Feeds:
Posts
Comments

Archive for the ‘Diagnostic Immunology’ Category

Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantation

Writer and Curator: Larry H. Bernstein, MD, FCAP

This article has the following structure:

9.3.1  Cell based immunotherapy

9.3.2  Photodynamic therapy (PDT)

9.3.3  Small molecules targeted therapy drugs; Tyrosine kinase inhibitors; imatinib (Gleevec/Glivec) and gefitinib (Iressa).

9.3.4 Graft versus Host Disease

9.3.5 Aspergillus Complicating Allogeneic Transplantation

Introduction

9.3.1 Allogeneic Stem Cell Treatment

http://www.lls.org/treatment/types-of-treatment/stem-cell-transplantation/allogeneic-stem-cell-transplantation

Allogeneic stem cell transplantation involves transferring the stem cells from a healthy person (the donor) to your body after high-intensity chemotherapy or radiation.

Allogeneic stem cell transplantation is used to cure some patients who:

  • Are at high risk of relapse
  • Don’t respond fully to treatment
  • Relapse after prior successful treatment

Allogeneic stem cell transplantation can be a high-risk procedure. The high-conditioning regimens are meant to severely or completely impair your ability to make stem cells and you will likely experience side effects during the days you receive high-dose conditioning radiation or chemotherapy. The goals of high-conditioning therapy are to:

treat the remaining cancer cells intensively, thereby making a cancer recurrence less likely
inactivate the immune system to reduce the chance of stem cell graft rejection
enable donor cells to travel to the marrow (engraftment), produce blood cells and bring about graft versus tumor effect

Possible Adverse Effects

The immune system and the blood system are closely linked and can’t be separated from each other. Because of this, allogeneic transplantation means that not only the donor’s blood system but also his or her immune system is transferred. As a result, these adverse effects are possible:

  • Immune rejection of the donated stem cells by the recipient (host-versus-graft effect)
  • Immune reaction by the donor cells against the recipient’s tissues (graft-versus-host disease [GVHD])

The immune reaction, or GVHD, is treated by administering drugs to the patient after the transplant that reduce the ability of the donated immune cells to attack and injure the patient’s tissues. See Graft Versus Host Disease.

Allogeneic stem cell transplants for patients who are older or have overall poor health are relatively uncommon. This is because the pre-transplant conditioning therapy is generally not well tolerated by such patients, especially those with poorly functioning internal organs. However, reduced intensity allogeneic stem cell transplants may be an appropriate treatment for some older or sicker patients.

T-Lymphocyte Depletion

One goal of allogeneic stem cell transplant is to cause the T lymphocytes in the donor’s blood or marrow to take hold (engraft) and grow in the patient’s marrow. Sometimes the T lymphocytes attack the cancer cells. When this happens, it’s called graft versus tumor (GVT) effect (also called graft versus cancer effect). The attack makes it less likely that the disease will return. This effect is more common in myeloid leukemias than it is in other blood cancers.

Unfortunately, T lymphocytes are the same cells that cause graft versus host disease (GVHD). Because of this serious and sometimes life-threatening side effect, doctors in certain cases want to decrease the number of T lymphocytes to be infused with the stem cells. This procedure, called T-lymphocyte depletion, is currently being studied by researchers. The technique involves treating the stem cells collected for transplant with agents that reduce the number of T lymphocytes.

The aim of T-lymphocyte depletion is to lessen GVHD’s incidence and severity. However, it can also cause increased rates of graft rejection, a decreased GVT effect and a slower immune recovery. Doctors must be careful about the number of T lymphocytes removed when using this technique.

Stem Cell Selection

Stem cell selection is another technique being studied in clinical trials that can reduce the number of T lymphocytes that a patient receives. Because of specific features on the outer coat of stem cells, doctors can selectively remove stem cells from a cell mixture. This technique produces a large number of stem cells and fewer other cells, including T lymphocytes.

9.3.2 Defining Characteristics of  Stem Cells

http://stemcells.nih.gov/info/basics/pages/basics1.aspx

Stem cells have the remarkable potential to develop into many different cell types in the body during early life and growth. In addition, in many tissues they serve as a sort of internal repair system, dividing essentially without limit to replenish other cells as long as the person or animal is still alive. When a stem cell divides, each new cell has the potential either to remain a stem cell or become another type of cell with a more specialized function, such as a muscle cell, a red blood cell, or a brain cell.

Stem cells are distinguished from other cell types by two important characteristics. First, they are unspecialized cells capable of renewing themselves through cell division, sometimes after long periods of inactivity. Second, under certain physiologic or experimental conditions, they can be induced to become tissue- or organ-specific cells with special functions. In some organs, such as the gut and bone marrow, stem cells regularly divide to repair and replace worn out or damaged tissues. In other organs, however, such as the pancreas and the heart, stem cells only divide under special conditions.

Until recently, scientists primarily worked with two kinds of stem cells from animals and humans: embryonic stem cells and non-embryonic “somatic” or “adult” stem cells. The functions and characteristics of these cells will be explained in this document. Scientists discovered ways to derive embryonic stem cells from early mouse embryos more than 30 years ago, in 1981. The detailed study of the biology of mouse stem cells led to the discovery, in 1998, of a method to derive stem cells from human embryos and grow the cells in the laboratory. These cells are called human embryonic stem cells. The embryos used in these studies were created for reproductive purposes through in vitro fertilization procedures.

When they were no longer needed for that purpose, they were donated for research with the informed consent of the donor. In 2006, researchers made another breakthrough by identifying conditions that would allow some specialized adult cells to be “reprogrammed” genetically to assume a stem cell-like state. This new type of stem cell is called induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).

Stem cells differ from other kinds of cells in the body. All stem cells—regardless of their source—have three general properties: they are capable of dividing and renewing themselves for long periods; they are unspecialized; and they can give rise to specialized cell types.

Stem cells are capable of dividing and renewing themselves for long periods. Unlike muscle cells, blood cells, or nerve cells—which do not normally replicate themselves—stem cells may replicate many times, or proliferate. A starting population of stem cells that proliferates for many months in the laboratory can yield millions of cells. If the resulting cells continue to be unspecialized, like the parent stem cells, the cells are said to be capable of long-term self-renewal.

Scientists are trying to understand two fundamental properties of stem cells that relate to their long-term self-renewal:

  1. Why can embryonic stem cells proliferate for a year or more in the laboratory without differentiating, but most adult stem cells cannot; and
  2. What are the factors in living organisms that normally regulate stem cell proliferation and self-renewal?

Discovering the answers to these questions may make it possible to understand how cell proliferation is regulated during normal embryonic development or during the abnormal cell division that leads to cancer.

Stem cells are unspecialized. One of the fundamental properties of a stem cell is that it does not have any tissue-specific structures that allow it to perform specialized functions. For example, a stem cell cannot work with its neighbors to pump blood through the body (like a heart muscle cell), and it cannot carry oxygen molecules through the bloodstream (like a red blood cell). However, unspecialized stem cells can give rise to specialized cells, including heart muscle cells, blood cells, or nerve cells.

Stem cells can give rise to specialized cells. When unspecialized stem cells give rise to specialized cells, the process is called differentiation. While differentiating, the cell usually goes through several stages, becoming more specialized at each step. Scientists are just beginning to understand the signals inside and outside cells that trigger each step of the differentiation process. The internal signals are controlled by a cell’s genes, which are interspersed across long strands of DNA and carry coded instructions for all cellular structures and functions. The external signals for cell differentiation include chemicals secreted by other cells, physical contact with neighboring cells, and certain molecules in the microenvironment. The interaction of signals during differentiation causes the cell’s DNA to acquire epigenetic marks that restrict DNA expression in the cell and can be passed on through cell division.

Adult stem cells typically generate the cell types of the tissue in which they reside. For example, a blood-forming adult stem cell in the bone marrow normally gives rise to the many types of blood cells. It is generally accepted that a blood-forming cell in the bone marrow—which is called a hematopoietic stem cell—cannot give rise to the cells of a very different tissue, such as nerve cells in the brain.

Through years of experimentation, scientists have established some basic protocols or “recipes” for the directed differentiation of embryonic stem cells into some specific cell types (Figure 1). (For additional examples of directed differentiation of embryonic stem cells, refer to the NIH stem cell report available at

http://stemcells.nih.gov/info/scireport/pages/2006report.aspx.)

stem cell differentiation figure1_sm

stem cell differentiation figure1_sm

http://stemcells.nih.gov/StaticResources/images/figure1_sm.jpg

9.3.3 Types of Stem Cell Transplants for Treating Cancer

http://www.cancer.org/treatment/treatmentsandsideeffects/treatmenttypes/bonemarrowandperipheralbloodstemcelltransplant/stem-cell-transplant-types-of-transplant

In a typical stem cell transplant for cancer very high doses of chemo are used, often along with radiation therapy, to try to destroy all the cancer cells. This treatment also kills the stem cells in the bone marrow. Soon after treatment, stem cells are given to replace those that were destroyed. These stem cells are given into a vein, much like a blood transfusion. Over time they settle in the bone marrow and begin to grow and make healthy blood cells. This process is called engraftment.

There are 3 basic types of transplants. They are named based on who gives the stem cells.

  • Autologous (aw-tahl-uh-gus)—the cells come from you
  • Allogeneic (al-o-jen-NEE-ick or al-o-jen-NAY-ick)—the cells come from a matched related or unrelated donor
  • Syngeneic (sin-jen-NEE-ick or sin-jen-NAY-ick)—the cells come from your identical twin or triplet
hematopoietic stem cell transplant

hematopoietic stem cell transplant

Autologous stem cell transplants

These stem cells come from you alone. In this type of transplant, your stem cells are taken before you get cancer treatment that destroys them. Your stem cells are removed, or harvested, from either your bone marrow or your blood and then frozen. To find out more about that process, please see the section “What’s it like to donate stem cells?” After you get high doses of chemo and/or radiation the stem cells are thawed and given back to you.

One advantage of autologous stem cell transplant is that you are getting your own cells back. When you donate your own stem cells you don’t have to worry about the graft attacking your body (graft-versus-host disease) or about getting a new infection from another person. But there can still be graft failure, and autologous transplants can’t produce the “graft-versus-cancer” effect.

This kind of transplant is mainly used to treat certain leukemias, lymphomas, and multiple myeloma. It’s sometimes used for other cancers, like testicular cancer and neuroblastoma, and certain cancers in children.

Getting rid of cancer cells in autologous transplants

A possible disadvantage of an autologous transplant is that cancer cells may be picked up along with the stem cells and then put back into your body later. Another disadvantage is that your immune system is still the same as before when your stem cells engraft. The cancer cells were able to grow despite your immune cells before, and may be able to do so again. The need to remove cancer cells from transplants or transplant patients and the best way to do it is being researched.

Doing 2 autologous transplants in a row is known as a tandem transplant or a double autologous transplant. In this type of transplant, the patient gets 2 courses of high-dose chemo, each followed by a transplant of their own stem cells. All of the stem cells needed are collected before the first high-dose chemo treatment, and half of them are used for each transplant. Most often both courses of chemo are given within 6 months, with the second one given after the patient recovers from the first one.

Allogeneic stem cell transplants

In the most common type of allogeneic transplant, the stem cells come from a donor whose tissue type closely matches the patient’s. (This is discussed later under “HLA matching” in the section called “ Donor matching for allogeneic transplant.”) The best donor is a close family member, usually a brother or sister. If you do not have a good match in your family, a donor might be found in the general public through a national registry. This is sometimes called a MUD (matched unrelated donor) transplant. Transplants with a MUD are usually riskier than those with a relative who is a good match.

Blood taken from the placenta and umbilical cord of newborns is a newer source of stem cells for allogeneic transplant. Called cord blood, this small volume of blood has a high number of stem cells that tend to multiply quickly. But the number of stem cells in a unit of cord blood is often too low for large adults, so this source of stem cells is limited to small adults and children. Doctors are now looking at different ways to use cord blood for transplant in larger adults, such as using cord blood from 2 donors.

Pros of allogeneic stem cell transplant: The donor stem cells make their own immune cells, which could help destroy any cancer cells that remain after high-dose treatment. This is called the graft-versus-cancer effect. Other advantages are that the donor can often be asked to donate more stem cells or even white blood cells if needed, and stem cells from healthy donors are free of cancer cells.

Cons to allogeneic stem cell transplants: The transplant, also known as the graft, might not take — that is, the donor cells could die or be destroyed by the patient’s body before settling in the bone marrow. Another risk is that the immune cells from the donor may not just attack the cancer cells – they could attack healthy cells in the patient’s body. This is called graft-versus-host disease (described in the section called “Problems that may come up shortly after transplant”). There is also a very small risk of certain infections from the donor cells, even though donors are tested before they donate. A higher risk comes from infections you have had, and which your immune system has under control. These infections often surface after allogeneic transplant because your immune system is held in check (suppressed) by medicines called immunosuppressive drugs. These infections can cause serious problems and even death.

Allogeneic transplant is most often used to treat certain types of leukemia, lymphomas, multiple myeloma,myelodysplastic syndrome, and other bone marrow disorders such as aplastic anemia.

Mini transplants (non-myeloablative transplants)

For some people, age or certain health conditions make it more risky to wipe out all of their bone marrow before a transplant. For those people, doctors can use a type of allogeneic transplant that’s sometimes called a mini-transplant. Compared with a standard allogeneic transplant, this one uses less chemo and/or radiation to get the patient ready for the transplant. Your doctor might refer to it as a non-myeloablative transplant or mention reduced-intensity conditioning (RIC). The idea here is to kill some of the cancer cells along with some of the bone marrow, and suppress the immune system just enough to allow donor stem cells to settle in the bone marrow.

Unlike the standard allogeneic transplant, cells from both the donor and the patient exist together in the patient’s body for some time after a mini-transplant. But slowly, over the course of months, the donor cells take over the bone marrow and replace the patient’s own bone marrow cells. These new cells can then develop an immune response to the cancer and help kill off the patient’s cancer cells — the graft-versus-cancer effect.

Syngeneic stem cell transplants – for those with an identical sibling

This is a special kind of allogeneic transplant that can only be used when the recipient has an identical sibling (twin or triplet) who can donate — someone who will have the same tissue type. An advantage of syngeneic stem cell transplant is that graft-versus-host disease will not be a problem. There are no cancer cells in the transplant, either, as there would be in an autologous transplant.

A disadvantage is that because the new immune system is so much like the recipient’s immune system, there is no graft-versus-cancer effect, either. Every effort must be made to destroy all the cancer cells before the transplant is done to help keep the cancer from relapsing (coming back).

9.3.4 Graft versus Host Disease

http://bethematch.org/For-Patients-and-Families/Life-after-transplant/Graft-versus-host-disease–GVHD-/

Graft-versus-host disease(GVHD) occurs because of differences between the cells of your body and the donated cells and is a common side effect of an allogeneic bone marrow transplant.

An allogeneic transplant uses blood cells from a family member, unrelated donor or cord blood unit. GVHD can affect many different parts of the body including the skin, eyes, mouth, stomach, and intestines.

There are two types of GVHD:

  • Acute GVHD: Develops in the first 100 days or so after transplant but can occur later. This primarily affects the skin, stomach, intestines, and liver.
  • Chronic GVHD: Usually develops 3-6 months after transplant, but signs can appear earlier or later. If you have had or currently have acute GVHD, you are more likely to have chronic GVHD.

The severity of acute and chronic GVHD can range from mild to life-threatening.

Doctors often see mild GVHD as a good thing after an allogeneic transplant when the transplant was done for a blood cancer. It is a sign that the donor’s immune system is working to destroy any remaining cancer cells. Patients who experience some GVHD have a lower risk of the cancer returning after transplant than patients who do not develop GVHD. If the transplant was to treat a disease other than cancer disease, like aplastic anemia, then the doctor may want to treat even mild GVHD.

Graft-versus-Host Disease

JLM Ferrara, JE Levine, P Reddy, and E Holler
Lancet. 2009 May 2; 373(9674): 1550–1561.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/S0140-6736(09)60237-3

The number of allogeneic hematopoietic cell transplantations (HCT) continues to increase with more than 25,000 allogeneic transplantations performed annually. The graft-versus-leukemia / tumor (GVL) effect during allogeneic HCT effectively eradicates many hematological malignancies.1 The development of novel strategies that use donor leukocyte infusions, non-myeloablative conditioning and umbilical cord blood (UCB) transplantation have helped expand the indications for allogeneic HCT over the last several years, especially among older patients.2 Improvements in infectious prophylaxis, immunosuppressive medications, supportive care and DNA-based tissue typing have also contributed to improved outcomes after allogeneic HCT.1 Yet the major complication of allogeneic HCT, graft-versus-host disease (GVHD), remains lethal and limits the use of this important therapy.2 Given current trends, the number of transplants from unrelated donors is expected to double within the next five years, significantly increasing the population of patients with GVHD. In this seminar we review advances made in identifying the genetic risk factors and pathophysiology of this major HCT complication, as well as its prevention, diagnosis and treatment.

Etiology and Clinical Features

Fifty years ago Billingham formulated three requirements for the development of GVHD: the graft must contain immunologically competent cells; the recipient must express tissue antigens that are not present in the transplant donor; and the recipient must be incapable of mounting an effective response to eliminate the transplanted cells.3 We know now that the immunologically competent cells are T cells, and that GVHD can develop in various clinical settings when tissues containing T cells (blood products, bone marrow, and solid organs) are transferred from one person to another who is not able to eliminate those cells.4, 5 Patients, whose immune systems are suppressed, and who receive white blood cells from another individual, are at particularly high risk for GVHD.

GVHD occurs when donor T cells respond to genetically defined proteins on host cells. The most important proteins are Human Leukocyte Antigens (HLA)2, 6, 7, which are highly polymorphic and are encoded by the major histocompatibility complex (MHC). Class I HLA (A, B, and C) proteins are expressed on almost all nucleated cells of the body at varying densities. Class II proteins (DR, DQ, and DP) are primarily expressed on hematopoietic cells (B cells, dendritic cells, monocytes), but their expression can be induced on many other cell types following inflammation or injury. High-resolution DNA typing of HLA genes with polymerase chain reaction (PCR)-based techniques have now largely replaced earlier methods. The incidence of acute GVHD is directly related to the degree of mismatch between HLA proteins8, 9 and thus ideally, donors and recipients are matched at HLA-A, -B, -C, and -DRB1, (“8/8 matches”), but mismatches may be tolerated for UCB grafts (see below).10–12

Non-HLA Genetics

Despite HLA identity between a patient and donor, approximately 40% of patients receiving HLA-identical grafts develop acute GVHD due to genetic differences that lie outside the HLA loci, or “minor” histocompatibility antigens (HA). Some minor HAs, such as HY and HA-3, are expressed on all tissues and are targets for both GVHD and GVL.13 Other minor HAs, such as HA-1 and HA-2, are expressed most abundantly on hematopoietic cells (including leukemic cells) and may therefore induce a greater GVL effect with less GVHD.13, 14

Polymorphisms in both donors and recipients for cytokines that are involved in the classical `cytokine storm’ of GVHD (discussed below) have been implicated as risk factors for GVHD.15 Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF)-α, Interleukin 10 (IL-10), Interferon-γ (IFNγ) variants have correlated with GVHD in some, but not all, studies.16–18 Genetic polymorphisms of proteins involved in innate immunity, such as nucleotide oligomerization domain 2 and Keratin 18 receptors, have also been associated with GVHD.19–22 Future strategies to identify the best possible transplant donor will probably incorporate both HLA and non-HLA genetic factors.

Clinical Features of Acute GVHD

Based on an early Seattle experience, acute GVHD was defined to occur prior to day 100, whereas chronic GVHD occurred after that time.23–25 This definition is far from satisfactory, and a recent National Institutes of Health classification includes late-onset acute GVHD (after day 100) and an overlap syndrome with features of both acute and chronic GVHD.26 Late-onset acute GVHD and the overlap syndrome occur with greater frequency after reduced-intensity conditioning (RIC), an increasingly widespread technique (see below). As shown in Table 1, the clinical manifestations of acute GVHD occur in the skin, gastrointestinal tract and liver.27 In a comprehensive review, Martin et al found that at the onset of acute GVHD, 81% of patients had skin involvement, 54% had GI involvement, and 50% had liver involvement.23 Recent data suggest that lungs might also be targets of experimental GVHD.28

Acute GVHD Symptoms

Table 1

Pathophysiology of Acute GVHD

Two important principles are important to consider regarding the pathophysiology of acute GVHD. First, acute GVHD reflects exaggerated but normal inflammatory mechanisms mediated by donor lymphocytes infused into the recipient where they function appropriately, given the foreign environment they encounter. Second, the recipient tissues that stimulate donor lymphocytes have usually been damaged by underlying disease, prior infections, and the transplant conditioning regimen.29 As a result, these tissues produce molecules (sometimes referred to as “danger” signals) that promote the activation and proliferation of donor immune cells.42–45 Mouse models havebeen central to our identification and understanding of the pathophysiologic mechanisms of GVHD, and canine models have been critical to the development of clinically useful strategies for GVHD prophylaxis and treatment and to the development of donor leukocyte infusions.36, 46, 47 Based largely on these experimental models, the development of acute GVHD can be conceptualized in three sequential steps or phases: (1) activation of the APCs; (2) donor T cell activation, proliferation, differentiation and migration; and (3) target tissue destruction (Figure 3).

Figure 3

GVHD Pathophysiology

In Phase I, the recipient conditioning regimen damages host tissues and causes release of inflammatory cytokines such as TNFα, IL-1 and IL-6. Increased levels of these cytokines leads to activation of host antigen presenting cells (APCs). In Phase II, host APCs activate mature donor cells. The subsequent proliferation and differentiation of these activated T cells produces additional effectors that mediate the tissue damage, including Cytotoxic T Lymphocytes, Natural Killer (NK) cells, TNFα and IL-1. Lipopolysaccharide (LPS) that has leaked through the damaged intestinal mucosa triggers additional TNFα production. TNFα can damage tissue directly by inducing necrosis and apoptosis in the skin and GI tract through either TNF receptors or the Fas pathway. TNFα plays a direct role in intestinal GVHD damage which further amplifies damage in the skin, liver and lung in a “cytokine storm.”

GVHD pathophysiology nihms-115970-f0003

GVHD pathophysiology nihms-115970-f0003

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC2735047/bin/nihms-115970-f0003.jpg

Phase I: Activation of Antigen Presenting Cells (APCs)

The first step involves the activation of APCs by the underlying disease and the HCT conditioning regimen. Damaged host tissues respond by producing “danger” signals, including proinflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNF-α), chemokines, and increased expression of adhesion molecules, MHC antigens and costimulatory molecules on host APCs.42, 48–50 A recent report demonstrated that at one week after HCT, increased levels of TNF-α receptor I, a surrogate marker for TNF-α, strongly correlated with the later development of GVHD.51 Damage to the GI tract from the conditioning is particularly important because it allows for systemic translocation of additional inflammatory stimuli such as microbial products including lipopolysaccaride (LPS) or other pathogen-associated molecular patterns that further enhance the activation of host APCs.49 The secondary lymphoid tissue in the GI tract is likely the initial site of interaction between activated APCs and donor T cells.52 These observations have led an important clinical strategy to reduce acute GVHD by reducing the intensity of the conditioning regimen. Experimental GVHD can also be reduced by manipulating distinct subsets of APCs.53,54 In addition, non-hematopoietic stem cells, such as mesenchymal stem cells or stromal cells, can reduce allogeneic T cell responses, although the mechanism for such inhibition remains unclear.2

The concept that enhanced activation of host APCs increases the risk for acute GVHD unifies a number of seemingly disparate clinical associations with that risk, such as advanced stages of malignancy, more intense transplant conditioning regimens and histories of viral infections. APCs detect infections by recognizing conserved molecular patterns that are unique to microbes, called pathogen-associated molecular patterns (PAMPs). Among the classes of receptors that recognize such patterns, the Toll-like receptors (TLR) are the best characterized.55 For example, TLR4 recognizes LPS55 and mice with mutant TLR4 receptors that do not respond to LPS cause less GVHD when used as donors.56 Other TLRs that recognize viral DNA or RNA also activate APCs and may enhance GVHD, providing a potential mechanistic basis for increased GVHD associated with viral infections such as cytomegalovirus (CMV).57

Phase II: Donor T Cell Activation

The core of the GVH reaction is Step 2, where donor T cells proliferate and differentiate in response to host APCs. The “danger” signals generated in Phase I augment this activation at least in part by increasing the expression of costimulatory molecules.58 Blockade of co-stimulatory pathways to prevent GVHD is successful in animal models, but this approach has not yet been tested in large clinical trials.2

In mouse models, where genetic differences between donor and recipient strains can be tightly controlled, CD4+ cells induce acute GVHD to MHC class II differences, and CD8+ cells induce acute GVHD to MHC class I differences.59–61 In the majority of HLA-identical HCTs, both CD4+ and CD8+ subsets respond to minor histocompatibility antigens and can cause GVHD in HLA-identical HCT.

Regulatory T cells can suppress the proliferation of conventional T cells and prevent GVHD in animal models when added to donor grafts containing conventional T cells.62 In mice, the Foxp3 protein functions as a master switch in the development of regulatory T cells, which normally constitute 5% of the CD4+ T cell population.62 Regulatory T cells secrete anti-inflammatory cytokines IL-10 and Transforming Growth Factor(TGF)-β and can also act through contact-dependent inhibition of APCs.62 It is likely that the use of regulatory T cells in clinical acute GVHD will require improved techniques to identify and expand them.

Natural Killer T cell (NKT) 1.1+ subsets of both the host and donors that have been shown to modulate acute GVHD.63 Host NKT cells have been shown to suppress acute GVHD in an IL-4 dependent manner.64 A recent clinical trial of total lymphoid irradiation used as conditioning significantly reduced GVHD and enhanced host NKT cell function.65 By contrast, donor NKT cells can reduce GVHD and enhance perforin mediated GVL in an experimental model.66

Activation of immune cells results in rapid intracellular biochemical cascades that induce transcription of genes for many proteins including cytokines and their receptors. Th1 cytokines (IFN-γ, IL-2 and TNF-α) are produced in large amounts during acute GVHD. IL-2 production by donor T cells remains the principal target of many current clinical therapeutic and prophylactic approaches to GVHD, such as cyclosporine, tacrolimus and monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) directed against IL-2 and its receptor.9 But emerging data indicate an important role for IL-2 in the generation and maintenance of CD4+ CD25+ T regs, suggesting that prolonged interference with IL-2 may have an unintended consequence of preventing the development of long term tolerance after allogeneic HCT.67 IFN-γ has multiple functions and can either amplify or reduce GVHD.68,69 IFN-γ may amplify GVHD by increasing the expression of molecules such as chemokines receptors, MHC proteins, and adhesion molecules; it also increases the sensitivity of monocytes and macrophages to stimuli such as LPS and accelerates intracellular cascades in response to these stimuli.70Early polarization of donor T cells so that they secrete less IFN-γ and more IL-4 can also attenuate experimental acute GVHD.71 IFN-γ may amplify GVHD by directly damaging epithelium in the GI tract and skin and inducing immnosuppression through the induction of nitric oxide.72 By contrast, IFN-γ may suppress GVHD by hastening the apoptosis of activated donor T cells.69, 73. This complexity means the manipulation of IFN-γ may have diverse effects in vivo, making it a challenging target with respect to therapeutic intervention. IL-10 plays a key role in suppression of immune responses, and clinical data suggest it may regulate acute GVHD.17 TGF-β, another suppressive cytokine can suppress acute GVHD but exacerbate chronic GVHD.74 Thus the timing and duration of the secretion of any given cytokine may determine the specific effects of that cytokine on GVHD severity.

Phase III: Cellular and Inflammatory Effector Phase

The effector phase of this process is a complex cascade of both cellular mediators such as cytotoxic T lymphocytes(CTLs) and NK cells and soluble inflammatory mediators such as TNF-α, IFN-γ, IL-1 and nitric oxide.2, 29 These soluble and cellular mediators synergize to amplify local tissue injury and further promote inflammation and target tissue destruction.

Cellular Effectors

The cellular effectors of acute GVHD are primarily CTLs and NK cells.49 CTLs that preferentially use the Fas/FasL pathway of target lysis and appear to predominate in GVHD liver damage (hepatocytes express large amounts of Fas) whereas GVHD CTLs that use the perforin /granzyme pathways are more important in the GI tract and skin.2, 75 Chemokines direct the migration of donor T cells from lymphoid tissues to the target organs where they cause damage. Macrophage inflammatory protein-1alpha (MIP-1α) and other chemokines such as CCL2-5, CXCL2, CXCL9-11, CCL17 and CCL27 are over-expressed and enhance the homing of cellular effectors to target organs during experimental GVHD.76Expression of integrins, such as α4β7 and its ligand MadCAM-1, are also important for homing of donor T cells to Peyer’s patches during intestinal GVHD.52, 77, 78

Prevention of GVHD

Based on the evidence from animal models regarding the central role of T cells in initiating GVHD, numerous clinical studies evaluating T cell depletion (TCD) as prophylaxis for GVHD were performed in the 1980’s and 1990’s. There were three principal TCD strategies: (1) negative selection of T cells ex vivo, (2) positive selection of CD34+ stem cells ex vivo; and (3) anti-T cell antibodies in vivo.83Most strategies showed a significant limitation in both acute and chronic GVHD.84–88 Unfortunately, the lower incidence of severe GVHD was offset by high rates of graft failure, relapse of malignancy, infections, and Epstein-Barr virus-associated lymphoproliferative disorders. Negative selection purging strategies using various anti-T cell antibodies achieved similar long-term results regardless of the breadth of antibody specificity.89–93 One large registry study demonstrated that purging strategies using antibodies with broad specificities produced inferior leukemia-free survival than standard immunosuppression in patients receiving unrelated donor transplants.94 Several studies have investigated partial T cell depletion, either by eliminating specific T cell subsets (e.g., CD8+) or by titrating the dose of T cells present in the inoculum.95–97 None of these approaches, however, has convincingly demonstrated an optimal strategy that improves long-term survival.

Alemtuzumab is a monoclonal antibody that binds CD52, a protein expressed on a broad spectrum of leukocytes including lymphocytes, monocytes, and dendritic cells. Its use in GVHD prophylaxis in a Phase II trial decreased the incidence of acute and chronic GVHD following reduced intensity transplant.98 In two prospective studies, patients who received alemtuzumab rather than methotrexate showed significantly lower rates of acute and chronic GVHD,99 but experienced more infectious complications and higher rates of relapse, so that there was no overall survival benefit. Alemtuzumab may also contribute to graft failure when used with minimal intensity conditioning regimens.100

An alternative strategy to TCD attempted to induce anergy in donor T cells by ex vivo antibody blockade of co-stimulatory pathways prior to transplantation. A small study using this approach in haploidentical HCT recipients was quite encouraging, but has not yet been replicated.101 Thus the focus of most prevention strategies remains pharmacological manipulation of T cells after transplant.

Administration of anti-T cell antibodies in vivo as GVHD prophylaxis has also been extensively tested. The best studied drugs are anti-thymocyte globulin (ATG) or antilymphocyte globulin (ALG) preparations. These sera, which have high titers of polyclonal antibodies, are made by immunizing animals (horses or rabbits) to thymocytes or lymphocytes, respectively. A complicating factor in determining the role of these polyclonal sera in transplantation is the observation that even different brands of the same class of sera exert different biologic effects.102 However, the side effects of ATG/ALG infusions are common across different preparations and include fever, chills, headache, thrombocytopenia (from cross-reactivity to platelets), and, infrequently, anaphylaxis. In retrospective studies, rabbit ATG reduced the incidence of GVHD in related donor HSCT recipients without appearing to improve survival.103, 104 In recipients of unrelated donor HSCT, addition of ALG to standard GVHD prophylaxis effectively prevented severe GVHD, but did not result in improved survival because of increased infections.105 In a long term follow-up study, however, pretransplant ATG provided significant protection against extensive chronic GVHD and chronic lung dysfunction.106

The primary pharmacologic strategy to prevent GVHD is the inhibition of the cytoplasmic enzyme, calcineurin, that is critical for in the activation of T cells. The calcineurin inhibitors, cyclosporine and tacrolimus, have similar mechanisms of action, clinical effectiveness and toxicity profiles, including hypomagnesemia, hyperkalemia, hypertension, and nephrotoxicity.9, 107 Serious side effects include transplant-associated thrombotic microangiopathy (TAM) and neurotoxicity that can lead to premature discontinuation. Although clinically similar to thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, TAM does not reliably respond to therapeutic plasmapheresis, carries a high mortality rate, and removal of the offending agent does not always result in improvement.108 Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome includes mental status changes, seizures, neurological deficits and characteristic magnetic resonance imaging findings; this syndrome has been seen in 1-2% of HCT recipients receiving and calcineurin inhibitors.109 Side effects of these drugs decrease as the dose is tapered, usually two to four months after HCT.

Calcineurin inhibitors are often administered in combination with other immunosuppressants, such as methotrexate, which is given at low doses in the early post-transplant period.9, 107 The toxicities of methotrexate (neutropenia and mucositis) have led some investigators to replace it with mycophenolate mofetil (MMF). In one prospective randomized trial, patients who received MMF as part of GVHD prophylaxis experienced significantly less severe mucositis and more rapid neutrophil engraftment than those who received methotrexate.110 The incidence and severity of acute GVHD was similar between the two groups, but the study closed early due to superiority of the MMF arm with respect to reduced mucositis and the speed of hematopoietic engraftment. A desire for faster neutrophil engraftment has led to the use of MMF in UCB blood transplants where graft failure is a major concern.111 MMF is also often used after RIC regimens for similar reasons.112, 113

Sirolimus is an immunosuppressant that is structurally similar to tacrolimus but does not inhibit calcineurin. In a small Phase II trial, it showed excellent efficacy in combination with tacrolimus;114 the drug damages endothelial cells, however, and it may enhance TAM that is associated with calcineurin inhibitors.115 The combination of tacrolimus and sirolimus is currently being compared in a large randomized multi-center trial.

RIC regimens attempt to suppress the host immune system sufficiently so that donor T cells can engraft and then ablate the lympho-hematopoietic compartment of the recipient. The term “non-myeloablative” is therefore somewhat misleading. RIC regimens produce less tissue damage and lower levels of the inflammatory cytokines that are important in the initiation of GVHD pathophysiology; this effect may explain the reduced incidence of severe GVHD following RIC compared to the full intensity conditioning used in historical controls.98, 116 The onset of acute GVHD may be delayed after RIC until after day 100, however, and it may present simultaneously with elements of chronic GVHD (“overlap syndrome”).116–120

Treatment of Acute GVHD

GVHD generally first develops in the second month after HCT, during continued treatment with calcineurin-based prophylaxis.23, 121 Steroids, with their potent antilymphocyte and anti-inflammatory activity, are the gold standard for treatment of GVHD. Many centers treat mild GVHD of the skin (Grade I) with topical steroids alone, but for more severe skin GVHD and any degree of visceral GVHD involvement, high-dose systemic steroids are usually initiated. Steroid therapy results in complete remission in less than half of the patients,122 and more severe GVHD is less likely to respond to treatment.123, 124 In a prospective randomized study, the addition of ATG to steroids as primary therapy did not increase the response rate.124 In a retrospective study, the use of ATG in patients who showed early signs of steroid-resistance was beneficial,122 but not all studies show such benefit and ATG is not standardly used because of increased infection risks.106, 125, 126.

An increasingly common treatment for GVHD is extracorporeal photopheresis (ECP). During ECP, the patient’s white blood cells are collected by apheresis, incubated with the DNA-intercalating agent, 8-methoxypsoralen, exposed to ultraviolet light (UVA), and returned to the patient. ECP is known to induce cellular apoptosis, which has strong anti-inflammatory effects in a number of systems, including prevention of rejection of solid organ grafts.127 Animal studies show that ECP reverses acute GVHD by increasing the number of regulatory T cells.128 A Phase II clinical study of steroid-dependent or steroid refractory GVHD showed resolution of GVHD in a large majority of patients, with 50% long-term survival in this very high risk group.129 Randomized multi-center studies of this approach are needed to determine its place in the management of acute GVHD.

Another interesting strategy to treat GVHD is the blockade of the inflammatory cytokine TNF-α. TNF-α can activate APCs, recruit effector cells and cause direct tissue damage.130 In animal models, TNF-α plays a central role in GVHD of the GI tract, which is central to the “cytokine storm” and plasma levels of TNFR I (a surrogate marker for TNF-α) rise in patients before the clinical manifestations of GVHD appear. 51 A recent Phase II trial of etanercept, a solubilized TNFR II, showed significant efficacy when added to systemic steroids as primary therapy for acute GVHD. Seventy percent of patients had complete resolution of all GVHD symptoms within one month, with 80% complete responses in the GI tract and the skin. The authors also showed that plasma levels of TNFR I were a significant biomarker for clinical GVHD.131

Treatment of Chronic GVHD

In contrast to acute GVHD, the pathophysiology of chronic GVHD remains poorly understood, and it is treated with a variety of immunosuppressive agents. The response of chronic GVHD to treatment is unpredictable, and mixed responses in different organs can occur in the same patient. Confounding variables such as infection and co-morbidities also make responses hard to measure. The use of corticosteroids (with or without a calcineurin inhibitor) is the standard of care, but a randomized trial of more than 300 patients with chronic GVHD found no difference between cyclosporine plus prednisone versus prednisone alone.132 Chronic immunosuppressants, especially those containing steroids, are highly toxic and result in infectious deaths. Many second line therapies have been studied, but none has achieved widespread acceptance. As mentioned above, ECP shows some promise, with significant response rates in high-risk patients. The best responses were observed in skin, liver, oral mucosa, eye, and lung.133 This observation is particularly relevant because lung GVHD has the potential to be a particularly devastating complication necessitating lung transplant as the only therapeutic option.134, 135

Essential Supportive Care in GVHD Patients

Meticulous supportive care is critical for patients with both acute and chronic GVHD because of the extended duration of immunosuppressive treatments and because the multiple medications required may have synergistic toxicities. Such care includes extensive infectious prophylaxis, early interventions in cases of suspected infections, and prophylaxis against non-infectious side effects of medications (See Table 3). These complications often require rapid responses to prevent serious or irreversible damage, and are best handled in close collaboration between the primary physician and the transplant specialist.

Table 3

Recommendations for Supportive Care

All patients should receive at least fluconazole as prophylaxis against fungal infections. Invasive molds, especially aspergillus, are common in patients with prolonged steroid use.136 Prophylaxis with voriconazole or posaconazole should be considered for these patients. Usual sites of infection are the lungs, sinuses, brain, skin,137 and serial galactomannan assays may aid in the early detection.138 Candida can cause lesions in the lung and spleen, which may need screening with ultrasonography. Pneumocystis is another opportunistic infection that should receive cotrimoxazol (bactrim) prophylaxis.139

Viral infections are frequent in these patients with GVHD. Cytomegalovirus causes interstitial pneumonia and gastritis. Patients who are at risk should have their blood monitored several times monthly. Techniques that directly detect virus should be performed, such as CMV PCR or pp65 antigen, and evidence of increased viral load should prompt preemptive treatment with ganciclovir or foscarnet prior to clinical manifestations of disease. Shingles is not uncommon and acyclovir prophylaxis may be beneficial.140 Patients and caregivers should receive vaccinations against influenza, and treatment with neuraminidase inhibitors is recommended in the event of influenza infection.141, 142

Patients with GVHD often have IgG2 and IgG4 subclass deficiencies despite normal lgG levels, making them susceptible to infections with encapsulated organisms. Treatment of severe hypogammaglobulinemia with intravenous immunoglobulin is standard in many centers,143 but the level that triggers replacement varies considerably among transplant specialists. There is little supporting evidence for the routine use of intravenous immunoglobulin as prophylaxis144 but patients should receive routine prophylaxis (penicillin or its equivalent) due to the increased risk of streptococcal sepsis.145 Pneumococcal conjugate and hemophilus influenza vaccine may provide additional protection and are also recommended for all patients, including those with chronic GVHD.139, 146, 147 The sites of any indwelling catheters should be assessed regularly and early treatment of a suspected infection initiated. Early signs or symptoms of septic shock such as shaking chills or low blood pressure requires prompt evaluation with chest X-ray and/or CT scan, blood culture and broad spectrum antibiotics because shock may progress rapidly in these patients.

9.3.5 Aspergillus Complicating Allogeneic Transplantation

Aspergillus infections in allogeneic stem cell transplant recipients: have we made any progress?

E Jantunen, V-J Anttila and T Ruutu
BMT 2002; 30(12):925-929
http://www.nature.com/bmt/journal/v30/n12/full/1703738a.html
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/sj.bmt.1703738

Invasive aspergillosis (IA) is common in allogeneic SCT recipients, with an incidence of 4-10%. The majority of these infections are diagnosed several months after SCT and they are frequently associated with GVHD. The diagnosis is difficult and often delayed. Established IA is notoriously difficult to treat with a death rate of 80-90%. This review summarises recent data on this problem to assess whether there has been any progress. Effective prophylactic measures are still lacking. Severe immunosuppression is the main obstacle to the success of therapy. Recent and ongoing developments in diagnostic measures and new antifungal agents may improve treatment results to some extent, but Aspergillus infections still remain a formidable problem in allogeneic transplantation. Further studies in this field will focus on the role of various cytokines and combinations of antifungal agents.

Summary

Read Full Post »

Vaccines, Small Peptides, aptamers and Immunotherapy [9]

Writer and Curator: Larry H. Bernstein, MD, FCAP

This contribution has the following structure:

9.1.1 Viruses in carcinogenesis

9.1.2   Simultaneous Humoral and Cellular Immune Response against Cancer–Testis Antigen NY-ESO-1: Definition of Human Histocompatibility Leukocyte Antigen (HLA)-A2–binding Peptide Epitopes

9.1.3 Monoclonal Antibodies in Cancer Therapy

9.1.4 Aptamers

9.1.5 Tumor Suppressors

9.1 Vaccines

9.1.1  Viruses in carcinogenesis

  • HPV-associated cervical cancer
  • HPV-associated head and neck cancer: a virus-related cancer epidemic

The contributions of hepatitis B virus and hepatitis C virus infections to cirrhosis and primary liver cancer worldwide

Risk of pancreatic cancer among individuals with hepatitis C or hepatitis B virus infection: a nationwide study in Sweden.

HIV Infection and Cancer Risk

HIV and cancer of the cervix

Anal cancer: an HIV-associated cancer

The therapeutic potential of CXCR4 antagonists in the treatment of HIV infection, cancer metastasis and rheumatoid arthritis

Types of Cancer: AIDS/HIV related malignancies

Cytokines in cancer pathogenesis and cancer therapy

Dendritic Cells as Therapeutic Vaccines against Cancer

9.1.2   Simultaneous Humoral and Cellular Immune Response against Cancer–Testis Antigen NY-ESO-1: Definition of Human Histocompatibility Leukocyte Antigen (HLA)-A2–binding Peptide Epitopes

9.1.3 Monoclonal antibodies

Monoclonal antibodies in cancer therapy

Monoclonal Antibodies in Cancer Therapy: 25 Years of Progress

9.1.4 Aptamers

Nanocarriers as an emerging platform for cancer therapy

Quantum Dot−Aptamer Conjugates for Synchronous Cancer Imaging, Therapy, and Sensing of Drug Delivery Based on Bi-Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer

Oligonucleotide Aptamers: New Tools for Targeted Cancer Therapy

9.1 Vaccines

9.1.1  Viruses in carcinogenesis

HPV-associated cervical cancer

http://www.cancer.net/navigating-cancer-care/prevention-and-healthy-living/hpv-and-cancer

Human papillomavirus (HPV) is a virus that is usually passed on during direct skin-to-skin contact, most commonly sex. In fact, HPV is the most common sexually transmitted disease in the United States. Most men and women are not aware they have an HPV infection because they do not develop any symptoms or health problems. Certain HPV types can cause precancerous lesions (areas of abnormal tissue) or cancer.

More than 40 of the viruses are called “genital type” HPVs. These viruses are spread from person to person when their genitals come into contact, usually during vaginal or anal sex. They can also be passed on through oral sex.

Genital HPV types can infect the genital area of women, including the vulva (outer portion of the vagina), the vagina, and the cervix (the lower, narrow part of a woman’s uterus), as well as the genital area of men, including the penis. In both men and women, genital HPV can infect the anus and some areas of the head and neck.

Nearly all cervical cancers are caused by HPV infection. Strong scientific evidence shows that a lasting HPV infection is required for cervical cancer to begin developing. Whether a woman who is infected with HPV will develop cervical cancer depends on a number of factors, including the type of HPV infection she has. Of the cervical cancers related to HPV, about 70% are caused by two strains, HPV-16 or HPV-18. In women who have HPV, smoking may increase the risk of cervical cancer.

Warts and precancerous lesions can be removed through cryotherapy (freezing); loop electrosurgical excision procedure (LEEP), which uses electric current to remove abnormal tissue; or surgery.

Receiving an HPV vaccine reduces your risk of infection. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved two vaccines that help prevent HPV infection: Gardasil and Cervarix. It is important to note that the vaccines cannot cure an existing HPV infection.

Purpose of the vaccines. The goal of HPV vaccination is to prevent a lasting HPV infection after a person is exposed to the virus. Gardasil, introduced in 2006, helps prevent infection from the two HPVs known to cause most cervical cancers and precancerous lesions in the cervix. The vaccine also prevents against the two low-risk HPVs known to cause 90% of genital warts. Gardasil is approved for the prevention of cervical, vaginal, and vulvar cancers in girls and women ages nine to 26. It is also approved to prevent anal cancer in women and men and genital warts in men and boys in the same age range. Cervarix, introduced in 2009, is approved for the prevention of cervical cancer in girls and women ages 10 to 25.

Effectiveness and safety of the vaccines. Data show the HPV vaccinations are safe and highly effective in preventing a lasting infection of the HPV types they target. Because it takes many years before a precancerous lesion develops into an invasive cancer, it will likely take several more years before there is evidence that the number of cancer cases in vaccinated individuals has been reduced.

HPV-associated head and neck cancer: a virus-related cancer epidemic
Shanthi Marur, Gypsyamber D’Souza, William H Westra, Arlene A Forastiere
Lancet Oncol 2010; 11: 781–89
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/S1470-2045(10)70017-6

A rise in incidence of oropharyngeal squamous cell cancer—specifically of the lingual and palatine tonsils—in white men younger than age 50 years who have no history of alcohol or tobacco use has been recorded over the past decade. This malignant disease is associated with human papillomavirus (HPV) 16 infection. The biology of HPV-positive oropharyngeal cancer is distinct with P53 degradation, retinoblastoma RB pathway inactivation, and P16 upregulation. By contrast, tobacco-related oropharyngeal cancer is characterized by TP53 mutation and downregulation of CDKN2A (encoding P16). The best method to detect virus in tumor is controversial, and both in-situ hybridization and PCR are commonly used; P16 immunohistochemistry could serve as a potential surrogate marker. HPV-positive oropharyngeal cancer seems to be more responsive to chemotherapy and radiation than HPV-negative disease. HPV 16 is a prognostic marker for enhanced overall and disease-free survival, but its use as a predictive marker has not yet been proven. Many questions about the natural history of oral HPV infection remain under investigation. For example, why does the increase in HPV-related oropharyngeal cancer dominate in men? What is the potential of HPV vaccines for primary prevention? Could an accurate method to detect HPV in tumor be developed? Which treatment strategies reduce toxic effects without compromising survival? Our aim with this review is to highlight current understanding of the epidemiology, biology, detection, and management of HPV-related oropharyngeal head and neck squamous cell carcinoma, and to describe unresolved issues.

Cancers of the head and neck arise from mucosa lining the oral cavity, oropharynx, hypopharynx, larynx, sinonasal tract, and nasophaynx. By far the most common histological type is squamous cell carcinoma, and grade can vary from well-differentiated keratinizing to undifferentiated non-keratinizing. An increase in incidence of oropharyngeal squamous cell carcinoma—specifically in the tonsil and tongue base—has been seen in the USA, most notably in individuals aged 40–55 years. Patients with oropharyngeal cancer are mainly white men. Unlike most tobacco-related head and neck tumors, patients with oropharyngeal carcinoma usually do not have a history of tobacco or alcohol use. Instead, their tumors are positive for oncogenic forms of the human papillomavirus (HPV), particularly 16 type. About 60% of oropharyngeal squamous cell cancers in the USA are positive for HPV 16. HPV-associated head and neck squamous cell carcinoma seems to be a distinct clinical entity, and this malignant disease has a better prognosis than HPV-negative tumors, due in part to increased sensitivity of cancers to chemotherapy and radiation therapy. Although HPV is now recognized as a causative agent for a subset of oropharyngeal squamous cell carcinomas, the biology and natural history of oropharyngeal HPV infection and the best clinical management of patients with HPV-related head and neck squamous cell tumors is not well understood.

Head and neck cancer is the sixth most common cancer worldwide, with an estimated annual burden of 563 826 incident cases (including 274 850 oral cavity cancers, 159 363 laryngeal cancers, and 52 100 oropharyngeal cancers) and 301 408 deaths.1 Although HPV has been long known to be an important cause of anogenital cancer, only in recent times has it been recognized as a cause of a subset of head and neck squamous cell carcinomas.2 More than 100 different types of HPV exist,3 and at least 15 types are thought to have oncogenic potential.4 However, most (>90%) HPV-associated head and neck squamous cell cancers are caused by one virus type, HPV 16, the same type that leads to HPV-associated anogenital cancers. The proportion of head and neck squamous cell carcinomas caused by HPV varies widely (figure 1),5–16 largely because of the burden of tobacco-associated disease in this population of tumors. Tobacco, alcohol, poor oral hygiene, and genetics remain important risk factors for head and neck tumors overall, but HPV is now recognized as one of the primary causes of oropharyngeal squamous cell cancers. In the USA, about 40–80% of oropharyngeal cancers are caused by HPV, whereas in Europe the proportion varies from around 90% in Sweden to less than 20% in communities with the highest rates of tobacco use (figure 1).

The incidence of head and neck cancers overall in the USA has fallen in recent years, consistent with the decrease in tobacco use in this region. By contrast, incidence of HPV-associated oropharyngeal cancer seems to be rising, highlighting the increasing importance of this causal association.17–19 In a US study in which data of the Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) program were used, incidence of oropharyngeal tumors (which are most likely to be HPV-associated) rose by 1·3% for base of tongue cancers and by 0·6% for tonsillar cancers every year between 1973 and 2004. By contrast, incidence of oral cavity cancers (not associated with HPV) declined by 1·9% every year during the same period.17 The age-adjusted incidence of tonsillar cancer increased 3·5-fold in women and 2·6-fold in men between 1970 and 2002.24 Augmented incidence of HPV-associated oropharyngeal cancers represents an emerging viral epidemic of cancer.

Why is increased incidence of HPV-associated oropharyngeal cancer most pronounced in young individuals? This effect could be attributable to changes in sexual norms (i.e., more oral sex partners or oral sex at an earlier age in recent than past generations) combined with fewer tobacco-associated cancers in young cohorts, making the outcomes of HPV-positive cancers more visible. Can the higher rates of HPV-associated oropharyngeal cancers in men compared with women be accounted for solely by differences in sexual behavior, or are biological differences in viral clearance present that could contribute to the higher burden of these cancers in men? HPV prevalence in cervical rather than penile tissue might boost the chances of HPV infection when performing oral sex on a woman, contributing to the higher rate of HPV-associated oropharyngeal cancer in men.

Tobacco use has fallen in past decades, and the corresponding rise in proportion of head and neck cancers that are oropharyngeal in origin has been striking, both in the USA and internationally. SEER data suggest that about 18% of all head and neck carcinomas in the USA were located in the oropharynx in 1973, compared with 31% of such squamous cell tumors in 2004.19 Similarly, in Sweden, the proportion of oropharyngeal cancers caused by HPV has steadily increased, from 23% in the 1970s to 57% in the 1990s, and as high as 93% in 2007.13,25 These data indicate that HPV is now the primary cause of tonsillar malignant disease in North America and Europe.

Findings of initial studies suggest that oral HPV frequency increases with age. Prevalent oral HPV infection is detected in 3–5% of adolescents26–28 and 5–10% of adults.14,29 We do not yet know whether the natural history of oral HPV or risk factors for persistent HPV infection in the oropharynx differ from those known for anogenital HPV infection (table 1). Data suggest oral HPV prevalence is amplified with number of sexual partners and is more typical in men, in HIV-infected individuals, and in current tobacco users.26–28,30,31

In view of the importance of tobacco use in head and neck squamous cell carcinoma, most cases of this malignant disease seen in non-smokers are unsurprisingly HPV-related. However, oral HPV infection is common in smokers and non-smokers and is an important cause of oropharyngeal cancer in both groups. For example, in case series, only 13–16% of individuals with HPV-positive head and neck squamous cell cancer did not smoke or drink alcohol.32,33 Although a higher proportion of individuals with HPV-positive compared with HPV-negative tumors are non-smokers or neither smoke nor drink alcohol, many with HPV-positive disease have a history of alcohol and tobacco use. In fact, 10–30% of HPV-positive head and neck squamous cell carcinomas were recorded in heavy tobacco and alcohol users.32,33 This finding underscores that HPV-associated malignant disease not only arises in people who do not smoke or drink alcohol but also occurs in people with the traditional risk factors of tobacco and alcohol use.

HPV detection may ultimately serve a more comprehensive role than mere prognostication. Detection of HPV is emerging as a valid biomarker for discerning the presence and progress of disease encompassing all aspects of patients’ care, from early cancer detection,41 to more accurate tumor staging (e.g., localization of tumor origin),42,43 to selection of patients most likely to benefit from specific treatments,44 to post-treatment tumor surveillance.45,46 Consequently, there is a pressing need for a method of HPV detection that is highly accurate, reproducible from one diagnostic laboratory to the next, and practical for universal application in the clinical arena. Despite growing calls for routine HPV testing of all oropharyngeal carcinomas, the best method for HPV detection is not established. Various techniques are currently in use, ranging from consensus and type-specific PCR methods, real-time PCR assays to quantify viral load, type-specific DNA in-situ hybridization, detection of serum antibodies directed against HPV epitopes, and immunohistochemical detection of surrogate biomarkers (e.g., P16 protein). Although PCR-based detection of HPV E6 oncogene expression in frozen tissue samples is generally regarded as the gold standard for establishing the presence of HPV, selection of assays for clinical use will ultimately be influenced by concerns relating to sensitivity, specificity, reproducibility, cost, and feasibility. Development of non-fluorescent chromogens has enabled visualization of DNA hybridization by conventional light microscope; furthermore, adaptation of in-situ hybridization to formalin-fixed and paraffin-embedded tissues has made this technique compatible with standard tissue-processing procedures and amenable to retrospective analysis of archival tissue blocks. Most PCR-based methods, on the other hand, need a high level of technical skill and are best used with fresh-frozen samples.

Limitations of any one detection assay can be offset by algorithms that combine the strengths of complementary assays.50 A highly feasible strategy incorporates P16 immunohistochemistry and HPV in-situ hybridization. In view of sensitivity that approaches 100%, P16 immunostaining is a good first-line assay for elimination of HPV-negative cases from any additional analysis. Since specificity is almost 100%, a finding positive for HPV 16 on in-situ hybridization reduces the number of false-positive cases by P16 staining alone. A P16-positive, HPV 16-negative result singles out a subset of tumors that qualifies for rigorous analysis for other (i.e., non-HPV 16) oncogenic virus types.

HPV in-situ hybridisation and P16 immunostaining as a practical diagnostic approach to discernment of HPV status can be applied readily to cytological preparations, including fi ne-needle aspirates from patients with cervical lymph-node metastases.41,52 Further expansion of HPV testing to blood and other body fl uids would advance the role of HPV as a clinically relevant biomarker, but these specimens would need other detection platforms. PCR-based detection of HPV DNA in blood (53) and saliva (54) of patients after treatment of their HPV-positive cancers suggests a future role in tumour surveillance. Detection of serum antibodies to HPV-related epitopes can predict the HPV status of head and neck cancers, and this method has been advocated as a way to project clinical outcomes and guide treatment without the constraints of tissue acquisition.53,55

The increasing prevalence of oropharyngeal cancer in young populations and substantially amplified survival rates with current treatment approaches stands in contrast to survival achieved in older individuals with comorbid disorders associated with tobacco and alcohol history. Several characteristics of patients with head and neck cancer have been linked with favorable prognosis, including non-smoker, minimum exposure to alcohol, good performance status, and no comorbid disorders, all of which are related to HPV-positive tumor status. Findings of retrospective analyses suggest that individuals with HPV-positive oropharyngeal cancer have higher response rates to chemotherapy and radiation and increased survival62–65 compared with those with HPV-negative tumors. Augmented sensitivity to chemotherapy and radiotherapy has been attributed to absence of exposure to tobacco and presence of functional unmutated TP53.63,64,66 Increased survival of patients with HPV-positive cancer is also possibly attributable in part to absence of field cancerization related to tobacco and alcohol exposure.67

Survival outcomes for individuals with HPV 16-positive and P16-positive oropharyngeal tumors were similar. Failure data indicated significantly diminished rates of locoregional failure and second primary tumour in patients with HPV-positive oropharyngeal cancer compared with those with HPV-negative tumors; distant metastases did not differ between the two groups. When survival was assessed after adjustment for tobacco exposure, in individuals who smoked, those with HPV-positive oropharyngeal tumors and fewer than 20 pack-years had 2-year overall survival of 95%, compared with 80% in those with HPV-positive cancers and 20 pack-years or more, and 63% in HPV-negative cancers and 20 pack-years or more. By comparison with people with HPV-positive oropharyngeal tumors who smoked and had fewer than 20 pack-years, the hazard of death was raised for those with HPV-negative tumors and 20 pack-years or more (hazard ratio 4·33) and those with HPV-positive cancers and 20 pack-years or more (1·79). These data indicate clearly that tobacco exposure alters the biology of HPV-positive oropharyngeal tumors and is an important prognostic factor.

An association between HPV-positive, P16-positive oropharyngeal tumors and survival outcomes was reported in another retrospective analysis of a large phase 3 trial of chemoradiation, which included more than 800 patients enrolled from international sites.72 This substudy analysis looked at 195 available tumor samples in patients with an oropharyngeal primary cancer, of which 28% were HPV-positive and 58% were P16-positive. Individuals with HPV-positive cancers had 2-year overall survival of 94% and 2-year failure-free survival of 86% compared with 77% (p=0·007) and 75% (p=0·035), respectively, in those with HPV-negative tumors. When co-expression of HPV and P16 was correlated with survival outcomes, individuals with HPV-positive, P16-positive tumors had 2-year overall survival of 95% compared with 88% in those with HPV-negative, P16-positive cancers and 71% (p=0·003) in those with HPV-negative, P16-negative tumors. Similar results were noted for 2-year failure-free survival (89%, 86%, and 69%, respectively; p=0·002) and time to locoregional failure (93%, 95%, and 84%, respectively; p=0·051). By multivariable analysis, HPV 16 and P16 were identified as independent prognostic factors.

ECOG proposes induction chemotherapy with a triple drug regimen to reduce tumor burden to subclinical disease (clinical complete response at primary site) followed by lower dose radiation (total dose 54 Gy) and concurrent cetuximab. Overall survival and progression-free survival outcomes will be assessed and compared with results of the 2008 ECOG study.70 The main aim of this planned study is to assess potential for a lower dose of radiation to control disease and to investigate toxic effects and quality-of-life variables.

In summary, tumor HPV status is a prognostic factor for overall survival and progression-free survival and might also be a predictive marker of response to treatment. The method of in-situ hybridization provides a feasible approach for implementation in most diagnostic pathology laboratories, and immunohistochemical staining for P16 could be useful as a surrogate marker for HPV status. Seemingly, locoregional recurrence—but not the rate of distant disease—is diminished in patients with HPV-positive tumors. Smoking and tobacco exposure might modify survival and recurrence of HPV-positive tumors and should be considered in future trials for risk stratification of patients with HPV-positive malignant disease.

HCV and cancer

The contributions of hepatitis B virus and hepatitis C virus infections to cirrhosis and primary liver cancer worldwide
Joseph F. Perz, Armstrong GL, Farrington LA,  Hutin YJF, Bell BP
J Hepatol 2006; 45:529-538
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/j.jhep.2006.05.013

End-stage liver disease accounts for one in forty deaths worldwide. Chronic infections with hepatitis B virus (HBV) and hepatitis C virus (HCV) are well-recognized risk factors for cirrhosis and liver cancer, but estimates of their contributions to worldwide disease burden have been lacking. Methods: The prevalence of serologic markers of HBV and HCV infections among patients diagnosed with cirrhosis or hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC) was obtained from representative samples of published reports. Attributable fractions of cirrhosis and HCC due to these infections were estimated for 11 WHO-based regions. Results: Globally, 57% of cirrhosis was attributable to either HBV (30%) or HCV (27%) and 78% of HCC was attributable to HBV (53%) or HCV (25%). Regionally, these infections usually accounted for >50% of HCC and cirrhosis. Applied to 2002 worldwide mortality estimates, these fractions represent 929,000 deaths due to chronic HBV and HCV infections, including 446,000 cirrhosis deaths (HBV: n = 235,000; HCV: n = 211,000) and 483,000 liver cancer deaths (HBV: n = 328,000; HCV: n = 155,000). Conclusions: HBV and HCV infections account for the majority of cirrhosis and primary liver cancer throughout most of the world, highlighting the need for programs to prevent new infections and provide medical management and treatment for those already infected.

Among primary liver cancers occurring worldwide, hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC) represents the major histologic type and likely accounts for 70% to 85% of cases [2]. Cirrhosis precedes most cases of HCC, and may exert a promotional effect via hepatocyte regeneration [3,4]. Compared with other causes of cirrhosis, chronic infection with hepatitis B virus (HBV) or hepatitis C virus (HCV) is associated with a higher risk of developing HCC [3,5]. Alcohol abuse represents a leading cause of cirrhosis and is also a major contributor. dietary aflatoxin exposure in parts of Africa and Asia has been associated with primary liver cancer, especially in hosts with chronic HBV infection [8].

An understanding of the relative contribution of various etiologies to disease burden is important for setting public health priorities and guiding prevention programs [10,11]. The World Health Organization’s Global Burden of Disease (GBD) 2000 project aims to quantify the burden of premature morbidity and mortality from over 130 major causes [1,12]. Liver cancer and cirrhosis are included in the analysis, but with the exception of alcohol, the etiologies underlying these diseases have not been well accounted for [1,11,13]. In particular, HBV and HCV infections have been poorly characterized in previous WHO estimates since these were based primarily on the acute effects of infection and omitted the associated burdens of chronic liver disease [10,11].

The attributable fraction represents the proportion of disease occurrence that potentially would be prevented by eliminating a given risk factor. For cirrhosis, a systematic analysis of attributable fractions has been lacking altogether. For HCC, previous estimates of the attributable fractions due to HBV and HCV are available but are not comprehensive and do not correspond to the regional designations and related conventions of the current GBD project [14].

The prevalence of HBV and HCV infection among cirrhosis and HCC patients varied considerably within and between regions (Tables 2 and 3). These variations tended to reflect known patterns of HBV and HCV infection endemicity [99,100]. For example, in countries where HCV infection has long been endemic, such as Japan and Egypt, there were high prevalences of HCV infection among cirrhosis and HCC patients. The same held true for China and most of the African nations in our sample regarding HBV infection. Areas such as these, where HBV infection predominated, appeared to have a younger population of HCC cases, which is thought to reflect the preponderance of infections acquired early in life (e.g., perinatal HBV transmission) [8]. Patterns of HBV and HCV co-infection were also notable.

When we applied the HBV- and HCV-attributable fractions we derived to 2002 worldwide mortality estimates [1], we found that approximately 929,000 deaths from cirrhosis (n = 446,000) and primary liver cancer (n = 483,000) were likely due to chronic viral hepatitis infections. HBV infection accounted for 563,000 deaths (235,000 from cirrhosis and 328,000 from liver cancer) and HCV infection accounted for 366,000 deaths (211,000 from cirrhosis and 155,000 from liver cancer).

We showed that chronic viral hepatitis infections likely account for the majority of both cirrhosis and HCC globally and in nearly all regions of the world. One of the strengths of our analysis was that it employed simple and transparent methods. Our estimates of attributable fractions were derived from reviews of published studies reporting the prevalence of HBV and HCV infections in patients with cirrhosis or HCC in all regions of the world. Alternate approaches rely on estimates of the prevalence of risk factors and corresponding relative risks in the source populations. However, errors associated with extrapolating exposure or hazard from one population to another are a major source of uncertainty in efforts to characterize international health risks [12]. Given the lack of representative data regarding HBV and HCV infection prevalences worldwide along with uncertainties in deriving region specific risk estimates, we believe ours is the preferred approach.

Our findings help illustrate the great need for programs aimed at preventing HBV or HCV transmission. In 1992, WHO recommended that all countries include hepatitis B vaccine in their routine infant immunization programs. As of 2003, WHO/UNICEF estimated 42% hepatitis B vaccination coverage among the global birth cohort [106]. Therefore, implementation of this strategy, which represents the most effective way of preventing chronic HBV infection and related end stage liver disease, is far from complete [107,108]. Other key primary prevention strategies include screening blood donors and maintaining infection control practices to prevent the transmission of healthcare-related HBV and HCV infections [105,109,110]. In countries where these activities have not been fully implemented, they should be given a high priority. In most developed countries, injection drug use and high-risk sexual behaviors represent the major risk factors for HCV infection and HBV infection, respectively, indicating the importance of related prevention efforts (e.g., reducing the numbers of new initiates to injection drug use).

The role of programs to identify, counsel, and provide medical management for the many persons already infected with HBV or HCV requires careful consideration [105,110]. Counseling that includes advice regarding avoidance of alcohol and education regarding modes of transmission can help reduce the risks for developing chronic disease or spreading infection to susceptible persons. The widespread application of therapeutic interventions also has the potential to accelerate the declines in end-stage liver disease that will eventually follow from hepatitis B vaccination and other primary prevention efforts [104,107]. Recent advances have occurred in the therapeutic management of chronic hepatitis B and chronic hepatitis C, but treatments are long and involve substantial costs and side effects [111–113]. Countries will need to consider the potential benefits of treatment while insuring that scarce healthcare resources are allocated in a manner that does not undermine primary prevention efforts [114].

Risk of pancreatic cancer among individuals with hepatitis C or hepatitis B virus infection: a nationwide study in Sweden.

Huang J1, Magnusson M, Törner A, Ye W, Duberg AS.
Br J Cancer. 2013 Nov 26; 109(11):2917-23.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/bjc.2013.689

A few studies indicated that hepatitis C and hepatitis B virus (HCV/HBV) might be associated with pancreatic cancer risk. The aim of this nationwide cohort study was to examine this possible association. Methods: Hepatitis C virus-
and hepatitis B virus-infected individuals were identified from the national surveillance database from 1990 to 2006, and followed to the end of 2008. The pancreatic cancer risk in the study population was compared with the general population by calculation of Standardized Incidence Ratios (SIRs), and with a matched reference population using a Cox proportional hazards regression model to calculate hazard ratios (HRs). Results: In total 340 819 person-years in the HCV cohort and 102 295 in the HBV cohort were accumulated, with 34 and 5 pancreatic cancers identified, respectively. The SIRHCV was 2.1 (95% confidence interval, CI: 1.4, 2.9) and the SIRHBV was 1.4 (0.5, 3.3). In the Cox model analysis, the HR for HCV infection was 1.9 (95% CI: 1.3, 2.7), diminishing to 1.6 (1.04, 2.4) after adjustment for potential confounders.
Conclusion: Our results indicated that HCV infection might be associated with an increased risk of pancreatic cancer but further studies are needed to verify such association. The results in the HBV cohort indicated an excess risk, however, without statistical significance due to lack of power.

Pancreatic cancer is one of the most rapidly fatal malignancies with a 5-year survival rate below 5%. The long-term survival is poor also for early diagnosed patients treated with resection surgery (Jemal et al, 2010). In Europe, it was estimated in a prediction model that in the year 2012 there would be 75 000–80 000 deaths from pancreatic cancer, which is the fourth most common cause of cancer-associated death for both men and women (Malvezzi et al, 2012). The incidence of pancreatic cancer is higher in the Nordic countries and Central Europe than in other parts of the world (Bosetti et al, 2012).

Tobacco smoking is a well-established risk factor for pancreatic cancer (Iodice et al, 2008), and a similar magnitude of excess risk as smoking was found among the users of Scandinavian snus (moist snuff) (Boffettaet al, 2005; Luo et al, 2007). Besides, accumulating evidence consistently shows that old age, male sex, diabetes mellitus, hereditary pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis and family history are positively associated with this carcinoma (Pandol et al, 2012). Albeit the biological mechanism is unclear, recent epidemiological studies indicated that some infections, such as exposure to Helicobacter pylori (Trikudanathan et al, 2011), poor oral health (Michaud et al, 2007), hepatitis C virus (HCV) (Hassan et al, 2008; El-Serag et al, 2009) or hepatitis B virus (HBV) (Hassan et al, 2008; Iloeje et al, 2010; Wang et al, 2012a, 2012b) might be associated with pancreatic cancer risk.

Globally, ∼170 million people are chronically infected with HCV (World Health Organization, 1997) and an estimated 350 million with HBV (Custer et al, 2004). The prevalence rates of HCV and HBV infection vary widely in the world, and Sweden is a low endemic country with an estimated 0.5% of the population infected with HCV (Duberg et al, 2008a) and even lower rate for HBV infection. Both chronic HCV and HBV infections are main causes of hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC). Previous findings demonstrated that HBV may replicate within the pancreas (Shimoda et al, 1981; Yoshimura et al, 1981) and that HCV could be associated with pancreatitis (Alvares-Da-Silva et al, 2000; Torbenson et al, 2007). Some studies support that HCV and HBV may have a role in the development of pancreatic cancer, but the evidence is far from conclusive (Hassan et al, 2008; El-Serag et al, 2009; Iloeje et al, 2010; Wang et al, 2012a, 2012b), and more studies are needed. Towards this end, we utilised Swedish population-based nationwide registers, with documentation of all diagnosed HCV- and HBV-infected individuals in Sweden, to explore the association of HCV or HBV infection and the risk of pancreatic cancer.

Baseline characteristics of the HCV and HBV cohorts are presented in Table 1. In the HCV and chronic HBV cohorts the mean follow-up time were 9.1 and 9.4 years, with a total of 360 154 and 107 986 person-years at risk, respectively. There was a clear male dominance in the HCV cohort, and median age at entry into the HCV or HBV cohorts (notification date) was 38 and 31 years, respectively. A marked difference between cohorts was observed regarding the aspect of country of origin; HCV-infected individuals were more likely from Nordic countries, but persons with chronic HBV infection were often immigrants from non-Nordic countries.

Hepatitis C virus cohort

In the HCV cohort, there were 34 pancreatic cancer cases observed during 340 819 person-years of follow-up (first 6 months of follow-up excluded), whereas 16.5 were expected, yielding a statistically significant increased risk of pancreatic cancer (SIR: 2.1; 95% CI: 1.4, 2.9). The SIR did not alter substantially across sex or estimated duration of HCV infection (Table 2). The majority of cases were among the patients who were born before 1960.

From the Cox regression model, an ∼90% excessive risk for pancreatic cancer (HR 1.9; 95% CI: 1.3, 2.7) was observed after adjustment for age, sex and county of residence, which is similar to the result from the SIR analysis. This excess risk diminished somewhat but remained statistically significant after further adjustment for potential confounders (HR 1.6; 95% CI: 1.04, 2.4). The results did not vary markedly when stratified by sex (Table 3). In the additional analyses, excluding all individuals ever hospitalized with acute and/or chronic pancreatitis, the results did not alter notably (data not shown).

In the HCV cohort, the Standardized Incidence Ratio (SIR) for lung cancer was 2.3 (95% CI: 1.9, 2.7) and the Hazard Ratio (HR) for lung cancer was 2.2 (95% CI: 1.8, 2.7), decreasing to 1.6 (95% CI: 1.3, 2.1) after adjustment for the potential confounders used in the pancreatic cancer analyses.

Chronic HBV cohort

A total of five pancreatic cancer cases were found during 102 295 person-years of follow-up (first 6 months excluded), whereas 3.5 were expected. Compared with the age- and sex-matched Swedish general population, a 40% excess risk of pancreatic cancer was found in the chronic HBV cohort (SIR: 1.4; 95% CI: 0.5, 3.3), but without statistical significance. Because of the small number of pancreatic cancer cases, there was not enough power for additional stratified analyses (Table 4).

The Cox regression model revealed similar results as the SIR analysis. The point estimates were somewhat higher (HR=2.0 from the model adjusted for only matching factors and HR=1.8 from the fully adjusted model), but still statistically non-significant (Table 5). The SIR for lung cancer in the chronic HBV infection cohort was 1.7 (95% CI: 1.1, 2.5).

This population-based large cohort study revealed a doubled risk of pancreatic cancer among HCV-infected patients compared with the Swedish general population. The excess risk was persistent across strata by sex or duration of infection. Although further adjustment for potential confounders, i.e., chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (related to smoking), diabetes mellitus, chronic pancreatitis and alcohol-related disease, resulted in an attenuated relative risk, this finding still supports the hypothesis that HCV infection might be associated with an increased risk of pancreatic cancer. Besides, the result indicated a moderate excessive risk of pancreatic cancer among HBV-infected patients according to different statistical approaches, but the size of the study cohort and the observed number of cancers were too small to draw a sound conclusion. Pancreatic cancer is more common in older age groups, and the small number of pancreatic cancers among the HBV cohort was probably an effect of the relatively young cohort, concordant with the epidemiology of chronic hepatitis B in Sweden.

The strengths of this register-based study include population-based cohort design, relatively large sample size, independently collected data on documentation of HCV/HBV notifications and pancreatic cancer occurrence and high completeness of follow-up.

The parallel (laboratory and clinician) notification system of HCV/HBV infections in Sweden has a high coverage of those with a diagnosed infection; it is estimated that about 75–80% of HCV infections are diagnosed, but there still remain unknown infections, not yet diagnosed or documented. In addition, a small portion of the reported patients could have a resolved infection, spontaneously or by treatment, this could (probably insignificant) lower the risk in the HCV and HBV cohort.

The number of unidentified HCV/HBV-coinfected individuals is probably low in the studied cohorts. However, in the HCV cohort there could be some patients who were never diagnosed with hepatitis B but have serologic markers of a past HBV infection. In these patients we cannot exclude the possibility of occult hepatitis B.

The biological mechanism of the association between HCV and pancreatic cancer is unclear. However, virtually, the pancreas and liver share the common blood vessels and ducts, and prior evidence demonstrated that the pancreas is a remote location for hepatitis virus inhabitation and replication (Hassan et al, 2008). HCV infection is associated with type 2 diabetes, which is both a risk factor and might be a consequence of pancreatic cancer (Mehta et al, 2000; Sangiorgio et al, 2000). Besides, previous studies reported that subclinical/acute pancreatitis (Katakura et al, 2005) and hyperlipasemia (Yoffe et al, 2003) may be extrahepatic manifestations of HCV infection. In addition, pancreatic involvement was observed among patients who suffered from chronic hepatitis infection, resulting in mild pancreatic damage accompanied with increased serum levels of pancreatic enzyme (Taranto et al, 1989; Katakura et al, 2005). Immune response may lead to chronic inflammation in the targeted organs after long time persistent infection with HCV. Therefore, hepatitis C virus conceivably serves as a biological agent that may indirectly have a role in inflammation-associated pancreatic carcinogenesis. Although still unclear to what extent chronic inflammation contributes to pancreatic cancer development, it is postulated that HCV can induce inflammatory microenvironment with high concentration of growth factors and cytokines. This may exert effects by accumulating alterations in driver genes and promoting cancer cell growth and proliferation.

HIV AIDS and Cancer

http://www.cancer.gov/cancertopics/causes-prevention/risk/infectious-agents/hiv-fact-sheet

Key Points

  • People infected with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) have a higher risk of some types of cancer than uninfected people.
  • A weakened immune system caused by infection with HIV, infection with other viruses, and traditional risk factors such as smoking all contribute to this higher cancer risk.
  • Highly active antiretroviral therapy and lifestyle changes may reduce the risk of some types of cancer in people infected with HIV.
  • The National Cancer Institute (NCI) conducts and supports a number of research programs aimed at understanding, preventing, and treating HIV infection, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome-related cancers, and cancer-associated viral diseases.
  1. Do people infected with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) have an increased risk of cancer?

Yes. People infected with HIV have a substantially higher risk of some types of cancer compared with uninfected people of the same age (1). Three of these cancers are known as “acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS)-defining cancers” or “AIDS-defining malignancies”: Kaposi sarcoma, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and cervical cancer. A diagnosis of any one of these cancers marks the point at which HIV infection has progressed to AIDS.

People infected with HIV are several thousand times more likely than uninfected people to be diagnosed with Kaposi sarcoma, at least 70 times more likely to be diagnosed with non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and, among women, at least 5 times more likely to be diagnosed with cervical cancer (1).

In addition, people infected with HIV are at higher risk of several other types of cancer (1). These other malignancies include anal, liver, and lung cancer, and Hodgkin lymphoma.

People infected with HIV are at least 25 times more likely to be diagnosed with anal cancer than uninfected people, 5 times as likely to be diagnosed with liver cancer, 3 times as likely to be diagnosed with lung cancer, and at least 10 times more likely to be diagnosed with Hodgkin lymphoma (1).

People infected with HIV do not have increased risks of breast, colorectal, prostate, or many other common types of cancer (1). Screening for these cancers in HIV-infected people should follow current guidelines for the general population

HIV and cancer of the cervix

Z.M. Chirenje
bestpracticeobgyn April 2005; 19(2):269–276
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.bpobgyn.2004.10.002

Cancer of the cervix is the second most common cause of cancer-related death in women worldwide, and in some low resource countries accounts for the highest cancer mortality in women. The highest burden of the HIV/AIDS epidemic is currently in sub-Saharan Africa, where more than half of the people infected are women who have no access to cervical cancer screening. The association between HIV and invasive cervical cancer is complex, with several studies now clearly demonstrating an increased risk of pre-invasive cervical lesions among HIV-infected women. However, there have not been significantly higher incidence rates of invasive cervical cancer associated with the HIV epidemic. The highest numbers of HIV-infected women are in poorly-resourced countries, where the natural progression of HIV disease in the absence of highly active antiretroviral treatment sometimes results in deaths from opportunistic infections before the onset of invasive cervical cancer. This chapter will discuss the association of HIV and cervical intraepithelial neoplasia, the treatment of pre-invasive lesions, and invasive cervical cancer in HIV-infected women. The role of screening and the impact of antiretroviral treatment on the progression of pre-invasive and invasive cancer will also be discussed.

Anal cancer: an HIV-associated cancer

Klencke BJ, Palefsky JM
Hematology/oncology Clinics of North America [2003, 17(3):859-872]
http://dx.doi.org:/1016/S0889-8588(03)00039-X

Although not yet included in the Centers for Disease Control definition of AIDS, anal cancer clearly occurs more commonly in HIV-infected patients. An effective screening program for those groups who are at highest risk might be expected to impact rates of anal cancer just as significantly as did cervical Pap screening programs for the incidence of cervical cancer. Despite a relatively low rate of progression from AIN to invasive cancer, the scope of the problem is enormous based on the prevalence of anal HPV infection and the size of the HIV-infected, at-risk population. Thus, the potential benefits of screening, detection, and the development of more effective therapy also are enormous. Currently, therapeutic HPV vaccines for AIN represent an exciting avenue of research in HPV-related anogenital disease. Invasive anal cancer and HSIL (which is believed to be the precursor lesion) are expected to become increasingly important health problems for both HIV-infected men and women as their life expectancy lengthens. Although HAART may have improved the ability of many to tolerate CMT, it appears that toxicity of this therapy continues to be a problem for a proportion of HIV-infected subjects. The acute side effects present specific challenges to the clinician and patient, have an immediate impact on the patient’s plan of care and dose intensity of the treatment, and ultimately may impact the outcome of the planned treatment. Late toxicity may influence the long-term quality of life. Small patient numbers, variable radiation therapy doses, limited information about viral load, and a potential confounding effect of higher CD4+ levels make it difficult to draw any conclusions about the effect of HAART on anal cancer outcome. Large, prospective studies will be required before solid conclusions about the impact of various factors on anal cancer prognosis and outcome can be drawn.

The therapeutic potential of CXCR4 antagonists in the treatment of HIV infection, cancer metastasis and rheumatoid arthritis

Hirokazu Tamamura, and Nobutaka Fujii
Exp Opin on Ther Targets Dec 2005; 9(6): 1267-1282 http://dx.doi.org:/10.1517/14728222.9.6.1267

CXCR4 is the receptor of the chemokine CXCL12, which is involved in progression and metastasis of several types of cancer cells, HIV infection and rheumatoid arthritis. The authors developed selective CXCR4 antagonists, T22 and T140, initially as anti-HIV agents, which inhibit T cell line-tropic (X4-) HIV-1 infection through their specific binding to CXCR4. Recently, T140 analogues have also been shown to inhibit CXCL12-induced migration of breast cancer cells, leukaemia T cells, pancreatic cancer cells, small cell lung cancer cells, chronic lymphocytic leukaemia B cells, pre-B acute lymphoblastic leukaemia cells and so on in vitro. Biostable T140 analogues significantly suppressed pulmonary metastasis of breast cancer cells and melanoma cells in mice. Furthermore, these compounds significantly suppressed the delayed-type hypersensitivity response induced by sheep red blood cells and collagen-induced arthritis, which represent in vivo mouse models of arthritis. Thus, T140 analogues proved to be attractive lead compounds for chemotherapy of these problematic diseases. This article reviews recent research on T140 analogues, referring to several other CXCR4 antagonists.

Types of Cancer: AIDS/HIV related malignancies

http://cancer.northwestern.edu/cancertypes/cancer_type.cfm?category=1

People with HIV/AIDS are at high risk for developing certain cancers, such as Kaposi’s sarcoma, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and cervical cancer. For people with HIV, these three cancers are often called “AIDS-defining conditions,” meaning that if a person with HIV has one of these cancers it can signify the development of AIDS. The connection between HIV/AIDS and certain cancers is not completely understood, but the link likely depends on a weakened immune system. Most types of cancer begin when normal cells begin to change and grow uncontrollably, forming a mass called a tumor. A tumor can be benign (noncancerous) or malignant (cancerous, meaning it can spread to other parts of the body). The types of cancer most common for people with HIV/AIDS are described in more detail below.

Kaposi’s sarcoma

Kaposi’s sarcoma is a type of skin cancer, which has traditionally occurred in older men of Jewish or Mediterranean descent, young men in Africa, or people who have received organ transplantation. Today, Kaposi’s sarcoma is found most often in homosexual men with HIV/AIDS and related to an infection with the human herpesvirus 8 (HHV-8). Kaposi’s sarcoma in people with HIV is often called epidemic Kaposi’s sarcoma. HIV/AIDS-related Kaposi’s sarcoma causes lesions to arise in multiple sites in the body, including the skin, lymph nodes, and organs such as the liver, spleen, lungs, and digestive tract.

Non-Hodgkin lymphoma

HIV/AIDS-related NHL is the second most common cancer associated with HIV/AIDS, after Kaposi’s sarcoma. There are many different subtypes of NHL. The most common subtypes of NHL in people with HIV/AIDS are primary central nervous system lymphoma (affecting the brain and spinal fluid), found in 20% of all NHL cases in people with HIV/AIDS, primary effusion lymphoma (causing fluid to accumulate around the lungs or in the abdomen), or intermediate and high-grade lymphoma. More than 80% of lymphomas in people with HIV/AIDS are high-grade B-cell lymphoma, while 10% to 15% of lymphomas among people with cancer who do not have HIV/AIDS are of this type. It is estimated that between 4% and 10% of people with HIV/AIDS develop NHL.

Other types of cancer

Other, less common types of cancer that may develop in people with HIV/AIDS are Hodgkin’s lymphoma, angiosarcoma (a type of cancer that begins in the lining of the blood vessels), anal cancer, liver cancer, mouth cancer, throat cancer, lung cancer, testicular cancer, colorectal cancer, and multiple types of skin cancer including basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, and melanoma.

Treatment options for the most common treatments for HIV/AIDS-related cancers are listed by the specific type of cancer. Treatment options and recommendations depend on several factors, including the type and stage of cancer, possible side effects, and the patient’s preferences and overall health.

Palliative care can help a person at any stage of illness. People often receive treatment for the cancer and treatment to ease side effects at the same time. In fact, patients who receive both often have less severe symptoms, better quality of life, and report they are more satisfied with treatment.

Palliative treatments vary widely and often include medication, nutritional changes, relaxation techniques, and other therapies. You may also receive palliative treatments similar to those meant to eliminate the cancer, such as chemotherapy, surgery, and radiation therapy.

It is extremely important that all patients with HIV/AIDS and an associated cancer receive treatment with highly active antiretroviral treatment (HAART) both during the cancer treatments and afterwards. HAART can effectively control the virus in most patients. Better control of the HIV infection decreases the side effects of many of the treatments, may decrease the chance of a recurrence, and can improve a patient’s chance of recovery from the cancer.

The treatment of HIV/AIDS-related Kaposi sarcoma usually cannot cure the cancer, but it can help relieve pain or other symptoms. This can be followed by palliative care for Kaposi sarcoma. Antiviral treatment for HIV/AIDS helps reduce a person’s chance of getting Kaposi sarcoma and can reduce the severity of Kaposi sarcoma. HAART helps treat the tumor and reduce the symptoms associated with Kaposi sarcoma for people with HIV/AIDS. It is usually used before other treatments, such as chemotherapy.

Curettage and electrodesiccation. In this procedure, the cancer is removed with a curette, a sharp, spoon-shaped instrument. The area can then be treated with electrodesiccation, which uses an electric current to control bleeding and kill any remaining cancer cells. Many patients have a flat, pale scar from this procedure.

Cryosurgery. Cryosurgery, also called cryotherapy or cryoablation, uses liquid nitrogen to freeze and kill cells. The skin will later blister and shed off. This procedure will sometimes leave a pale scar. More than one freezing may be needed.

In photodynamic therapy, a light-sensitive substance is injected into the lesion that stays longer in cancer cells than in normal cells. A laser is directed at the lesion to destroy the cancer cells.

Radiation therapy is the use of high-energy x-rays or other particles to destroy cancer cells. A doctor who specializes in giving radiation therapy to treat cancer is called a radiation oncologist. The most common type of radiation treatment is called external-beam radiation therapy, which is radiation given from a machine outside the body. When radiation therapy is given using implants, it is called internal radiation therapy or brachytherapy. External-beam radiation therapy may be given as a palliative treatment. A radiation therapy regimen (schedule) usually consists of a specific number of treatments given over a set period of time.

Side effects from radiation therapy may include fatigue, mild skin reactions, upset stomach, and loose bowel movements. Most side effects go away soon after treatment is finished. Learn more about radiation therapy.

Chemotherapy may help control advanced disease, although curing HIV/AIDS-related Kaposi sarcoma with chemotherapy is extremely rare. Usually, for HIV/AIDS-related Kaposi sarcoma, chemotherapy is used to help relieve symptoms and to lengthen a patient’s life. Common drugs for Kaposi sarcoma include: liposomal doxorubicin (Doxil), paclitaxel (Taxol, LEP-ETU, Abraxane), and vinorelbine (Navelbine, Alocrest).

The side effects of chemotherapy depend on the individual and the dose used, but they can include fatigue, risk of infection, nausea and vomiting, hair loss, loss of appetite, and diarrhea. These side effects usually go away once treatment is finished.

HIV/AIDS-related Kaposi sarcoma may receive alpha-interferon (Roferon-A, Intron A, Alferon), which appears to work by changing the surface proteins of cancer cells and by slowing their growth. Immunotherapy is generally used for people who are in the good-risk category in the immune system (I) factor of the TIS staging system (see Stages). The most common side effects of alpha-interferon are low levels of white blood cells and flu-like symptoms.

The main treatments for HIV/AIDS-related non-Hodgkin lymphoma are chemotherapy, targeted therapy, and radiation therapy.

Treatments for women with the precancerous condition called CIN (see   Overview) are generally not as effective for women with HIV/AIDS because of a weakened immune system. Often, the standard treatment for HIV/AIDS can lower the symptoms of CIN.

Women with invasive cervical cancer and HIV/AIDS that is well-controlled with medication, generally receive the same treatments as women who do not have HIV/AIDS. Common treatment options include surgery, radiation therapy, and chemotherapy.

Cytokines in cancer pathogenesis and cancer therapy

Glenn Dranoff
Nature Reviews Cancer Jan 2004; 4(11-22) http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/nrc1252

The mixture of cytokines that is produced in the tumor microenvironment has an important role in cancer pathogenesis. Cytokines that are released in response to infection, inflammation and immunity can function to inhibit tumor development and progression. Alternatively, cancer cells can respond to host-derived cytokines that promote growth, attenuate apoptosis and facilitate invasion and metastasis. A more detailed understanding of cytokine–tumor-cell interactions provides new opportunities for improving cancer immunotherapy.

Dendritic Cells as Therapeutic Vaccines against Cancer
Jacques Banchereau and A. Karolina Palucka
Nature Reviews Immunology APR 2005; 5:296-306
http://cnc.cj.uc.pt/BEB/private/pdfs/2007-2008/Immunology/E/Rev_paper_E4.pdf

Mouse studies have shown that the immune system can reject tumours, and the identification of tumor antigens that can be recognized by human T cells has facilitated the development of immunotherapy protocols. Vaccines against cancer aim to induce tumor-specific effector T cells that can reduce the tumor mass, as well as tumor-specific memory T cells that can control tumor relapse. Owing to their capacity to regulate T-cell immunity, dendritic cells are increasingly used as adjuvants for vaccination, and the immunogenicity of antigens delivered by dendritic cells has now been shown in patients with cancer. A better understanding of how dendritic cells regulate immune responses will allow us to better exploit these cells to induce effective anti-tumor immunity.

Vaccines against infectious agents are one success of immunology and have spared countless individuals from diseases such as polio, measles, hepatitis B and tetanus8 . However, progress in the development of vaccines against infectious agents has been largely empirical and not always successful, as many infectious diseases still evade the immune system, particularly chronic infections such as tuberculosis, malaria and HIV infection. Further progress will be made through rational design based on our increased understanding of how the immune system works and how the induction of protective immunity is regulated. The same principle applies to vaccines against cancer, particularly as cancer is a chronic disease, and when it becomes clinically visible, tumor cells and their products have already been interacting with and affecting host cells for a considerable time to ensure the survival of the tumor. Ex vivo-generated, antigen-loaded DCs have now been used as vaccines to improve immunity9 . Numerous studies in mice have shown that DCs loaded with tumor antigens can induce therapeutic and protective antitumor immunity10. The immunogenicity of antigens delivered by DCs has been shown in patients with cancer9 or chronic HIV infection11, thereby providing proof of principle that using DCs as vaccines can work. Despite this, the efficacy of therapeutic vaccination against cancer has recently been questioned12 because of the undeniably limited rate of objective tumor regressions that has been observed in clinical studies so far. However, the question is not whether DC vaccines work but how to orient further studies to refine the immunological and clinical parameters of vaccination with DCs to improve its efficacy.

Vaccines against cancer Early studies in mice showed that the immune system can recognize and reject tumours13 and that immunodeficient mice (lacking interferon-γ (IFN-γ) and recombination-activating gene 2) have an increased incidence of cancer14 (BOX 1). In humans, the incidence of some cancers is increased in immunodeficient patients15 and is increased with age, owing to Immunosenescence16. These observations support the scientific rationale for immunotherapy for cancer. The term immunotherapy refers to any approach that seeks to mobilize or manipulate the immune system of a patient for therapeutic benefit17. In this regard, there are numerous strategies for improving the resistance of a patient to cancer. These include non-specific activation of the immune system with microbial components or cytokines, antigen-specific adoptive immunotherapy with antibodies and/or T cells, and antigen-specific active immunotherapy (that is, vaccination). The main limitation of using antibodies is that target proteins need to be expressed at the cell surface. By contrast, targets for T cells are usually peptides derived from intracellular proteins, which are presented at the cell surface in complexes with MHC molecules18. The identification of defined tumor antigens in humans19,20 prompted the development of adoptive T-cell therapy. Yet, the most attractive strategy is vaccination, which is expected to induce both therapeutic T-cell immunity (in the form of tumor-specific effector T cells) and protective T-cell immunity (in the form of tumor-specific memory T cells that can control tumor relapse)21–23. Numerous approaches for the therapeutic vaccination of individuals who have cancer have been developed, including the use of the following: autologous and allogeneic tumor cells (which are often modified to express various cytokines), peptides, proteins and DNA vaccines9,23–26. The observed results are variable; however, in many cases, a tumour-specific immune response has been induced, and tumor regressions, albeit limited, have occurred. These approaches rely on random encounter of the vaccine with host DCs. A lack of encounter of the vaccine antigen with DCs might result in the absence of an immune response. Alternatively, an inappropriate encounter — for example, with unactivated DCs or with the ‘wrong’ subset of DCs — might lead to silencing of the immune response27. Both of these situations could explain some of the shortcomings of current cancer vaccines. Furthermore, we do not know how tumor antigens need to be delivered to DCs in vivo to elicit an appropriate immune response.

Immature and mature dendritic cells have different functions. A | Immature dendritic cells (DCs) induce tolerance. Tissue DCs constantly sample their environment, capture antigens and migrate in small numbers to draining lymph nodes. In the absence of inflammation, the DCs remain in an immature state, and antigens are presented to T cells in the lymph node without costimulation, leading to either the deletion of T cells or the generation of inducible regulatory T cells. B | Mature DCs induce immunity. Tissue inflammation induces the maturation of DCs and the migration of large numbers of mature DCs to draining lymph nodes. The mature DCs express peptide–MHC complexes at the cell surface, as well as appropriate co-stimulatory molecules. This allows the priming of CD4+ T helper cells and CD8+ cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs), the activation of B cells and the initiation of an adaptive immune response. To control the immune response, CD4+CD25+ regulatory T (TReg)-cell populations are also expanded. [ADCC, antibody-dependent  cell-mediated cytotoxicity; NK, natural killer; TCR, T-cell receptor].

Box 1 |

Mice

  • The immune system can reject tumors
  • Immune-mediated rejection of chemically induced tumours13
  • Increased cancer incidence in immunodeficient mice14

Humans

  • Increased cancer incidence in immunodeficient patients15
  • Increased cancer incidence with age (immunosenescence)16
  • Cancer regression in patients with paraneoplastic neurological disorders that are mediated by onconeuronal antibodies and specific CD8+ T cells136

Dendritic cells DC subsets. There are thought to be two main pathways of differentiation into DCs2,31 (FIG. 2). The myeloid pathway generates two subsets: Langerhans cells, which are found in stratified epithelia such as the skin; and interstitial DCs, which are found in all other tissues32. The lymphoid pathway generates plasmacytoid DCs (pDCs), which secrete large amounts of type I IFNs (IFN-α and IFN-β) after viral infection33,34. DCs and their precursors show remarkable functional plasticity. For example, pDCs form one of the first barriers to the expansion of intruding viruses, thereby functioning, through the release of type I IFNs, as part of the innate immune response. Subsequently, these cells differentiate into DCs that can present antigens to T cells, thereby functioning as members of the adaptive immune system35,36. Monocytes can differentiate into either macrophages, which function as scavengers, or DCs that induce specific immune responses37,38. Different cytokines skew the in vitro differentiation of monocytes into DCs with different phenotypes and functions (FIG. 3). So, after activation (for example, by granulocyte/ macrophage colony-stimulating factor, GM-CSF), monocytes that encounter interleukin-4 (IL-4) become DCs known as IL-4-DCs29,30,39. By contrast, after encounter with IFN-α, tumour-necrosis factor (TNF) or IL-15, activated monocytes differentiate into IFN-α-DCs40–43, TNF-DCs44 or IL-15-DCs45, respectively. Whether, in vivo, all interstitial DCs are derived from monocytes remains to be established, but myeloid DCs that are isolated from human peripheral blood also give rise to different DC types after exposure to different cytokines. Each of these DC subsets has both common and unique biological functions, which are determined by a unique combination of cell-surface molecule expression and cytokine secretion. For example, whereas IL-4-DCs are a homologous population of immature cells that is devoid of Langerhans cells, TNFDCs are heterogeneous and include both CD1a+ Langerhans cells and CD14+ interstitial DCs44.In vitro experiments showed that Langerhans cells and interstitial DCs that were generated from cultures of CD34+ hematopoietic progenitors differ in their capacity to activate lymphocytes: interstitial DCs induce the differentiation of naive B cells into immunoglobulin-secreting plasma cells4,32, whereas Langerhans cells seem to be particularly efficient activators of cytotoxic CD8+ T cells. They also differ in their cytokine-secretion pattern (only interstitial DCs produce IL-10) and their enzymatic activity4,32, which might be fundamental for the selection of peptides that are presented to T cells. Indeed, different enzymes are likely to degrade a given antigen into different sets of peptides, as has recently been shown for the HIV protein Nef 46. This then leads to different sets of peptide–MHC complexes being presented and thereby to distinct repertoires of antigen-specific T cells. So, these unique DCs are likely to yield unique immune effectors, thereby allowing the broad immune response that is required to combat permanently evolving microorganisms and tumors.

Distinct DC subsets induce distinct types of immune response. DCs have a crucial role in determining the type of response that is induced. There is evidence that either polarized DCs or distinct DC subsets might provide T cells with different signals that determine the class of immune response31. So, in mice, splenic CD8α+ DCs prime naive CD4+ T cells to produce TH1 cytokines in a process that involves IL-12, whereas splenic CD8α– DCs prime naive CD4+ T cells to produce TH2 cytokines47,48. Furthermore, this polarization into different T-cell subsets also depends on the signal received by a DC, as shown by the induction of IL-12 production and polarization towards TH1 cells when DCs are activated with Escherichia coli lipopolysaccharide (LPS), but the absence of IL-12 production and polarization towards TH2 cells when the same type of DC is exposed to LPS from Porphyromonas gingivalis 49. In humans, CD40 ligand (CD40L)-activated monocyte-derived DCs prime TH1-cell responses through an IL-12-dependent mechanism, whereas pDCs activated with IL-3 and CD40L have been shown to secrete negligible amounts of IL-12 and to prime TH2-cell responses50. So, both the type of DC subset and the activation signals to which DCs are exposed are important for polarization of T cells.

Mouse proof-of-principle in vivo studies

  • Ex vivo-generated, antigen-loaded dendritic cells (DCs) induce antigen-specific T-cell immunity137
  • Ex vivo gene-loaded DCs can induce humoral immunity138
  • Ex vivo-generated, antigen-loaded DCs induce tumor-specific immunity139,140
  • Ex vivo-generated DCs are superior to other types of vaccine141
  • Ex vivo-generated immature DCs induce tolerance142
  • Combination therapy with ex vivo-generated DCs improves vaccine efficacy112,113

This is an important parameter in vaccination against cancer, as type 1 immunity (including IFN-γ secretion) is desirable, whereas type 2 immunity (including IL-4 or IL-10 secretion) is considered deleterious. DCs and immune tolerance. DCs can induce and maintain immune tolerance27, both central and peripheral.

Central Tolerance depends on mature thymic DCs, which are essential for the deletion of newly generated T cells that have a receptor that recognizes self-components51. However, central tolerance might not be effective for all antigens. Furthermore, many self-antigens might not have access to the thymus, and others are only expressed later in life. So, there is a requirement for Peripheral Tolerance, which occurs in lymphoid organs and is mediated by immature DCs (FIG. 1a). Immature DCs present tissue antigens to T cells in the absence of appropriate co-stimulation, leading to T-cell Anergy or deletion27 or to the development of IL-10-secreting Inducible Regulatory T Cells52,53. The research groups of Nussenzweig and Steinman54 have elegantly shown that fusion proteins targeted to immature DCs lead to the induction of antigen-specific tolerance. By contrast, concomitant activation of these DCs with CD40- specific antibody results in a potent immune response, because the DCs are induced to express a large number of co-stimulatory molecules55. However, mature DCs might also contribute to peripheral tolerance by promoting the clonal expansion of naturally occurring CD4+CD25+ REGULATORY T (TReg) CELLS56, as discussed later. Therefore, the biology of DCs offers several targets for the control of cellular immunity. The parameters that need to be considered include DC-related factors, host-related factors and combining DC vaccines with other therapies.

Subsets of human dendritic cells. (Fig not shown). The population of dendritic cells (DCs) in the peripheral blood, which can be mobilized by treatment with FLT3L (fms-related tyrosine kinase 3 ligand), contains both CD11c+ myeloid DCs and CD11c– plasmacytoid DCs. So far, most studies of DCs have been carried out with DCs generated by culturing monocytes with granulocyte/macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF) and interleukin-4 (IL-4); this simple procedure yields a homogenous population of DCs that resemble interstitial DCs, and the population is devoid of Langerhans cells. These DCs are immature and require exogenous factors for maturation. DCs can also be generated by culturing CD34+ haematopoietic progenitor cells (HPCs) or peripheral-blood monocytes with GM-CSF and tumour-necrosis factor (TNF). In this way, two DC subsets can be obtained: Langerhans cells, which might have improved efficacy for eliciting cytotoxic T lymphocytes; and interstitial DCs, which resemble monocyte-derived DCs. Adding IL-4 to CD34+ HPC cultures in the presence of GM-CSF and TNF inhibits the differentiation of Langerhans cells. [Green boxes indicate cell types that can be induced by culture with GM-CSF and TNF. Yellow boxes indicate cell types that can be induced by culture or mobilization with FLT3L].

Plasticity of monocyte-derived dendritic cells. (Fig not shown). Activated monocytes can differentiate into different types of dendritic cell (DC) after encounter with different cytokines. These distinct DCs will influence the differentiation of lymphocytes into immune effectors with different functions, leading to varied immune responses. For example, interleukin-15-DCs (IL-15- DCs) are remarkably more efficient at priming and maturation of rare antigen-specific cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) than are IL-4-DCs. Thymic stromal lymphopoietin-DCs (TSLP-DCs) induce CD4+ T cells to differentiate into pro-inflammatory T helper 2 (TH2) cells, which secrete large amounts of IL-13 and tumor-necrosis factor (TNF)143, whereas interferon-α-DCs (IFN-α-DCs) induce CD4+ T cells to differentiate into TH1 cells, which secrete IFN-γ and IL-10. The properties and function of TNF-DCs remain to be determined. [FLT3L, fms-related tyrosine kinase 3 ligand; GM-CSF, granulocyte/macrophage colony-stimulating factor].

Antigen loading. Loading MHC class I and class II molecules at the cell surface of DCs with peptides derived from defined antigens is the most commonly used strategy for DC-based vaccination22,87. Although this technique is important for proof-of-principle studies, the use of peptides has limitations: the restriction of a peptide to a given HLA type; the limited number of well-characterized Tumor-Associated Antigens; the relatively rapid turnover of exogenous peptide– MHC complexes, resulting in comparatively low antigen presentation by the time that the DC arrives in the draining lymph node after injection; and the induction of a restricted repertoire of T-cell clones, thereby limiting the ability of the immune system to control tumor-antigen variation. Yet another level of complexity is brought about by the use of MODIFIED HETEROCLITIC PEPTIDES. Some synthetic peptides, even those derived from immune-dominant antigens, do not bind MHC class I molecules with high affinity, possibly explaining their limited immunogenicity in vivo88. Therefore, the generation of peptide analogues with increased affinity for MHC class I molecules (known as heteroclitic peptides) could be used to improve peptide immunogenicity89,90. However, recent elegant studies in patients with malignant melanoma show that T cells elicited in vivo by vaccination with heteroclitic MART1 (melanoma antigen recognized by autologous T cells) or glycoprotein 100 (gp100) peptide show poor recognition of the endogenous melanoma-derived peptide and less efficient tumor-cell lysis compared with T cells specific for the native peptide91.

Immunoregulatory mechanisms

Naturally occurring CD4+CD25+ regulatory T cells

Cell-mediated suppression independent of interleukin-10 (IL-10) and/or transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β);
clonal expansion is regulated by mature dendritic cells (DCs)

Inducible regulatory T cells

Cytokine-mediated suppression through IL-10 and/or TGF-β; induction and clonal expansion is regulated by immature DCs

Natural killer T cells

Cytokine-mediated suppression through IL-13

Vaccine-induced B cells?

Cytokine-mediated regulation through IL-4, IL-6 and IL-10; competition with DCs for antigen uptake

Tumor-specific interferon-γ-secreting T cells?

Immunoediting and selection of escape variants (not discussed in main text)

Immune correlates of efficacy of dendritic-cell-based vaccines

  • Induction of broad tumour-specific T-cell immunity: T cells specific for several tumour antigens
  • Induction of effector T cells: T cells with immediate capacity to recognize tumour antigens and secrete cytokines such as tumour-necrosis factor and interferon-γ
  • Induction of memory T cells: T cells that secrete interleukin-2 and proliferate on re-exposure to tumour antigen
  • Induction of T cells that kill tumour cells
  • Decreased number of T cells with regulatory function

DCs are an attractive target for therapeutic manipulation of the immune system to increase otherwise insufficient immune responses to tumour antigens. However, the complexity of the DC system requires rational manipulation of DCs to achieve protective or therapeutic immunity. So, further research is needed to analyse the immune responses induced in patients by distinct ex vivo-generated DC subsets that are activated through different pathways. The ultimate ex vivo-generated DC vaccine will be heterogeneous and composed of several subsets, each of which will target a specific immune effector. These ex vivo strategies should help to identify the parameters for in vivo targeting of DCs, which is the next step in the development of DC-based vaccination. Indeed, distinct DC subsets express unique cell-surface molecules, such as different lectins131: Langerhans cells express langerin, which is crucial for the formation of Birbeck granules132,133; interstitial DCs express DCSIGN (dendritic-cell-specific intercellular-adhesionmolecule-3-grabbing non-integrin), which is involved in interactions with T cells and in DC migration but is also used by pathogens (such as HIV) to hijack the immune system; and pDCs express yet another lectin, BDCA2 (blood DC antigen 2)134,135. Such differential expression of cell-surface molecules might allow specific in vivo targeting of DC subsets for induction of the desired type of immune response.

9.1.2   Simultaneous Humoral and Cellular Immune Response against Cancer–Testis Antigen NY-ESO-1: Definition of Human Histocompatibility Leukocyte Antigen (HLA)-A2–binding Peptide Epitopes

Elke Jäger, Yao-Tseng Chen, Jan W. Drijfhout, Julia Karbach, et al.
J Exp Med. 1998 Jan 19; 187(2): 265–270.
A growing number of human tumor antigens have been described that can be recognized by cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) in a major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I–restricted fashion. Serological screening of cDNA expression libraries, SEREX, has recently been shown to provide another route for defining immunogenic human tumor antigens. The detection of antibody responses against known CTL-defined tumor antigens, e.g., MAGE-1 and tyrosinase, raised the question whether antibody and CTL responses against a defined tumor antigen can occur simultaneously in a single patient. In this paper, we report on a melanoma patient with a high-titer antibody response against the “cancer–testis” antigen NY-ESO-1. Concurrently, a strong MHC class I–restricted CTL reactivity against the autologous NY-ESO-1–positive tumor cell line was found. A stable CTL line (NW38-IVS-1) was established from this patient that reacted with autologous melanoma cells and with allogeneic human histocompatibility leukocyte antigen (HLA)-A2−, NY-ESO-1–positive, but not NY-ESO-1–negative, melanoma cells. Screening of NY-ESO-1 transfectants with NW38-IVS-1 revealed NY-ESO-1 as the relevant CTL target presented by HLA-A2. Computer calculation identified 26 peptides with HLA-A2–binding motifs encoded by NY-ESO-1. Of these, three peptides were efficiently recognized by NW38-IVS-1. Thus, we show that antigen-specific humoral and cellular immune responses against human tumor antigens may occur simultaneously. In addition, our analysis provides a general strategy for identifying the CTL-recognizing peptides of tumor antigens initially defined by autologous antibody.

There is growing evidence for humoral and cellular immune recognition of cancer by the autologous human host (1–6). Based on CTL-dependent lysis of cultured melanoma cell lines, several categories of autoimmunogenic tumor antigens have been characterized, including differentiation antigens of specific cell lineages (7–9), individual antigens caused by point mutations (10, 11), and tumor antigens, such as MAGE, which are expressed in a variable proportion of different tumor types, but are silent in most normal tissues except the testis (12). CTL responses against melanoma antigens induced by peptide vaccines in vivo have been associated with a favorable development of advanced melanoma in some patients (6, 13). As immunoselection of antigen-negative tumor cell variants has been observed during peptide vaccination (14), the molecular characterization of additional CTL-defined tumor antigens is needed to develop polyvalent vaccines with broader immunotherapeutic effects.

Sahin et al. have recently introduced a powerful new methodology for identifying human tumor antigens eliciting humoral immune response (5). The method has been called SEREX, for serological expression cloning of recombinant cDNA libraries of human tumors. Novel and previously defined tumor antigens have been identified by the SEREX method, including MAGE-1 and tyrosinase, both originally identified by cloning the epitopes recognized by CTLs. Thus, antibody screening of cDNA libraries prepared from human tumors can be used to identify antigens eliciting a cellular immune response, including CTLs, circumventing the need for established cultured autologous cell lines and stable CTL lines.

We have recently identified a novel human tumor antigen by SEREX analysis of a human esophageal cancer (15). The antigen, NY-ESO-1, belongs to a growing number of human tumor antigens we have called “cancer–testis” antigens that include MAGE, GAGE, BAGE (1), and SSX2 (HOM-MEL-40) (5, 16). These antigens have the following characteristics: (a) they are expressed in a variable portion of a wide range of cancers, (b) their normal tissue expression is generally restricted to the testis, and (c) they are generally coded for by genes on the X chromosome. In a recent survey of sera from normal individuals and cancer patients, antibodies against NY-ESO-1 were found in ∼10% of patients with melanoma, ovarian cancer, and other cancers, but not in normal individuals (Stockert, E., manuscript in preparation). One patient with a high NY-ESO-1 antibody response was found to have specific CTL reactivity against cultured autologous melanoma cells. In the present study, we report that NY-ESO-1 encodes the CTL target in this patient and identify the NY-ESO-1 peptides that are recognized.

High-titer Antibody Reactivity against NY-ESO-1.

Melanoma patient NW38 presented with extensive metastases to inguinal lymph nodes having large areas of necrosis. Reverse transcriptase PCR of tumor RNA showed that this tumor expressed NY-ESO-1. Based on the hypothesis that exposure of the immune system to large amounts of intracellular tumor proteins released from the necrotic tumor might elicit a strong humoral immune response, the serum of patient NW38 was tested for specific reactivity against recombinant NY-ESO-1 protein. Fig. ​Fig.11 shows the reactivity of NW38 serum with the recombinant NY-ESO-1 protein, with a lysate of NY-ESO-1–transfected COS-7 cells, and with a lysate of the autologous NY-ESO-1 messenger RNA–positive tumor cell line NW-MEL-38. A 22-kD protein species was identified in both cell lysates, and comigrated with the purified recombinant NY-ESO-1 protein. The identity of this protein species as NY-ESO-1 was further confirmed by using an anti–NY-ESO-1 mouse monoclonal antibody. Reactivity against recombinant NY-ESO-1 protein was still detectable at a serum dilution of 1:100,000. No reactivity was detected against a lysate of untransfected COS-7 cells.
The correlation between NY-ESO-1 expression and NW38-IVS-1 reactivity suggested NY-ESO-1 as the antigenic target. To prove this, COS-7 cells were transfected with NY-ESO-1 cDNA and different MHC class I molecules and used as targets for NW38-IVS-1. Reactivity was measured in a standard TNF-α release assay. TNF release was found after stimulation of NW38-IVS-1 with COS-7 cells cotransfected with HLA-A2− and NY-ESO-1 cDNA. No reactivity was detected after stimulation with cotransfectants of pcDNA3.1(−)-NY-ESO-1− and pcDNA1Amp-HLA-A1 cDNA, COS-7 cells transfected with pcDNA3.1(−), or untransfected COS-7 cells (Fig. ​(Fig.3).3).

Peptide-specific CTLs.

26 different peptides encoded by NY-ESO-1 with theoretical binding motifs to the HLA-A2.1 molecule were tested for specific recognition by NW38-IVS-1. The target cells were peptide-pulsed T2 cells. Of these 26 peptides, three were recognized by NW38-IVS-1 as determined by a standard51Cr–release assay (Table ​(Table1).1). The peptide sequences SLLMWITQCFL, SLLMWITQC, and QLSLLMWIT are located between positions 155 and 167 of the NY-ESO-1 protein (15), and show overlapping sequences. The 11-mer SLLMWITQCFL (2 in Table ​Table1)1) and the 9-mer SLLMWITQC (12 in Table ​Table1)1) consist of identical amino acids at positions 1–9.

To provide additional confirmation of the peptide specificity, the 26 synthetic peptides were individually incubated with HLA-A2–transfected COS-7 cells and tested in the TNF release assay. Consistent with the results of 51Cr–release assay, specific TNF-α release was detected in tests with peptides SLLMWITQCFL, SLLMWITQC, and QLSLLMWIT. NY-ESO-1/HLA-A2 transfectants were used as a positive control in these assays (Fig. ​(Fig.4).4).

The search for tumor antigens that induce specific immune responses in cancer patients is the ongoing challenge in tumor immunology. Evidence for a specific humoral response to human cancer came from serological analysis of cell surface reactivity of sera from cancer patients for autologous cancer cells, an approach called autologous typing (4). However, with only a few exceptions, this approach did not allow for the structural definition of the antigenic target. An autologous typing system also provided the first evidence for the development of CTLs with specificity for human melanoma cells (3, 17, 21–24). Using specific antitumor CTLs as probes, a number of CTL targets have been cloned on the basis of MHC class I–restricted recognition (1, 6). However, this approach involves cultured cancer cell lines and stable CTL lines from the same patient, two requirements that cannot easily be met with many tumor types. With the demonstration that genes coding for CTL-recognized tumor antigens elicit humoral immunity and can be cloned by SEREX methodology, a technically less demanding approach defining immunogenic tumor antigens is now available, one that extends the range of analysis to tumor types that are not easily adaptable to in vitro growth and are not sensitive targets for CTLs. A number of novel tumor antigens have been defined by SEREX, including two new members of the cancer–testis antigenic family, SSX2 (HOM-MEL-40) (5, 16), and NY-ESO-1 (15).

In this study, we identified a melanoma patient, NW38, with high-titered antibody against NY-ESO-1. This patient had a large and highly necrotic tumor, and the sustained release of intracellular antigens that are usually inaccessible to the immune system may account for the high NY-ESO-1 titer. The establishment of an autologous cell line that typed NY-ESO-1 positive provided target cells for assessing CTL reactivity in this patient. A CTL line was established from this patient that lysed the autologous melanoma cell line in an HLA-A2–restricted fashion. Using target cells transfected with NY-ESO-1 and HLA-A2, the specificity of CTL reactivity was found to be coded by NY-ESO-1. Computer analysis of the NY-ESO-1 sequence identified 26 peptides with HLA-A2–binding motifs. Screening of these peptides presented by T2 cells identified three sequences that were confirmed to be specifically recognized by NW38-IVS-1. This is the first conclusive demonstration of simultaneous antibody and CTL responses against a cancer–testis antigen in a single patient.

The strategy used in this study to generate and analyze CTL reactivity to a SEREX-defined antigen can be used as a model for investigating cellular immune responses to the growing list of other SEREX antigens. Identification of clones in SEREX requires high-titered IgG antibody, and the development of such antibodies requires the help of CD4+ T cells. In this sense, SEREX can be thought of as a method to define the CD4+ T cell repertoire to human tumor antigens. Also, the presence of both NY-ESO-1 antibody and CTLs in patient NW38 suggests that screening for an antibody response may be a simple and effective way to identify patients with concomitant CTL reactivity, and this possibility is now being tested in other patients with NY-ESO-1 antibody. In the absence of autologous tumor cell lines, CD8+ T cells can be stimulated with autologous antigen-presenting cells that have been transfected with the coding gene or fed purified protein antigens. A similar strategy can be used to identify peptide targets for CD4+ T cells.

A major objective in defining immunogenic human tumor targets is to explore their use in the development of cancer vaccines, and a number of clinical trials with various vaccine constructs are currently underway. Although tumor regression is the desired goal of a therapeutic vaccine, this end point cannot be expected to be an effective way to develop maximally immunogenic tumor vaccines. For this purpose, reliable immunological assays are needed to monitor the specificity and strength of specific immune reactions generated by the vaccine. With the exception of vaccines aimed at inducing a humoral immune response such as GM2 ganglioside vaccines, most vaccine trials are designed to stimulate cellular immunity, particularly the development of CTLs and CD4+ T cells. These have been difficult to detect in vaccine trials with MAGE peptides (25), and difficult to interpret in trials with vaccines containing melanocyte differentiation antigens, since CTLs against these antigens can be generated in vitro from nonvaccinated melanoma patients as well as normal individuals (26, 27). However, de novo induction and increase of preexisting CTL reactivity have been detected after vaccination with melanocyte differentiation antigens and observed to be associated with cancer regressions in a limited number of patients (13). The demonstration of a simultaneous antibody and CTL response to NY-ESO-1 in the same patient suggests that serological methods may be useful in monitoring vaccine trials with NY-ESO-1 and other tumor antigens eliciting a humoral immune response.

9.1.3 Monoclonal Antibodies in Cancer Therapy

R K Oldham
JCO September 1983; 1(9): 582-590
http://jco.ascopubs.org/content/1/9/582.short


The need for improved specificity in cancer therapy is apparent. With the advent of monoclonal antibodies, the possibility of specifically targeted therapy is being considered. Early trials of monoclonal antibody in experimental animals and humans have indicated its ability to traffic to specific tumor sites and to localize on or around the tumor cells displaying antigens to which the antibody is directed. This evidence of specific targeting, along with preliminary evidence of therapeutic efficacy for monoclonal antibodies and immunoconjugates with drugs, toxins, and isotopes is encouraging. The current status of clinical trials with monoclonal antibodies is reviewed and an example of the experimental approach for the development of immunoconjugates in animal models is presented.

Monoclonal Antibodies in Cancer Therapy: 25 Years of Progress

Robert K. Oldham, Robert O. Dillman
JCO Apr 10, 2008: 26(11): 1774-1777
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1200/JCO.2007.15.7438

In 1983, it was apparent that a major problem with current modalities of cancer treatment was the lack of specificity for the cancer cell.1 It was predicted that a major advancement in treatment of cancer would be the development of a class of agents that would have a greater degree of specificity for the tumor cell. Based on many animal studies and the treatment of fewer than 100 patients, it was evident in 1983 that monoclonal antibodies would be that major advance.

The first patient treated in the United States with monoclonal antibody therapy was a patient with non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma.2 Nadler et al2 described the treatment using a murine monoclonal antibody designated AB 89. Although treatment was not successful in inducing a significant clinical response, it did represent the first proof of principle in humans that a monoclonal antibody could induce transient decreases in the number of circulating tumor cells, induce circulating dead cells, and form complexes with circulating antigen, all with minimal toxicity to the patient. Antibody could be detected on the surface of circulating lymphoma cells, and free antigen in the serum decreased with each infusion of antibody. After two courses of milligram doses of AB 89, a final and third course with 1.5 g of antibody was administered during a 6-hour period. A marked reduction in circulating antigen was noted, but these studies suggested to the authors that the quantity of circulating antigen was too great to effectively deliver AB 89 to the patient’s tumor cells in a therapeutically effective manner.2

In the Journal of Clinical Oncology review article cited earlier,1 evidence was reviewed from animal tumor models that clearly demonstrated both specificity and therapeutic efficacy with little serious toxicity. Whereas passive serotherapy of human cancer had shown little success,3 it was apparent in the earlier review that monoclonal antibodies could be used in the treatment of leukemia and lymphoma.4,5 In 1983, a review of the literature revealed approximately 10 published studies and one in-press article of therapeutic trials of monoclonal antibody therapy in humans. All of these studies used murine monoclonal antibodies and were phase I/II studies. Most were in leukemia or lymphoma, but the earliest solid tumor studies were also underway in melanoma6 and GI cancer.1

By 1983, the pioneers in monoclonal antibody research believed that a new era of cancer therapy had begun, and for the first time, true specific and targeted therapy was underway using hybridoma technology to produce monoclonal antibodies with exquisite specificity. It was also apparent, based on animal model studies, that monoclonal antibodies could be a vehicle to bring immunoconjugate therapy to the clinic by conjugating monoclonal antibodies to drugs, toxins, and radioisotopes using the specificity of the monoclonal antibody to carry enhanced killing capacity directly to the tumor cells. Thus, the era of monoclonal antibody therapy, as well as immunoconjugate therapy, had begun.

Although there was much excitement (and skepticism) about this new treatment modality (the use of a form of biologic therapy with great specificity in patients with advanced cancer) there were also problems and limitations. As presented in Table 1, there were clinical toxicities with murine monoclonal antibodies, most of which were secondary to the interaction with the target antigen.7 However, the major limitation was their immunogenicity. Murine proteins are highly immunogenic, and it was soon found that only a few infusions of these foreign proteins could be given to patients with cancer because of the development of human antimouse antibody.8 Another problem quickly became apparent, in that some of the antigens on cancer cell surfaces modulated off the surface and into the circulation when antibody attached. Modulation could also cause internalization of the complex. It was recognized that this could represent a therapeutic advantage by using the antibody as carrier to internalize the toxic component of an immunoconjugate, potentially making it more therapeutically active.

In 1983, few specific antigens found only in cancer cells had been identified, and there was much debate about the specificity of these antigens. Many of the antigens to which monoclonal antibodies were made were embryonic antigens or shared antigens found on cancer cells and some normal cells. Therefore, although the specificity of the antibody was exquisite for the antigen, the specificity for the antibody or immunoconjugate for cancer was not absolute. One fairly clear exception occurred early in the 1980s when Levy et al9 developed monoclonal antibodies to the idiotype of B-lymphoma cells. The first patient given this anti-idiotypic antibody had a complete response to therapy, and his lymphoma went into a sustained remission that lasted for years. As a direct result of these early studies with anti-idiotypic antibodies, there is now a series of idiotype vaccines that are in phase III trials in patients with low-grade follicular lymphomas.10 These anti-idiotype vaccines will likely be the first truly custom-tailored, personalized anticancer vaccines to be approved for therapeutic use.

The major limitation of murine monoclonal antibody therapy was the immunogenicity of the mouse protein; a variety of investigators postulated that for monoclonal antibody therapy to be truly successful, human or humanized antibodies would be necessary. It was also known 25 years ago that the half-life of murine antibodies in the circulation was brief, and because of human antimouse antibody, became briefer with each infusion of murine monoclonal antibody. Previous studies of human immunoglobulin in clinical trials had demonstrated a much longer half-life for human immunoglobulin, which predicted that once human or humanized antibodies were available, the therapeutic efficacy of monoclonal antibodies and their immunoconjugates might be considerably enhanced.1
How has the field of monoclonal antibody and immunoconjugate therapy fared since the predictions of the early 1980s? Twenty-five years later, considerable progress has been made in this field.11,12 The US Food and Drug Administration has approved 21 monoclonal antibody products, with six of these biologic drugs approved specifically for cancer (Table 2). It was a landmark date in November 1997 when rituximab became the first monoclonal antibody approved specifically for cancer therapy.13 In addition to these six unconjugated monoclonal antibody therapies, one drug immunoconjugate, gemtuzumab ozogamicin (Mylotarg; Wyeth-Ayerst, Madison, NJ), has been approved. This humanized monoclonal antibody to CD33 is approved for use in acute myelogenous leukemia and uses the antibody conjugated to calicheamicin, a potent enediyene antibiotic originally isolated from aMicromonospora echoinospora.14 Two radioisotope-antibody conjugates, ytrrium-90 ibritumomab tiuxetan (Zevalin; Cell Therapeutics Inc, Seattle, WA) and iodine-131 tositumomab (Bexxar; GlaxoSmithKline, Middlesex, United Kingdom) have been approved.15 The murine form of these antibodies was retained in order to expedite clearance from the circulation. Both radiolabeled antibodies target the CD20 antigen on lymphoma cells.

Unlike the immunoconjugates, which are currently infrequently used, each of the six unconjugated antibodies approved for cancer therapy is currently frequently used in the treatment of humans with cancer. The use of techniques to humanize or chimarize monoclonal antibodies to decrease their murine components has been an important advance in the field. These molecules have a long half-life in the blood stream, and can interact with human complement or effector cells of the patient’s immune system. They behave in a manner similar to naturally occurring immunoglobulin and work along the lines of our normal antibody-based immune response as effective agents in treating patients with cancer.16

Rituximab has become the largest-selling biologic drug in clinical oncology, and is active in a variety of human lymphomas and chronic lymphocytic leukemia.17,18 This is a chimeric monoclonal antibody targeting the CD20 antigen found on both normal B cells and on most low-grade and some higher grade B-cell lymphomas. It is effective as a single agent in induction and maintenance therapy. It is primarily used, however, in combination with standard chemotherapies in the treatment of patients with non-Hodgkin’s B-cell lymphomas and chronic lymphocytic leukemia.19-22

A second monoclonal antibody that has proven highly effective in the clinic is trastuzumab, a humanized antibody that reacts with the second part of the human epidermal growth factor receptor 2.23 Like rituximab, it is effective as a single agent in induction and maintenance therapy, but is used primarily in conjunction with chemotherapy for patients with human epidermal growth factor receptor 2/neu–positive breast cancer.24,25

Alemtuzumab is a humanized monoclonal antibody targeting the CD52 antigen found on B lymphocytes and is used primarily for chronic lymphocytic leukemia.26 Like the two previously cited monoclonal antibody therapies, alemtuzumab is effective as induction and maintenance therapy. Alemtuzumab is also reactive with T lymphocytes, and unlike the other two antibodies, it is typically not combined with chemotherapy because of the increased risk of infection.(26)

Another humanized monoclonal antibody, bevacizumab, has been applied more broadly in human solid tumors because it targets vascular endothelial growth factor, which is the ligand for a receptor found on blood vessels.(27) Because this receptor is on endothelial cells, bevacizumab seems to be effective by reducing the blood supply to tumor nodules, thereby slowing or interrupting growth. Initially approved for advanced colorectal cancer,(28) it is now used in a variety of human solid tumors including cancers of the lung, kidney, and breast.(29-31)

The last two antibodies approved for clinical use were cetuximab (a chimeric antibody), and panitumumab (a completely human antibody). Both target the epidermal growth factor receptors found on a variety of human tumors.(32,33) Cetuximab was originally approved for use in combination with chemotherapy in metastatic colorectal cancer.(34) It also enhances chemotherapy and radiation therapy of squamous cell cancers of the head and neck.(35) Panitumumab was approved based on its single-agent activity in refractory colorectal cancer and is being combined with chemotherapy as well.

At the end of 2007, 25 years of clinical studies have resulted in the approval of six unconjugated, humanized, or chimeric monoclonal antibodies for cancer therapy along with one drug immunoconjugate and two radioisotope immunoconjugates. Although few in number, these monoclonal antibodies are changing the face of cancer therapy, bringing us closer to more specific and more effective biologic therapy of cancer as opposed to nonspecific cytotoxic chemicals.

Modern recombinant techniques have made it possible to rapidly produce both chimeric antibodies and humanized antibodies, and totally human antibodies are also being produced. Identification of surface receptors that are integral to proliferation and apoptosis has provided more targets for monoclonal antibodies beyond those originally identified by the murine immune system. In 2008, there are more than 100 monoclonal antibody–based biologic drugs in hundreds of clinical trials. Many of these are in phase II and phase III and will be coming before the US Food and Drug Administration for approval in the next few months and years. At long last, immunoconjugates are proving efficacious with acceptable toxicity and will extend our diagnostic (36) and therapeutic armamentarium (37) from mainly unconjugated monoclonal antibodies to a broad array of highly active and specific immunoconjugates.

On this silver anniversary for our 1983 review, “Monoclonal Antibodies in Cancer Therapy, ” we can confidently predict that progress toward more specific and less toxic therapy for human cancer is in our near future. The developments during the past 25 years in both biologic drugs and targeted small molecules place us on the verge of more cures with less toxicity for our patients with cancer.

9.1.4 Aptamers

Nanocarriers as an emerging platform for cancer therapy

Dan Peer1,7, Jeffrey M. Karp2,3,7, Seungpyo Hong, et al. 
Nature Nanotechnology
 2, 751 – 760 (2007)
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/nnano.2007.387

Nanotechnology has the potential to revolutionize cancer diagnosis and therapy. Advances in protein engineering and materials science have contributed to novel nanoscale targeting approaches that may bring new hope to cancer patients. Several therapeutic nanocarriers have been approved for clinical use. However, to date, there are only a few clinically approved nanocarriers that incorporate molecules to selectively bind and target cancer cells. This review examines some of the approved formulations and discusses the challenges in translating basic research to the clinic. We detail the arsenal of nanocarriers and molecules available for selective tumor targeting, and emphasize the challenges in cancer treatment.

Quantum Dot−Aptamer Conjugates for Synchronous Cancer Imaging, Therapy, and Sensing of Drug Delivery Based on Bi-Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer
Vaishali Bagalkot, L Zhang, E Levy-Nissenbaum, S Jon, PW Kantoff, et al.
Nano Letters 2007; 7(10):3065-3070
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1021/nl071546n

We report a novel quantum dot (QD)−aptamer(Apt)−doxorubicin (Dox) conjugate [QD−Apt(Dox)] as a targeted cancer imaging, therapy, and

sensing system. By functionalizing the surface of fluorescent QD with the A10 RNA aptamer, which recognizes the extracellular domain of the prostate specific membrane antigen (PSMA), we developed a targeted QD imaging system (QD−Apt) that is capable of differential uptake and imaging of prostate cancer cells that express the PSMA protein. The intercalation of Dox, a widely used antineoplastic anthracycline drug with fluorescent properties, in the double-stranded stem of the A10 aptamer results in a targeted QD−Apt(Dox) conjugate with reversible self-quenching properties based on a Bi-FRET mechanism. A donor−acceptor model fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET) between QD and Dox and a donor−quencher model FRET between Dox and aptamer result when Dox intercalated within the A10 aptamer. This simple multifunctional nanoparticle system can deliver Dox to the targeted prostate cancer cells and sense the delivery of Dox by activating the fluorescence of QD, which concurrently images the cancer cells. We demonstrate the specificity and sensitivity of this nanoparticle conjugate as a cancer imaging, therapy and sensing system in vitro.

Semiconductor nanocrystals known as quantum dots (QDs)

have been increasingly utilized as biological imaging and labeling probes because of their unique optical properties, including broad absorption with narrow photoluminescence spectra, high quantum yield, low photobleaching, and resistance to chemical degradation. In some cases, these unique properties have conferred advantages over traditional fluorophores such as organic dyes.1-4 The surface modification of QDs with antibodies, aptamers, peptides, or small

molecules that bind to antigens present on the target cells or tissues has resulted in the development of sensitive and specific targeted imaging and diagnostic modalities for in vitro and in vivo applications.5-7 More recently, QDs have been engineered to carry distinct classes of therapeutic agents for simultaneous imaging and therapeutic applications.8,9 While these combined imaging therapy nanoparticles represent an exciting advance in the field of nanomedicine, it would be ideal to engineer “smart” multifunctional nanoparticles that are capable of performing these tasks while sensing the delivery of drugs in a simple and easily detectable manner. One way to achieve this goal is to develop multifunctional nanoparticles capable of sensing the release of the therapeutic modality by a change in the fluorescence of the imaging modality.

Figure 1. (a) Schematic illustration of QD-Apt(Dox) Bi-FRET system. In the first step, the CdSe/ZnS core-shell QD are surface functionalized with the A10 PSMA aptamer. The intercalation of Dox within the A10 PSMA aptamer on the surface of QDs results in the formation of the QD-Apt(Dox) and quenching of both QD and Dox fluorescence through a Bi-FRET mechanism: the fluorescence of the QD is quenched by Dox while simultaneously the fluorescence of Dox is quenched by intercalation within the A10 PSMA aptamer resulting in the “OFF” state. (b)

Schematic illustration of specific uptake of QD-Apt(Dox) conjugates into target cancer cell through PSMA mediate endocytosis. The release of Dox from the QD-Apt(Dox) conjugates induces the recovery of fluorescence from both QD and Dox (“ON” state), thereby sensing the intracellular delivery of Dox and enabling the synchronous fluorescent localization and killing of cancer cells.

Figure 3. Fluorescence spectra. (a) QD-Apt conjugate (1 µM) with increasing molar ratio of Dox (from top to bottom: 0, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.8, 3.5, 4.5, 5.5, 7, and 8) at an excitation of 350 nm. (b) Dox (10 µM) with increasing molar ratio of QD-Apt conjugate (from top to bottom: 0.02, 0.04, 0.07, 0.09, 0.12, 0.14, and 0.16) at an excitation of 480 nm.

In conclusion, herein we report to our knowledge the first example of a multifunctional nanoparticle that can detect cancer cells at a single cell level while intracellularly releasing a cytotoxic dose of a therapeutic agent in a reportable manner. We demonstrate the specificity and sensitivity of this cancer imaging, therapy and sensing nanoparticle conjugate system in vitro by using PCa cell lines. By functionalizing the surface of fluorescent QD with the A10 PSMA aptamer, and intercalating Dox into the double-stranded CG sequence of the A10 PSMA aptamer, we developed a targeted QD-Apt(Dox) conjugate with reversible Bi-FRET properties. The incorporation of multiple CG sequences within the stem of the aptamers may further increase the loading efficiency of Dox on these conjugates. The presence of additional Dox may enhance the selfquenching effect of QD-Apt(Dox) conjugates thereby improving their imaging sensitivity, while the higher dose of Dox may enhance the therapeutic efficacy of the conjugates. Furthermore, through the use of other disease-specific aptamers or other targeting molecules, similar multifunctional nanoparticles may potentially be developed for additional important medical applications

Oligonucleotide Aptamers: New Tools for Targeted Cancer Therapy

Hongguang Sun1, Xun Zhu2, Patrick Y Lu3, Roberto R Rosato, et al.
Molecular Therapy Nucleic Acids(2014) 3, e182;
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/mtna.2014.32

Aptamers are a class of small nucleic acid ligands that are composed of RNA or single-stranded DNA oligonucleotides and have high specificity and affinity for their targets. Similar to antibodies, aptamers interact with their targets by recognizing a specific three-dimensional structure and are thus termed “chemical antibodies.” In contrast to protein antibodies, aptamers offer unique chemical and biological characteristics based on their oligonucleotide properties. Hence, they are more suitable for the development of novel clinical applications. Aptamer technology has been widely investigated in various biomedical fields for biomarker discovery, in vitro diagnosis, in vivo imaging, and targeted therapy. This review will discuss the potential applications of aptamer technology as a new tool for targeted cancer therapy with emphasis on the development of aptamers that are able to specifically target cell surface biomarkers. Additionally, we will describe several approaches for the use of aptamers in targeted therapeutics, including aptamer-drug conjugation, aptamer-nanoparticle conjugation, aptamer-mediated targeted gene therapy, aptamer-mediated immunotherapy, and aptamer-mediated biotherapy.

The terms “aptamer” and “SELEX” were introduced by two independent groups in 1990.1,2 The term “aptamer” refers to small nucleic acid ligands that exhibit specific therapeutic functions and an unambiguous binding affinity for their targets. Conversely, Systematic Evolution of Ligands by EXponential enrichment (SELEX) technology is the method used for aptamer development. Although using small molecule nucleic acids as therapeutics has been explored for decades, development of SELEX and aptamer technology revolutionized this field.

The most important property of an aptamer, from the Latin aptus (to fit), is its high target selectivity. These short, chemically synthesized, single-stranded (ss) RNA or DNA oligonucleotides fold into specific three-dimensional (3D) structures with dissociation constants usually in the pico- to nano-molar range.3 Moreover, in contrast to other nucleic acid molecular probes, aptamers interact with and bind to their targets through structural recognition (Figure 1), a process similar to that of an antigen-antibody reaction. Thus, aptamers are also referred to as “chemical antibodies.”

Figure 1.

Schematic diagram of aptamer binding to its target.

Full figure (43K)

Due to their small size and oligonucleotide properties, aptamers offer several advantages over protein antibodies in both their extensive clinical applicability and a less challenging industrial synthesis process. Specifically, (i) aptamers can penetrate tissues faster and more efficiently due to their significantly lower molecular weight (8–25 kDa aptamers versus ~150 kDa of antibodies). Therefore, aptamers penetrate tissues barriers and reach their target sites in vivo more efficiently than the larger-sized protein antibodies. (ii) Aptamers are virtually nonimmunogenic in vivo. In principal, as aptamers are oligonucleotides they should not be recognized by the immune system. In practice, a recent clinical study showed that aptamers did not stimulate an immune response in vivo,4,5 as compared to protein antibodies that are highly immunogenic, especially following repeat injections. (iii) Aptamers are thermally stable. Based on the intrinsic property of oligonucleotides, even after a 95 °C denaturation, aptamers can refold into their correct 3D conformations once cooled to room temperature. In comparison, protein-based antibodies permanently lose their activity at high temperatures. More importantly, a well-established synthesis protocol and chemical modification technology lead to (iv) rapid, large-scale aptamer synthesis and modification capacity that includes a variety of functional moieties; (v) low structural variation during chemical synthesis; and (vi) have lower production costs. Moreover, aptamers specifically recognize a wide range of targets, such as ions, drugs, toxins, peptides, proteins, viruses, bacteria, cells, and even tissues.6,7,8,9,10,11,12 In the clinic, aptamer-based therapeutics are gaining momentum. For example, Macugen, a modified RNA aptamer, specifically targets vascular endothelial growth factor. It has been approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA)13 for the treatment of wet age-related macular degeneration and is under evaluation for other conditions.14 In the cancer setting, AS1411 targets nucleolin, a protein over-expressed in a variety of tumors. It is currently being evaluated as a potential treatment option in solid tumors and acute myeloid leukemia.15 An updated list of therapeutic aptamers undergoing clinical trials is included in ref. 16 and Table 1. Taken together, these clinical studies highlight many possible uses that aptamers may have in a variety of biomedical fields, including therapeutics.17
Table 1 – A list of therapeutic aptamers undergoing clinical trials.

Since aptamer technology was first introduced, the RNA-based sequence library has been widely used for SELEX. Based on the existing evidence, it is believed that the presence of a 2′-OH group and non-Watson-Crick base pairing allows RNA aptamer oligonucleotides to fold into more diverse 3D structures than ssDNA molecules. Consequently, using the more flexible RNA sequences simplifies the development of high-affinity and -specificity aptamers. Despite their advantages, RNA sequences are very sensitive to nucleases present in biological environments and can be rapidly degraded.18 To increase nuclease resistance of RNA-based aptamers, several chemical modifications have been investigated. Evidence shows that 2′-OH group and phosphodiester linkages of RNA sequences are the sites of nuclease hydrolysis. Subsequently, substitutions of the 2′-OH functional group by 2′-fluoro, 2′-amino, or 2′-O-methoxy motifs, and/or changes to the phosphodiester backbone with boranophosphate or phosphorothioate are the most common modifications aimed at increasing nuclease resistance.19 More recently, Wu et al. developed a novel chemical modification method to increase siRNA stability, in which phosphorodithioate and 2′-O-Methyl were simultaneously substituted in the same nucleotide.20
This modification method significantly enhanced siRNA stability and represents a potential new direction for utilization of RNA-based therapies in complex biological systems. Other effective modifications recently reported utilize the locked nucleic acid technology16,21 or generate “mirror” RNA sequence structures, termed spiegelmers.22 These modifications result in structural changes to the RNA sequences, which cannot be digested by nucleases.

In addition to RNA aptamers, ssDNA-based aptamers have also been developed. Due to their lack of 2′-OH groups, DNA molecules are naturally resistant to 2′-endonucleases and are stable in biological environments. Recently, our group developed a biostable DNA-based aptamer specific for CD30, a protein biomarker that is over-expressed in Hodgkin and anaplastic large cell lymphomas. Functional analysis demonstrated that this ssDNA-based aptamer exhibited high CD30 binding affinity as low as 2 nmol/l and was stable in human serum for up to 8 hours. Conversely, an RNA-based CD30 aptamer was digested within 10 minutes under similar conditions.23
In summary, unique chemical features and biological functions have made aptamers a very attractive tool in biomedical research over the past two decades. Currently, there are over 4,000 published articles referenced in the PubMed database that include the term “aptamer.” Research areas that include aptamer technology cover bioassays, drug development, cell detection, tissue staining, in vitro and in vivo imaging, nanotechnology, and targeted therapy. As chemical antibodies, aptamers represent an excellent alternative to replace or supplement protein antibodies, which have been extensively used in the clinic.

Aptamers Specifically Targeting Cell Surface Biomarkers

Using SELEX technology to develop aptamers for cell surface biomarkers

SELEX, the methodology used to develop aptamers specific for a target of interest, is based on a repetitive amplification and enrichment process. The SELEX process follows several steps: first, a random ssDNA oligonucleotide library is chemically synthesized to contain between 1014–1015 unique random sequences flanked by conserved primer binding sites. This step utilizes the following universal scheme: 5′-sense primer sequence-(random sequence)-antisense primer sequence-3′, where the primer sequence ranges from 18 to 22 bases and the random sequence contains 20–40 nucleic acids. The general procedure consists of labeling the 5′-sense primer with a fluorochrome reporter for monitoring aptamer selection, while the 3′-antisense primer is labeled with an affinity molecule, such as biotin, that is used to separate single-stranded oligonucleotides generated in each amplification round. This random ssDNA library can be used directly to select an initial pool of DNA aptamers. Conversely, generation of RNA aptamers requires two extra steps. Specifically, a pool of random ssDNA oligonucleotides is generated, T7 RNA polymerase promoter sequence is added to the 5′-sense primer, and the DNA is then used as a template for T7 RNA polymerase-based transcription in the 5′ to 3′ direction. During the second SELEX step, the oligonucleotide library is heated and rapidly cooled to promote the formation of 3D structures. The library is then mixed with the target of interest for specific binding enrichment. In the third step, the unbound sequences are discarded through the use of membranes, columns, magnetic beads, and capillary electrophoresis.6,24,25 In the fourth step, the enriched sequences are amplified in vitro by either PCR (DNA aptamers) or RT-PCR (RNA aptamers) to generate a new sequence library for the next round of SELEX. The amplified sequence library may go through further negative-target selection, which eliminates the nonspecific sequences generated by binding of nontarget moieties. Lastly, aptamer selection goes through 4–20 rounds of amplification and enrichment. The exact number of required amplification and selection steps depends on the aptamer target being a purified protein or a living cell, and on the evolution of the aptamer sequence library, as that established by gel electrophoresis, flow cytometry (for target binding), classical cloning or sequencing methods, or by high throughput Next-Generation Sequencing (NGS). In recent years, the traditional SELEX method had also been modified to include the capillary electrophoresis (CE) SELEX, toggle selection, photo-SELEX, bead-based selection, X-Aptamers, and Slow Off-rate Modified Aptamers (SOMAmers) in order to maximize affinity and specificity, to improve the speed of selection and success rate, and to provide additional properties to the selected aptamers.26,27,28,29,30,31

Similar to protein antibody development, purified recombinant proteins or peptides expressed in prokaryotic or eukaryotic systems can be used as targets for aptamers selected by the SELEX method. However, because of the posttranslational modifications, especially in the case of highly glycosylated proteins, purified proteins or peptides often cannot fold into the correct 3D structure that is formed under physiologic conditions.32 Consequently, the newly synthesized aptamers may not be able to selectively recognize and interact with their corresponding targets, which would result in failure of the biomedical application. As this is a common problem, it is very important to choose biomarkers in their native conformation for aptamers selection. Taking this issue into an account, a modified SELEX technology that uses whole living cells, Cell-based SELEX (or Cell-SELEX), was recently established.33 To develop cell-specific aptamers, the Cell-SELEX method uses whole living cells that express surface biomarkers of interest. However, the presence of many different cell surface molecules in addition to the target biomarker(s) results in the synthesis of many unrelated/unwanted aptamers. Therefore, in addition to all the SELEX steps described above, Cell-SELEX technology also utilizes control cells that do not express the target biomarker(s) during the counter-selection step.33

Well-characterized biomarkers that are endogenously expressed at high levels, such as the ErbB superfamily, MUC1, EpCAM, and CD30, offer the best potential for cell-based aptamer development. Subsequently, cell lines that have high endogenous expression of cell-specific or cancer type-specific biomarker(s) are commonly used for Cell-SELEX. However, if such cell lines are unavailable, a biomarker of interest could be over-expressed in a particular cell line via gene transfection and the parental cells used for counter-selection. Using this approach, aptamers targeting the cancer stem cell (CSC) biomarker CD133 have been recently developed.34 In this study, CD133 cDNA was transfected into HEK293T cells that were then used for aptamer enrichment, with the parental HEK293T cells serving as a negative control. Similarly, an aptamer specific for the human receptor tyrosine kinase was recently developed.35

Figure 2.

Schematic diagram of our hybrid-SELEX method for selection of CD30-specific ssDNA aptamer. In our experiment, the hybrid-SELEX process is divided into (a) the cell-based SELEX selection and (b) CD30 protein-based SELEX enrichment. First, CD30-expressing lymphoma cells are used for positive selection and CD30-negative Jurkat cells are used in negative counter-selection. After 20 rounds of selection, the enriched aptamer pool is incubated with CD30 protein immobilized on magnetic beads for five additional rounds of enrichment. SELEX, Systematic Evolution of Ligands by EXponential enrichment.

Full figure and legend (183K)

Aptamers specific for cell surface biomarkers

Cell surface biomarkers are functionally important molecules involved in many biological processes, such as signal transduction, cell adhesion and migration, cell–cell interactions, and communication between the intra- and extra-cellular environments. An abnormal expression of cell surface biomarkers is often related to tumorigenesis.50 Clinically, it is estimated that about 60% of cancer-targeting drugs, including therapeutic antibodies and small molecule inhibitors, target cell surface biomarkers,51 making them attractive for disease treatment. In the last decade, many aptamers targeting cell surface biomarkers have been developed through the advancement of both the protein- and/or cell-based SELEX technologies (see Table 2 for detailed list). These aptamers have been extensively studied for diagnosis and/or treatment of hematological malignancies,7,23,49 lung,52,53,54 liver,55 breast,56,57 ovarian,58 brain,59,60colorectal,61 and pancreatic cancers,46 as well as for identification and characterization of CSCs.34,62

Aptamer-Mediated Targeted Therapies

Traditional cancer treatment approaches, such as chemotherapy, radiotherapy, photodynamic therapy, and photothermal therapy can cause serious side effects in patients due to their associated nonspecific toxicity. To minimize these side effects, a concept of personalized, targeted therapy has been gaining momentum. One of the main clinical approaches for targeted cancer therapy employs antibody-based drugs. Although antibody-mediated therapy is highly specific and results in fewer side effects, potential immunogenicity and high cost of production may limit its clinical applications. To overcome these obstacles, oligonucleotide aptamer-based targeted therapeutics and specific drug delivery systems have recently been explored. These studies revealed numerous advantages offered by the aptamer technology over protein-based antibody therapies, with some of these described in the section below.
Aptamer-drug conjugates

Aptamer-drug conjugation (ApDC) is a very simple yet effective model of noncovalently or covalently conjugating aptamer sequences directly with therapeutic agents (Figure 3). For example, aptamer-conjugated Doxorubicin (Dox), a chemotherapeutic agent extensively used in the treatment of various cancers, has recently been shown to have enhanced therapeutic efficacy over Dox alone. Mechanistically, Dox cytotoxicity is caused by its intercalation into the nucleic acid structure at the preferred paired CG or GC sites with subsequent inhibition of cancer cell proliferation. Taking advantage of its propensity for intercalation, Dox can be noncovalently conjugated to oligonucleotide aptamers containing CG/GC sequences through a simple incubation step. A recent report by Subramanian et al. describes the effectiveness of aptamer-Dox conjugates in the treatment of retinoblastoma.63 In their study, a 2′-fluoro modified RNA aptamer EpDT3 (specific for EpCAM, a CSC marker), was noncovalently conjugated with Dox. After binding to EpCAM molecules expressed at the cancer cell surface, the EpDT3-Dox conjugates were preferentially internalized by the cancer and not by the healthy cells, greatly enhancing therapeutic efficacy and reducing treatment-associated side effects. Several other studies also utilized aptamer-Dox conjugates for cancer therapy, such as HER2 aptamer-Dox conjugates targeting breast cancer,64 MUC1 aptamer-Dox conjugates targeting lung cancer,65 and PSMA aptamer-Dox conjugates targeting prostate cancer.66 Despite their obvious advantages, several concerns related to the use of aptamer-Dox conjugate have been raised. These include (i) instability of the aptamer-drug conjugate due to the reversible nature of noncovalent conjugation process; (ii) short circulating half-life of aptamer-drug conjugates in vivo due to their low molecular weight; and (iii) poor drug payload capacity due to a very simple structure of aptamers. These three disadvantages and technological approaches to improve them are described in greater detail below.

Figure 3.

Schematic diagram of noncovalent or covalent aptamer-drug conjugation.

Full figure (40K)

To enhance the stability of drug loading, Dox can be covalently conjugated to aptamer sequences via a functional linker moiety. For example, the DNA aptamer sgc8 possesses a strong affinity for PTK7 kinase that is abundantly expressed on the surface of CCRF-CEM T-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia cells. To enhance its stability, this aptamer was covalently conjugated with Dox through an acid-labile linker.67 Once the sgc8 aptamer-Dox conjugate was preferentially bound and internalized by the target cells, the acid-labile linker was easily cleaved in the acidic lysosomal environment, releasing Dox and effectively killing target cells.67 On the other side of the spectrum, covalent conjugation is the most commonly used method of aptamer-drug conjugation, especially for agents that cannot intercalate into the nucleic acid structure or whose intercalation would disrupt aptamer structure.68 Evidence suggests that these covalently conjugated aptamer-drug compounds are significantly more stable than the corresponding noncovalently conjugated intercalations.69

Conjugation of aptamers with high molecular weight polymers, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG), has been examined in order to increase aptamer molecular weight. Specifically, PEG has been widely used in drug modifications, including synthesis of Macugen aptamers. This modification, resulting in PEGylated aptamers, not only increased the aptamer molecular weight and prolonged its circulating half-life, but also enhanced its stability and decreased its toxic accumulation in nontarget tissues.70,71

Finally, in order to increase aptamer-drug payload capacity, an innovative model named aptamer-tethered DNA nanotrains (aptNTrs) was recently introduced by Zhu et al. to deliver Dox to cancer cells.72 In this study, structure of the sgc8 aptamer that targets PTK7 was modified by adding a DNA trigger probe on the 5′-end. Consequently, the modified aptamer acted as a locomotive for targeting, while two hairpin monomers containing Dox intercalation sites acted as boxcars to deliver the drug. After self-assembly, the newly synthesized sgc8 aptamer-NTrs displayed high drug payload capacity, with the drug/sgc8 aptamer-NTr molar ratio of 50:1. Importantly, sgc8 aptamer-NTrs-Dox conjugates were preferentially internalized by the target cells, thereby inhibiting tumor cell growth in vitro and in vivo.72

Another strategy for increasing the aptamer payload capacity involves the construction of polyvalent aptamers. Polyvalent aptamers exhibit an increased target affinity and are more rapidly internalized by their target cells. To demonstrate this, Boyacioglu et al. developed a new DNA aptamer they termed SZTI01 against PSMA.69 First, a dimeric aptamer complex (DAC) was created for specific delivery of Dox to PSMA-expressing cancer cells. Then, the SZTI01aptamer was modified on the 3′-terminus with either a dA16 or dT16 single-stranded tail that contained CpG sites for loading Dox, and the two monomers were annealed in a 1:1 ratio to form the DAC structure. The results of the study showed that DACs have a high Dox payload capacity with the Dox/DAC molar ratio of about 4:1, and the DACs-Dox conjugates were stable under physiological conditions for up to 8 hours.69 In another study, a DNA aptamer targeting MUC1 was truncated and an aptamer containing three repeats of the active targeting region, termed L3, was synthesized. Although the Dox payload capacity was not specifically modified in the L3 aptamer, the L3-Dox conjugates showed a stronger affinity to target cells and lower cytotoxicity to off-target cells than the parental MUC1 aptamer.73 Finally, polyvalent aptamers can also be constructed through the rolling circle amplification (RCA) technology. Using the RCA method and the sgc8 aptamer sequence as a circular template, a polyvalent sgc8 aptamer, termed Poly-Aptamer-Drug, was synthesized.74 It was determined that the Dox payload capacity of the polyvalent sgc8 aptamer increased tenfold, as compared to the monovalent sgc8 aptamer. Moreover, because of their 40-fold greater binding affinity, the Poly-Aptamer-Drug conjugates were more effective than their monovalent counterparts in targeting and killing leukemia cells.74

Although Dox presents itself as a very attractive chemotherapeutic agent for use in aptamer conjugation, other drugs, such as Gemcitabine (Gem) and photosensitizers, can also be targeted to cancer cells through the aptamer technology. Gem is an FDA-approved deoxycytidine analog (dFdC) used for anticancer therapy. To deliver Gem specifically to pancreatic cancer cells, Ray et al. developed a novel aptamer-Gem polymer model. In this model, a single-stranded RNA polymer contained Gem that was enzymatically synthesized through a mutant T7 RNA polymerase-mediated transcription reaction and fused with a nuclease-resistant 2′-fluoro-modified RNA aptamer (E07) that selectively binds to EGFR on pancreatic cancer cells. The E07 aptamer structure was modified by introducing a 24-nucleotide sequence at the 3′ end and using it as an adaptor for Gem polymer binding. Following an annealing step, the Gem polymer complementary bound with the E07 aptamer and preferentially targeted the EGFR-expressing pancreatic cancer cells, inhibiting cell proliferation.75

Compared with the traditional chemotherapeutic agents, controlled conditional prodrug photosensitizers have also been extensively used for aptamer-mediated drug delivery. In this therapeutic approach, termed photodynamic therapy, or photodynamic therapy, photosensitizers are activated by light irradiation and induce production of intracellular reactive oxygen species, resulting in cytotoxicity. A study by Ferreira et al. describes the development of a DNA aptamer specific for MUC1 and covalently conjugated at the 5′ end with the photosensitizer chlorin e6.76 Upon light irradiation, MUC1-expressing epithelial cancer cells were preferentially killed with cytotoxicity about 500-fold higher than that of the control cells. Similar studies have reported using a necleolin aptamer (AS1411)-TMPyP4 for targeting breast cancer77 and the EGFR aptamer (R13)-TF70 for treatment of lung cancer.78

Finally, approaches to extend the scope of aptamer application have also been developed. Similar to bi-specific antibodies, bi-specific or even tri-specific aptamers can be constructed. A bi-specific aptamer for targeting different cells was recently described by Zhu et al. In their study, specific DNA aptamers sgc8 and sgd5a were conjugated through a dsDNA linker. Compared to each mono-aptamer, this bi-specific aptamer (named SD) could recognize its target cell simultaneously with equal specificity and affinity, while Dox intercalation into the dsDNA induced target cell cytotoxicity.79 In the same study, a Y-shape dsDNA linker was used to construct a tri-specific aptamer that also recognized its target cells with high specificity and affinity.79 Clinically, Min et al. proposed using a bi-specific aptamer for prostate cancer therapy. It is well established that prostate tumors may contain both PSMA-positive and -negative cell types. Thus, this study utilized two aptamers, a 2′-fluoro modified RNA aptamer targeting PSMA-expressing cells and a DUP-1 peptide aptamer specific to PSMA-negative cells, conjugated through streptavidin. Moreover, intercalating Dox into the PSMA aptamer of this bi-specific aptamer model could serve as a tool to target all prostate cancer cell types.80

Aptamer-nanoparticle therapeutics

Nanoparticles (NPs) are attractive vehicles to increase both the half-life and the drug payload capacity of aptamer-mediated drug delivery. In addition to their common features, such as biocompatibility for clinical applications, large surface for enhanced aptamer and drug loading, and uniform size and shape for excellent biodistribution, NPs have other individual physical and chemical properties defined by their materials. For example, copolymers and liposomes are biodegradable, while metal materials offer exceptional photothermal and magnetic performance.

Conclusion

Antibody-based targeted therapeutics provide high target specificity and affinity. However, their potential for immunogenicity is of a great concern, as is their high production cost, both of which have limited their clinical applicability. As discussed in this review, when compared to protein antibodies, oligonucleotide aptamers offer many advantages, including simple chemical synthesis, virtual nonimmunogenicity, smaller size, faster tissue penetration, ease of modification with different functional moieties, low cost of production, and high biological stability. Therefore, aptamers have become a promising new class of molecular ligands that could replace or supplement protein antibodies. In summary, aptamer technology has a strong market value and may be applied in various biomedical fields, including in vitro cancer cell detection, in vivo tumor imaging, and targeted cancer therapy (Figure 7).

Figure 7.

Summary of various aptamer applications.

Full figure (58K)

Although aptamer technology has a great potential in the biomedical field, several technical challenges remain and must be addressed. These include: (i) how can aptamers be rapidly adapted for specific targets by decreasing false-positive/-negative selection? Primarily dependent on the natural properties of targets of interest, such as proteins versus cells or tissues, the process of aptamer selection is usually time-consuming, and the success rate is sometimes low. To improve the speed and success rate, novel methods for aptamer selection have been recently described. They include bead-based selection, that can select aptamers as rapidly as a single round of selection,27,28 and the SOMAmer, which improves the aptamer production success rate from less than 30% to over 50%.29,30 More recently, a study by Cho et al. devised a Quantitative Parallel Aptamer Selection System (QPASS) method, which integrates microfluidic selection, NGS, and in situ-synthesized aptamer arrays. This approach allows for the simultaneous measurement of affinity and specificity for thousands of candidate aptamers in parallel.116 In addition to QPASS, evolving modifications to the Cell-SELEX approach are beginning to address difficulties with successful removal of the influence stemming from the presence of dead cells, slow enrichment aptamers recognizing targets of interest, and contamination with unwanted aptamer sequences. As described above, utilization of the above-mentioned FACS-mediated SELEX44,45 and hybrid-SELEX23 offers novel approaches that address these technical challenges.

(ii) How can we select cancer-relevant targets for aptamer development and clinical applications? Tumorigenesis is a dynamic process that includes multiple constantly changing factors. Therefore, a one-size-fits-all cancer-specific biomarker is unlikely to ever be identified. Yet, it has been established that certain biomarkers present in healthy tissues are highly expressed in cancer cells. Moreover, certain biomarkers are associated with particular cancer cell types making them to be considered as useful targets for development of targeted cancer therapy. However, while use of cancer cells to identify biomarkers and to develop therapeutic agents is a reasonable approach, cultured cells, especially immortalized cell lines, greatly differ from tumor tissues in vivo. To overcome these limitations and to select more reliable cancer-relevant biomarkers for aptamer development, several innovative SELEX methods have been recently described. Of particular interest are the tissue-based SELEX117 and the in vivo-SELEX,118 which offer target selection under more relevant pathologic conditions. This cell/tissue-specific biomarker selection can also be utilized for development of noncancer related therapies, as shown for aptamers targeting the adipose tissue in obesity119 and for aptamers designed to penetrate the blood-brain barrier in order to combat brain diseases.120 Hence, we believe that the careful selection of cancer-associated biomarkers and cell/tissue type-specific biomarkers will expand the scopes of aptamer applicability and improve the feasibility of clinical applications.

(iii) What methods could improve aptamer biostability in vivo? Unmodified RNA-based aptamers are very susceptible to the nuclease-mediated degradation in vivo. Although many chemical modifications aimed at increasing biostability of the RNA aptamers have been developed, including 2′-modifications, 3′-modifications, phosphodiester backbone modifications,19,20 and utilizations of novel nucleic acids (locked nucleic acid and Spiegelmers),16,21,22 their effectiveness is still limited. When it was first described, PEGylation was a very attractive strategy for prolonging aptamer circulation half-life and enhancing their biostability. However, a recent report showed that the in vivo use of PEGylated aptamers induced production of anti-PEG antibodies,121 emphasizing the need for the development of alternative approaches.

(iv) How can aptamer technology be modified to achieve a more effective drug delivery? Many drug delivery systems described in this review are tested in vitroor in animal models. Yet, as with any compound that is translated from the bench to the bedside, aptamer-drug conjugates may behave differently in a human patient than they do in laboratory animals. Therefore, aptamer-drug conjugation remains an important challenge that must be considered. Specifically, various coupling approaches lead to different pharmacokinetics, biodistribution, and tolerability in vivo, which in turn greatly affect treatment effectiveness. In the same vein, we must consider the effectiveness of aptamer-mediated target gene therapy. Gene therapy, including siRNA and miRNA aimed at silencing specific genes, is considered the next generation therapeutic approach. However, silencing a single pathogenic gene may not be a viable therapeutic option because tumorigenesis is a process regulated by multiple genes and signaling pathways. Therefore, combining targeted therapeutics with gene therapy may represent the most effective strategy. Such combinational therapy approaches can greatly improve the therapeutic efficacy while reducing the required dosages of both drugs and small molecule RNAs,122 and, more importantly, may offer new alternatives to combat chemotherapy-resistant cancers.110

(v) The last important point to consider is whether aptamer-mediated biotherapies can become effective, FDA-approved medications. Following Macugen approval by the FDA, many aptamer-mediated biotherapies have been evaluated in clinical trials. Of particular interest is AS1411, an antitumor aptamer that has completed several Phase I clinical trials.15 Trial results are promising and offer useful insights into further modifications that could be applied to therapeutic aptamer development.

Taken together, although some technical challenges remain to be addressed, oligonucleotide aptamers have become an attractive and promising tool for targeted cancer therapy. As more clinical data are accumulated, we and others will be better equipped to optimize aptamer formulations, leading to the expansion of aptamer use in the clinic.

9.1.5 Tumor Suppressors

Intrinsic Disorder in PTEN and its Interactome Confers Structural Plasticity and Functional Versatility
Prerna Malaney, Ravi R Pathak, Bin Xue, VN Uversky & Vrushank Davé
Scientific Reports 20 June 2013; 3(2035)
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/srep02035

IDPs, while structurally poor, are functionally rich by virtue of their flexibility and modularity. However, how mutations in IDPs elicit diseases, remain elusive. Herein, we have identified tumor suppressor PTEN as an intrinsically disordered protein (IDP) and elucidated the molecular principles by which its intrinsically disordered region (IDR) at the carboxyl-terminus (C-tail) executes its functions. Post-translational modifications, conserved eukaryotic linear motifs and molecular recognition features present in the C-tail IDR enhance PTEN’s protein-protein interactions that are required for its myriad cellular functions. PTEN primary and secondary interactomes are also enriched in IDPs, most being cancer related, revealing that PTEN functions emanate from and are nucleated by the C-tail IDR, which form pliable network-hubs. Together, PTEN higher order functional networks operate via multiple IDP-IDP interactions facilitated by its C-tail IDR. Targeting PTEN IDR and its interaction hubs emerges as a new paradigm for treatment of PTEN related pathologies.

The concept of “Intrinsic Disorder” in proteins has rapidly gained attention as the preponderance and functional roles of IDPs are increasingly being identified in eukaryotic proteomes1, 2. Structured proteins adopt energetically stable three-dimensional conformations with minimum free energy. In contrast, IDPs, due to their unique amino acid sequence arrangements, cannot adopt energetically favorable conformations and, thus, lack stable tertiary structure in vitro3. This structural plasticity allows IDPs to operate within numerous functional pathways, conferring multiple regulatory functions4, 5, 6. Indeed, mutations in and dysregulation of IDPs are associated with many diseases including cancer1, 6, 7, signifying that IDPs play vital roles in functional pathways. Evidence suggests that ~80% of proteins participating in processes driving cancer contain IDRs6. For example, tumor suppressor p53 as an IDP, functions via its C-terminal IDR, which simultaneously exists in different conformations, each of which function differently1. Since PTEN is the second most frequently mutated tumor suppressor with versatile functions8, we hypothesized that PTEN may contain IDR(s) that can be exploited for therapeutic targeting in cancers and diseases associated with pathogenic PI3K/Akt/mTOR (Phosphoinositide 3-Kinase/Akt/ mammalian Target of Rapamycin) signaling9, 10, 11.

PTEN (phosphatase and tensin homolog), a 403 amino acid dual protein/lipid phosphatase converts phosphatidylinositol(3,4,5)-triphosphate (PIP3) to phosphatidylinositol(4,5)-bisphosphate (PIP2), thereby regulating the PI3K/Akt/mTOR pathway involved in oncogenic signaling, cell proliferation, survival and apoptosis12. PTEN, as a protein phosphatase, autodephosphorylates itself13. Deficiency or dysregulation of PTEN drives endometrial, prostate, brain and lung cancers, and causes neurological defects14, 15. PTEN is activated after membrane association16, providing conformational accessibility to the catalytic phosphatase domain (PD) that converts PIP3 to PIP216(Figure 1a). Because PTEN reduces PIP3 levels and inhibits pathogenic PI3K signaling, therapeutically targeting PTEN to the membrane to enhance its activity is of significance in treating several pathologies including cancer.

Figure 1: PTEN: A newly identified IDP.

PTEN - A newly identified IDP. srep02035-f1

PTEN – A newly identified IDP. srep02035-f1

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f1.jpg

(a) Diagrammatic representation of PTEN structure. PTEN, a 403 amino acid protein, comprises of PBM: PIP2 Binding Module (AA 1–13; in green), a phosphatase Domain (AA 14–185; in pink), C2 Domain (AA 190–350; in blue), C-terminal region or Tail (AA 351–400; in orange) and a PDZ binding domain (AA 401–403; in dark blue). The PDZ-binding motif is considered as a part of the C-terminal region. *Figure not to scale. (b) Crystal structure of PTEN. Only the phosphatase (in pink) and C2 domain (in blue) are amenable to crystallization. The first seven residues and the last 50 residues represent unstructured/loosely-folded regions that are yet to be crystallized. These regions represent the N- and C-termini of PTEN, respectively. (Source: RCSB Protein Data Bank). (c) Disorder analysis of PTEN. PONDR-VLXT and PONDR-FIT prediction tools were used to determine the disorder score of PTEN. Any value above 0.5 indicates intrinsic disorder. There are several disordered stretches within the PTEN protein, however, the most prominent of these disordered regions is a 50 amino-acid stretch located at the C-terminus of the PTEN protein. (d) IDPs are enriched in polar (R, Q, S, T, E, K, D, H) and structure breaking (G, P) amino acids and are depleted in hydrophobic (I, L, V, M, A), aromatic (Y, W, F) and cysteine (C) and asparagine (N) residues. The amino acid sequence of PTEN highlights these classes of residues with their relative distribution. (e) Composition profiling for full-length PTEN (in green), its ordered domain (in yellow) and its IDR (in red). The tool used is Composition Profiler (Vacic et al, 2007). As shown in the graph, the disordered region in PTEN is enriched in polar residues (specifically H, T, D, S and E), structure breaking residues (specifically P) and is depleted in all hydrophobic residues, cysteine and all aromatic residues. (f) Histogram representing the percentage of hydrophobic, polar, aromatic, structure breaking, cysteine and asparagines residues in ordered vs. disordered regions. The disordered region has an amino acid composition in line with the definition of IDPs.

PTEN crystal structure revealed that the PD and membrane-binding C2 domains are ordered (Figure 1b); however, the structures of the N-terminus, the CBR3 loop and the 50 amino-acid C-tail remain undetermined17. The C-tail is of particular significance due to its ability to regulate PTEN membrane association, activity, function, stability18, 19, 20, 21. Herein, we identify PTEN as an IDP with its C-tail being intrinsically disordered. The PTEN C-tail IDR is heavily phosphorylated by a number of kinases and regulates the majority of PTEN functions, including a large number of PPIs that forms the PTEN primary and secondary interactomes, comprising critical functional protein hubs, most of which are related to cancer. Our analysis provides a mechanistic insight into the functioning of the PTEN C-tail IDR at the systems level, including inter- and intra-molecular interactions that will aid in designing drugs to enhance the lipid phosphatase activity of PTEN for the pharmacotherapy of cancers and pathological conditions driven by hyperactive PI3K-signaling.

PTEN is an IDP

Utilizing two disorder prediction software programs, PONDR-VLXT and PONDR-FIT22, 23, we have identified PTEN as a bona fide IDP. PTEN has a highly disordered, functionally versatile, C-tail encompassing amino acids 351–403 (Figure 1a and 1c). A PDZ-binding motif (amino acids 401–403) is part of the disordered region. Thus, the PTEN C-tail IDR facilitates interactions with a vast repertoire of PDZ domain-containing proteins (Figs. 1a and 2d). The unique amino acid composition of IDRs dictates their structural plasticity3, 23, 24. IDRs are enriched in polar and structure-breaking amino acid residues, depleted in hydrophobic and aromatic residues and, rarely, contain Cys and Asn residues1, 23, 24. The ordered region of PTEN (AA 1–350) has 25% hydrophobic, 43% polar, 9% structure breaking, 13% aromatic and 9% Cys and Asn residues. In contrast, the PTEN C-tail (AA 351–403) is enriched in polar (66%) and structure breaking (11%) residues and is depleted in hydrophobic (11%), aromatic (6%) and Cys and Asn residues (6%), indicating an ideal profile for the IDR (Figs. 1d and 1f ). Further, compositional analysis of PTEN using the Composition Profiler24 reveals that the disordered region in PTEN is enriched in polar residues (specifically H, T, D, S and E) and structure breaking residues (specifically P) but is depleted in all aromatic and hydrophobic residues in addition to cysteine. (Figure 1e), again exhibiting universal characteristics of IDPs. Taken together, we establish the PTEN C-tail as a functional IDR and classify PTEN as a new IDP.

Figure 2: The functional relevance of the PTEN IDR.

The functional relevance of the PTEN IDR. srep02035-f2

The functional relevance of the PTEN IDR. srep02035-f2

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f2.jpg

(a) The number of mutations observed in PTEN over its 403 amino-acid stretch is plotted. Fewer mutations are observed in the tail region (in red) possibly indicating the deleterious nature of mutations in the functionally critical C-terminal region. [Source: Sanger Institute Catalogue of Somatic Mutations in Cancer (COSMIC), Human Gene Mutation Database (HGMD)]. (b) Number of mutations in every successive 50 amino-acid stretch of the PTEN protein. The last 50 amino-acid stretch, representing the tail region has at least one-eighth the number of mutations seen in any other 50 amino-acid stretch along PTEN, pointing to its critical function in cell homeostasis. (c) Correlation of mutations with the amino acid composition of PTEN. The ratio of mutations in specific residues in the disordered vs. ordered region are represented in this graph. The residues considered here are those used to define IDRs: hydrophobic, polar, aromatic, structure-breaking, cysteine and asparagine residues. Compared to the other classes of residues, mutations in aromatic residues are much higher in the disordered region when compared to the ordered region. (d) The PTEN primary interactome. Forty proteins interact with known regions of PTEN. There are approximately 340 more proteins that interact with PTEN at sites that are yet to be determined (see Supplementary Table S2). Proteins shown in pink interact with the phosphatase domain, those in blue interact with the C2 domain and those in orange interact with the disordered tail. (Visualization tool: Cytoscape). (e) The PTEN C-tail has a higher propensity for PPIs. Of the 40 mapped proteins, 60% interact with the disordered indicating a strong correlation between degree of disorder and the number of protein interactions. (f) Most proteins within the PTEN interactome are highly disordered. Approximately 80% of PTEN-interacting proteins within the primary interactome are disordered, as indicated in red. The proteins within the interactome that are ordered are indicated in blue.

Low mutability of PTEN IDR suggests critical biological functions

Mutations in PTEN are associated with several types of cancers14. To correlate PTEN mutations to its structure, we analyzed all human PTEN mutations deposited in the COSMIC Database (http://www.sanger.ac.uk/genetics/CGP/cosmic/). The disordered PTEN C-tail IDR shows unusually low mutability (~8-fold less) compared to any other 50 amino-acid stretch of PTEN (Figure 2a and 2b). To confirm our finding of the low mutability of the C-tail region, we also analyzed all human PTEN mutations deposited in the Human Gene Mutation Database (HGMD,http://www.hgmd.cf.ac.uk/ac/index.php)25 (Figure 2a), cBioPortal for Cancer Genomics26, 27(Supplementary Figure S1) and the Roche Cancer Genome Database28 (Supplementary Figure S1) which was consistent with the COSMIC database mutational data. It is likely that evolutionary pressure maintains a survival advantage and ipso facto abrogates progeny with mutations in highly functional protein sequences29, 30, 31. Thus, the functionally versatile PTEN C-tail IDR cannot afford mutations, hence showing least number of mutations. It is equally likely that mutations in individual residues within the IDR are well tolerated, as the evolutionary pressure may have shifted to maintaining global biophysical properties and structural malleability of the IDR to safeguard the critical protein function29. In either case, on a global scale, the versatile structural pliability of the PTEN IDR dictates functional diversity and biological activities29. Thus, the slightest functional perturbation in the PTEN IDR due to mutations, either within the IDR or in domains interacting with it, could disrupt cellular homeostasis as seen in cancers and neurodegenerative disorders associated with PTEN mutations. This is supported by our data indicating that PTEN, as an IDP when mutated, causes several cancers14.

Moreover, the PTEN C-tail IDR exhibits preferential mutations in aromatic residues compared to the ordered region (Figure 2c). The ratio of mutations in aromatic residues in the disordered to ordered region is much higher than any other class of residues (structure breaking, hydrophobic, polar, Cys and Asn), likely attributed to the structure-imparting property of aromatic residue32. Specifically, aromatic residues within IDRs engage in stacking interactions, enhancing nucleation between distinct residues at functional protein-protein interaction interfaces32. Thus loss of this critical structural and functional property imparted by aromatic residues is associated with a disease phenotype. In summary, the disordered PTEN C-tail IDR has functionally evolved to contain a combination of peptides that cannot tolerate mutations.

Disorderliness in PTEN primary interactome drives functional networks

Protein-Protein Interactions (PPIs) typically occur between conserved, structurally rigid regions of two or more proteins, particularly ordered proteins that display energetically favorable, highly-folded conformations. Intriguingly, IDPs lack tertiary structure, yet engage in PPIs, albeit with lower affinities but high specificity1. The lack of structure within IDPs enhances their biophysical landscape, conferring them with the ability to attain structural complementarities required for PPIs. Since IDPs do not conform to a stable structure, they are less compact, providing a larger physical interface and energetic adaptability to interact with multiple proteins1, 7. Thus, conditional folding within IDPs is effectively utilized for interaction with a multitude of binding partners, enabling them to shuttle between several signaling cascades as efficient “cogs”, mediating and regulating PPIs4,7, 33, 34, 35, 36. Indeed, we discovered that PTEN, being an IDP, interacted with more than 400 proteins (Supplementary Table S1) when a combination of online software, literature search and database mining tools were used. Proteins with known PTEN interaction domains were classified as “mapped” (Figure 2d and Supplementary Table S1), whereas those with uncharacterized/predicted interactions were designated as “unmapped” proteins (Supplementary Table S1). Derivation of PTEN primary interactome from the mapped proteins using Cytoscape (http://www.cytoscape.org/) indicated that PTEN disorderliness is efficiently used for interaction with 40 proteins, most existing in distinct functional pathways (Figure 2d, 2e and Supplementary Table S2).

Interestingly, within the PTEN primary interactome, 60% of interactions occurred within the disordered C-tail region. Furthermore, disorder analysis on the primary interactome revealed that 33 proteins (>82%) were IDPs, of which two-thirds interacted with the C-tail IDR (Figure 2e, 2f andSupplementary Table S3), indicating a high propensity for disorder-disorder (D-D)-type interactions.

In order to study evolutionary conservation of the PTEN C-tail and its interactions across species, several sequence alignments were performed (Figure 3a). Sequence alignment of the entire PTEN protein from different animal species shows a good conservation of the catalytic phosphatase domain between vertebrates and invertebrates with 100% sequence conservation for the dual specificity phosphatase catalytic motif HCKAGKGR8 (Supplementary Figure S2). The C-tail shows good conservation in the vertebrate species, likely indicating the recent emergence of the function of PTEN C-tail region in regulating PTEN activity and enriching its PPI potential, translating to its versatile functions. In order to examine the conservation across species for the PTEN C-tail interacting proteins, a literature search was conducted to identify experimentally verified domains/motifs involved in interaction with the C-tail. The domains involved in these interactions with the C-tail for 13 proteins with relevant literature sources for these interactions are part of Supplementary Figure S3. Subsequent sequence alignments for these thirteen proteins (Supplementary Figure S3) shows good sequence homology for the domains/motifs involved in interaction with the PTEN C-tail. These findings support the concept that the PTEN C-tail has evolved in vertebrates to incorporate features that allow it to interact with these proteins.

Figure 3: Sequence conservation in PTEN and its interacting partners reflects functionality.

Sequence conservation in PTEN and its interacting partners reflects functionality. srep02035-f3

Sequence conservation in PTEN and its interacting partners reflects functionality. srep02035-f3

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f3.jpg

(a) Sequence alignment of the PTEN protein for vertebrate and invertebrate animals. Green color indicates sequence similarity while red indicates sequence dissimilar amino acid residues. All comparisons are made with respect to the human PTEN protein. (b) Network analysis for PTEN was performed to assess its potential as a network hub. The network shows multiple secondary interactions within the 40 mapped proteins, indicating their role in multiple signaling cascades mediated via PTEN. The proteins SMAD2/3, AR, PCAF, ANAPC7, B-arrestin 1 and p53 appear to be critical within these signaling cascades and also happen to be intrinsically disordered (Supplementary Table S3), reinforcing the concept of preferential interactions between disordered proteins. (Analysis Tool: Metacore by GeneGo).

Further, to assess whether PTEN acts as a functional hub protein and regulates pathways through its protein-binding partners, we performed functional network analysis using the Analyze Network option from MetaCore (GeneGo Inc, Thomson Reuters, 2011) (Figure 3b). The PTEN primary interactome was used as input with PTEN as the central node. We identified multiple interactions not only between PTEN (node) and SMAD2/3, AR, PCAF, ANAPC3, ANAPC4, Caveolin, β-arrestin 1 and p53 (edges), but also amongst the edge proteins themselves (Figure 3b). Interestingly, all the edge proteins are themselves highly disordered (Supplementary Table S3). Further supporting this finding, our functional enrichment revealed that 13 proteins (one-third) of the PTEN primary interactome were cancer-related and highly disordered (Figure 4a, Supplementary Table S3 and S4).

Figure 4: Derivation and disorder analysis of the PTEN cancer interactome.

Derivation and disorder analysis of the PTEN cancer interactome. srep02035-f4

Derivation and disorder analysis of the PTEN cancer interactome. srep02035-f4

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f4.jpg

  • Derivation of the PTEN Cancer Interactome. Functional enrichment of the PTEN primary interactome identified 13 cancer-related proteins which are also intrinsically disordered. Subsequently, the PTEN secondary interactome was derived from the primary PTEN interacting proteins. A subset of the secondary interactome was designated as the PTEN Cancer Interactome and it represents the proteins that interact with the 13 cancer-related proteins of the primary interactome. (b) PTEN Cancer Interactome. PTEN is the primary node that interacts with the 13 cancer-related proteins representing the partial primary interactome. Proteins that interact with each of the 13 cancer-related proteins comprise the secondary interactome. Disordered proteins are represented in red while ordered proteins are shown in blue. Cancer-related proteins in the PTEN primary interactome were identified using IPA (Ingenuity® Systems, ingenuity.com). (c) We identified 40 proteins that are part of the PTEN primary interactome of which 13 are highly disordered (IDP) and identified as potential cancer network hubs based on functional network analysis. We further identify 299 IDPS from the secondary PTEN interactome. A filter for cancer-related proteins revealed that approximately two-thirds of the IDPs that form the secondary interactome (193 out of 299) are involved in oncogenesis, suggesting a high degree of functional enrichment. (Functional network analysis was performed using IPA (Ingenuity® Systems,www.ingenuity.com).Full size image (805 KB)

Pliant PTEN secondary interactome relays function of the primary network

The disorderliness of the PTEN primary interactome prompted us to investigate the possibility that PTEN radiates its function via a malleable network of IDPs that extends beyond the primary interactome. Therefore, we derived the PTEN secondary interactome (Supplementary Table S5) and ascertained the interaction of 13 cancer-related proteins identified in the primary interactome (Figure 4a). The entire PTEN secondary interactome consisted of 299 IDPs, of which 193 IDPs (two-thirds) were associated with the 13 cancer-related proteins, generating a “PTEN-Cancer Interactome” (Figure 4, Supplementary Table S5 and S6). Thus, two-third of the IDPs within the PTEN secondary interactome associates with one-third of the cancer related IDPs within the PTEN primary interactome, indicating that cancer-related functions are driven by IDPs in the PTEN interactome and that the flexibility of IDP-IDP interactions modulates diverse functions; dysregulation of which causes cancers.

Functional network analysis of the 193 cancer-related IDPs identified 31 proteins that shared multiple nodes (Figure 5a and Supplementary Table S6). We overlaid this network with the cancer-related IDPs of the primary interactome to predict functionally critical protein hubs (indicated in yellow circles in Figure 5a and b). Our analysis revealed 16 proteins as highly populated hubs, most enriched in disordered regions, again demonstrating that a high degree of structural and functional association between the hubs required IDP-IDP interactions (Figure 5b). The involvement of these hubs in multiple, critical oncogenic signaling pathways make them attractive drug targets in the field of clinical oncology. Our bioinformatic analysis resonates well with observed biological phenomena as seen in the case of MDM2 protein, which is a major PPI hub regulating p53. Interaction of the human androgen receptor (AR) protein and MDM2 influences prostate cell growth and apoptosis37. Mdm2-Daxx interaction activates p53 following DNA damage38, and Daxx binds and inhibits AR function39. Conversely, the breast cancer susceptibility gene 1 (BRCA1) interacts directly with AR and enhances AR target genes, such as p21(WAF1/CIP1), that may result in the increase of androgen-induced cell death in prostate cancer cells40. Further, BRCA1 complexes with Smad3 and is inactivated, leading to early-onset familial breast and ovarian cancer41. Within the same network, MDM2 inhibits the transcriptional activity of SMAD proteins including SMAD342, thereby, emerging as a major player in prostrate, breast and ovarian cancer. Loss of PTEN, on the other hand, results in resistance to apoptosis by activating the MDM2-mediated antiapoptotic mechanism. We also identified proteins like NCL, DAXX and SUMO that play critical roles in mediating cancers as being a part of the PTEN centric cancer interactome (Figure 5b). Interestingly, all of the 16 predicted hubs can be traced back to PTEN (either directly or through other signaling adaptors) reinforcing our analysis (Figure 5c). These findings support the prevailing concept of preferential interaction between disordered regions of two distinct proteins; with PTEN being the common disordered interacting hub, giving functional centrality to PTEN in many critical cellular pathways.

Figure 5: Predicting functionally relevant network hubs in the PTEN cancer interactome.

Predicting functionally relevant network hubs in the PTEN cancer interactome. srep02035-f5

Predicting functionally relevant network hubs in the PTEN cancer interactome. srep02035-f5

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images/srep02035-f5.jpg

(a) Methodology to identify functional hubs within the PTEN Cancer Interactome. The PTEN Cancer Interactome contains 193 IDPs that are potential hubs. Over-represented IDPs (or IDPs with multiple occurrences) in the PTEN Cancer Interactome would have a greater propensity to function as hubs. Upon sorting for over-represented IDPs the list of 193 proteins is brought down to 31 proteins. In order to assess the possibility of these 31 proteins as functional hubs a network analysis is warranted. (b) We identified 31 potential hubs based on multiple associations from within the 193 cancer-associated IDPs of the PTEN secondary interactome. Regulatory networks derived from these 31 proteins were overlaid with a similar network from the 13 cancer-related proteins. Based on the number of associations within the network, we identify 16 potential functional hubs in the PTEN cancer interactome (indicated in yellow). Regulatory interactions were generated using the Transcriptome Browser tool (Lopez et al, 2008). (c) Functional network analysis of the 16 predicted hubs. In order to assess the functional association of the 16 predicted hubs with PTEN – a network analysis with PTEN as a central node was done. The analysis identifies MDM2 protein, a major regulator of p53, as one of the major PPI hubs in the PTEN cancer interactome. A number of other critical cancer-related proteins, such as AR, SMAD2/3 and PDGFRB that are part of the PTEN primary interactome, feature prominently in the PTEN cancer interactome. We also identified proteins like NCL, DAXX and SUMO that play critical roles in mediating cancers as being a part of the PTEN centric cancer interactome. Interestingly, all of the 16 predicted hubs can be traced back to PTEN (either directly or through other signaling adaptors) reinforcing our analysis. (Functional network analysis was performed using IPA (Ingenuity® Systems, www.ingenuity.com).

To further validate our methodology in using intrinsic disorder and cancer as filters to identify key signaling hubs, we compared our data sets with a previously published cancer signaling data set. We derived 7 common hubs (Supplementary Table S7), which were extended using the expansive human signaling network described previously43, 44, 45, 46 to obtain the PTEN associated cancer interactome (Figure 6a). An extensive disease associated network analysis using IPA validated our predictions as all the seven predicted hubs had an extensive cross-talk across multiple cancer disease types (Figure 6b).

Figure 7: Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs.

Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs. srep02035-f7

Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs. srep02035-f7

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f6.jpg

(a) A PTEN linked cancer network was derived using seven of the 16 predicted cancer hubs that were common with the human cancer associated gene set. The associated partners of the seven hubs were extracted from the human signaling network (Cui et al, 2007, Awan et al, 2007, Li et al, 2012 and Newman et al, 2013). Red color denotes the potential cancer hubs and blue color are their associated partners. Topological analysis identifies p53 as the most significant network hub in the PTEN linked cancer network (Supplementary Table S7). (b) Disease associated network of PTEN cancer hubs. A functional network was constructed with the seven topologically relevant hubs identified previously using the Core Analysis function from the IPA suite to derive the primary network (denoted as MP). A disease network was constructed using the Path Designer option and disease associated biological functions were overlaid on the primary network. Fx denotes the different functions associated with the members of the networks.

Modulation of PTEN PPIs by linear binding motifs

Recent evidence has shown that IDPs mediate PPIs via short linear amino acid sequences (~20 residues) called Molecular Recognition Elements (MoREs) or Molecular Recognition Features (MoRFs)35, 47. MoRFs undergo disorder-to-order transitions upon binding and adopt thermodynamically stable well-defined structures47, increasing the propensity of IDPs to interact with a vast repertoire of proteins. MoRFs also display molecular recognition elements that capture the binding partner proteins with high specificity. These partner-dependent conformational differences are critical to imparting versatile binding properties to IDRs35.

Since the PTEN IDR engages in multiple PPIs, we tested the possibility for the existence of MoRFs. The MORFP red algorithm48 revealed that PTEN contains major MoRF sites at amino acids 273–279 (part of the disordered CBR3 loop of the C2 domain), amino acids 339–347 (in close vicinity of the disordered C-tail) and amino acids 395–403 (part of the disordered C-tail) (Figure 7a and Supplementary Figure S4). The primary restriction of MoRFs to the PTEN C-tail IDR or adjacent regions indicates that these MoRFs directly participate in modulating PPI functions (Figure 7a). However, mutational analysis within MoRFs is required to establish their active role in functional PPIs.

Figure 7: Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs.

Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs. srep02035-f7

Biochemical features modulating PTEN PPIs. srep02035-f7

http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f7.jpg

(a) MoRFs in the PTEN C-tail IDR. MoRFpred (Disfani et al, 2012), a computational tool, was used to identify MoRF regions within the PTEN protein (Supplementary Figure S4). The MoRFs in the vicinity of the C-tail IDR are highlighted in red. Interestingly, all of the major MoRFs (with a length greater than 5 residues) are observed in the vicinity of disordered regions (either part of the disordered CBR3 loop of the C2 domain or the C-tail IDR) indicating a positive correlation between intrinsic disorder and PPIs. (b) ELMs in PTEN C-tail IDR. Eukaryotic Linear Motifs (or ELMs) are 3–11 amino acid long sequences that mediate PPIs. IDRs are particularly enriched in ELMs (Dinkel et al, 2012). The linear motifs occurring in the disordered segment of PTEN (tail + PDZ domain) have been highlighted. The motifs with a high conservation score (>0.75) are indicated in red. Interestingly, all of the motifs with a high conservation score are restricted to the C-tail IDR. (c) Phosphorylation sites in the C-tail IDR. Phosphorylation of PTEN, particularly on serine and threonine residues in the disordered region, regulates the function and stability of PTEN. Phosphorylation occurs at Ser 362, Thr 366, Ser 370, Ser 380, Thr 382, Thr 383, Ser 385 by various enzymes such as Casein Kinase II, Glycogen synthase kinase 3-B and Polo-like kinase 3. Each of these phosphorylation events helps regulate the availability and stability of the PTEN molecule within the cell.

Protein-protein interactions are also facilitated by very short motifs (3–10 amino acids) called Short Linear Motifs (SLiMs) or Eukaryotic Linear Motifs (ELMs)49, 50. Because of their short sequences, ELMs arise/disappear by simple point mutations, providing the evolutionary plasticity that the ordered protein domains lack. Thus, ELMs easily adapt to novel interactions in signaling pathways, where rapid assembly/disassembly of multi-protein complexes is a prerequisite. The frequent occurrence of ELMs in a typical proteome indicates their critical cellular functions. Consistent with this notion, a higher density of ELMs are observed in hub proteins and IDPs50. Since ELMs have short sequences, they interact with low-affinity, however, they engage in highly cooperative binding in protein complexes, triggering productive signaling50. Therefore, at increased intracellular local concentrations they competitively bind to mutually overlapping physiological targets of each other as seen with PDZ, SH2 and PTB interaction domains found in cancer-associated proteins and in IDRs49, 50. As PTEN contains a PDZ-binding motif within the IDR (Figure 1a and c), we probed for the existence and features of ELMs in PTEN using The Eukaryotic Linear Motif Resource (http://elm.eu.org). We identified 34 different classes of ELMs in PTEN that mediate PPIs (Supplementary Figure S5). Interestingly, the four ELMs that are most conserved (conservation score>0.75) occurred within the PTEN C-tail IDR, indicating its high level of functional/biological significance (Figure 7b). ELM functions are further modulated by post-translational modifications, mainly by phosphorylation50. Indeed, the PTEN IDR possesses nine phosphorylation sites51, 52(Figure 7c).

PTEN phosphorylation modulates intramolecular association and PPI function

Post-translational Modifications (PTMs) in IDPs facilitate PPIs5. Modifying enzymes readily dock on structurally flexible IDRs, making them a hot spot for PTMs4, 7, 53, 54. Consistent with this notion, regulatory cancer-associated proteins have twice as much disorder and undergo more frequent phosphorylation/dephosphorylation than other cellular proteins as predicted by DISPHOS (a DISorder-enhanced PHOSphorylation prediction software)54, implicating a tight interconnection between protein phosphorylation and disorder. Consistent with the function of PTM in IDRs, clustering of Ser and Thr phosphorylation sites (Figure 7c) in the C-tail IDR regulates PTEN stability, membrane association and activity19, 20. Phosphorylation in the PEST [proline (P), glutamic acid (E), serine (S) and threonine (T)] domain within the C-tail IDR (amino acids 352 to 399) inhibits degradation of PTEN51. Casein kinase II (CK II), Glycogen synthase kinase 3-beta (GSK3-β) and PLK3 (Polo-like kinase 3) phosphorylate Ser and Thr residues within the IDR, each providing a distinct function51 (Figure 7c). The microtubule-associated serine/threonine (MAST), serine/threonine kinase 11(STK11) or LKB1 and casein kinase I (CKI) kinases have also been implicated in PTEN phosphorylation. STK11/LKB1 modifies T383, while CKI modifies T366, S370 and S38552. Indeed, our DISPHOS prediction for C-tail IDRs supports these experimental observations (Supplementary Figure S6).

Substrate-kinase interactions are typically of the disordered-ordered (D-O) type and are stabilized by hydrogen bonding (Figure 7c), a hallmark of IDRs54. Indeed, computational analysis revealed that large ordered regions comprising the catalytic domains of CKII, GSK3B, PLK3, Rak, and Src kinases interact with the C-tail IDR (Supplementary Table S8), indicating that PTEN engages in D-O type intermolecular interactions with the modifying kinases.

At the intramolecular level, phosphorylation at C-tail residues triggers a conformational change in PTEN, inhibiting its membrane association and, therefore, its lipid phosphatase activity18, 19, 21, 55. The phosphorylated C-tail IDR folds onto the PD and C2 domains giving rise to the “closed-closed” conformation of PTEN (Figure 8a) that is incapable of interaction with the membrane18, 20. The “closed- closed” form of PTEN is enzymatically inactive and cannot convert PIP3 to PIP2. The identification of the exact resides involved in this intramolecular interaction remains an active area of research18, 20, 56.

Figure 8: Targeting PTEN C-tail IDR.
http://www.nature.com/srep/2013/130620/srep02035/images_article/srep02035-f8.jpg

Most PTEN functions emanate from the C-tail IDR, including aberrant PPIs that hyper-activate oncogenic pathways. (a) Phosphorylation mediates an intramolecular interaction in the PTEN molecule. Phosphorylation causes a conformational change in PTEN converting it to the enzymatically inactive “closed closed ” form wherein the flexible tail folds onto residues in the C2 and phosphatase domain, thereby making it incapable of interacting with the membrane. Dephosphorylation (by an unknown phosphatase or via auto-dephosphorylation) converts PTEN to the “open-closed” form. Electrostatic interactions, mediated by the PBM, further convert PTEN to the “open-open” form wherein it binds to the membrane and acts as a lipid phosphatase converting PIP3 to PIP2, thereby, abrogating signaling via the PI3K/Akt/mTOR pathways. Subsequent to membrane binding, several E3 ubiquitin ligases polyubiquitinate PTEN marking it for proteasomal degradation. Phosphorylation, by inducing the intramolecular interaction, masks the ubiquitination sites thereby increasing the half-life of the PTEN protein within the cell. Therefore, phosphorylation negatively regulates PTEN function but positively regulates its stability. (b) PTEN IDR engages in PPIs of the disorder:order type (D-O type). As revealed in the present study, this occurs via the use of a MoRF or SLiM region. Therefore, designing a peptidomimetic drug molecule that competes with the PTEN MoRF/SLiM binding to the ordered protein will abrogate PTEN binding, therefore PTEN function. PTEN IDR is highly accessible to multiple kinases that phosphorylate and modulate PTEN function, mainly its inhibition via intra-molecular interactions. PTEN inhibition hyper-activates the PI3K/AKT/mTOR pathway, which increase the oncogenic potential of the cell and drives cancer growth. Therefore, targeting the PTEN C-tail IDR with small molecules that bind and sterically hinder PTEN phosphorylation and/or intra-molecular interactions will be an ideally adjunctive therapy to multiple inhibitor therapy targeting of the PI3/AKT/mTOR pathway.

It was recently shown that the phosphorylation events of PTEN occur in two independent cascades of ordered events, with the S380–S385 cluster being modified prior to the S361–S70 cluster52. Even within the two clusters, the phosphorylation events follow a specific pattern with a distributive kinetic mechanism. Not surprisingly, distributive kinetics is energetically favorable on protein domains that are highly disordered with multiple ensembles of flexible structures52. Thus the dynamic nature of these phosphorylation events is contingent to the inherent flexibility in the PTEN structure driven by intrinsically disordered C-tail crucial for PTEN stability and localization within the cell (Figure 8a).

Targeting intrinsic disorder in PTEN and its interactome

Drug targeting to critical protein regions can mitigate aberrant cellular processes driving oncogenesis57. However, despite numerous clinical trials with molecularly targeted therapies, failure rates for cancer treatments remain high. Conventional therapies targeting pathway-specific kinases suffer from “off-target effects” and often fail due to the emergence of compensatory and alternative pathways58. As a novel approach, facile drug targeting to IDRs within critical signaling hub proteins is highly plausible59, 60, 61. Moreover, as IDRs undergo extensive PTMs53 and engage in PPIs4, 34, 36, the multitude of resulting protein interactions (normal and aberrant) can be targeted concomitantly with a cocktail of distinct inhibitors, which dampens oncogenic signaling60.

Indeed, targeting PPIs is a more selective treatment strategy over conventional enzyme inhibitors60. However, disruption of multiple ordered interfaces within PPIs by small molecule inhibitors remains challenging62. The advantage of targeting IDPs engaged in PPIs is that, unlike ordered proteins, they engage in PPIs via MoRFs or ELMs, which are small peptide regions that bind with low affinity and thus are susceptible to disruption by small molecule inhibitors59. Consistent with this notion, small molecules disrupted highly disordered complexes of p53-Mdm2 and c-Myc-Max interactions by inducing order upon binding60, 63. Likewise, targeting the PTEN C-tail IDR may reduce its intra- and inter-molecular interactions and limit accessibility to enzymes mediating PTMs (Figure 8b), providing a means to increase PTEN activity. Our analysis shows that since the C-tail IDR is rich in conserved MoRFs/SLiMS, targeting these regions will prove to be a rational therapeutic modality for a large number of cancers that show compromised PTEN activity or hyperactivation of the oncogenic PI3K/AKT/mTOR pathway9, 10, 11. Since reductions in the levels and activity of PTEN are sufficient to drive oncogenesis11, 14, 15, increasing PTEN activity is an ideal therapy for cancers associated with hyperactive PI3K-signaling.

Discussion

Recent studies on genome- and proteome-wide molecular alterations in diseases indicate that pathological conditions are caused by perturbations in complex, highly interconnected biological networks64. Thus, current reductionist approach of studying structure-function relationship in diseases has limited our abilities to discover effective targeted therapeutics. In an attempt to overcome these limitations, in the current study, we have undertaken a novel approach to drug discovery that exploits systems and network biology at the structural, topological and functional level. Using PTEN, a tumor suppressor, we have applied computational and systems biology approaches and integrated extensive data-mining and biochemical properties of IDP interactions to reach a finer understanding of PTEN function. These results have identified PTEN C-tail IDR and several hub proteins in PTEN-driven molecular network implicated in human diseases as therapeutic targets, enhancing the repertoire of clinically relevant biological targets for pharmacotherapy.

Our derivation and analysis of PTEN primary and secondary interactome indicates that altered levels or interactions of IDPs perturb myriad cellular signaling pathways, leading to pathological conditions including cancer. IDPs have the propensity to aggregate and cause cellular toxicity65. Therefore, PTEN as an IDP has evolved a mechanism, wherein, the level of active PTEN, its cellular localization and PTEN-PPIs are regulated via phosphorylation of the C-tail IDR. Furthermore, evolutionarily conserved ELMs and MoRFs that we have identified within the C-tail IDR may play a critical role in orchestrating the formation and function of the PTEN interactome.

Increase in complexity of PPIs is either directed by the number and type of proteins or by increasing the number of interactions required to execute cellular functions66. To delineate how PTEN executes myriad functions, we first derived the PTEN primary interactome. We found 40 proteins to directly interact on the PTEN molecule, out of which 25 were associated with the C-tail IDR, consistent with the concept that disorderliness within PTEN executes its myriad functions. To enhance our understanding of PTEN functions in the context of multiple distinct pathways at the systems-level, we delineated functional networks operating within the primary interactome. Our findings showed a high degree of cross-talk between edges, implying that shared regulatory modules, comprised of multiple signaling cascades, operate via PTEN-mediated interaction networks. When these networks are altered, diseases ensue with extreme functional penalties. We also found that the edge proteins were themselves highly disordered indicating that disorderliness within the PTEN primary interactome confers functional versatility. Supporting this notion, 13 proteins that were functionally classified as cancer-related were also highly disordered forming a pliable “PTEN-Cancer Interactome”. Thus, PTEN lesions influence the flexibility of IDP-IDP interactions modulating diverse functions, likely causing cancer.

Owing to the inherent ability of PPIs to be flexible while being complex, specific cellular functions are readily fine-tuned as per the biological demands. Emerging evidence suggests that certain features on the IDRs are recognized as a way of conferring plasticity to protein interaction networks. Consistent with this concept, our data suggest that PTEN, a hub protein containing an IDR, likely utilizes MoRFs and ELMs, gets differentially modified via PTMs, acquiring complementary structures to engage and modulate PPI activity by facilitating adaptive binding to multiple protein partners in many cellular pathways. Thus, our present work provide a novel entrée in targeting intrinsic disorder in PTEN and its interactome to dampen the aberrant PI3K-signaling that drives many cancers. First, imparting order to the PTEN structure may help dampen multiple oncogenic signaling pathways mediated via the 16 hub proteins identified in the present study, by limiting their affinity for PPIs. Second, targeting intrinsic disorder in PTEN and its interactome can become an adjunctive or alternative approach to the use of various kinase inhibitors, which are toxic and have many off-target effects when used to mitigate the aberrant hyperactivation of PI3K/AKT/mTOR oncogenic signaling pathway. Taken together, the present findings provide a novel entrée to design strategies for drug discovery and may become a logical intervention in the pharmacotherapy of cancer and other PTEN-associated disease treatment modalities.

Read Full Post »

New methods for Study of Cellular Replication, Growth, and Regulation

Writer and Curator: Larry H Bernstein, MD, FCAP

Introduction:

This article is the first in a series on genomics, epigenomics and cancer.  It is necessary here to introduce the large advancement in the technological advances that have followed the Human Genome Project and its thrust into the domain of genome expression.  While the genome is the code that is passed on from generation to generation in a family chain, and while there now is an ability to trace genes that have existed and are traceable by evolutionary history to early eukaryotic species, that portion of the cell line is defining and only modified in time.  It is only a beginning in the unraveling of the question – What is life?

This article has the following structure:

1.1.1       Gene Amplification

1.1.2       Protein-binding Receptors

1.1.3 Advanced Proteomic Technologies for Cancer Biomarker Discoveries

1.1.3.1 State of the art technologies

1.1.3.1.1 2D difference gel electrophoresis (2DIGE)

1.1.3.1.2 MALDI imaging technology (see also 1.1.5)

1.1.3.1.3 Electron Transfer Dissociation

1.1.3.1.4 Reverse-phase Protein Array (RPA)

1.1.3.2 Principles of Protein Microarrays

1.1.3.3 Disposable reagentless electrochemical immunosensor array based on a polymer/sol/gel membrane for simultaneous measurement of several tumor markers

1.1.4 p16INK4a Expression Correlates with Degree of Cervical Neoplasia: A Comparison with Ki-67 Expression and Detection of High-Risk HPV Types

1.1.5 Quantitative real-time detection of magnetic nanoparticles by their nonlinear magnetization

1.1.6 Proteomics and biomarkers

1.1.6.1 Identification by proteomic analysis of calreticulin as a marker for bladder cancer and evaluation of the diagnostic accuracy of its detection in urine

1.1.6.2 Multiplexed proteomic analysis of oxidation and concentrations of CSF proteins in Alzheimer’s disease

1.1.6.3 The Brain Injury Biomarker VLP-1 Is Increased in the Cerebrospinal Fluid of Alzheimer Disease Patients

1.1.6.4 Determination of non-α1-antichymotrypsin-complexed PSA as an indirect measurement of free PSA: analytical performance and diagnostic accuracy

1.1.6.5 Ultrasensitive densitometry detection of cytokines with nanoparticle-modified aptamers

1.1.6.6 Protein profiling of microdissected pancreas carcinoma and identification of HSP27 as a potential serum marker

1.1.7 Mass Spectrometry Methods

1.1.7.1 LC-MS/MS quantification of Zn-α2 glycoprotein: A potential serum biomarker for prostate cancer

1.1.7.2 A novel, high-throughput workflow for discovery and identification of serum carrier protein-bound peptide biomarker candidates in ovarian cancer samples

1.1.7.3 Mass Spectrometry-based hepcidin measurements in serum and urine: analytical aspects and clinical implications

1.1.7.4 Current state and future directions of neurochemical biomarkers for Alzheimer’s disease

1.1.7.5 Use of SELDI-TOF mass spectrometry for identification of new biomarkers: potential and limitations

1.1.1 Gene Amplification

An increase in the number of copies of a gene. There may also be an increase in the RNA and protein made from that gene. Gene amplification is common in cancer cells, and some amplified genes may cause cancer cells to grow or become resistant to anticancer drugs. Genes may also be amplified in the laboratory for research purposes.

http://www.cancer.gov/dictionary?cdrid=650175

Actinin-4 gene Amplification in Ovarian Cancer: A Candidate Oncogene Associated with Poor Patient Prognosis and Tumor Chemoresistance

Yamamoto S, Tsuda H, Kazufumi H, Onozato K, …, Matsubar O

Medscape 6/18/2009

http://medscape.com/viewarticle/704105

Actinin-4, an isoform of non-muscular α-actinin, enhances cell motility by bundling the actin cytoskeleton. We previously reported a prognostic implication of high histochemical expression of actinin-4 protein in ovarian cancers.  Chromosomal gain or amplification of the 19q 12-q13 region has been reported in ovarian cancer. We hypothesized that the actinin-4 (ACTN4) gene might be a target of the 19q 12-q13 amplicon and play an essential role in ovarian cancer progression. In total, we investigated 136 advanced-stage ovarian cancers the copy number of the ACTN4 gene on chromosome 19q3, and used fluorescence in situ hybridization to determine the correlation of the ACTN4 copy number with actinin-4 protein immunoreactivity and major clinicopathological factors. We detected a higher copy number ( > 4) of  of the ACTN4 gene in 29 (21%) cases and it was associated with the intensity of the actinin-4 immunoreactivity (p < 0.0001), a high histological tumor grade (p < 0.030), a clear-cell adenocarcinoma histology (p = 0.012), resistancxe to first- line chemotherapies (p = 0.028), and poor patient outcome (p=0.0011). Uni-
variate analyses using the Cox regression model showed that a higher ACTN4 gene copy numberwas predicted patient outcome more accurately than high actinin-4 immunoreactivity (relative risk: 2.48 vs 1.55). Multivariate analysis indicated that a higher copy number of the ACTN4 gene may be a targetof the 19q amplicon, acting as a candidate oncogene, and serve as a predictor of poor outcome and tumor chemoresistance in patients with advanced-stage ovarian cancers (from Modern Pathology).

1.1.2       Protein-binding Receptors

Customizing the Targeting of IGF-1 Receptor

Renato Baserga
Medscape 5/6/2009. From Future Oncology
http://medscape.com/viewarticle/589011

The type 1 IGF receptor (IGF—IR) is activated by two ligands, IGF-1 and IGF-2, and by insulin at supraphysiological concentrations. It plays a significant role in the growth of normal and abnormal cells, and antibodies against the IGF-IR are now in clinical trials. Targeting of the IGF-IR in cancer cells (by antibodies or other means) can be improved by the appropriate selection of responsive tumors.

The prominence of IGF-IR has increased considerably in the past few years, progressing from a redundant insulin receptor to one that is important in cell and body growth, cell survival and malignant transformation. The IGF-IR can send either a mitogenic or a differentiation signal depending on substrate availability. In many cell types (fibroblasts, epithelial cells, etc.) the IGF-IR sends an unambiguous mitogenic, antiapoptotic signal. In other cell types, such as myeloid cells, neuronal cells and others, activation of IGF-IR induces differentiation. When cells do not express or express very low levels of IRS-1, a substrate of both the IGF_IR and the insulin receptor (InR), IGF-1 induces differentiation. This is the case with 32D myeloid precursor cells that do’t express IRS-1 and are induced to differentiate by IGF-1. Ectopic expression of IRS-1 in 32D cells abrogates differentiation; the cells become transformed and even form tumors in mice. IRS-1 activates the P13K pathway, which is the main mitogenic pathway originating from the IGF-IR. However, the shc-Ras-ERKs pathway also plays a role in the mitogenic signal of the IGF-IR, with the two converging at GSK3-β. The demonstration that knockout mouse embryo cells for the IGF-IR receptor were refractory to transformation by viruses, oncogenes and overexpressed growth factor receptors clearly demonstrated the major role played by the IGF-IR in cellular transformation.

Methods for Targeting the IGF-1 Receptor

·        The original methods for targeting the IGF-1 receptor in experimental animals were antisense strategies and dominant-negative mutants of the receptor. They are obsolete.
·        Several antibodies to the IGF-IR are effective in inhibiting tumor growth in vitro and in mice. They are now in Phase I clinical trials.
·        Other investigators have identified specific inhibitors of the IGF-1 receptor tyrosine kinase activity. (cyclolignans)
·        To induce apoptosis, it is probably necessary to downregulate the receptor. Without downregulation, there is inhibition of growth, but no apoptosis.
·        Targeting the ligands gives good results in mice, but fails in humans. Adult mice express only IGF-1, but humans keep synthesizing both IGF-1 and IGF-2 in adult life.

Summary of IRS-1

·        Insulin receptor substrate (IRS-1) is a multitask protein that interacts with many other proteins.·        IRS-1 is mitogenic, inhibits differentiation, protects from apoptosis and regulates cell (and body size).·        IRS-1 is essential to mitogenic IGF-IR signaling.

·        IRS-1 is activated by the EGF receptor, cMet and the Ewing’s sarcoma oncogene.

·        IRS-1 plays a significant role in transformation by T antigen and v-src.

·        Doenregulation of IRS-1 causes growth arrest and differentiation.

·        Nuclear IRS-1 acts as a transcriptional cofactor for both RNA pol 1 and 2-directed genes.

·        IRS-1 effects on cells can be dissociated from the effects of IGF-IR, IRS-2 and insulin receptor.

·        IRS-1 is a biomarker of sensitivity of cancer cells to IGF-IR targeting.

·        Hypothesis: IRS-1 is an antitumor suppressor, similar to anti-p53 protein.

 

The ability of IRS-1 to cause cell transformation, and the tendency to lose the transformed phenotype in cells in which IRS-1 is low or has been downregulated, suggests that the importance of the IGF-IR in cancer may be dependent on IRS-1 as much as on the receptor itself. When IRS-1 is activated directly, for instance by v-src, the IGF-IR is no longer a requiremeny for malignant transformation.  Metastases are very susceptible to IGF-IR therapy.

IGF-IR Targeting Summary

  • In the absence of IRS-1, the IGF1R sends a differentiation signal, which becomes mitogenic with IRS1 expression, and targeting IGF1R in cells that do not express IRS-1 may be counterproductive.
  • In colon cancer liver metastases the cancer cells of awash in IGF-1.
  • In Ewing’s sarcoma, a tumor sensitive to IGF1r targeting in clinical trials, there is an autocrine mechanism that may make the cancer cells IGF-1 dependent, but an oncogene/IRS-1 interaction may also make these cells incapable of switching to other growth factors.
  • IGF-1R sends a potent anti-apoptotic signal, independent of its mitogenicity. This property could be exploited to increase chemo- or radio- toxicity.
  • IGF-1R expression is required for anchorage independence.

1.1.3 Advanced Proteomic Technologies for Cancer Biomarker Discoveries

1.1.3.1 State of the art technologies

Wong SCC, Chan CML, Ma BBY,…,Chan ATC.

Medscape 6/10/2009. From Expert Review of Proteomics.
http://medscape.com/viewarticle/703566

Proteomic technologies have experienced major improvements in recent years. Such advances have facilitated the discovery of potential tumor markers with improved sensitivities and specificities for the diagnosis, prognosis and treatment monitoring of cancer patients. The topic of discussion is four state of the art technologies: 2D difference gel electrophoresis, MALDI imaging mass spectrometry, electron transfer dissociation mass spectrometry and reverse-phase protein array.  These have contributed to large advances in proteomic technologies from 1997-2008.

1.1.3.1.1 2D difference gel electrophoresis (2DIGE)

The 2D DIGE method is an improved 2GE technique. Two different protein samples (e.g., control and disease) and, optionally, one reference sample (e.g., control and disease together) are labeled with one of three different fluorophore: cyanine (cy)2, 3 or 5. These fluorophores have the same charge, similar molecular weight and distinct fluorescent properties, allowing their discrimination during scanning using appropriate optical filters.Two types of cyanine dyes are available: CyDyeTM  DIGE Fluor minimal dyse and CyDye DIGE Fluor saturation dye (GE Healthcare, Uppsala, Sweden).The minimal dye labelks a small percentage of lysine residues with minimal change in the electrophoretic mobility pattern of the protein, whereas the saturation dye labels all available cysteine residues and is, therefore, more sensitive, but causes EP mobility shift of labelled proteins.  Different types of protein sample may be used.Labeled sample pairs are mixed and  run in a single gel.The same pooled reference sample is used for all gels within an experiment.The gel is scanned at three wavelengths for Cy2 (488 nm), Cy3 (532 nm) and Cy5 (633 nm), and a gel image for each of the samples is obtained.Variation between the gels is minimized. Correct matching of protein spots is improved.Normalization and quantitation of the spots is most accurate.The linear dynamic range is four orders of magnitude and it is fully compatible for quantitation with MS. The technique is mainly used for the discovery of novel biomarkers.

1.1.3.1.2 MALDI imaging technology (see also 1.1.5)

MALDI Imaging Mass Spectrometry gives a deeper understanding of biochemical processes in the tumor cells and tissues. Immunohistochemistry is limitated, but the MALDI technique is high-throughput.MALDI IMS was developed to allow researchers to analyze proteomic expression profiles directly from patient tissue sections.The tissue is first mounted, then MALDI matrix is applied onto the tissue sample and MALDI MS is applied to obtain mass spectra from predefined locations across the tissue section.All acquired spectra are then compiled into a composite 2D map for the tissue sample.The expression profiles of numerous proteins can be obtained without the need for antibodies. It is also possible to correlate the mapping with tissue histology.

Post-translational modifications have a role in structure and function of proteins: protein folding, protein localization, regulation of activity and mediation of protein-protein interaction. Two common forms of PTM have been implicated in cancer neoplasia: phosphorylation and glycosylation.  Phosphoproteomic studies led to identification of novel tyrosine kinase substrates in breast cancer, and to discovery of novel therapeutic targets for brain cancer, and to increased understanding of signaling pathways in lung cancer.  The identification of novel therapeutic targets for ovarian cancer resulted from identification of abnormally glycosylated proteins – mucins.

1.1.3.1.3 Electron Transfer Dissociation

Electron Transfer Dissociation is a recently developed technique for the analysis of peptides by MS, utilizing radiofrequency quadrupole ion traps such as 2D linear IT, spherical IT and OrbitrapTM (Thermo Fisher,MA).Peptides are fragmented by transfer of electrons from anions to induce cleavage of CαN bonds along the peptide backbone, producing c- and z-type ions. In contrast to CID, ETD preserves the localization of labile PTM and provides peptide-sequence information, but it fails to fragment peptide bonds adjacent to proline.CID and ETD should be used to complement each other. An advantage of the TED is that in the analysis of phosphopeptides a near complete series of c- and z-ions is observed without the loss of phosphoric acid. The method has provided for proteomic researchers a tool for comprehensive analysis of peptides and their PTMs.

1.1.3.1.4 Reverse-phase Protein Array (RPA)

Then there is the Reverse-phase Protein array, which has the advantage that it identifies changes associated with the development of cancer. The identification of such proteins can be used as biomarkers for diagnosis, prognosis, treatment decisions and therapeutic monitoring. Still, patient samples pose a challenge:

  • Proteomic patterns differ among cell types;
  • Protein expression changes dynamically over time;
  • Proteins have a broad dynamic range of expression levels spanning several orders of magnitude;
  • Proteins can be present in multiple forms, such as polymorphysms and splice variants;
  • Traditional proteomic methods, such as, @DE, require larger amounts of protein than those obtained from biopsy samples;
  • Many existing proteomic technologies cannot ber used to study protein-protein interactions.

The method of RPA is simple and requires the spotting of patient samples in an array format onto a nitrocellulose support.Each array is incubated with a particular antibody, and signal intensity is proportional to the amount of analyte. Signal detection is by fluorescence, chemiluminescence or colorimetric methods.  The results are qwuantified by scanning and analyzed by softwares such as P-SCAN and ProteinScan.

Main advantages of RPA are:

  • Various types of biological samples;
  • Investigation of PTMs;
  • Protein-protein interactions;
  • Labeling of samples with fluorescent dyes or mass tags;
  • Quantitation within the linear range of detection;
  • Direct measurement of target proteins by spotting reference standards.

Key Issues

  • 2DE couple with MS has been a mainstay for discovery of novel biomarkewrs;
  • 2D DIGE has improved quantification accuracy;
  • MALDI imaging MS allows detedtion and comparison with histopathology;
  • ETD-MS has opened up the possibility of identifying the structure and localization of PTM and the peptide/protein.
  • RPA is a powerful tool for high-throughput validation across hundreds of samples.

1.1.3.2  Principles of Protein Microarrays


Preface, Foreward and Chapter 1: In Protein Microarrays, Ed. Mark Schena
Mark Schena, Joseph L. Hackett and Emanuel F. Petricoin
Jones and Bartlett Publ. 2002, ON, CA

What is true inside the cell cannot always be recapitulated outside the cell.  The year is 1986 and the second year of graduate school of UCSF. With cloned receptor in hand (just isolated by Roger Miesfeld), I set out to test whether glucocorticoid receptor function could be recapitulated in yeast cells. This might allow us to test evolutionary nconservation in eukaryotes.  Remarkably, the rat receptor sprsang to life on the first attempt, producing a diagnostic blue colot change in yeast cells expressing a β-galactosidase fusion and a broad smile on the face of a young scientist. Receptor experiments in yeast necessarily required grinding up yeast cells, fractionating the proteins by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, transferring the proteins onto nitrocellulose, probing the immobilized proteins with a monoclonal antibody, and examining the filter to confirm the presence of the expressed rat protein.

Protein-ntibody interactions on protein chips are determined by complex associations between epitopes on the target protein and the antigen-binding site on the detection molecule. Individual protein-ligand pairs can possess widely different affinities.  Proteomic microarrays require capture and detection molecules with high affinities and low dissociation rates . For these and other reasons protein chips are more challenging than DNA chips. Antibodies, aptamers, recombinant proteins, peptides, phage, evem small molecular weight chemicals/drugs can be used as a bait molecule and/or detection reagent. The molecule may be an antibody or the cellular lysate itself, which are immobilized onto the substratum and act as a bait molecule.  Each spot contains one type of immobilized antibody or bait protein. The first problem is the vast range of concentrations to be detected (up to a factor of 1010 .  Adequate sensitivity must be achieved (at least femtomolar range), and the amplification chemistry must be tolerant to the large dynamic range of the analytes.

Microarrays are analytical devices that possess four distinct characteristics:

  1. Microscopic target elements or spot;
  2. Planar substrates;
  3. Rows and columns of elements; and
  4. Specific binding between microarray target elements on the substrate and probe molecules in solution.

The scope of microarray research includes:

  1. Gene expression
  2. Signal transduction
  3. Genome mismatch scanning
  4. Inflammation
  5. Cancer
  6. Cell cycle
  7. DNA replication
  8. Oxidative stress
  9. Hormone action
  10. Apoptosis
  11. Neurodegenerative disease
  12. Infectious disease
  13. Cytoskeleton, and
  14. Protein trafficking.

The proliferation of microarrays beyond the realm of DNA and gene expression was inevitable, and the idea of making and using microarrays of proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, and small molecules was an obvious extension of the original DNA microarray format. This exciting technology area provides the foundation for the book, Protein Microarrays.  Proteins, not mRNAs are the true functional components of cells. They mediate gene regulation, enzyme catalysis, cellular metabolism, DNA replication, and cell division and confer cell shape and mobility and the capacity to communicate within and between cells. a hypothetical 400 amino acid protein would have a molecular weight of 54 kDa.
Many cellular proteins fall in the molecular weight range of 10-125 kDa, and nearly every human protein weighs < 500 kDa.

The 20 amino acids are chemically diverse and correspondingly confer to the proteins their structural and functional diversity and impart their catalytic specificity and binding properties. The amino acids are bound in the protein by the amino acid side chains of the polypeptide. The nh-CO peptide unit has a partial double-bond character due to the amide bond, and its conformations are restricted by that structure. In addition, proteins have secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure. Hydrophobic amino acids are in the interior, and hydrophilic amino acid residues are on the exterior. The hydrophilic exterior allows for water solubility.

The following are microarray assay formats used in expression profiling:

  1. Protein expression
  2. Serum-based diagnostics
  3. Protein-protein binding
  4. Drug-target binding
  5. Receptor-epitope binding.

1.1.3.3  Disposable reagentless electrochemical immunosensor array based on a polymer/sol/gel membrane for simultaneous measurement of several tumor markers

Wu J, Yan F, Zhang X, Yan Y, Tang J, Ju H.
Clin Chem 2008; 54(9):1481-1489.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2007.102350

Background: A reagentless sensor array for simultaneous multianalyte testing (SMAT) may enable accurate diagnosis and be applicable for point-of-care testing. We developed a disposable reagentless immunosensor array for simple immunoassay of panels of tumor markers. Methods: We carried out SMAT with a direct capture format, in which colloidal gold nanoparticles with bound horseradish peroxidase (HRP)-labeled antibodies were immobilized on screen-printed carbon electrodes with biopolymer/sol-gel to trap their corresponding antigens from sample solution. Upon formation of immunocomplex, the direct electrochemical signal of the HRP decreased owing to increasing spatial blocking, and the analytes could be simultaneously determined by monitoring the signal changes.
Results: The proposed reagentless immunosensor array allowed simultaneous detection of carcinoma antigen 153, carcinoma antigen 125, carbohydrate antigen 199, and carcinoembryonic antigen in clinical serum samples in the ranges of 0.4–140 kU/L, 0.5–330 kU/L, 0.8–190 kU/L, and 0.1–44 μg/L, respectively, with detection limits of 0.2 kU/L, 0.5 kU/L, 0.3 kU/L, and 0.1 μg/L corresponding to the signals 3 SD above the mean of a zero standard. The interassay imprecision of the arrays was <9.5%, and they were stable for 35 days. The positivity detection rate of panels of tumor markers was >95.5% for 95 cases of cancer-positive sera. Conclusions: The immunosensor array provides a SMAT with short analytical time, small sampling volume, no need for substrate, and, no between-electrode cross-talk. This method not only proved the capability of the array in point-of-care testing, but also allowed simultaneous testing of several tumor markers.

Cancer is one of the leading causes of mortality, and early clinical diagnosis is crucial for successful treatment of the disease. Many immunosensors and immunoassay methods have been developed for the determination of a single tumor marker, whose concentration in human serum is associated with the stages of tumors (1)(2)(3)(4). Because many cancers express 1 marker [e.g., breast cancer is associated with carcinoma antigens 153 and 125 (CA 153 and CA 125)1 and carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA)], and concentrations of several tumor markers often increase in the serum of a patient, accurate simultaneous multianalyte test (SMAT) of combinations of tumor markers may improve the diagnosis of certain types of tumor (5)(6)(7)(8).

SMAT may offer a shorter analytical time, higher sample throughput, lower sampling volume, and lower cost per assay compared with traditional single-analyte tests (9)(10). Thus, multilabel assays and spatially resolved assay systems have been developed as the main modes to perform SMAT (11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16)(17)(18)(19)(20)(21)(22)(23)(24)(25). Application of the multilabel assays has been limited by difficulty in accurate quantification due to different optimal assay conditions and the signal overlap of different labels (11)(12)(13). Although a set of substrate zone-resolved techniques have been proposed to overcome these drawbacks (14)(15), the restriction in the number of available labels still greatly limits their application.

Spatially resolved assays with a single label seem well suited for performing SMAT, and optical SMAT, relying on fluorescence emission and optical reflectance, has been developed into mature technology. Optical SMAT, however, often needs an expensive array detector, such as a charge-coupled device camera (16)(17). Electrochemical array, which is distinguished by its convenient miniaturization for high-throughput systems, low assay cost, and absence of sophisticated and expensive array detectors, shows promising application in cancer screening (18)(19). Electrochemical cross-talk caused by diffusion of the detectable enzymatic products is the main problem in the fabrication of electrochemical array. To solve this problem, many approaches have been followed. One approach, for example, is to ensure that the distance between adjacent electrodes is larger than the diffusion distance of enzymatic product (20)(21)(22)(23), but such an approach conflicts with the goal of miniaturization. Another simple method to completely avoid the electrochemical cross-talk can be achieved by immobilizing the electron-transfer mediator on an individual immunosensor to shuttle electrons (24)(25), but this approach requires the addition of hydrogen peroxide, leading to limited practical application.

A reagentless electrochemical immunosensor is an attractive strategy (26). In our previous work, we prepared several reagentless immunosensors by using sol-gel matrix to immobilize immunoreagents and detected the direct electron transfer of labeled enzyme, horseradish peroxidase (HRP) (27)(28)(29)(30)(31). To achieve SMAT, this work further fabricated a reagentless immunosensor array by individually embedding 4 kinds of HRP-labeled antibody-modified gold nanoparticles in a newly designed biopolymer/sol-gel matrix formed on screen-printed carbon electrodes (SPCEs), where the HRP-Ab-Au nanoparticles were limited in the holes of the biopolymer/sol-gel film. Chitosan, a biopolymer with excellent film-forming ability, biocompatibility, nontoxicity, and high mechanical strength, acted as the adhesion frame in the synthesis of the sol-gel and made the electrical communication between redox sites of the enzyme and sensing surface easier due to the cooperative effort of chitosan and sol-gel matrix. The presence of gold nanoparticles accelerated the electron transfer between immobilized HRP and the electrode and increased the hole size for improving the permeability of the sol-gel matrix so that the antigens in solution could easily penetrate into the sol-gel film for immunoreaction. Upon formation of immunocomplexes, the electrochemical responses decreased due to increasing spatial blocking, leading to the reagentless immunosensing to corresponding antigens without cross-talk. The proposed electrochemical immunosensor array had high analyte throughput, showed acceptable comparability to conventional methods for measuring several tumor markers, could be fabricated with mass production techniques, and thus provided the potential for application in point-of-care testing (POCT).

Schematic diagrams of immunosensors array and multianalyte electrochemical immunoassay system.

Schematic diagrams of immunosensors array and multianalyte electrochemical immunoassay system.

Figure 1.

Schematic diagrams of immunosensors array and multianalyte electrochemical immunoassay system.

(a), Nylon sheet, (b), silver ink, (c), graphite auxiliary electrode, (d), Ag/AgCl reference electrode, (e), graphite working electrode, (f), insulating dielectric.

The DPV curves of both the bare and biopolymer/sol-gel modified SPCEs in 0.2 mol/L PBS, pH 6.9, did not show any detectable signal in the applied potential window (Fig. 3⇓ ). After we embedded 0.17 μL of 50 mg/L HRP-anti-CA 153 in the biopolymer/sol-gel, the modified SPCEs displayed a sensitive peak around −540 mV (vs Ag/AgCl) (curve d, Fig. 3⇓ ), which was close to the reduction peak potential of HRP/biopolymer/sol-gel prepared with 0.17 μL of 2.0 mg/L HRP (curve c, Fig. 3⇓ ), indicating the direct electron transfer between electrode and the labeled HRP with regard to Fe(III)-Fe(II) conversion. The small difference of peak potentials between HRP-anti-CA 153 and HRP resulted from the change of microenvironment around HRP molecules because of the presence of antibody. In the presence of gold nanoparticles in the biopolymer/sol-gel, the reduction peak of the equal amount of HRP-antibody conjugate increased 2.1-fold (curve e, Fig. 3⇓ ). The cyclic voltammetric experiments at different gold electrodes showed the same appearance, and upon incorporation of gold nanoparticles into the biopolymer/sol-gel at SPCEs, the reduction peak current at the same scan rate increased 1.98-fold (see Supplemental Fig. 1 in the Data Supplement that accompanies the online version of this article at  http://www.clinchem.org/content/vol54/issue9). Thus the Au nanoparticles could accelerate the direct electrochemistry of HRP to further amplify the detectable signal. This peak was also 2.7 times higher than that of HRP-anti-CA 153-Au nanoparticles/sol-gel modified SPCE (curve f, Fig. 3⇓ ), indicating the positive effects of chitosan with good biocompatibility and hydrophilicity (35), which enhanced water uptake and swelling of the film and led to better permeability of the film for the transfer of counter ions to neutralize the charge change during the redox process and a favorable microenvironment for electron hopping or electron self-exchange between immobilized HRP molecules (36). Thus electron transfer kinetics and direct electrochemical signal increased. After the modified SPCE was incubated with CA 153, the direct electrochemical signal decreased markedly due to the increased barrier that resulted from the formation of immunocomplex (curve g, Fig. 3⇓ ), leading to a reagentless immunosensing method for antigen detection.

DPVs of bare SPCE

DPVs of bare SPCE

DPVs of bare SPCE (a), biopolymer/sol-gel (b), HRP/biopolymer/sol-gel (c), HRP-anti-CA 153/biopolymer/sol-gel (d), HRP-anti-CA 153-Au nanoparticles/biopolymer/sol-gel (e), HRP-anti-CA 153-Au nanoparticles/sol-gel modified SPCE in pH 6.9 PBS (f), and panel e in pH 6.9 PBS after incubation in 20 μL of 50 kU/L CA 153 at room temperature for 40 min (g).

The formation of immunocomplex depended on the incubation temperature and time. For the sake of convenient manipulation, the incubation step was performed with 20 μL antigen solution or the mixture of antigens for SMAT at room temperature, after which the DPV response of the labeled HRP decreased with increasing incubation time and reached a relatively stable value at 30–40 min (Fig. 4A⇓ ), indicating saturated formation of immunocomplex in the membrane. Thus, 40 min was chosen as the optimal incubation time for SMAT.

Dependences of DPV responses of immunosensors on incubation time

Dependences of DPV responses of immunosensors on incubation time

Dependences of DPV responses of immunosensors on incubation time (A) and pH of detection solution (B) for CA 153, CA 125, CA 199, and CEA.

Table 1.

Positivity detection rates of clinical sera.

Sample n Associated tumor markers Positive cases, n Positivity detection rate, %
Colorectal or gastric cancer 53 CA 199, CEA 531 100
Epithelial ovarian cancer 22 CA 125, CA 199, CEA 211 95.5
Breast cancer 8 CA 153, CA 125, CEA 81 100
Lung cancer 12 CA 199, CEA 121 100
Normal serum 20 CA 153, CA 125, CA 199, CEA 22 10

In comparison with previous reports (24)(25), this array avoids the addition of mediator to shuttle electrons, and thus can exclude the electrochemical cross-talk at the electrode dimensions used here. Furthermore, the measurement of the direct electrochemical signal of HRP labeled to immunoreagents also avoids the need for other reagents in the detection process. Although the measurements show acceptable results, adding sulfite in the detection solution is not the best solution for the removal of oxygen. Thus, a system has been developed for POCT to exclude oxygen from the detection solution (see Supplemental Fig. 3 in the online Data Supplement).

1.1.3.4  p16INK4a Expression Correlates with Degree of Cervical Neoplasia: A Comparison with Ki-67 Expression and Detection of High-Risk HPV Types

S Nicholas Agoff, Patricia Lin, Janice Morihara, Constance Mao, Nancy B Kiviat and Laura A Koutsky
Mod Pathol 2003;16(7):665–673

Although recent studies have suggested that p16INK4a may be a useful surrogate biomarker of cervical neoplasia, Ki-67 and human papillomavirus testing have also been shown to be useful in detecting neoplasia. To help delineate the utility of p16INK4a, biopsy samples (n = 569: negative, 133; reactive, 75; atypical, 39; low grade, 76; moderate, 80; and severe intraepithelial neoplasia, 113; also, squamous cell carcinoma, 46; adenocarcinoma, 7) were analyzed by immunohistochemistry for expression of p16INK4a and Ki-67 (n = 432), as well as by in situhybridization for human papillomavirus Type 16 (n = 219). Testing for high-risk human papillomavirus types by polymerase chain reaction and HybridCapture2 was performed on concurrent cervical swab specimens. Recuts of the original blocks were reexamined (n = 198). Endometrial biopsies (n = 10) were also analyzed for p16INK4a expression. Degree of p16INK4a and Ki-67 expression correlated with degree of cervical neoplasia (P < .001) and with presence of high-risk human papillomavirus types (P < .001). There was no relationship between p16INK4a overexpression and inflammation or hormonal status. Ki-67 expression correlated with inflammation (P = 0.003) and was expressed in more reactive and atypical lesions than p16INK4a (P = 0.008). Probes for human papillomavirus 16 stained 54% of cervical neoplastic lesions; the degree of staining correlated significantly with degree of neoplasia (P < .001) and p16INK4astaining (P < .001). Interobserver reproducibility was substantial for p16INK4a and Ki-67 interpretation (weighted kappa: 0.74 and 0.70, respectively). Expression of p16INK4a was observed in all endometrial biopsies. Compared with Ki-67 expression and detection of high-risk human papillomavirus, p16INK4a was less likely to be positive in samples from women with negative, reactive, and atypical biopsies. Although expression of p16INK4ain endometrial epithelium may be problematic in terms of screening, the potential of p16INK4a as a screening test warrants investigation.

The screening of women by Pap smear has led to a remarkable decline in the mortality from cervical cancer; however, secondary to subjective criteria, interpretation of Pap smears is subject to marked inter- and intraobserver variability as well as having a relatively low sensitivity for cervical neoplasia on a single sample (as low as 66% sensitivity for biopsy-proven high-grade squamous intraepithelial lesions [HSIL]) (1, 2). Recently, histology, which is thought of as the gold standard for the diagnosis of cervical neoplasia, has also been found to suffer from marked intra- and interobserver variability, and testing for high-risk human papillomavirus (HPV) by Hybrid Capture 2, which has been shown to be very sensitive in the detection of cervical neoplasia and useful in the triaging of ASCUS smears, has a low specificity for cervical neoplasia (1,3). Thus, new biomarkers that are more sensitive and specific in the detection of cervical neoplasia and more reproducible than cervical cytology are needed.

Human papillomaviruses (HPV) are known to be a major causative agent in cervical neoplasia and invasive cervical carcinoma. Many different HPV types associated with cervical neoplasia have been discovered, and they have been subdivided into high- and low-risk categories based on their association with invasive cervical carcinoma (4). This association is based, in part, on the relative affinity that the HPV-type specific oncoproteins E6 and E7 bind to cellular regulatory proteins, specifically, the p53 tumor suppressor protein and the retinoblastoma protein (Rb) (5). Inactivation of these factors, either by degradation (p53) or functional inactivation (Rb), leads to disruption of the cell cycle and increased proliferation, thought to ultimately give rise to carcinoma.

p16INK4a is a cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor that regulates the activity of cyclin-dependent kinases 4 and 6 and is often inactivated in many cancers by genetic deletion or hypermethylation (6). In non-HPV–associated tumors, this inactivation leads to increased cyclin-dependent kinase activity and inactivation of Rb. However, in HPV-associated tumors, inactivation of Rb by E7 leads to markedly increased levels of p16INK4a. Recent studies have documented overexpression of p16INK4a not only in cervical intraepithelial neoplasia (CIN) but in cervical cancer as well (6, 7, 8, 9, 10).

For p16INK4a, the results were reported in semiquantitative fashion (negative, or 1+ to 3+) based on none, 5–25%, 25–75%, and >75% of cells immunostained in a lesion. Strong nuclear as well as cytoplasmic staining was considered a positive reaction. Wispy weak cytoplasmic staining present in rare cells (<5%) was considered plusminus, and for analysis was grouped into the negative category. For Ki-67, the results were also reported in a semiquantitative fashion as cells in the lower 1/3 of the epithelium staining (i.e., usually basilar cell staining), cells in the middle 1/3–2/3 staining, or cells in the upper 1/3 staining (14). Strong nuclear staining was considered a positive reaction. Stains were analyzed by two authors (SNA and JM) for reproducibility; each was blinded to the other’s result.

The degree of p16INK4a expression correlated well with the degree of cervical neoplasia, and this correlation improved slightly when compared with the recut slide diagnosis (P < .001; Fig. 1; Tables 1 and 2). There was very little expression in negative and reactive lesions, with only 11% to 12% showing greater than or equal to1+ staining (24 of 208 -original diagnosis, 12 of 112 recut diagnosis). 57% of the CIN I cases had greater than or equal to1+ expression, compared with 75% of CIN II lesions and 91% of CIN III lesions. On the recut diagnosis, 97% of CIN III lesions stained greater than or equal to1+. There were 10 (9%) CIN III original diagnosis that did not stain for p16INK4a, but on review, the majority of these were secondary to the lesion being cut through and not present on the immunohistochemistry (IHC) slide. For the recut diagnosis, there was only 1 (3%) case that did not stain with p16INK4a, and on review, two of three pathologists agreed that this represented CIN III, whereas the third felt it represented atypical squamous metaplasia. p16INK4a expression of 1+ or greater was present in 89%(47/53) of the invasive carcinomas. Review of negative cases confirmed the carcinoma diagnosis.

p16INK4a and Ki-67 expression in normal, low-grade squamous dysplasia, and high grade squamous dysplasia

p16INK4a and Ki-67 expression in normal, low-grade squamous dysplasia, and high grade squamous dysplasia

p16INK4a and Ki-67 expression in normal cervical squamous mucosa (A, H&E stain; B, p16INK4a; C, Ki-67), low-grade squamous dysplasia (CIN I; D, H&E stain; E, p16INK4a; F, Ki-67), and high grade squamous dysplasia (CIN III; G, H&E stain; H, p16INK4a, I, Ki-67).

1.1.3.5  Quantitative real-time detection of magnetic nanoparticles by their nonlinear magnetization

A novel method of highly sensitive quantitative detection of magnetic nanoparticles (MP) in biological tissues and blood system has been realized and tested in real time in vivoexperiments. The detection method is based on nonlinear magnetic properties of MP and the related device can record a very small relative variation of nonlinear magnetic susceptibility up to 10−8 at room temperature, providing sensitivity of several nanograms of MP in 0.1mlvolume. Real-time quantitative in vivomeasurements of dynamics of MP concentration in blood flow have been performed. A catheter that carried the blood flow of a rat passed through the measuring device. After an MP injection, the quantity of MP in the circulating blood was continuously recorded. The method has also been used to evaluate the MP distribution between rat’s organs. Its sensitivity was compared with detection of the radioactive MP based on isotope of Fe59. The comparison of magnetic and radioactive signals in the rat’s blood and organ samples demonstrated similar sensitivity for both methods. However, the proposed magnetic method is much more convenient as it is safe, less expensive, and provides real-time measurementsin vivo. Moreover, the sensitivity of the method can be further improved by optimization of the device geometry.

1.1.6  Proteomics and biomarkers

1.1.6.1 Identification by proteomic analysis of calreticulin as a marker for bladder cancer and evaluation of the diagnostic accuracy of its detection in urine

Kageyama S, Isono Y, Iwaka H,…, Yoshiki T.
Clin Chem 2004; 50(5):857-866.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2003.027425
How are we going to discover new cancer biomarkers? A proteomic approach for bladder cancer.
Editorial. Eftherios P. Diamandis
Clin Chem 2003; 50(5):794-795.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373.2004.032177

BACKGROUND: New methods for detection of bladder cancer are needed because cystoscopy is both invasive and expensive and urine cytology has low sensitivity. We screened proteins as tumor markers for bladder cancer by proteomic analysis of cancerous and healthy tissues and investigated the diagnostic accuracy of one such marker in urine. METHODS: Three specimens of bladder cancer and healthy urothelium, respectively, were used for proteome differential display using narrow-pH-range two-dimensional electrophoresis. To evaluate the presence of calreticulin (CRT) as detected by Western blotting, we obtained 22 cancerous and 10 noncancerous surgical specimens from transurethral resection or radical cystectomy. To evaluate urinary CRT, we collected 70 and 181 urine samples from patients with and without bladder cancer, respectively. Anti-CRT COOH-terminus antibody was used to detect CRT in tissue and urine. RESULTS: Proteomic analysis revealed increased CRT (55 kDa; pI 4.3) in cancer tissue. Quantitative Western blot analysis showed that CRT was increased in cancer tissue (P = 0.0003). Urinary CRT had a sensitivity of 73% (95% confidence interval, 62-83%) at a specificity of 86% (80-91%) for bladder cancer in the samples tested. CONCLUSIONS: Proteomic analysis is useful in searching for candidate proteins as biomarkers and led to the identification of urinary CRT. The diagnostic accuracy of urinary CRT for bladder cancer appears comparable to that of Food and Drug Administration-cleared urinary markers, but further studies are needed to determine its diagnostic role.

A handful of cancer biomarkers are currently used routinely for population screening, disease diagnosis, prognosis, monitoring of therapy, and prediction of therapeutic response. Unfortunately, most of these biomarkers suffer from low sensitivity, specificity, and predictive value, particularly when applied to rare diseases in population screening programs. Thus, for the classic cancer biomarkers much is left to be desired in terms of clinical applicability. We need new cancer biomarkers that will further enhance our ability to diagnose, prognose, and predict therapeutic response in many cancer types. Because biomarkers can be analyzed relatively noninvasively and economically, it is worth investing in discovering more biomarkers in the future. The completion of the Human Genome Project has raised expectations that the knowledge of all genes and proteins will lead to identification of many candidate biomarkers for cancer and other diseases. These predictions still need to be realized. The prevailing view among specialists is that the most powerful single cancer biomarkers may have already been discovered. Likely, in the future we will discover biomarkers that are less sensitive or specific but could be used in panels, in combination with powerful bioinformatic tools, to devise diagnostic algorithms with improved sensitivity and specificity. These efforts are currently in progress1.

  1. Stephan C, Vogel B, Cammann H, Lein M, Klevecka V, Sinha P, et al. [An artificial neural network as a tool in risk evaluation of prostate cancer. Indication for biopsy with the PSA range of 2–20 microg/l]. Urologe A 2003; 42:1221–9.

In this issue of Clinical Chemistry, Kageyama et al. propose proteomic analysis of urine as a new way to identify bladder cancer biomarkers. Previously, Celis et al. 2 used two-dimensional gel electrophoresis and developed a comprehensive database for bladder cancer profiles of both transitional and squamous cell carcinomas. Through their studies, Kageyama et al. were able to identify a potential tumor marker, calreticulin, which is found in the urine of patients with bladder carcinoma. The authors used a differential display method of bladder cancer vs healthy urothelial tissue and mass spectrometry to identify proteins that are increased in cancer tissue. In addition to calreticulin, an endoplasmic reticulum chaperone, they found nine other candidate proteins that could constitute new biomarkers for bladder carcinoma. The authors confirmed their data with quantitative Western blot analysis, immunoprecipitation, and immunohistochemistry. Their reported sensitivity and specificity were 73% and 86%, respectively, similar to the values reported for other biochemical bladder markers. However, the diagnostic accuracy of their test was vulnerable to urinary tract infections3.

3 Positive correlations were found among the appearance of adenylate kinase activity in the urine and the existence of bacteriuria, the Fairley test, and other criteria of urinary infection. Since the adenylate kinase isozymes of human tissues are organ specific and can be distinguished from one another, the appearance of adenylate kinase isozymes in urine was used in this study to identify the existence of infection in bladder or kidney. The findings suggest the usefulness of measuring the appearance of urinary adenylate kinase isozymes for the purpose of detection and differential diagnoses of urinary infections, particularly since adenylate kinase is absent or found in low concentrations in urine and serum under normal conditions.

Currently, potential bladder tumor markers can be used in various clinical scenarios, including4:

  • Serial testing for earlier detection of recurrence;
    • Complementary testing to urine cytology to improve the detection rate;
    • Providing a less expensive and more objective alternative

to the urine cytology test; and
• Directing the cytoscopic evaluation of patient followup.

The gold standard for the detection of urothelial neoplasia is cytologic examination of urothelial cells from voided urine, urinary bladder washings, and urinary tract brushing specimens in combination with cystoscopic examination5,6.

  1. Celis A, Rasmussen HH, Celis P, Basse B, Lauridsen JB, Ratz G, et al. Short-term culturing of low-grade superficial bladder transitional cell carcinomas leads to changes in the expression levels of several proteins involved in key cellular activities. Electrophoresis 1999;20:355–61.
  2. Bernstein LH, Horenstein JM, and Russell PJ. Urinary adenylate kinase and urinary infections. J Clin Microbiol. 1983 Sep; 18(3): 578–584
  3. Fritsche HA. Bladder cancer and urine tumor marker tests. In: Diamandis EP, Fritsche HA, Lilja H, Chan DW, Schwartz MK. Tumor markers: physiology,pathobiology, technology and clinical applications. Washington: AACC Press, 2002; 281–6.
  4. Bailey MJ. Urinary markers in bladder cancer. BJU Int 2003; 91:772–3
  5. Eissa S, Kassim S, El-Ahmady O. Detection of bladder tumours: role of cytology, morphology-based assays, biochemical and molecular markers. Curr Opin Obstet Gynecol 2003;15:395–403

Current guidelines suggest that low-risk patients should be surveyed once a year with cystoscopy and high-risk patients at 3-month intervals. Currently, cystoscopy is always combined with VUC. Because, as mentioned earlier, new urinary bladder tests such as BTA or NMP22 could detect lower-grade disease recurrence with higher sensitivity than VUC, it could be worthwhile to consider including one or more of these tests in the routine follow-up of patients with bladder carcinoma. However, large prospective studies will be necessary to test the clinical utility of these assays against cytology.

1.1.6.2  Multiplexed proteomic analysis of oxidation and concentrations of CSF proteins in Alzheimer’s disease

Korolainen MA, Nyman TA, Nyyssonen P, Hartikainen ES, Pirttila Y.
Clin Chem 2007; 53(4):657-665.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.078014

Carbonylation is an irreversible oxidative modification of proteins that has been linked to various conditions of oxidative stress, aging, physiological disorders, and disease. Increased oxidative stress is thus also considered to play a role in the pathogenesis of age-related neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer disease (AD). In addition, it has recently become evident that the response mechanisms to increased oxidative stress may depend on sex. Several oxidized carbonylated proteins have been identified in plasma and brain of AD patients by use of 2-dimensional oxyblotting.

Signals for beta-trace, lambda chain, and transthyretins were decreased in probable AD patients compared with controls. The only identified protein exhibiting an increased degree of carbonylation in AD patients was lambda chain. The concentrations of proteins did not generally differ between men and women; however, vitamin D-binding protein, apolipoprotein A-I, and alpha-1-antitrypsin exhibited higher extents of carbonylation in men.

None of the brain-specific proteins exhibited carbonylation changes in probable AD patients compared with age-matched neurological controls showing no cognitive decline. The carbonylation status of proteins differed between women and men. Two-dimensional multiplexed oxyblotting is applicable to study both the concentrations and carbonylation of cerebrospinal fluid proteins.

1.1.6.3  The Brain Injury Biomarker VLP-1 Is Increased in the Cerebrospinal Fluid of Alzheimer Disease Patients

Jin-Moo Lee, Kaj Blennow, Niels Andreasen, Omar Laterza, Vijay Modur, Jitka Olander, Feng Gao, Matt Ohlendorf, and Jack H. Ladenson
Clinical Chemistry  2008; 54:10 1617–1623
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2008.104497

BACKGROUND: Definitive diagnosis of Alzheimer disease (AD) can be made only by histopathological examination of brain tissue, prompting the search for premortem disease biomarkers. We sought to determine if the novel brain injury biomarker, visinin-like protein 1 (VLP-1), is altered in the CSF of AD patients compared with controls, and to compare its values to the other well-studied CSF biomarkers 42-amino acid amyloid- peptide (A1–42), total Tau (tTau), and hyperphosphorylated Tau (pTau). METHODS: Using ELISA, we measured concentrations of A1–42, tTau, pTau, and VLP-1 in CSF samples from 33 AD patients and 24 controls. We compared the diagnostic performance of these biomarkers using ROC curves. RESULTS: CSF VLP-1 concentrations were significantly higher in AD patients [median (interquartile range) 365 (166) ng/L] compared with controls [244 (142.5) ng/L]. Although the diagnostic performance of VLP-1 alone was comparable to that of A, tTau, or pTau alone, the combination of the 4 biomarkers demonstrated better performance than each individually. VLP-1 concentrations were higher in AD subjects with APOE 4/4 genotype [599 (240) ng/L] compared with 3/4 [376 (127) ng/L] and 3/3 [280 (115.5) ng/L] genotypes. Furthermore, VLP-1 values demonstrated a high degree of correlation with pTau (r 0.809) and tTau (r 0.635) but not A1–42 (r 0.233). VLP-1 was the only biomarker that correlated with MMSE score (r 0.384, P 0.030). CONCLUSIONS: These results suggest that neuronal injury markers such as VLP-1 may have utility as biomarkers for AD.

The diagnosis of Alzheimer disease (AD),6 the most common form of dementia in Western countries, is largely based on historical and clinical criteria. Although many studies report a reasonably high degree of diagnostic accuracy (80%–90%), these studies often include patients with advanced disease evaluated at specialized centers (1 ). At present, postmortem examination of brain tissue is the only tool for definitive diagnosis. Therefore, the development of a biomarker for AD would aid greatly in the diagnosis of this disease. In addition, such a marker could potentially be used to measure efficacy in future therapeutic trials. Most studies of AD biomarkers have focused on known pathological substrates for the disease. Amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles are pathological hallmarks of AD (2 ) and primarily comprise abnormally aggregated endogenous proteins. Amyloid plaques (extracellular proteinaceous aggregates) are principally composed of the amyloid- peptide (A), a 38 – to 42–amino acid peptide fragment of the amyloid precursor protein (APP). The major species, the 42– amino acid peptide (A1–42) (3, 4 ), is significantly decreased in the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) of patients with AD (5– 8 ). Neurofibrillary tangles are intraneuronal protein aggregates found mainly in neurites and primarily composed of hyperphosphorylated Tau (pTau), a microtubule-associated protein.

Fig. 1. CSF VLP-1 values in AD patients and controls. Scatter plot of CSF VLP-1 values in control vs AD patients. The line within the box represents the median value, the box encompasses 25th to 75th percentiles, and the error bars encompass the 10th to 90th percentiles. A significant difference was found in control vs AD patients (P 0.001, Student t-test).

To see if VLP-1 provides utility to the diagnosis of AD beyond the contribution of A, tTau, or pTau alone, we performed a ROC analysisfor each individual biomarker alone compared to the combination of all biomarkers. The AUCs for VLP-1, A, tTau, pTau, and an optimum linear combination of all biomarkers are shown in Fig. 2. AUCs were similar between all biomarkers individually; however, the linear combination of all biomarkers resulted in an approximately 5% improvement (Fig. 2).

To examine possible relationships between CSF VLP-1 values and patient characteristics, we performed correlation analyses between VLP-1 and age, disease duration, MMSE, and the number of APOE 4 alleles. VLP-1 correlated with MMSE and the number of APOE 4 alleles (Fig. 3A). None of the other biomarkers correlated with MMSE in this patient population (A1–42, r 0.350, P 0.497; tTau, r 0.295, P 0.100; pTau, r 0.202, P 0.264). To further examine the relationship between APOE genotype and CSF VLP-1 concentrations, we calculated mean CSF VLP-1 values by different genotypes. APOE 4/4 individuals had the highest concentrations, followed by 3/4 and 3/3 individuals (Fig. 3B).

To examine if VLP-1 concentrations in the CSF were related to values of the other biomarkers studied, we performed correlations between VLP-1 and tTau, pTau, or A1–42 using data from both AD patients and controls (Fig. 4). VLP-1 and pTau showed the greatest correlation (r 0.809) (Fig. 4C), whereas A1–42 did not correlate with VLP-1 (Fig. 4A, r 0.233). Individual correlations for AD patients analyzed separately from controls were also performed, and revealed results similar to that of the total patient population: VLP-1 vs A1–42 was not statistically significant (r 0.29671 and 0.1698 in AD and controls, respectively), whereas VLP-1 vs tTau (r 0.6221 and 0.7247 in AD and controls) and pTau (r 0.8747 and 0.6227 in AD and controls) were significantly correlated in the AD and control populations analyzed separately.

Dementia severity appears to correlate with the number of neurofibrillary tangles, but not to the degree of plaque deposition (13 ). The close correlation between VLP-1 and pTau concentrations in the CSF of AD patients is consistent with these findings, as is the lack of correlation with A. There are several limitations to this study. First, the number of patients in both control and disease groups is limited. Further studies will be needed to confirm our findings in larger, more well-characterized populations. Second, because the diagnosis of AD was made by clinical criteria, there will undoubtedly be a small but significant group of patients that were misdiagnosed (10%–20%) (1 ). This may account for some of the overlap in values for CSF biomarkers. ApoE genotyping in the control group might help with this diagnostic uncertainty. A much more rigorous study would require autopsy confirmation of diagnosis. Third, our study is limited to a comparison of VLP-1 concentrationsin AD patients vs controls, a situation thatis unlikely to occur clinically. A more relevant comparison should be made across patients carrying the differential diagnosis of dementia. Finally, our CSF samples represent a single snapshot in AD pathogenesis; further studies will be required to understand the time course or biomarker evolution with disease pathogenesis.

1.1.6.4 Determination of non-α1-antichymotrypsin-complexed PSA as an indirect measurement of free PSA: analytical performance and diagnostic accuracy.

Wesselin S, Dtephan C, Semjonow A,…, Jung K.
Clin Chem 2003;49(6):887-894.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/49.6.887

Background: A new assay measures prostate-specific antigen (PSA) not complexed to α1-antichymotrypsin (nACT-PSA) after removing PSA complexed to ACT by use of anti-ACT antibodies. We evaluated nACT-PSA and its ratio to total PSA (tPSA) as alternatives to free PSA (fPSA) and its ratio to tPSA in differentiating prostate cancer (PCa) and benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) in patients with tPSA of 2–20 μg/L. Methods: PSA in serum of 183 untreated patients with PCa and 132 patients with BPH was measured retrospectively on the chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer LIAISON® (Byk-Sangtec Diagnostica) with the LIAISON tPSA and LIAISON fPSA assays. The nACT-PSA fraction was determined with a prototype assay measuring the residual PSA after precipitation of ACT-PSA with an ACT-precipitating reagent.
Results: nACT-PSA was higher than fPSA in samples with fPSA concentrations <1 μg/L but lower in samples with >1 μg/L fPSA. The median ratios of fPSA/tPSA and of nACT-PSA/tPSA were significantly different between patients with BPH and PCa (19.4% vs 12.2% and 17.4% vs 13.0%, respectively). Within the tPSA ranges tested (2–20, 2–10, and 4–10 μg/L), areas under the ROC curves for the fPSA/tPSA ratios were significantly larger than those for nACT-PSA/tPSA. In the tPSA ranges <10 μg/L, the areas under the ROC curves for fPSA/tPSA were significantly larger than those for tPSA, whereas the areas for nACT-PSA/tPSA were not. At decision limits for 95% sensitivity and specificity, both ratios significantly increased specificity and sensitivity, respectively, compared with tPSA, but the fPSA/tPSA ratio showed higher values. Conclusions: nACT-PSA and its ratio to tPSA provide lower diagnostic sensitivity and specificity than fPSA/tPSA. The fPSA/tPSA ratio represents the state-of-the-art method for differentiating between PCa and BPH.

1.1.6.5 Ultrasensitive densitometry detection of cytokines with nanoparticle-modified aptamers

Li yuan-Yuan, Zhang C, Li Bo-Sheng, …, Xu Shun-Quing
Clin Chem 2007; 53(6):1061-1066
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.082271

Background: Aptamers mimic properties of antibodies and sometimes turn out to be even better than antibodies as reagents for assays. We describe the establishment of an ultrasensitive densitometry method for cytokine detection by nanoparticle (NP)-modified aptamers. Methods: The assay simultaneously uses a gold NP–modified aptamer and a biotin-modified aptamer to bind to the target protein, forming a sandwich complex. The absorbance signal generated by the aptamer-protein complex is amplified and detected with a microplate reader. Results: The assay for platelet-derived growth factor B-chain homodimer (PDGF-BB) was linear from 1 fmol/L to 100 pmol/L (R2 = 0.9869). The analytical detection limit was 83 amol/L. The intraassay and interassay imprecision (CVs) was ≤7.5%. Serum concentrations of PDGF-BB determined with the gold NP–modified aptamer assay and with ELISA were not significantly different. Conclusions: The gold NP–modified aptamer assay provides a fast, convenient method for cytokine detection and improves the detection range and the detection limit compared with ELISA.

1.1.6.6  Protein profiling of microdissected pancreas carcinoma and identification of HSP27 as a potential serum marker.

Melle C, Ernst G, Escher N, Hartmann D,…, von Eggeling F.
Clin Chem 2007; 53(4):629-635.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.079194

Background: Patients with pancreatic adenocarcinomas have a poor prognosis because of late clinical manifestation and the tumor’s aggressive nature. We used proteomic techniques to search for markers of pancreatic carcinoma. Methods: We performed protein profiling of microdissected cryostat sections of 9 pancreatic adenocarcinomas and 10 healthy pancreatic tissue samples using ProteinChip technology (surface-enhanced laser desorption/ionization). We identified proteins by use of 2-dimensional gel electrophoresis, peptide fingerprint mapping, and immunodepletion and used immunohistochemistry for in situ localization of the proteins found. We used ELISA to quantify these proteins in preoperative serum samples from 35 patients with pancreatic cancer and 37 healthy individuals. Results: From among the differentially expressed signals that were detected by ProteinChip technology, we identified 2 proteins, DJ-1 and heat shock protein 27 (HSP27). We then detected HSP27 in sera of patients by use of ELISA, indicating a sensitivity of 100% and a specificity of 84% for the recognition of pancreatic cancer. Conclusions: The detection of DJ-1 and HSP27 in pure defined tissue and the retrieval of HSP27 in serum by antibody-based methods identifies a potential marker for pancreatic cancer.

1.1.7  Mass Spectrometry Methods

1.1.7.1 LC-MS/MS quantification of Zn-α2 glycoprotein: A potential serum biomarker for prostate cancer

Bondar OP, Barnidge DR, KKlee EW, Davis BJ, Klee GG
Clin Chem 2007; 53(4):673-678 http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.079681

LC-MS/MS – tandem mass spectrometry

Background: Zn-α2 glycoprotein (ZAG) is a relatively abundant glycoprotein that has potential as a biomarker for prostate cancer. We present a high-flow liquid chromatography–tandem mass spectrometry (LC-MS/MS) method for measuring serum ZAG concentrations by proteolytic cleavage of the protein and quantification of a unique peptide. Methods: We selected the ZAG tryptic peptide 147EIPAWVPEDPAAQITK162 as the intact protein for quantification and used a stable isotope-labeled synthetic peptide with this sequence as an internal standard. Standards using recombinant ZAG in bovine serum albumin, 50 g/L, and a pilot series of patient sera were denatured, reduced, alkylated, and digested with trypsin. The concentration of ZAG was calculated from a dose–response curve of the ratio of the relative abundance of the ZAG tryptic peptide to internal standard. Results: The limit of detection for ZAG in serum was 0.08 mg/L, and the limit of quantification was 0.32 mg/L with a linear dynamic range of 0.32 to 10.2 mg/L. Replicate digests from pooled sera run during a period of 3 consecutive days showed intraassay imprecision (CV) of 5.0% to 6.3% and interassay imprecision of 4.4% to 5.9%. Mean (SD) ZAG was higher in 25 men with prostate cancer [7.59 (2.45) mg/L] than in 20 men with nonmalignant prostate disease [6.21 (1.65) mg/L, P = 0.037] and 6 healthy men [3.65 (0.71) mg/L, P = 0.0007]. Conclusions: The LC-MS/MS assay can be used to evaluate the clinical utility of ZAG as a cancer biomarker.

1.1.7.2 A novel, high-throughput workflow for discovery and identification of serum carrier protein-bound peptide biomarker candidates in ovarian cancer samples.

Lopez MF, Mikulskis A, Kuzdzal S, Golenko E,…, Fishman D.
Clin Chem 2007; 53(6):1067-1074.
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.080721

MALDI-TOF MS

Background: Most cases of ovarian cancer are detected at later stages when the 5-year survival is ∼15%, but 5-year survival approaches 90% when the cancer is detected early (stage I). To use mass spectrometry (MS) of serum proteins for early detection, a seamless workflow is needed that provides an opportunity for rapid profiling along with direct identification of the underpinning ions. Methods: We used carrier protein–bound affinity enrichment of serum samples directly coupled with MALDI orthagonal TOF MS profiling to rapidly search for potential ion signatures that contained discriminatory power. These ions were subsequently directly subjected to tandem MS for sequence identification. Results: We discovered several biomarker panels that enabled differentiation of stage I ovarian cancer from unaffected (age-matched) patients with no evidence of ovarian cancer, with positive results in >93% of samples from patients with disease-negative results and in 97% of disease-free controls. The carrier protein–based approach identified additional protein fragments, many from low-abundance proteins or proteins not previously seen in serum. Conclusions: This workflow system using a highly reproducible, high-resolution MALDI-TOF platform enables rapid enrichment and profiling of large numbers of clinical samples for discovery of ion signatures and integration of direct sequencing and identification of the ions without need for additional offline, time-consuming purification strategies.

1.1.7.3  Mass Spectrometry-based hepcidin measurements in serum and urine: analytical aspects and clinical implications.

Kemna EHJM, Tjalsma H, Podust VN, Swinkels DW.
Clin Chem 2007; 53(4):620-628.
http://DX.DOI.ORG:/10.1373/clinchem.2006.079186

SELDI-TOF MS

Background: Discovery of the central role of hepcidin in body iron regulation has shed new light on the pathophysiology of iron disorders. Information is lacking on newer analytical approaches to measure hepcidin in serum and urine. Recent reports on the measurement of urine and serum hepcidin by surface-enhanced laser-desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (SELDI-TOF MS) necessitate analytical and clinical evaluation of MS-based methodologies. Methods: We used SELDI-TOF MS, immunocapture, and tandem MS to identify and characterize hepcidin in serum and urine. In addition to diagnostic application, we investigated analytical reproducibility and biological and preanalytical variation for both serum and urine on Normal Phase 20 and Immobilized Metal Affinity Capture 30 ProteinChip arrays. We obtained samples from healthy controls and patients with documented iron-deficiency anemia, inflammation-induced anemia, thalassemia major, and hereditary hemochromatosis. Results: Proteomic techniques showed that hepcidin-20, -22, and -25 isoforms are present in urine. Hepcidin-25 in serum had the same amino acid sequence as hepcidin-25 in urine, whereas hepcidin-22 was not detected in serum. The interarray CV was 15% to 27%, and interspot CV was 11% to 13%. Preliminary studies showed that hepcidin-25 differentiated disorders of iron metabolism. Urine hepcidin is more affected by multiple freeze-thaw cycles and storage conditions, but less influenced by diurnal variation, than is serum hepcidin. Conclusion: SELDI-TOF MS can be used to measure hepcidin in both serum and urine, but serum requires a standardized sampling protocol.

1.1.7.4  Current state and future directions of neurochemical biomarkers for Alzheimer’s disease.

In this comprehensive review, we summarize the current state-of-the-art of neurochemical biomarkers for Alzheimer’s disease. Predominantly, these biomarkers comprise cerebrospinal fluid biomarkers directly related to the pathophysiology of this disorder (such as amyloid beta protein, tau protein). We particularly pay attention to the innovations in this area that have been made in technological aspects during the past 5 years (e.g., multiplex analysis of biomarkers, proteomics), to the discovery of novel, potential biomarkers (e.g., amyloid beta oligomers, isoprostanes), and to the extension of this research towards identification of biomarkers in plasma.

1.1.7.5  Use of SELDI-TOF mass spectrometry for identification of new biomarkers: potential and limitations.

Surface-enhanced laser desorption time of flight mass spectrometry (SELDI-TOF-MS) is an important proteomic technology that is immediately available for the high throughput analysis of complex protein samples. Over the last few years, several studies have demonstrated that comparative protein profiling using SELDI-TOF-MS breaks new ground in diagnostic protein analysis particularly with regard to the identification of novel biomarkers. Importantly, researchers have acquired a better understanding also of the limitations of this technology and various pitfalls in biomarker discovery. Bearing these in mind, great emphasis must be placed on the development of rigorous standards and quality control procedures for the pre-analytical as well as the analytical phase and subsequent bioinformatics applied to analysis of the data. To avoid the risk of false-significant results studies must be designed carefully and control groups accurately selected. In addition, appropriate tools, already established for analysis of highly complex microarray data, need to be applied to protein profiling data. To validate the significance of any candidate biomarker derived from pilot studies in appropriately designed prospective multi-center studies is mandatory; reproducibility of the clinical results must be shown over time and in different diagnostic settings. SELDI-TOF-MS-based studies that are in compliance with these requirements are now required; only a few have been published so far. In the meantime, further evaluation and optimization of both technique and marker validation strategies are called for before MS-based proteomic algorithms can be translated into routine laboratory testing.

Read Full Post »

Pancreatic Cancer and Crossing Roads of Metabolism

Curator: Demet Sag, PhD

 

PART I: Pancreatic Cancer

  • Intro
  • What is Pancreas cancer
  • What are the current and possible applications for treatment and early diagnosis
  • How pancreatic cancer is related to obesity, overweight, BMI, diabetes
  • Genetics of Pancreatic Cancer

PART II : Translational Research on Molecular Genetics Studies at Immune Response Mechanism 

  • Natural Killer Cells
  • IL-17
  • Chemokines

search_result- pancreatic cancer clinical trial studies

https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/results?term=Pancreatic+Cancer&Search=Searchpc 1

PART I: Pancreatic Cancer

Introduction:

Our body works a s a system even during complex diseases that is sometimes forgotten.  From nutrition to basic immune responses since we are born we start to change how we respond and push the envelope to keep hemostasis in our body.

During this time additional factors also increase or decrease the rate of changes such as life style, environment, inherited as well acquired genetic make-up, types of infections, weight and stress only some of them. As a result we customized our body so deserve a personalized medicine for a treatment. Customized approach is its hype with developing technology to analyze data and compare functional genomics of individuals.

However, still we need the basic cell differentiation to solve the puzzle to respond well and connect the dots for physiological problems.  At the stem of the changes there is a cell that respond and amplify its reaction to gain a support to defend at its best . Thus, in this review I like to make a possible connection for pancreatic cancer, obesity-diabetes and innate immune response through natural killer cells.

Pancreatic cancer is one of the most lethal malignancies. Pancreatic cancer is one of the most difficult cancers to treat. Fewer than 5% of patients survive more than 5 years after diagnosis. The 5-year survival rate is despite therapeutic improvements still only 6%. More than 80% of the pancreatic tumors are classified as pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma (PDA).

When cells in the pancreas that secrete digestive enzymes (acinar cells) turn into duct-like structures, pancreatic cancer can develop. Oncogenic signaling – that which causes the development of tumors – can influence these duct-like cells to form lesions that are a cancer risk.

 

Crossing roads

The recent publication brought up the necessity to understand how pancreatic cancer and IL17 are connected.

Schematic diagram showing the central role of IL-17B–IL-17RB signaling in pancreatic cancer metastasis.

Adapted from an illustration by Heng-Hsiung Wu and colleagues

http://jem.rupress.org/content/212/3/284/F2.large.jpg

 

Simply, obesity and diabetes increases the risks of cancers, cardiovascular disease, hypertension, and type-2 DM.  There is a very big public health concern as obesity epidemic, the incidence of diabetes is increasing globally, with an estimated 285 million people, or 6.6% of the population from 20 to 79 years of age, affected this is especially more alarming as child obesity is on the rise.

According to a World Health Organization (WHO) report showing that 400 million people are obese in the world, with a predicted increase to 700 million by 2015  and in the US, 30–35 percent of adults are obese.  In addition, high BMI and increased risk of many common cancers, such as liver, endometrium, breast, pancreas, and colorectal cancers have a linear increasing relationship.

The BMI is calculated by dividing body weight in kilograms by height squared in meters kg/m2). The current standard categories of BMI are as follows: underweight, <18.5; normal weight, 18.5–24.9; overweight, 25.0–29.9; obese, 30.0–34.9; and severely obese, > or = 35.0).

Furthermore, natural killer cells not only control innate immune responses but have function in other immune responses that was not recognized well before.

Recently, there have been reports regarding Natural Killer cells on was about the function of IL17 that is produced by iNKT, a subtype of NK, for a possible drug target.  In addition, regulation of receptors that are up or downregulated by NK cells for a precise determination between compromised cells and healthy cells.

Therefore, instead of sole reliance on SNPs, or GWAS for early diagnostics or only organ system base pathology, compiling the overall health of the system is necessary for a proper molecular diagnostics and targeted therapies.

  • What is Pancreas cancer

SNAP SHOT:

Incidence

  • It is a rare type of cancer.
  • 20K to 200K US cases per year

 Medically manageable

Treatment can help

 Requires a medical diagnosis

  1. lab tests or imaging
  2. spreads rapidly and has a poor prognosis.
  3. treatments may include: removing the pancreas, radiation, and chemotherapy.

 Ages affected; even though person may develop this cancer from age 0 to 60+ there is a high rate of incidence after age 40.

 

People may experience:

  • Pain: in the abdomen or middle back
  • Whole body: nausea, fatigue, or loss of appetite
  • Also common: yellow skin and eyes, fluid in the abdomen, weight loss, or dark urine
  • The pancreas secretes enzymes that aid digestion and hormones that help regulate the metabolism of sugars.

Prescription

  • Chemotherapy regimen by injection: Irinotecan, Gemcitabine (Gemzar), Oxaliplatin (Eloxatin)
  • Other treatments: Leucovorin by injection, Fluorouracil by injection (Adrucil)

 

Also common

  • Chemotherapy regimen: Gemcitabine-Oxaliplatin regimen, Docetaxel-Gemcitabine regimen
  • Procedures: Radiation therapy, Pancreatectomy, surgery to remove pancreatic tumors

 

Specialists

  • Radiologist: Uses images to diagnose and treat disease within the body.
  • Oncologist: Specializes in cancer.
  • Palliative medicine: Focuses on improving quality of life for terminally ill patients.
  • General surgeon: Performs a range of surgeries on the abdomen, skin, breast, and soft tissue.
  • Gastroenterologist: Focuses on the digestive system and its disorders.

What are the current and possible applications for treatment and early diagnosis

Diagnostics

Several imaging techniques are employed in order to see if cancer exists and to find out how far it has spread. Common imaging tests include:

  • Ultrasound – to visualize tumor
  • Endoscopic ultrasound (EUS) – thin tube with a camera and light on one end
  • Abdominal computerized tomography (CT) scans – to visualize tumor
  • Endoscopic retrograde cholangiopancreatography (ERCP) – to x-ray the common bile duct
  • Angiogram – to x-ray blood vessels
  • Barium swallows to x-ray the upper gastrointestinal tract
  • Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) – to visualize tumor
  • Positron emission tomography (PET) scans – useful to detect if disease has spread

 

New solutions in Diagnostics;

The study, published in Nature Communications, suggests that targeting the gene in question – protein kinase D1 (PKD1) – could lead to new ways of halting the development of one of the most difficult tumors to treat.

“As soon as pancreatic cancer develops, it begins to spread, and PKD1 is key to both processes. Given this finding, we are busy developing a PKD1 inhibitor that we can test further,” says the study’s co-lead investigator, Dr. Peter Storz.

Do we have new markers?

Is it possible check the cancer along with glucose levels or insulin at the point of care or companion diagnostics?

Therapy

New Solutions in Therapies

ABRAXANE (paclitaxel formulated as albumin bound nanoparticles; nab-paclitaxel), in combination with gemcitabine, has been recommended for use within NHS Scotland by the Scottish Medicines Consortium (SMC) for the treatment of metastatic adenocarcinoma of the pancreas.

The SMC decision is based on results from the MPACT (Metastatic Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma Clinical Trial) study, published in the October 2013 edition of the New England Journal of Medicine, which demonstrated an increase in median overall survival of 1.8 months when compared to gemcitabine alone [(8.5 months vs. 6.7 months respectively) (HR 0.72; 95% CI 0.62 to 0.83 P<0.001)]. 

Updated results from post-hoc analysis of the MPACT trial based on an extended data cut-off (8 months) at the time the trial was closed demonstrated an increase in the median overall survival benefit of 2.1 months when compared to gemcitabine alone [(8.7 months vs. 6.6 months respectively) (HR 0.72,95% CI = 0.62 to 0.83, P<.001)].

Using radioactive bacteria to stop the spread of pancreatic cancer – scientists from Albert Einstein College of Medicine of Yeshiva University used bacteria to carry radioisotopes commonly used in cancer treatment directly into pancreatic cancer cells. They found in animal experiments that the incidence of secondary tumors went down dramatically – i.e. the cancer was much less likely to spread (metastasize).

Targeting stroma is another approached that is followed by TGen to potentially extend patient survival in all cases including advanced cases based on a report at Clinical Cancer Research, published online by the American Association for Cancer Research. Thus this eliminates one of the limiting factor to reach tumor cells and destroying the accumulation of stroma — the supporting connective tissue that includes hyaluronan and few other collagen types.

One of the study leaders, Andrew Biankin, a Cancer Research UK scientist at the University of Glasgow in the UK said that “Being able to identify which patients would benefit from platinum-based treatments would be a game-changing moment for treating pancreatic cancer, potentially improving survival for a group of patients.” 

 In the journal Nature, the international team- including scientists from Cancer Research UK showed the evidence of large chunks of DNA being shuffled around, which they were able to classify according to the type of disruption they created in chromosomes.

The study concludes there are four subtypes of pancreatic cancer, depending on the frequency, location and types of DNA rearrangement. It terms the subtypes: stable, locally rearranged, scattered and unstable.

Can we develop an immunotherapy?

 Genetics of Pancreatic Cancer 

There are many ongoing studies to develop diagnostics technologies and treatments. However, the etiology of PC is not well understood. Pancreas has dual functions that include 2% of endocrine hormone secretion and 98% exocrine secretion, enzymes, to help digestion. As a result, pancreatic cancer is related to obesity, overweight, diabetes.

First, eliminating the risk factors can be the simplest path. Next approach is dropping the obesity and diabetes to prevent the occurrence of cancers since in the U.S. population, 50 percent are overweight, 30 percent are medically obese and 10 percent have diabetes mellitus (DM). Tobacco smoking, alcohol consumptions, chronic pancreatitis, and genetic risk factors, have been recognized as potential risk factors for the development and progression of PC.

Many studies showed that the administration of anti-diabetic drugs such as metformin and thiazolidinediones (TZD) class of PPAR-γ agonists decreases the risk of cancers.  Thus, these agents are thought to be the target to diagnose or cure PC.

Type 2 diabetes mellitus has been associated with an increased risk of several human cancers, such as liver, pancreatic, endometrial, colorectal, breast, and bladder cancer. The majority of the data show that metformin therapy decreases, while insulin secretagog drugs slightly increase the risk of certain types of cancers in type 2 diabetes.

Metformin can decrease cell proliferation and induce apoptosis in certain cancer cell lines. Endogenous and exogenous (therapy induced) hyperinsulinemia may be mitogenic and may increase the risk of cancer in type 2 diabetes. Type 2 diabetes mellitus accounts for more than 95% of the cases.

In PDA these cells have been reported to express specific genes such as Aldh1 or CD133. To date, more than 20 case-control studies and cohort and nested case-control studies with information on the association between diabetes and pancreatic cancer, BMI and cancer, and obesity and cancer have been reported.

Meta analysis and cohort studies:

 

  1. Meta studies for Diabetes and PC

Most of the diabetes and PC studies were included in two meta-analyses, in 1995 and in 2005, investigating the risk of pancreatic cancer in relation to diabetes.

The first meta-analysis, conducted in 1995, included 20 of these 40 published case-control and cohort studies and reported an overall estimated relative risk (RR) of pancreatic cancer of 2.1 with a 95% confidence interval (CI) of 1.6-2.8. These values were relatively unchanged when the analyses were restricted to patients who had diabetes for at least 5 years (RR, 2.0 [95% CI, 1.2-3.2]).

The second meta-analysis, which was conducted in 2005, included 17 case-control and 19 cohort and nested case-control studies published from 1996 to 2005 and demonstrated an overall odds ratio (OR) for pancreatic cancer of 1.8 and 95% CI of 1.7-1.9 .   Individuals diagnosed with diabetes within 4 years before their pancreatic cancer diagnosis had a 50% greater risk of pancreatic cancer than did those diagnosed with diabetes more than 5 years before their cancer diagnosis (OR, 2.1 [95% CI, 1.9-2.3] versus OR, 1.5 [95% CI, 1.3-1.8]; P = 0.005).

  1. In a recent pooled analysis of 2192 patients with pancreatic cancer and 5113 cancer-free controls in three large case-control studies conducted in the United States (results of two of the three studies were published after 2005),
  2. Risk estimates decreased as the number of years with diabetes increased.
  3. Individuals with diabetes for 2 or fewer, 3-5, 6-10, 11-15, or more than 15 years had ORs (95% CIs) of 2.9 (2.1-3.9), 1.9 (1.3-2.6), 1.6 (1.2-2.3), 1.3 (0.9-2.0), and 1.4 (1.0-2.0), respectively (P < 0.0001 for trend).

pc2

  1. Meta Studies between BMI and PC

Meta studies in 2003 and 2008 showed a week positive association between BMI and PC.  In 2003, a meta-analysis of six case-control and eight prospective studies including 6,391 PC cases 2% increase in risk per 1 kg/m2 increase in BMI. In 2008, 221 datasets, including 282,137 incidence of cancer cases with 3,338,001 subjects the results were similar  RR, 1.12; CI, 1.02–1.22.

In 2007, 21 prospective studies handled , 10 were from the United States, 9 were from Europe, and 2 were from Asia and studies was conducted including 3,495,981 individuals and 8,062 PC cases. There was no significant difference between men and women and the estimated summary risk ratio (RR) per 5 kg/m2 increase in BMI was 1.12 (95% CI, 1.06–1.17) in men and women combined.

This study concluded that concluded that there was a positive association between BMI and risk of PC, per  a 5 kg/m2 increase in BMI may be equal to  a 12% increased risk of PC.

  • The location and type of the obesity may also signal for a higher risk. The recent Women’s Health Initiative study in the United States among 138,503 postmenopausal showed that  women central obesity  in relation to PC (n=251) after average of 7.7 years of follow-up duration demonstrated that central adiposity is related to developing PC at a higher risk. Based on their result “women in the highest quintile of waist-to-hip ratio have a 70 percent (95% CI, 10–160%) greater risk of PC compared with women in the lowest quintile”
  • Age of obesity or being overweight versus risk of developing PC was also examined.
  • Regardless of their DM status they were at risk and decreased their survival even more so among men than women between age of 14-59.

overweight   14 to 39 years   (highest odds ratio [OR], 1.67; 95% CI, 1.20–2.34) or

obese            20 to 49 years     (highest OR, 2.58; 95% CI, 1.70–3.90)   , independent of DM status.

  • This association was different between men and women from the ages of 14 to 59:

stronger in men               (adjusted OR, 1.80; 95% CI, 1.45–2.23)

weaker in women            (adjusted OR, 1.32; 95% CI, 1.02–1.70).

  • The effect of BMI , obesity and overweight had reduced overall survival of PC regardless of disease stage and tumor resection status

high BMI (= or > 25)                          20 to 49 years , an earlier onset of PC by 2 to 6 years.

obese patients: hazard ratio,               1.86, 95% CI, 1.35–2.56).

overweight or obese                             30 to 79 years,  in the year prior to recruitment

overweight patients: hazard ratio,       1.26, 95% CI, 0.94–1.69;

Similarly, the authors concluded that:

  • Being overweight or obese during early adulthood was associated with a greater risk of PC and a younger age of disease onset, whereas obesity at an older age was associated with a lower overall survival in patients diagnosed with PC.
  • More recently, several large prospective cohort studies with a long duration of follow-up has been conducted in the U.S. showing a positive association between high BMI and the risk of PC (adjusted RR 1.13–1.54), suggesting the role of obesity and overweight with higher risk in the development and eventual death due to PC.
  • Although the role of smoking and gender in the association of obesity and PC is not clear, the new evidence strongly supports a positive association of high BMI with increased risk of PC, consistent with the majority of early findings; however, all recent studies strongly suggest that obesity and overweight are independent risk factor of PC.
  • Diabetes was associated with a 1.8-fold increase in risk of pancreatic cancer (95% CI, 1.5-2.1).

How pancreatic cancer is related to obesity, overweight, BMI, diabetes

 pc3

Connections in Physiology and Pathology:

Altogether cumulative data suggest that DM has a three-fold increased risk for the development of PC and a two-fold risk for biliary cancer insulin resistance and abnormal glucose metabolism, even in the absence of diabetes, is associated with increased risk for the development of PC.  Obesity alters the metabolism towards insulin resistance through affecting gene expression of inflammatory cytokines, adipose hormones such as adipokines, and PPAR-γ.

Furthermore, adiponectin also pointed out to be a negative link factor for cancers such as colon, breast, and PC.  Therefore, insulin resistance is one of the earliest negative effects of obesity, early altered glucose metabolism, chronic inflammation, oxidative stress and decreased levels of adipose hormone adiponectin and PPAR-γ, key regulators for adipogenesis.

Potential pathways directly linking obesity and diabetes to pancreatic cancer. Obesity and diabetes cause mutiple alterations in glucose and lipid hemastasis, microenvironments, and immune responses, which result in the activation of several oncogenic signaling pathways.

These deregulations increase cell survival and proliferation, eventually leading to the development and progression of pancreatic cancer. ROS, reactive oxygen species; IGF-1, insulin-like growth factor-1; IR, insulin receptors; IGF-1R, insulin-like growth factor-1 receptors; TNFR, tumor necrosis factor receptors; TLR, Toll-like receptors; HIF-1α, hypoxia-inducible factor-α1; AMPK, AMP kinase; IKK, IκB kinase; PPAR-γ, peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor-γ; VEGF, vascular endothelial growth factor; MAPK, MAP kinase; mTOR, mammalian target of rapamycin; TSC, tuberous sclerosis complex; Akt, protein kinase B. PI3K, phosphoinositide-3-kinase; STAT3, activator of transcription-3; JNK, c-Jun NH2-terminal kinase.

Top six pathways interacting with obesity or diabetes in modifying the risk of pancreatic cancer are Chemokine Signaling, Pathways in cancer, Cytokine-cytokine receptor interaction, Calcium signaling pathway. MAPK signaling pathway.

This analysis showed

  • GNGT2,
  • RELA,
  • TIAM1,
  • CBLC,
  • IFNA13, 
  • IL22RA1, 
  • IL2RA
  • GNAS,
  • MAP2K7,
  • DAPK3, 
  • EPAS1 and 
  • FOS as contributor genes.

  Furthermore, top overrepresented canonical pathways, including

  1. Role of RIG1-like Receptors in Antiviral Innate Immunity,
  2. Role of PI3K/AKT Signaling in the Pathogenesis of Influenza, and
  3. Molecular Mechanisms of Cancer

in genes interacting with risk factors (P < 10−8) are

  • TRAF6, 
  • RELA,
  • IFNA7,
  • IFNA4,
  • NFKB2,
  • IFNA10,
  • IFNA16,
  • NFKB1,
  • IFNA1/IFNA13,
  • IFNA5,
  • IFNA14,
  • IFNA,
  • GSK3B,
  • IFNA16,
  • IFNA14,
  • TP53,
  • FYN,
  • ARHGEF4,
  • GNAS,
  • CYCS ,
  • AXIN1,
  • ADCY4,
  • PRKAR2A,
  • ARHGEF1 ,
  • CDC42,
  • RAC,3
  • SIN3A,
  • RB1,
  • FOS ,
  • CDH1,
  • NFKBIA,
  • GNAT1,
  • PAK3,
  • RHOA,
  • RASGRP1,
  • PIK3CD,
  • BMP6,
  • CHEK2, and
KEGG code Pathway description Risk factor No. of genes/genes with marginal effecta No. of SNPs/eigenSNPs in the interaction analysisb PG x Ec Major contributing genesd
hsa04062e Chemokine Signalinge Obesity 175/27 695/181 3.29 × 10−6 GNGT2 RELA TIAM1
hsa05200 Pathways in cancer Obesity 315/37 806/212 5.35 × 10−4 CBLC RELA
hsa04060 Cytokine-cytokine receptor interaction Obesity 247/36 422/149 6.97 × 10−4 IFNA13 IL22RA1 IL2RA
hsa04020 Calcium signaling pathway Diabetes 171/24 759/190 1.57 × 10−4 GNAS
hsa04010 MAPK signaling pathway Diabetes 260/32 523/154 3.56 × 10−4 FOS MAP2K7
hsa05200 Pathways in cancer Diabetes 315/37 806/212 4.46 × 10−4 DAPK3 EPAS1 FOS

aNumber of genes making up the pathway/ number of genes survived the PCA-LRT (P ≤ 0.10).

bNumber of SNPs in the “reconstructed” pathways/number of principal components for LRT.

cP value was estimated by LRT in logistic regression model with adjustment of age, sex, study site, pack years(continuous), obesity or diabetes as appropriate, and five principal components for population structure.

dGenes with PG x E ≤ 0.05 in logistic regression and P ≤ 0.10 in PCA-LRT.

ePathways remained significant after Bonferroni correction (P < 1.45 × 10−4)

pc4

Top overrepresented canonical pathways in genes interacting with risk factors (P < 10−8)

Biological process Risk factor P Valuea Ratiob Contributing genes
Role of RIG1-like Receptors in Antiviral Innate Immunity Obesity 6.71 × 10−11 12/49 (0.25) TRAF6 RELA IFNA7 IFNA4 NFKB2 IFNA10 IFNA16 NFKB1
IFNA1/IFNA13 IFNA5 IFNA14 IFNA6
Role of PI3K/AKT Signaling in the Pathogenesis of Influenza Obesity 8.64 × 10−9 12/74 (0.12) RELA IFNA7 IFNA4 NFKB2 GSK3B IFNA10 IFNA16 NFKB1
IFNA1/IFNA13 IFNA5 IFNA14 IFNA6
Molecular Mechanisms of Cancer Diabetes 1.03 × 10−9 24/378 (0.063) TP53 FYN ARHGEF4 GNAS CYCS AXIN1 ADCY4 PRKAR2A
ARHGEF1 CDC42 RAC3 SIN3A RB1 FOS CDH1 NFKBIA GNAT1
PAK3 RHOA RASGRP1 PIK3CD BMP6 CHEK2 E2F2

aCalculated using Fisher’s exact test (right-tailed).

bNumber of genes interacting with a risk factor of interest (P ≤ 0.05) in a given pathway divided by total number of genes making up that pathway.

Pancreatic Cancer and Diabetes:

We conclude that diabetes type II has a fundamental influence on pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma by stimulating cancer cell proliferation, while metformin inhibits cancer cell proliferation. Chronic inflammation had only a minor effect on the pathophysiology of an established adenocarcinoma.

  • Diabetes increases tumor size and proliferation of carcinoma cells
  • Diabetes does not decrease cell death in carcinomas
  • Diabetes II like syndrome reduces the number of Aldh1+cells within the tumor
  • Metformin decreases tumor size and proliferation of carcinoma cells

 

Much is known about factors increasing the likelihood to develop PDA. Identified risk factors include among others chronic pancreatitis, long lasting diabetes, and obesity. Patients with chronic and especially hereditary pancreatitis have a very high relative risk of developing pancreatic cancer of 13.3 and 69.0, respectively. Patients with diabetes and obesity have a moderately increased relative risk of 1.8 and 1.3. These studies indicate that a substantial number of patients with PDA also suffer from local inflammation or diabetes.

http://www.biomedcentral.com/1471-2407/15/51/figure/F3?highres=y

http://www.biomedcentral.com/content/figures/s12885-015-1047-x-4.jpg

pc5

Potential mechanisms underlying the associations of diabetes and cancer.

  • AdipoR1/R2, adiponectin receptor 1/2;
  • AMPK, 5′-AMPactivated protein kinase;
  • IGF-1, insulin-like growth factor-1;
  • IGF-1R, insulin-like growth factor-1 receptor;
  • IKK, IκA;B kinase; IR, insulin receptor;
  • IRS-1, insulin receptor substrate-1;
  • MAPK, mitogen-activated-protein-kinase;
  • mTOR, mammalian target of rapamycin;
  • NF-κA;B, nuclear factor-κA;B;
  • ObR, leptin receptor;
  • PAI-1, plasminogen activator inhibitor-1;
  • PI3-K, phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase;
  • ROS, Reactive oxygen species;
  • TNF-α, tumor necrosis factor- α;
  • TNF-R1, tumor necrosis factor-receptor 1;
  • uPA, urokinase-type plasminogen activator;
  • uPAR, urokinase-type plasminogen activator receptor;
  • VEGF, vascular endothelial growth factor;
  • VEGFR, vascular endothelial growth factor receptor.

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/core/lw/2.0/html/tileshop_pmc/tileshop_pmc_inline.html?title=Click%20on%20image%20to%20zoom&p=PMC3&id=3238796_nihms-277874-f0001.jpg

Type 2 diabetes mellitus is likely the third modifiable risk factor for pancreatic cancer after cigarette smoking and obesity. The relationship between diabetes and pancreatic cancer is complex. Diabetes or impaired glucose tolerance is present in more than 2/3rd of pancreatic cancer patients.

Epidemiological investigations have found that long-term type 2 diabetes mellitus is associated with a 1.5-fold to 2.0-fold increase in the risk of pancreatic cancer. A causal relationship between diabetes and pancreatic cancer is also supported by findings from prediagnostic evaluations of glucose and insulin levels in prospective studies.

Insulin resistance and associated hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, and inflammation have been suggested to be the underlying mechanisms contributing to development of diabetes-associated pancreatic cancer.

Stem Cells

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/core/lw/2.0/html/tileshop_pmc/tileshop_pmc_inline.html?title=Click%20on%20image%20to%20zoom&p=PMC3&id=3410675_nihms295920f1.jpg

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3932318/

pc6

“A study by Permert et al.using glucose tolerance tests in patients with newly diagnosed pancreatic cancer showed that 75% of patients met criteria for diabetes. Pannala et al. used fasting blood glucose values or previous use of antidiabetic medications to define diabetes in patients with pancreatic cancer (N.=512) and age-matched control non-cancer subjects attending primary care clinics (N.=933) “

Distribution of fasting blood glucose among pancreatic cancer cases and controls. From Pannala et al.

“ They reported a nearly seven-fold higher prevalence of diabetes in pancreatic cancer patients compared to controls (47% vs. 7%). In a retrospective study using similar criteria, Chari et al. found the prevalence of diabetes in pancreatic cancer patients to be 40%.  http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3932318/”

 

Relationship between type 2 diabetes and risk of pancreatic cancer in case-control and nested case control studies. “Diamond: point estimate representing study-specific relative risks or summary relative risks with 95% CIs. Horizontal lines: represent 95% confidence intervals (CIs). Test for heterogeneity among studies: P<0.001, I2=93.6%. 1, cohort studies (N.=27) use incidence or mortality rate as the measurements of relative risk; 2, cohort studies (N.=8) use standardized incidence/mortality rate as the measurement of relative risk. From Benet al.”

 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3932318/

Table II

Sensitivity and specificity for biomarkers for pancreatic cancer.

Biomarker Study Sensitivity Specificity N.
CA19-9 Goonetilleke 68 79 82 Meta-analysis
Steinberg 69 81 90 Meta-analysis
CA125 Duraker 85 57 78 123
Haguland 86 45 76 95
CEA Ni 87 45 75 68
Haglund 86 54 76 95
Zhao 88 25 86 143
Duraker 85 39 91 123
SPan-1 Kiriyama 74 81 76 64
Chung 89 92 83 67
Kobayashi 90 82 85 200
Du-PAN 2 Satake 83 48 85 239
Sawabu 91 72 94 32
Kawa 92 64 – 200

NIHMS552557.html

PART II:  Targets for Immunomodulation to develop a therapy


Natural Killer Cells:

Natural Killer cells usually placed under non-specific immune response as a first defend mechanism during innate immunity.  NKs responses to innate immune reactions but not only viruses but also bacteria and parasitic infections develop a new line of defense.  These reactions involve amplification of many cytokines based on the specific infection or condition.  Thus, these activities help NKs to evolve.

However, their functions proven to be more than innate immune response since from keeping the pregnancy term to prevent recurrent abortions to complex diseases such as cancer, diabetes and cardiovascular conditions they have roles thorough awakening chemokines and engaging them specifically with their receptors to activate other immune cells.  For example, there is a signaling mechanism connection between NKs and DCs to respond attacks.  Furthermore, there are interactions between various types of immune cells and they are specific for example between NK and Tregs.

During pregnancy there is a special kind of interaction between NK cells and Tregs.

  • There can be several reasons such as to protect pregnancy from the immunosuppressive environment so then the successful implantation of the embryo and tolerance of the mother to the embryo can be established. In normal pregnancy, these cells are not killers, but rather provide a microenvironment that is pregnancy compatible and supports healthy placentation.
  • During cancer development tumors want to build a microenvironment through an array of highly orchestrated immune elements to generate a new environment against the host. In normal pregnancy, decidua, the uterine endometrium,  is critical for the development of placental vasculature.
  • This is the region gets thicks and thin during female cycles to prevent or accept pregnancies. As a result, mother nature created that 70% of all human decidual lymphocytes are NK cells, defined as uterine or decidual NK (dNK) cells.
  • The NK cell of decidua (dNK) and  peripheral blood NK cells are different since  dNK cells are characterized as CD56brightCD16−CD3−, express killer cell immunoglobulin-like receptors and exhibit low killing capacity despite the presence of cytolytic granules, and a higher frequency of CD4+CD25bright   

The lesson learn here is that pregnancy and mammary tissue are great examples of controlling cellular differentiation and growth since after pregnancy all these cells go back to normal state.

Understanding these minute differences and relations to manipulate gene expression may help to:

  1. Develop better biomaterials to design long lasting medical devices and to deliver vaccines without side effects.
  2. Generate safer vaccines as NKcells are the secret weapons in DC vaccination and studying their behavior together with T-cell activation in vaccinated individuals might predict clinical outcome.
  3. Establish immunotherapies based on interactions between NK cells and Tregs for complex diseases not only cancer, but also many more such as autoimmune disorder, transplants, cardiovascular, diabetes.

pc 1

Trascription factors are the silence players of the gene expression that matches input to output as a cellular response either good or bad but this can be monitored and corrected with a proper meical device or diagnostics tool to provide successful treatment regimen.

  • Therefore, the effects of Tregs on NK during gene regulation analyzed and compared among other living organisms for concerved as well as signature sequence targets even though the study is on human.
  • Unfortunatelly we can’t mutate the human for experimental purposes so comparative developmental studies now its widely called stem cell biology with a system biology approach may help to establish the pathway.

NK and T reg regulation share a common interest called T box proteins. These proteins are conserved and also play role in development of heart at very early development, embryology.  What is shared among all T-box is simply lie behind the capacity for DNA binding through the T-box domain and transcriptional regulatory activity, which plays a role in controlling the expression of developmental gene in all animal species.

 The Special T box protein: T-bet

The first identified T-box protein was Brachyury (T). in a nut shell

  • The T-box domain is made up of about 180 amino-acid residues that includes a specific sequence of DNA
  • called T-box  domain,  TCACACCT between residues 135 and 326 in mouse.
  • However, T-bet which is the T-box protein expressed in T cells and also called as TBX21 is quite conserved in 18 members of the T-box protein (TBX) family
  • since it has a crucial dual role during development and for coordination of both innate and adaptive immune responses.

T-Bet was originally cloned for its role in Th1 lineage, it has a role in Th2 development, too. 

The whole mechanism based on direct activation and modulation mechanisms in that  T-Bet directly activates IFN-γ gene transcription and enhances development of Th1 cells at the same time modulates IL-2 and Th2 cytokines in an IFN-γ-independent manner that creates an attenuation of Th2 cell development.

Thus, certain lipids ligands or markers can be utilized during vaccine design to steer the responses for immune therapies against autoimmune diseases.   As a result, tumors can be removed and defeated by manipulating NKs action.

 

INKT:

NKT has functions in diabetes, asthma. One cell type that has been proposed to contribute immensely to the development of asthma is NKT cells, which constitute a small population of lymphocytes that express markers of both T cells (T-cell receptor, TCR) and NK cells (e.g., NK1.1, NKG2D). NKT cells can be subdivided into at least three subtypes, based on their TCR. Type I NKT cells or invariant NKT (iNKT) cells express invariant TCR chains (V14–J18 in mice and V24–J18 in humans) coupled with a limited repertoire of V chains (V8, V7 and V2 in mice and V11 in humans).

The studies in the past decade showed the protective mechanism of NKT cells during the development of Type 1 diabetes can be complex.

  1. First, NKT cells can impair the differentiation of anti-islet reactive T cells into Th1 effector cells in a cell–cell contact dependent manner, which did not require Th2 cytokine production or CD1d recognition.
  2. Second, NKT cells accumulating in the pancreas can indirectly suppress diabetogenic CD4+T cells via IFN-γ production.
  3. Last, anergic iNKT cells induced by protracted αGalCer stimulation can induce the production of noninflammatory DCs, which inhibit diabetes development in an Ag-specific fashion.

These findings point to an important protective role for NKT cells during autoimmune pathogenesis in the pancreas.

A crucial role has been suggested for invariant natural killer T cells (iNKT) in regulating the development of asthma, a complex and heterogeneous disease characterized by airway inflammation and airway hyperreactivity (AHR).

iNKT cells constitute a unique subset of T cells responding to endogenous and exogenous lipid antigens, rapidly secreting a large amount of cytokines, which amplify both innate and adaptive immunity.

IL17:

Terashima A et al (2008) identified a novel subset of natural killer T (NKT) cells that expresses the interleukin 17 receptor B (IL-17RB) for IL-25 (also known as IL-17E) and is essential for the induction of Airway hypersensitive reaction (AHR). IL-17RB is preferentially expressed on a fraction of CD4(+) NKT cells but not on other splenic leukocyte populations tested.

They strongly suggested that IL-17RB(+) CD4(+) NKT cells play a crucial role in the pathogenesis of asthma.

NKT connection can be established between through targeting IL17 and IL17RB. There is a functional specialization of interleukin-17 family members. Interleukin-17A (IL-17A) is the signature cytokine of the recently identified T helper 17 (Th17) cell subset. IL-17 has six family members (IL-17A to IL-17F).

Although IL-17A and IL-17F share the highest amino acid sequence homology, they perform distinct functions; IL-17A is involved in the development of autoimmunity, inflammation, and tumors, and also plays important roles in the host defenses against bacterial and fungal infections, whereas IL-17F is mainly involved in mucosal host defense mechanisms. IL-17E (IL-25) is an amplifier of Th2 immune responses.

 There is no one easy answer for the role of IL-17 in pancreatic cancer as there are a number of unresolved issues and but it can be only suggested that  pro-tumorigenic IL-17 activity is confined to specific subsets of patients with pancreatic cancer since there is a increased expression of IL-17RB in these patients about ∼40% of pancreatic cancers presented on their histochemical staining (IHC-  immunohistochemistry.

IL17 and breast cancer:

In addition, during breast cancer there is an increased signaling of interleukin-17 receptor B (IL-17RB) and IL-17B.  They promoted tumor formation in breast cancer cells in vivo and even created acinus formation in immortalized normal mammary epithelial cells in vitro cell culture assays.

  • Furthermore, the elevated expression of IL-17RB not only present itself  stronger than HER2 for a better prognosis but also brings the shortest survival rate if patients have increased  IL-17RB and HER2 levels.
  • However, decreased level of IL-17RB in trastuzumab-resistant breast cancer cells significantly reduced their tumor growth.  This may prompt a different independent  role for  IL-17RB and HER2  in breast cancer development.
  • In addition, treatment with antibodies specifically against IL-17RB or IL-17B effectively attenuated tumorigenicity of breast cancer cells.

These results suggest that the amplified IL-17RB/IL-17B signaling pathways may serve as a therapeutic target for developing treatment to manage IL-17RB-associated breast cancer.

IL 17 and Asthma:

A requirement for iNKT cells has also been shown in a model of asthma induced with air pollution, ozone and induced with respiratory viruses chronic asthma studied in detail. In these studies specific types of NKT cells found to that specific types of NK and receptors trigger of asthma symptoms. Taken together, these studies indicate that both Th2 cells (necessary for allergen-specific responses) and iNKT cells producing IL-4 and IL-13 are required for the development of allergen-induced AHR.

Although CD4+ IL-4/IL-13-producing iNKT cells (in concert with antigen-specific Th2 cells) are crucial in allergen-induced AHR, NK1.1–IL-17-producing iNKT cells have a major role in ozone-induced AHR.

A main question in iNKT cell biology involves the identification of lipid antigens that can activate iNKT cells since this allow to identify which microorganisms to attack as  a result, the list of microorganisms that produce lipids that activate iNKT cells is rapidly growing.

Invariant natural killer T cells (iNKT) cell function in airway hyperreactivity (AHR). iNKT cells secrete various cytokines, including Th2 cytokines, which have direct effects on hematopoietic cells, airway smooth muscle cells, and goblet cells. Alternatively, iNKT cells could regulate other cell types that are known to be involved in asthma pathogenesis, e.g., neutrophils and alveolar macrophages.

http://www.nature.com/mi/journal/v2/n5/images/mi200996f1.jpg

Chemokines:

Chemokines  have a crucial role in organogenesis of various organs including lymph nodes, arising from their key roles in stem cell migration. Moreover, most homeostatic chemokines can control the movement of lymphocytes and dendritic cells and eventually adaptive immunity. Chemokines are heparin-binding proteins with 4 cysteine residues in the conserved positions.

The human chemokine system has about 48 chemokines. They are subgrouped based on:

  • Number of cysteines
  • Number of amino acid separating cysteines
  • Presence or absence of ELR motif includes, 3-amino acid sequence, glutamic acid-leucine-arginine
  • functionally classified as inflammatory, homeostatic, or both, based on their expression patterns

Chemokines are structurally divided into 4 subgroups :CXC, CC, CX3C, and C. X represent an aminoacid so the first 2 cysteines are separated by 1 is grouped as CXC and 3 amino acids is called CX3C chemokines but in CC  the first 2 cysteines are adjacent. In the C chemokines there is no second and fourth cysteines.

Various types of inflammatory stimuli induce abundantly the expression of inflammatory chemokines to induce the infiltration of inflammatory cells such as granulocytes and monocytes/macrophages.

  • inflammatory chemokines are CXC chemokines with ELR motif and CCL2.
  • homeostatic chemokines are expressed constitutively in specific tissues or cells.

cmi20132f2

Chemokines exert their biological activities by binding their corresponding receptors, which belong to G-protein coupled receptor (GPCR) with 7-span transmembrane portions. Thus, the target cell specificity of each chemokine is determined by the expression pattern of its cognate receptor .

Moreover, chemokines can bind to proteoglycans and glycosaminoglycans with a high avidity, because the carboxyl-terminal region is capable of binding heparin.

Consequently, most chemokines are produced as secretory proteins, but upon their secretion, they are immobilized on endothelium cells and/or in extracellular matrix by interacting with proteoglycans and glycosaminoglycans. The immobilization facilitates the generation of a concentration gradient, which is important for inducing the target cells to migrate in a directed way.

The human chemokine system.

Chemokine receptor Chemokines Receptor expression in
Leukocytes Epithelium Endothelium
CXCR1 CXCL6, 8 PMN + −
CXCR2 CXCL1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 PMN + +
CXCR3 CXCL4, 9, 10, 11 Th1, NK − +
CXCR4 CXCL12 Widespread + +
CXCR5 CXCL13 B − −
CXCR6 CXCL16 Activated T + −
CXCR7 (ACKR3) CXCL12, CXCL11 Widespread + +
Unknown CXCL14 (acts on monocytes)
CCR1 CCL3, 4, 5, 7, 14, 15, 16, 23 Mo, Mϕ, iDC, NK + +
CCR2 CCL2, 7, 8, 12, 13 Mo, Mϕ, iDC, NK
activated T, B
+ +
CCR3 CCL5, 7, 11, 13, 15, 24, 26, 28 Eo, Ba, Th2 − +
CCR4 CCL2, 3, 5, 17, 22 iDC, Th2, NK, T, Mϕ − −
CCR5 CCL3, 4, 5, 8 Mo, Mϕ, NK, Th1
activated T
+ −
CCR6 CCL20 iDC, activated T, B + −
CCR7 CCL19, 21 mDC, Mϕ, naïve T
activated T
+ −
CCR8 CCL1, 4, 17 Mo, iDC, Th2, Treg − −
CCR9 CCL25 T + −
CCR10 CCL27, 28 Activated T, Treg + −
Unknown CCL18 (acts on mDC and naïve T)
CX3CR1 CX3CL1 Mo, iDC, NK, Th1 + −
XCR1 XCL1, 2 T, NK − −
Miscellaneous Scavenger receptors for chemokines
Duffy antigen (ACKR1) CCL2, 5, 11, 13, 14
CXCL1, 2, 3, 7, 8
D6 (ACKR2) CCL2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12
CCL13, 14, 17, 22
CCRRL1 (ACKR4) CCL19, CCL21, CCL25

Leukocyte anonyms are as follows. Ba: basophil, Eo: eosinophil, iDC: immature dendritic cell, mDC: mature dendritic cell, Mo: monocyte, Mϕ: macrophage, NK: natural killer cell, Th1: type I helper T cell, Th2: type II helper T cell, and Treg: regulatory T cell.

 pc9

There are differences between  human liver and peripheral NK cells. Regulation of NK cell functions by CD226, CD96 and TIGIT.close. CD226 binding to CD155 or CD112 at the cell surface of transformed or infected cells triggers cytotoxic granule exocytosis and target cell lysis by natural killer (NK) cells. TIGIT, CD226, CD96 and CRTAM ligand specificity and signalling.close.

Regulation of NK cell-mediated cancer immunosurveillance through CD155 expression.close.   CD155 is frequently overexpressed by cancer cells.

pc10

Liver NK cells Circulating NK cells References
CD3-CD56+ 30.6% (11.6–51.3%) 12.8% (1–22%) 17
CD56bright/total NK cell ~50% ~10% 18,19
CD56dim/total NK cell ~50% ~90% 18,19
CD27 high low 20,21
CD16 − + 18,22
CD69 +/−, higher +/− 16
Chemokine receptor CCR7 and CXCR3
(CD56bright)
CXCR1, CX3CR1
(CD56dim)
13,23
Inhibitory receptor (NKG2A) high low 24
Natural cytotoxicity higher high 18,19
TRAIL high low 1
Perforin, Granzyme B high low 2
Cytokine production high
(MIP-1α/β, IL-10,
TNF-α, TNF-β, IFN-γ,
GM-CSF)
low
(TNF-α, TNF-β, IFN-γ,
GM-CSF, IL-10)
18
ADCC – high 25
  • In conclusion, having to develop precise early diagnostics is about determining the overlapping genes as key among diabetes, obesity, overweight and pancreas functions even pregnancy can be suggested.

 

  • It seems feasible to develop an immunotherapy for pancreatic cancer with the focus on chemokines and primary  signaling between iNKT and Tregs such as one of the recent plausable target IL-17 and IL17 RB.

References:

 Heng-Hsiung Wu,1et al Targeting IL-17B–IL-17RB signaling with an anti–IL-17RB antibody blocks pancreatic cancer metastasis by silencing multiple chemokines. Published March 2, 2015 // JEM vol. 212 no. 3 333-349 

MUNIRAJ1andS. T. CHARI2 Minerva Gastroenterol Dietol. 2012 Dec; 58(4): 331–345.PMCID: PMC3932318

Beaudoin L. et al. NKT cells inhibit the onset of diabetes by impairing the development of pathogenic T cells specific for pancreatic β cells. Immunity. 2002;17:725–736.

Wang J, Cho S, Ueno A, et al. Ligand-dependent induction of noninflammatory dendritic cells by anergic invariant NKT cells minimizes autoimmune inflammation.J. Immunol. 2008;181:2438–2445.

Lee HH, Meyer EH, Goya S, et al. Apoptotic cells activate NKT cells through T cell Ig-like mucin-like-1 resulting in airway hyper-reactivity. J. Immunol.2010;185:5225–5235.

Huang CK1, et al  6. Autocrine/paracrine mechanism of interleukin-17B receptor promotes breast tumorigenesis through NF-κB-mediated antiapoptotic pathway. Oncogene. 2014 Jun 5;33(23):2968-77.

Terashima A1 et al  A novel subset of mouse NKT cells bearing the IL-17 receptor B responds to IL-25 and contributes to airway hyperreactivity. J Exp Med. 2008 Nov 24;205(12):2727-33.

Isaksson B et al. Lifestyle factors and pancreatic cancer risk: a cohort study from the Swedish Twin Registry. Int J Cancer. 2002;98:480–482.

Larsson SC et al Overall obesity, abdominal adiposity, diabetes and cigarette smoking in relation to the risk of pancreatic cancer in two Swedish population-based cohorts. Br J Cancer.2005;93:1310–1315.

Michaud DS et al Physical activity, obesity, height, and the risk of pancreatic cancer. JAMA.2001;286:921–929.

Patel AV et al Obesity, recreational physical activity, and risk of pancreatic cancer in a large U.S. Cohort.Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev. 2005;14:459–466.

Rapp K et al  Obesity and incidence of cancer: a large cohort study of over 145,000 adults in Austria. Br J Cancer. 2005;93:1062–1067.

Shibata A et al. A prospective study of pancreatic cancer in the elderly. Int J Cancer. 1994;58:46–49.

Howe GR, Jain M, Miller AB. Dietary factors and risk of pancreatic cancer: results of a Canadian population-based case-control study. Int J Cancer.1990;45:604–608.

Nilsen TI, Vatten LJ. A prospective study of lifestyle factors and the risk of pancreatic cancer in Nord-Trondelag, Norway. Cancer Causes Control.2000;11:645–652.

Zatonski W et al Nutritional factors and pancreatic cancer: a case-control study from south-west Poland. Int J Cancer. 1991;48:390–394.

Berrington de GA et al A meta-analysis of obesity and the risk of pancreatic cancer. Br J Cancer. 2003;89:519–523.

Larsson SC, Orsini N, Wolk A. Body mass index and pancreatic cancer risk: A meta-analysis of prospective studies. Int J Cancer. 2007;120:1993–1998.

Renehan AG et al  Body-mass index and incidence of cancer: a systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective observational studies. Lancet. 2008;371:569–578.

Luo J et al Obesity and risk of pancreatic cancer among postmenopausal women: the Women’s Health Initiative (United States) Br J Cancer. 2008;99:527–531.

Li D et al Body mass index and risk, age of onset, and survival in patients with pancreatic cancer.JAMA. 2009;301:2553–2562.

Jiao L et al . Body mass index, effect modifiers, and risk of pancreatic cancer: a pooled study of seven prospective cohorts. Cancer Causes Control. 2010;21:1305–1314.

Johansen D et al Metabolic factors and the risk of pancreatic cancer: a prospective analysis of almost 580,000 men and women in the Metabolic Syndrome and Cancer Project. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev. 2010;19:2307–2317.

Godsland IF. Insulin resistance and hyperinsulinaemia in the development and progression of cancer. Clin Sci (Lond) 2010;118:315–332. Kahn BB, Flier JS. Obesity and insulin resistance. J Clin Invest. 2000;106:473–481.

Pisani P. Hyper-insulinaemia and cancer, meta-analyses of epidemiological studies. Arch Physiol Biochem. 2008;114:63–70.

Jazet IM, Pijl H, Meinders AE. Adipose tissue as an endocrine organ: impact on insulin resistance. Neth J Med. 2003;61:194–212.

Kahn SE, Hull RL, Utzschneider KM. Mechanisms linking obesity to insulin resistance and type 2 diabetes. Nature. 2006;444:840–846.

Shoelson et al  Obesity related hyperinsulinaemia and hyperglycaemia and cancer development. Arch Physiol Biochem. 2009;115:86–96.

Boyd DB. Insulin and cancer. Integr Cancer Ther. 2003;2:315–329.

Fisher WE, Boros LG, Schirmer WJ. Insulin promotes pancreatic cancer: evidence for endocrine influence on exocrine pancreatic tumors. J Surg Res.1996;63:310–313.

P Matangkasombut1,2, et al Natural killer T cells and the regulation of asthma Mucosal Immunology (2009) 2, 383–392;

Tahir SM, Cheng O, Shaulov A, et al. Loss of IFN-γ production by invariant NK T cells in advanced cancer. J. Immunol. 2001;167:4046–4050.

Motohashi S, Kobayashi S, Ito T, et al. Preserved IFN-α production of circulating Vα24 NKT cells in primary lung cancer patients. Int. J. Cancer.2002;102:159–165.

Toura I, Kawano T, Akutsu Y, Nakayama T, Ochiai T, Taniguchi M. Cutting edge: inhibition of experimental tumor metastasis by dendritic cells pulsed with α-galactosylceramide. J. Immunol. 1999;163:2387–2391.

Chang DH, Osman K, Connolly J, et al. Sustained expansion of NKT cells and antigen-specific T cells after injection of α-galactosyl-ceramide loaded mature dendritic cells in cancer patients. J. Exp. Med. 2005;201:1503–1517.

Ambrosino E, Terabe M, Halder RC, et al. Cross-regulation between type I and type II NKT cells in regulating tumor immunity: a new immunoregulatory axis. J. Immunol. 2007;179:5126–5136.  uncovered a new immunoregulatory axis where vNKT cells can inhibit the antitumor activity of iNKT cells and CD8+ T cells

Crowe NY, Coquet JM, Berzins SP, et al. Differential antitumor immunity mediated by NKT cell subsets in vivo. J. Exp. Med. 2005;202:1279–1288.

Novak J, Beaudoin L, Park S, et al. Prevention of Type 1 diabetes by invariant NKT cells is independent of peripheral CD1d expression. J. Immunol.2007;178:1332–1340.

Everhart J, Wright D. Diabetes mellitus as a risk factor for pancreatic cancer. A meta-analysis. JAMA. 1995;273:1605–9.

Huxley R et al Type-II diabetes and pancreatic cancer: a meta-analysis of 36 studies. Br J Cancer. 2005;92:2076–83.

Ben Q, Xu M, Ning X, Liu J, Hong S, Huang W, et al. Diabetes mellitus and risk of pancreatic cancer: A meta-analysis of cohort studies. Eur J Cancer.2011;47:1928–37.

Clinic, Mayo. “Mayo researchers identify gene that pushes normal pancreas cells to change shape.”Medical News Today. MediLexicon, Intl., 24 Feb. 2015. Web.10 Mar. 2015.

James D. Byrne et al Local iontophoretic administration of cytotoxic therapies to solid tumors

Sci Transl Med 4 February 2015: Vol. 7, Issue 273, p. 273ra14 Sci. Transl. Med. DOI: 10.1126/scitranslmed.3009951, published online 4 February 2015, abstract.

Mayo Clinic news release, accessed 20 February 2015 via Newswise.

Additional source: ACS, What are the key statistics about pancreatic cancer?, accessed 20 February 2015.

Additional source: ACS, What is pancreatic cancer?, accessed 20 February 2015.

Scottish Medicines Consortium. Treatment Assessment. February 2015

NHS England. Cancer Drugs Fund list Version 3. Available at http://www.england.nhs.uk/wp-content/uploads/2015/01/ncdf-list-dec14.pdf . Last accessed January 2015

NHS England. Cancer Drugs Fund: Albumin-bound paclitaxel decision summary. Available athttp://www.england.nhs.uk/wp-content/uploads/2015/01/ncdf-summ-albumin-pac.pdf. Accessed February 2015

Cancer Research UK. Pancreatic cancer key stats. Available athttp://www.cancerresearchuk.org/cancer-info/cancerstats/keyfacts/pancreatic-cancer/cancerstats-key-facts-on-pancreatic-cancer. Accessed February 2015

Cancer Research UK. Statistics and outlook for pancreatic cancer. Available athttp://www.cancerresearchuk.org/about-cancer/type/pancreatic-cancer/treatment/statistics-and-outlook-for-pancreatic-cancer Accessed February 2015

ISD Scotland. Cancer statistics: Pancreatic Cancer. Available at http://www.isdscotland.org/Health-Topics/Cancer/Cancer-Statistics/Pancreatic/ Accessed February 2015

Von Hoff DD, et al. Increased Survival in Pancreatic Cancer with nab-Paclitaxel plus Gemcitabine. N Engl J Med. 2013;369:1691 – 1703. Available at:http://www.nejm.org/doi/full/10.1056/NEJMoa1304369 Accessed February 2015

Goldstein D et al. nab-Paclitaxel plus gemcitabine for metastatic pancreatic cancer: long-term survival from a phase III trial. JNCI J Ntal Cancer Inst, 2015, 1-10. DOI: 10.1093/jnci/dju413. Accessed February 2015

The Translational Genomics Research Inst. “TGen study: Destroying tumor material that ‘cloaks’ cancer cells could benefit patients.” Medical News Today. MediLexicon, Intl., 27 Feb. 2015. Web. 10 Mar. 2015.

Mol Carcinog. 2012 Jan; 51(1): 64–74. doi:  10.1002/mc.20771

Mendonça FM1, de Sousa FR1, Barbosa AL1, Martins SC1, Araújo RL1, Soares R2, Abreu C1. Metabolism. 2015 Metabolic syndrome and risk of cancer: which link? Feb;64(2):182-9.

Huang CK1, et al  Autocrine/paracrine mechanism of interleukin-17B receptor promotes breast tumorigenesis through NF-κB-mediated antiapoptotic pathway. Oncogene. 2014 Jun 5;33(23):2968-77.

 Jiao L et al  Dietary consumption of advanced glycation end products andpancreatic cancer in the prospective NIH-AARP Diet and Health Study.

 Cancer. 2014 Dec 1;120(23):3669-75. doi: 10.1002/cncr.28863. Epub 2014 Oct 14. Clinical and pathologic features of familial pancreatic cancer.

The Rockefeller University Press, doi: 10.1084/jem.20141702 Cancer Lett. 2015 Jan 28;356(2 Pt A):281-8. doi: 10.1016/j.canlet.2014.03.028. Epub 2014 Apr 2.

 Humphris JL1, et al  Australian Pancreatic Cancer Genome Initiative  Br J Cancer. 2014 Nov 25;111(11):2180-6. doi: 10.1038/bjc.2014.525. Epub 2014 Oct 2.

Søreide K1, Sund M2.  Epidemiological-molecular evidence of metabolic reprogramming on proliferation, autophagy and cell signaling in pancreas cancer.  Am J Clin Nutr. 2015 Jan;101(1):126-34. doi: 10.3945/ajcn.114.098061. Epub 2014 Nov 19.

Lin CC1, et al .Independent and joint effect of type 2 diabetes and gastric and hepatobiliary diseases on risk of pancreatic cancer risk: 10-year follow-up of population-based cohort.

Wang Z1 et al  Metformin is associated with reduced risk of pancreatic cancer in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2014 Oct;106(1):19-26. doi: 10.1016/j.diabres.2014.04.007. Epub 2014 Apr 18.

Preziosi G1, Oben JA2, Fusai G3. Obesity and pancreatic cancer.  Surg Oncol. 2014 Jun;23(2):61-71. doi: 10.1016/j.suronc.2014.02.003. Epub 2014 Mar 12.

Berger NA1. Obesity and cancer pathogenesis. Ann N Y Acad Sci. 2014 Apr;1311:57-76. doi: 10.1111/nyas.12416.

De Souza AL1, Saif MW. Diabetes and pancreatic cancer. JOP. 2014 Mar 10;15(2):118-20. doi: 10.6092/1590-8577/2286.

Timofte D et al Metabolic disorders in patients operated for pancreatic cancer.  Rev Med Chir Soc Med Nat Iasi. 2014 Apr-Jun;118(2):392-8.

Lowenfels AB, Maisonneuve P. Epidemiologic and etiologic factors of pancreatic cancer. Hematol Oncol Clin North Am. 2002;16:1–16.

Lowenfels AB, Sullivan T, Fiorianti J, Maisonneuve P. The epidemiology and impact of pancreatic diseases in the United States. Curr Gastroenterol Rep.2005;7:90–95.

Michaud DS. Epidemiology of pancreatic cancer. Minerva Chir. 2004;59:99–111.

Schuster DP. Obesity and the Development of Type 2 Diabetes: the Effects of Fatty Tissue Inflamation. Dovepress; 2010. pp. 253–262.

WHO. World Health Organization Fact Sheet for World Wide Prevalence of Obesity. 2006. http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs311/en/index.html.

Chang S et al, State ranks of incident cancer burden due to overweight and obesity in the United States, 2003. Obesity (Silver Spring) 2008;16:1636–1650.

Lewis L. Lanie  Evolutionary struggles between NK cells and viruses Nature Reviews Immunology 8, 259-268 (April 2008) | doi:10.1038/nri2276

Seth, S. et al. The murine pan T cell marker CD96 is an adhesion receptor for CD155 and nectin-1. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 364, 959–965 (2007).

de Andrade et al DNAM-1 control of natural killer cells functions through nectin and nectin-like proteins. Immunol. Cell Biol. 92, 237–244 (2014).

Orange, J. S. Formation and function of the lytic NK-cell immunological synapse. Nature Rev. Immunol. 8, 713–725 (2008).

Lagrue, K. et al. The central role of the cytoskeleton in mechanisms and functions of the NK cell immune synapse. Immunol. Rev. 256, 203–221 (2013).

Vyas, Y. M. et al. Spatial organization of signal transduction molecules in the NK cell immune synapses during MHC class I-regulated noncytolytic and cytolytic interactions. J. Immunol. 167, 4358–4367 (2001).

Shibuya, K. et al. CD226 (DNAM-1) is involved in lymphocyte function-associated antigen 1 costimulatory signal for naive T cell differentiation and proliferation. J. Exp. Med. 198,1829–1839 (2003).

Lozano, E. et al  The CD226/CD155 interaction regulates the proinflammatory (TH1/TH17)/anti-inflammatory (TH2) balance in humans. J. Immunol. 191, 3673–3680 (2013).

Maier, M. K. et al. The adhesion receptor CD155 determines the magnitude of humoral immune responses against orally ingested antigens. Eur. J. Immunol. 37, 2214–2225(2007).

Pende, D. et al. Expression of the DNAM-1 ligands, Nectin-2 (CD112) and poliovirus receptor (CD155), on dendritic cells: relevance for natural killer-dendritic cell interaction.Blood 107, 2030–2036 (2006).

O’Leary et al  T cell- and B cell-independent adaptive immunity mediated by natural killer cells. Nature Immunol. 7, 507–516(2006).

Sanchez-Correa, B. et al. Decreased expression of DNAM-1 on NK cells from acute myeloid leukemia patients. Immunol. Cell Biol. 90, 109–115 (2012).

Mamessier, E. et al. Human breast cancer cells enhance self tolerance by promoting evasion from NK cell antitumor immunity. J. Clin. Invest. 121, 3609–3622 (2011).

Nakai, R. et al. Overexpression of Necl-5 correlates with unfavorable prognosis in patients with lung adenocarcinoma. Cancer Sci. 101, 1326–1330 (2010).

Tane, S. et al. The role of Necl-5 in the invasive activity of lung adenocarcinoma. Exp. Mol. Pathol. 94, 330–335 (2013).

Sloan, K. E. et al. CD155/PVR plays a key role in cell motility during tumor cell invasion and migration. BMC Cancer 4, 73 (2004)

Chan, C. J., Smyth, M. J. & Martinet, L. Molecular mechanisms of natural killer cell activation in response to cellular stress. Cell Death Differ. 21, 5–14 (2014).

Li, M. et al. T-cell immunoglobulin and ITIM domain (TIGIT) receptor/poliovirus receptor (PVR) ligand engagement suppresses interferon-γ production of natural killer cells via β-arrestin 2-mediated negative signaling. J. Biol. Chem. 289, 17647–17657 (2014).

Guma, M. et al. Imprint of human cytomegalovirus infection on the NK cell receptor repertoire. Blood 104, 3664–3671 (2004).

Sharma S. Natural killer cells and regulatory T cells in early pregnancy loss.

Int J Dev Biol. 2014;58(2-4):219-29. doi: 10.1387/ijdb.140109ss. Review.

Mukaida N, Sasaki S, Baba T. Chemokines in cancer development and progression and their potential as targeting molecules for cancer treatment.  Mediators Inflamm. 2014;2014:170381. doi: 10.1155/2014/170381. Epub 2014 May 22. Review.

Van Elssen CH, Oth T, Germeraad WT, Bos GM, Vanderlocht J.  Natural killer cells: the secret weapon in dendritic cell vaccination strategies.Clin Cancer Res. 2014 Mar 1;20(5):1095-103. doi: 10.1158/1078-0432.CCR-13-2302. Review.

Gardner AB, Lee SK, Woods EC, Acharya AP. Biomaterials-based modulation of the immune system. Biomed Res Int. 2013;2013:732182. doi: 10.1155/2013/732182. Epub 2013 Sep 22. Review.

Pedroza-Pacheco I, Madrigal A, Saudemont A. Interaction between natural killer cells and regulatory T cells: perspectives for immunotherapy. Cell Mol Immunol. 2013 May;10(3):222-9. doi: 10.1038/cmi.2013.2. Epub 2013 Mar 25. Review.

Lindau D, Gielen P, Kroesen M, Wesseling P, Adema GJ.  The immunosuppressive tumour network: myeloid-derived suppressor cells, regulatory T cells and natural killer T cells. Immunology. 2013 Feb;138(2):105-15. doi: 10.1111/imm.12036. Review.

Tian Z, Chen Y, Gao B.Natural killer cells in liver disease.  Hepatology. 2013 Apr;57(4):1654-62. doi: 10.1002/hep.26115. Review.

Joyce S, Girardi E, Zajonc DM. J NKT cell ligand recognition logic: molecular basis for a synaptic duet and transmission of inflammatory effectors. Immunol. 2011 Aug 1;187(3):1081-9. doi: 0.4049/jimmunol.1001910. Review.

Diana J, Gahzarian L, Simoni Y, Lehuen A. Innate immunity in type 1 diabetes.  Discov Med. 2011 Jun;11(61):513-20. Review.

Wu L, Van Kaer L.Natural killer T cells in health and disease. Front Biosci (Schol Ed). 2011 Jan 1;3:236-51. Review.

Cantorna MT.  Why do T cells express the vitamin D receptor? Ann N Y Acad Sci. 2011 Jan;1217:77-82. doi: 10.1111/j.1749-6632.2010.05823.x. Epub 2010 Nov 29. Review.

Key Papers:

These papers, Gilfian et all and Iguchi-Manaka et al,  were the first to show the role of CD226 in NK cell- and CD8+ T cell-mediated tumour immunosurveillance using Cd226−/− mice.

  • Gilfillan, S.et al. DNAM-1 promotes activation of cytotoxic lymphocytes by nonprofessional antigen-presenting cells and tumors. J. Exp. Med. 205, 2965–2973 (2008).
  • Iguchi-Manaka, A.et al. Accelerated tumor growth in mice deficient in DNAM-1 receptor.  Exp. Med. 205, 2959–2964 (2008).

Johnston, R. J. et al. The immunoreceptor TIGIT regulates antitumor and antiviral CD8+ T cell effector function. Cancer Cell 26, 923–937 (2014).
This study shows that TIGIT is expressed by PD1+ exhausted tumour-infiltrating T cells and that targeting these receptors with monoclonal antibodies represents a promising strategy to restore CD8+ T cell functions in cancer or in chronic infectious disease.

Khakoo, S. I. et al. HLA and NK cell inhibitory receptor genes in resolving hepatitis C virus infection. Science 305, 872–874 (2004).

Fang, M. et al. CD94 is essential for NK cell-mediated resistance to a lethal viral disease.Immunity 34, 579–589 (2011).
This study using CD94-deficient mice shows that the activating receptor formed by CD94 and NKG2E is essential for the resistance of C57BL/6 mice to mousepox.

Pradeu, T., Jaeger, S. & Vivier, E. The speed of change: towards a discontinuity theory of immunity? Nature Rev. Immunol. 13, 764–769 (2013).
This is an outstanding review on the formulation of a new immune paradigm ‘the discontinuity theory’

Further Reading:

Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Molecular Biology of Pancreatic Cancer: How Useful Is It in Clinical Practice? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
George H Sakorafas, Vasileios Smyrniotis
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Endoscopic Findings of Upper Gastrointestinal Lesions in Patients with Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Hiroyuki Watanabe, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Two Avirulent, Lentogenic Strains of Newcastle Disease Virus Are Cytotoxic for Some Human Pancreatic Tumor Lines In Vitro ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Megan Delimata, Sooraj Tejaswi
Vol 14, No 3 (2013): May – p. 221-303 Duration of Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer in a Case-Control Study in the Midwest and the Iowa Women’s Health Study (IWHS) Cohort ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sarah A Henry, Anna E Prizment, Kristin E Anderson
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Endoscopic Management of Pain in Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Parit Mekaroonkamol, Field F Willingham, Saurabh Chawla
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Advancements in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer: 2013 ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 15, No 5 (2014): September – p. 413-540 New-onset Diabetes: A Clue to the Early Diagnosis of Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Suresh T Chari
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 2: Carcinogenesis Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Murat Saruc, Jens Standop, Hiroshi Egami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 5 (2013): September – p. 475-527 Synchronous Triple Cancers of the Pancreas, Stomach, and Cecum Treated with S-1 Followed by Pancrelipase Treatment of Pancreatic Exocrine Insufficiency ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Daisuke Ishikawa, Shigeki Nanjo, Shinji Takeuchi, Tadaaki Yamada, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Toshifumi Gabata, Osamu Matsui, Hiroko Ikeda, Yasushi Takamatsu, Sakae Iwakami, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 1 (2012): January – p. 1-123 Newcastle Disease Virus LaSota Strain Kills Human Pancreatic Cancer Cells in Vitro with High Selectivity ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Sooraj Tejaswi, Megan Delimata
Vol 13, No 3 (2012): May – p. 252-329 Rare Solid Tumors of the Pancreas as Differential Diagnosis of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sabine Kersting, Monika S Janot, Johanna Munding, Dominique Suelberg, Andrea Tannapfel, Ansgar M Chromik, Waldemar Uhl, Uwe Bergmann
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 A Proteomic Comparison of Formalin-Fixed Paraffin-Embedded Pancreatic Tissue from Autoimmune Pancreatitis, Chronic Pancreatitis, and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL. TABLES 1-4 (PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Scott Brizard, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Highlights on the First Line Treatment of Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Krishna S Gunturu, Jamie Jarboe, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Pancreatic Cancer: Updates on Translational Research and Future Applications ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Evangelos G Sarris, Konstantinos N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Pancreatic Cancer: What About Screening and Detection? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Froso Konstantinou, Kostas N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Najla Hatem El-Jurdi, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 1: Basic Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Murat Saruc, Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Atsushi Itami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Analysis of Endoscopic Pancreatic Function Test (ePFT)-Collected Pancreatic Fluid Proteins Precipitated Via Ultracentrifugation ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL.(XLS)  SUPPL.(PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Aleksandr Gaun, John F K Sauld, Ali Ghoulidi, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Regulation Mechanisms of the Hedgehog Pathway in Pancreatic Cancer: A Review ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Kim Christin Honselmann, Moritz Pross, Carlo Maria Felix Jung, Ulrich Friedrich Wellner, Steffen Deichmann, Tobias Keck, Dirk Bausch
Vol 14, No 5S (2013): September (Suppl.) – p. 528-602 History of Previous Cancer in Patients Undergoing Resection for Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  PDF
Francesca Gavazzi, Maria Rachele Angiolini, Cristina Ridolfi, Maria Carla Tinti, Marco Madonini, Marco Montorsi, Alessandro Zerbi
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Molecular Biology of Pancreatic Cancer: How Useful Is It in Clinical Practice? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
George H Sakorafas, Vasileios Smyrniotis
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Endoscopic Findings of Upper Gastrointestinal Lesions in Patients with Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Hiroyuki Watanabe, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Two Avirulent, Lentogenic Strains of Newcastle Disease Virus Are Cytotoxic for Some Human Pancreatic Tumor Lines In Vitro ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Megan Delimata, Sooraj Tejaswi
Vol 14, No 3 (2013): May – p. 221-303 Duration of Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer in a Case-Control Study in the Midwest and the Iowa Women’s Health Study (IWHS) Cohort ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sarah A Henry, Anna E Prizment, Kristin E Anderson
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Endoscopic Management of Pain in Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Parit Mekaroonkamol, Field F Willingham, Saurabh Chawla
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Advancements in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer: 2013 ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 15, No 5 (2014): September – p. 413-540 New-onset Diabetes: A Clue to the Early Diagnosis of Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Suresh T Chari
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 2: Carcinogenesis Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Murat Saruc, Jens Standop, Hiroshi Egami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 5 (2013): September – p. 475-527 Synchronous Triple Cancers of the Pancreas, Stomach, and Cecum Treated with S-1 Followed by Pancrelipase Treatment of Pancreatic Exocrine Insufficiency ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Daisuke Ishikawa, Shigeki Nanjo, Shinji Takeuchi, Tadaaki Yamada, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Toshifumi Gabata, Osamu Matsui, Hiroko Ikeda, Yasushi Takamatsu, Sakae Iwakami, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 1 (2012): January – p. 1-123 Newcastle Disease Virus LaSota Strain Kills Human Pancreatic Cancer Cells in Vitro with High Selectivity ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Sooraj Tejaswi, Megan Delimata
Vol 13, No 3 (2012): May – p. 252-329 Rare Solid Tumors of the Pancreas as Differential Diagnosis of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sabine Kersting, Monika S Janot, Johanna Munding, Dominique Suelberg, Andrea Tannapfel, Ansgar M Chromik, Waldemar Uhl, Uwe Bergmann
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 A Proteomic Comparison of Formalin-Fixed Paraffin-Embedded Pancreatic Tissue from Autoimmune Pancreatitis, Chronic Pancreatitis, and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL. TABLES 1-4 (PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Scott Brizard, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Highlights on the First Line Treatment of Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Krishna S Gunturu, Jamie Jarboe, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Pancreatic Cancer: Updates on Translational Research and Future Applications ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Evangelos G Sarris, Konstantinos N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Pancreatic Cancer: What About Screening and Detection? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Froso Konstantinou, Kostas N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Najla Hatem El-Jurdi, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 1: Basic Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Murat Saruc, Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Atsushi Itami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Analysis of Endoscopic Pancreatic Function Test (ePFT)-Collected Pancreatic Fluid Proteins Precipitated Via Ultracentrifugation ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL.(XLS)  SUPPL.(PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Aleksandr Gaun, John F K Sauld, Ali Ghoulidi, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Regulation Mechanisms of the Hedgehog Pathway in Pancreatic Cancer: A Review ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Kim Christin Honselmann, Moritz Pross, Carlo Maria Felix Jung, Ulrich Friedrich Wellner, Steffen Deichmann, Tobias Keck, Dirk Bausch
Vol 14, No 5S (2013): September (Suppl.) – p. 528-602 History of Previous Cancer in Patients Undergoing Resection for Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  PDF
Francesca Gavazzi, Maria Rachele Angiolini, Cristina Ridolfi, Maria Carla Tinti, Marco Madonini, Marco Montorsi, Alessandro Zerbi

Patents

1.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week10/OG/html/1412-2/US08974784-20150310.html

Anti-pancreatic cancer antibodies: David M. Goldenberg, Mendham, NJ (US); Hans J. Hansen, Picayune, MS (US); Chien-Hsing Chang, Downingtown, PA (US); …

2.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week42/OG/html/1407-3/US08865413-20141021.html

A method of diagnosing pancreatic cancer in a human, the method comprising detecting the level of golgi apparatus protein 1 in a sample from the …

3.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week10/OG/html/1412-2/US08974802-20150310.html

A method for the treatment of pancreatic cancer, which comprises the administration to a human patient with pancreatic cancer of an effective …

4.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week50/OG/html/1409-3/US08912191-20141216.html

A method of treatment of melanoma, colorectal cancer, or pancreatic cancerwherein the treatment inhibits the progress of, reduces the rate of …

5.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week10/OG/html/1412-2/US08975401-20150310.html

A method of treating a cancer selected from breast cancer, hepatocellular carcinoma … gastric carcinoma, leukemia and pancreatic cancer in a subject …

6.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week42/OG/html/1407-3/US08865173-20141021.html

Treatments for pancreatic cancer metastases: Suzanne M. Spong, San Francisco, CA (US); Thomas B. Neff, Atherton, CA (US); and Stephen J. Klaus, San …

7.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week48/OG/html/1409-1/US08901093-20141202.html

Custom vectors for treating and preventing pancreatic cancer: Dennis L. Panicali, Acton, MA (US); Gail P. Mazzara, Winchester, MA (US); Linda R. …

8.       www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week09/OG/html/1412-1/US08969366-20150303.html

A method for treating a disease selected from the group consisting of melanoma, stomach cancer, liver cancer, colorectal cancer, pancreatic …

9.       Drug composition cytotoxic for pancreatic cancer cells

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week13/OG/html/1401-1/US08685941-20140401.html

Drug composition cytotoxic for pancreatic cancer cells: James Turkson, Orlando, Fla. (US) Assigned to University of Central Florida Research …

10.    [PDF] J. John Shimazaki, Esq. 1539 Lincoln Way, Suite 204

http://www.uspto.gov/web/offices/com/sol/foia/tac/2.66/74713131.pdf

  1. John Shimazaki, Esq. 1539 Lincoln Way, Suite 204 … containing the Of fice Action because Applicant™s president™s father was ill withpancreatic…

11.    [PDF] Written Comments on Genetic Diagnostic Testing Study

http://www.uspto.gov/aia_implementation/gen_e_lsi_20130207.pdf

Page 5 of 23 extracolonic cancers of LS include liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, gall bladder duct cancer, prostate cancer, sarcomas, thyroid cancer …

12.    Detection of digestive organ cancer, gastric cancer …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week02/OG/html/1410-2/US08932990-20150113.html

Detection of digestive organ cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, pancreatic cancer, and biliary tract cancer by gene expression profiling

13.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week06/OG/html/1399-2/US08648112-20140211.html

wherein said cancer is selected from the group consisting of a sarcoma, … a nervous system cancer, prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer, and colon can …

14.    Treatment of hyperproliferative diseases with vinca …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week45/OG/html/1408-2/US08883775-20141111.html

A method of treating or ameliorating a hyperproliferative disorder selected from the group consisting of glioblastoma, lung cancer, breast cancer . …

15.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week30/OG/html/1404-5/US08791125-20140729.html

A method for treating a Weel kinase mediated cancer selected from the group consisting of breast cancer, lung cancer, pancreatic cancer, colon …

16.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week08/OG/html/1411-4/US08962891-20150224.html

wherein said proliferative disorder is breast cancer or pancreatic cancer. …

17.    Immunoconjugates, compositions for making them, and …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week40/OG/html/1407-1/US08852599-20141007.html

A method for treating a cancer in a subject suffering from such cancer, … pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, lymphoma, colon cancer, mesothelioma, …

18.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week11/OG/html/1400-3/US08673898-20140318.html

A method of treating cancer, … lung cancer, melanoma, neuroblastomas, oral cancer, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer , rectal cance …

19.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week43/OG/html/1407-4/US08871744-20141028.html

A method for treating a subject having breast cancer, ovarian cancer, or pancreatic cancer in need of therapy thereof comprising administering to …

20.    [PDF] Pamela Scudder <pscudder@windstream.net> Sent: Saturday …

http://www.uspto.gov/sites/default/files/aia_implementation/gene-comment-scudder.pdf

My daughter died of ovarian cancer. My other daughter and many … (mutation) is known to cause a higher incidence of pancreatic (for instance) cancer …

21.    Methods of treating cancer using pyridopyrimidinone …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week48/OG/html/1409-1/US08901137-20141202.html

A method of treating pancreatic cancer which method comprises administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound that is:

22.    Heteroaryl substituted pyrrolo[2,3-B]pyridines and pyrrolo …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week02/OG/html/1410-2/US08933086-20150113.html

A method of treating pancreatic cancer in a patient, comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound …

23.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week49/OG/html/1409-2/US08906934-20141209.html

… wherein the cell proliferative disorder is selected from the group consisting of cervical cancer, colon cancer, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, …

24.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week32/OG/html/1405-2/US08802703-20140812.html

A method of inhibiting MEK in a cancer cell selected from the group consisting of human melanoma cells and human pancreatic cancer cells …

25.    Antibody-based arrays for detecting multiple signal …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week08/OG/html/1399-4/US08658388-20140225.html

A method for performing a multiplex, high-throughput immunoassay for facilitating a cancer diagnosis, the method comprising:

26.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week48/OG/html/1409-1/US08901147-20141202.html

A method for the treatment of colorectal cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, prostatecancer, urinary cancer, kidney cancer, and pancreatic …

27.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week16/OG/patentee/alphaY.htm

Yamaue, Hiroki; to Onco Therapy Science, Inc. Combination therapy for pancreatic cancer using an antigenic peptide and chemotherapeutic agent 08703713 …

28.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week48/OG/patentee/alphaP_Utility.htm

… The Custom vectors for treating and preventing pancreatic cancer … system and apparatus for control of pancreatic beta cell function to improve …

29.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week16/OG/patentee/alphaW.htm

Whatcott, Cliff; and Han, Haiyong, to Translational Genomics Research Institute, The Therapeutic target for pancreatic cancer cells 08703736 Cl. …

30.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week10/OG/patentee/alphaG.htm

Goldenberg, David M.; Hansen, Hans J.; Chang, Chien-Hsing; and Gold, David V., to Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-pancreatic cancer antibodies 08974784 Cl. …

31.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week42/OG/patentee/alphaD.htm

… Narayan, Vaibhav; and Patterson, Scott, to Celera Corporation Pancreatic cancertargets and uses thereof 08865413 Cl. 435-7.1. Domsch, Matthew L.; …

32.    [PDF] 15 March 2005 – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/trademarks/tmog/20050315_OG.pdf

15 March 2005 – United States Patent and Trademark Office

33.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week10/OG/html/1412-2/US08975248-20150310.html

Combinations of therapeutic agents for treating cancer: … myeloma, colorectal adenocarcinoma, cervical carcinoma and pancreatic carcinoma, …

34.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week05/OG/patentee/alphaG_Utility.htm

… Inc. Medium-chain length fatty acids, salts and triglycerides in combination with gemcitabine for treatment of pancreatic cancer 08946190 Cl. …

35.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week13/OG/patentee/alphaT_Utility.htm

Turkson, James; to University of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Drug composition cytotoxic for pancreatic cancer cells 08685941 Cl. 514-49.

36.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week31/OG/patentee/alphaG_Utility.htm

… David M., to Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-mucin antibodies for early detection and treatment of pancreatic cancer 08795662 Cl. 424-130.1. Gold, …

37.    [PDF] www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/trademarks/tmog/20110816_OG.pdf

http://www.uspto.gov

38.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week29/OG/patentee/alphaG.htm

Goggins, Michael G.; and Sato, Norihiro, to Johns Hopkins University, The Aberrantly methylated genes in pancreatic cancer 08785614 Cl. 536-24.3. …

39.    www.uspto.gov

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week46/OG/html/1408-3/US08889697-20141118.html

wherein said cancer is pancreatic cnacer, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL …

40.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week39/OG/patentee/alphaM_Utility.htm

Malafa, Mokenge P.; and Sebti, Said M., to University of South Florida Delta-tocotrienol treatment and prevention of pancreatic cancer 08846653 Cl. …

41.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week02/OG/patentee/alphaK_Utility.htm

… Taro, to National University Corporation Kanazawa University Detection of digestive organ cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, pancreatic …

42.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week11/OG/patentee/alphaK_Utility.htm

Kirn, David; to Sillajen Biotherapeutics, Inc. Oncolytic vaccinia virus cancer therapy 08980246 Cl. 424-93.2. Kirn, Larry J.; …

43.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week39/OG/patentee/alphaM_Utility.htm

Malafa, Mokenge P.; and Sebti, Said M., to University of South Florida Delta-tocotrienol treatment and prevention of pancreatic cancer 08846653 Cl. …

44.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week35/OG/patentee/alphaS_Utility.htm

list of patentees to whom patents were issued on the 2nd day of september, 2014 and to whom reexamination certificates were issued during the week …

45.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week42/OG/patentee/alphaS.htm

… Therapeutics Inc. Compounds and compositions for stabilizing hypoxia inducible factor-2 alpha as a method for treating cancer 08865748 Cl. …

46.    [PDF] Paper No. 12 UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE …

http://www.uspto.gov/sites/default/files/ip/boards/bpai/decisions/prec/bhide.pdf

high incidence of ras involvement, such as colon and pancreatic tumors. By … withcancer or pre-cancerous states will serve to treat or palliate the …

47.    CPC Scheme – C07K PEPTIDES – United States Patent and …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/cpc/html/cpc-C07K.html

PEPTIDES (peptides in … Cancer-associated SCM-recognition factor, CRISPP} [2013‑01] … Kazal type inhibitors, e.g. pancreatic secretory inhibitor, …

48.    Class Definition for Class 514 – DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/uspc514/defs514.htm

… compound X useful as an anti-cancer … certain rules as to patent … Cystic fibrosis is manifested by faulty digestion due to a deficiency of pa …

49.    United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/cpc/html/cpc-G01N_3.html

Cancer-associated SCM-recognition factor, CRISPP . G01N 2333/4748. . . . . … Bovine/basic pancreatic trypsin inhibitor (BPTI, aprotinin) G01N …

50.    Class Definition for Class 530 – CHEMISTRY: NATURAL RESINS …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/uspc530/defs530.htm

CLASS 530 , CHEMISTRY: NATURAL … Typically the processes of this subclass include solvent extraction of pancreatic … as well as with some forms of …

51.    CPC Definition – A61K PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL, OR …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/cpc/html/defA61K.html

PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL, OR TOILET PURPOSES … i.e. Pancreatic stem cells are classified in A61K 35/39, … preparations containing cancer a …

52.    Class 530: CHEMISTRY: NATURAL RESINS OR DERIVATIVES …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/offices/ac/ido/oeip/taf/def/530.htm

Typically the processes of this subclass include solvent extraction of pancreatic … 828 for cancer -associated proteins … provided for in Class …

53.    United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/cpc/html/cpc-G01N_1.html

Home page of the United States Patent and … Pancreatic cells} G01N 33/5073 … – relevant features relating to a specifically defined cancer are …

54.    *****TBD***** – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/shadowFiles/defs514sf.htm?514_971&S&10E&10F

class 514, drug, bio-affecting and body treating compositions …

55.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week47/OG/patentee/alphaN_Utility.htm

… Dale E., to Buck Institute for Age Research, The Reagents and methods for cancertreatment and … useful for diagnosis and treatment of pancreati …

56.    United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/classification/cpc/html/cpc-C12Y_2.html

Pancreatic ribonuclease (3.1.27.5) C12Y 301/27006. . Enterobacter ribonuclease (3.1.27.6) C12Y 301/27007. . Ribonuclease F (3.1.27.7) C12Y 301/27008. …

57.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week01/OG/patentee/alphaI_Utility.htm

Institute for Cancer Research: See … and Segev, Hanna, to Technion Research & Development Foundation Limited Populations of pancreatic …

58.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week53/OG/patentee/alphaC.htm

Cancer Research Technology Limited: See–Collins, Ian; Reader, John Charles; Klair, Suki; Scanlon, Jane; Addison, Glynn; and Cherry, Michael 08618121 …

59.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week12/OG/patentee/alphaP_Utility.htm

… to University Health Network Cyclic inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer … progenitor cells and pancreatic endocrine …

60.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week47/OG/patentee/alphaI.htm

… to King Fahd University of Petroleum and Minerals Cytotoxic compounds for treatingcancer … or preventing a pancreatic dysfunction 08894972 Cl …

61.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week50/OG/patentee/alphaC.htm

… and Taylor-Papadimitriou, Joyce, to Københavns Universitet Generation of a cancer-specific … to CuRNA, Inc. Treatment of pancreatic …

62.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week29/OG/patentee/alphaP_Utility.htm

… to Cedars-Sinai Medical Center Drug delivery of temozolomide for systemic based treatment of cancer … Pancreatic enzyme compositions and …

63.    Class 424: DRUG, BIO-AFFECTING AND BODY TREATING …

http://www.uspto.gov/web/offices/ac/ido/oeip/taf/def/424.htm

… a disclosed or even specifically claimed utility (i.e., compound X having an attached radionuclide useful as an anti-cancer diagnostic or …

64.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week25/OG/patentee/alphaT_Utility.htm

… Chang-Jer, to Gold Nanotech Inc. Physical nano-complexes for preventing and treating cancer and … and protective solution for protecting pancrea …

65.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week27/OG/patentee/alphaA_Utility.htm

… Thomas T., to Penn State Research Foundation, The In vivo photodynamic therapy ofcancer via a near infrared … of pancreatic beta-cells by …

66.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week32/OG/patentee/alphaB_Utility.htm

Birnie, Richard; to University of York, The Cancer vaccine 08802619 Cl. 514-1. Birtwhistle, Daniel P.; Long, James R.; and Reinke, Robert E., …

67.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week20/OG/patentee/alphaC_Utility.htm

… to Cornell University Method for treating cancer 08729133 Cl. 514-673 … methods for promoting the generation of PDX1+ pancreatic cells …

68.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week49/OG/patentee/alphaL_Utility.htm

… Kurt, to Abbvie Biotherapeutics Inc. Compositions against cancer antigen LIV-1 and uses … H., to Amylin Pharmaceuticals, LLC Pancreatic …

69.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week11/OG/patentee/alphaS_Utility.htm

… Kenji; and Matsuda, Hirokazu, to Kyoto University Molecular probe for imaging ofpancreatic islets and use … use in the treatment of cancer …

70.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week36/OG/patentee/alphaK.htm

… Emi; Matsumi, Chiemi; and Saitoh, Yukie, to Actgen Inc Antibody having anti-cancer … The Plectin-1 targeted agents for detection and treatment …

71.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week53/OG/patentee/alphaK.htm

list of patentees to whom patents were issued on the 31th day of december, 2013 and to whom reexamination certificates were issued during the week …

72.    Patentee Index – United States Patent and Trademark Office

http://www.uspto.gov/web/patents/patog/week40/OG/patentee/alphaK_Utility.htm

… Uemoto, Shinji; and Kawaguchi, Yoshiya, to Kyoto University Method of culturingpancreatic islet-like tissues by a … of breast cancer 08853183 …

Clinical Trials:

Region Name   Number of Studies
World 1824  
Africa   [map]   10  
Central America   [map]   4  
East Asia   [map]   179  
Japan 40   [studies]
Europe   [map]   444  
Middle East   [map]   46  
North America 1189  
Canada   [map]   102   [studies]
Mexico 11   [studies]
United States   [map]   1144   [studies]
Alabama 60   [studies]
Alaska 4   [studies]
Arizona 107   [studies]
Arkansas 23   [studies]
California 235   [studies]
Colorado 79   [studies]
Connecticut 51   [studies]
Delaware 15   [studies]
District of Columbia 36   [studies]
Florida 187   [studies]
Georgia 77   [studies]
Hawaii 15   [studies]
Idaho 11   [studies]
Illinois 139   [studies]
Indiana 94   [studies]
Iowa 51   [studies]
Kansas 39   [studies]
Kentucky 48   [studies]
Louisiana 46   [studies]
Maine 11   [studies]
Maryland 189   [studies]
Massachusetts 142   [studies]
Michigan 116   [studies]
Minnesota 114   [studies]
Mississippi 14   [studies]
Missouri 91   [studies]
Montana 27   [studies]
Nebraska 42   [studies]
Nevada 32   [studies]
New Hampshire 25   [studies]
New Jersey 64   [studies]
New Mexico 27   [studies]
New York 230   [studies]
North Carolina 111   [studies]
North Dakota 22   [studies]
Ohio 136   [studies]
Oklahoma 41   [studies]
Oregon 54   [studies]
Pennsylvania 180   [studies]
Rhode Island 23   [studies]
South Carolina 72   [studies]
South Dakota 23   [studies]
Tennessee 115   [studies]
Texas 212   [studies]
Utah 36   [studies]
Vermont 11   [studies]
Virginia 69   [studies]
Washington 83   [studies]
West Virginia 12   [studies]
Wisconsin 74   [studies]
Wyoming 9   [studies]
North Asia   [map]   24  
Pacifica   [map]   39  
South America   [map]   30  
South Asia   [map]   23  
Southeast Asia   [map]   25  

Search Results for ‘pancreas cancer’

Genomics and Epigenetics: Genetic Errors and Methodologies – Cancer and Other Diseases on March 25, 2015 |  Read Full Post »

@Mayo Clinic: Inhibiting the gene, protein kinase D1 (PKD1), and its protein could stop spread of this form of Pancreatic Cancer on February 24, 2015  Read Full Post »

The Changing Economics of Cancer Medicine: Causes for the Vanishing of Independent Oncology Groups in the US on November 26, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Autophagy-Modulating Proteins and Small Molecules Candidate Targets for Cancer Therapy: Commentary of Bioinformatics Approaches on September 18, 2014 |  Read Full Post »

New Immunotherapy Could Fight a Range of Cancers on June 4, 2014  Read Full Post »

Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer: Efficacy of FOLFIRINOX  on June 1, 2014  Read Full Post »

 

ipilimumab, a Drug that blocks CTLA-4 Freeing T cells to Attack Tumors @DM Anderson Cancer Center on May 28, 2014 | Read Full Post »

NIH Study Demonstrates that a New Cancer Immunotherapy Method could be Effective against a wide range of Cancers  on May 12, 2014 |

Cancer Research: Curations and Reporting Posted in on May 6, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Cancer Research: Curations and Reporting: Aviva Lev-Ari, PhD, RN  on April 20, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Prologue to Cancer – e-book Volume One – Where are we in this journey? on April 13, 2014 | Read Full Post »

 

Epilogue: Envisioning New Insights in Cancer Translational Biology on April 4, 2014 | Read Full Post »

 

A Synthesis of the Beauty and Complexity of How We View Cancer

on March 26, 2014 Read Full Post »

 

Pancreatic Cancer Diagnosis: Four Novel Histo-pathologies Screening Characteristics offers more Reliable Identification of Cellular Features associated with Cancer

on November 13, 2013 | Read Full Post »

 

What`s new in pancreatic cancer research and treatment?

on October 21, 2013 | Read Full Post »

 

Family History of Cancer may increase the Risk of Close Relatives developing the Same Type of Cancer as well as Different Types

on July 25, 2013 Read Full Post »

 

2013 Perspective on “War on Cancer” on December 23, 1971

on July 5, 2013 Read Full Post »

 

Mesothelin: An early detection biomarker for cancer (By Jack Andraka) on April 21, 2013 |  Read Full Post »

Pancreatic Cancer: Genetics, Genomics and Immunotherapy

on April 11, 2013 |  Read Full Post »

New methods for Study of Cellular Replication, Growth, and Regulation on March 25, 2015 Read Full Post »

Diet and Diabetes on March 2, 2015 |  Read Full Post »

Neonatal Pathophysiology on February 22, 2015 |  Read Full Post »

Endocrine Action on Midbrain on February 12, 2015 | Read Full Post »

Gastrointestinal Endocrinology on February 10, 2015 | Read Full Post »

Parathyroids and Bone Metabolism on February 10, 2015 | Read Full Post »

Pancreatic Islets on February 8, 2015 | Read Full Post »

Pituitary Neuroendocrine Axis on February 4, 2015 |Read Full Post »

Highlights in the History of Physiology on December 28, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Outline of Medical Discoveries between 1880 and 1980 on December 3, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Diagnostics Industry and Drug Development in the Genomics Era: Mid 80s to Present on November 21, 2014  Read Full Post »

Implantable Medical Devices to 2015 – Industry Market Research, Market Share, Market Size, Sales, Demand Forecast, Market Leaders, Company Profiles, Industry Trends on November 17, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Pharmacological Action of Steroid Hormones on October 27, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Metabolomics Summary and Perspective on October 16, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Pancreatic Tumors take nearly 20 years to become Lethal after the first Genetic Perturbations – Discovery @ The Johns Hopkins University  on October 15, 2014 |Read Full Post »

Isoenzymes in cell metabolic pathways on October 6, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Metformin, thyroid-pituitary axis, diabetes mellitus, and metabolism on September 28, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Carbohydrate Metabolism on August 13, 2014 | Read Full Post »

A Primer on DNA and DNA Replication on July 29, 2014 | Read Full Post »

The Discovery and Properties of Avemar – Fermented Wheat Germ Extract: Carcinogenesis Suppressor on June 7, 2014 | Read Full Post »

Previous Articles posted on Prostate Cancer

@Mayo Clinic: Inhibiting the gene, protein kinase D1 (PKD1), and its protein could stop spread of this form of Pancreatic Cancer 2012pharmaceutical 2015/02/24
Published
Thymoquinone, an extract of nigella sativa seed oil, blocked pancreatic cancer cell growth and killed the cells by enhancing the process of programmed cell death. larryhbern 2014/07/15
Published
Moringa Oleifera Kills 97% of Pancreatic Cancer Cells in Vitro larryhbern 2014/06/21
Published
The Gonzalez protocol: Worse than useless for pancreatic cancer sjwilliamspa 2014/06/17
Published
An alternative approach to overcoming the apoptotic resistance of pancreatic cancer 2012pharmaceutical 2014/06/03
Published
Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer: Efficacy of FOLFIRINOX 2012pharmaceutical 2014/06/01
Published
Consortium of European Research Institutions and Private Partners will develop a microfluidics-based lab-on-a-chip device to identify Pancreatic Cancer Circulating Tumor Cells (CTC) in blood 2012pharmaceutical 2014/04/10
Published
Pancreatic Cancer Diagnosis: Four Novel Histo-pathologies Screening Characteristics offers more Reliable Identification of Cellular Features associated with Cancer 2012pharmaceutical 2013/11/13
Published
What`s new in pancreatic cancer research and treatment? 2012pharmaceutical 2013/10/21
Published
Pancreatic Cancer: Genetics, Genomics and Immunotherapy tildabarliya 2013/04/11
Published
Pancreatic cancer genomes: Axon guidance pathway genes – aberrations revealed 2012pharmaceutical 2012/10/24
Published
Biomarker tool development for Early Diagnosis of Pancreatic Cancer: Van Andel Institute and Emory University 2012pharmaceutical 2012/10/24
Published
Personalized Pancreatic Cancer Treatment Option 2012pharmaceutical 2012/10/16
Published
Battle of Steve Jobs and Ralph Steinman with Pancreatic cancer: How we lost ritusaxena 2012/05/21
Published
Early Biomarker for Pancreatic Cancer Identified pkandala 2012/05/17
Published
Usp9x: Promising therapeutic target for pancreatic cancer ritusaxena 2012/05/14
Published
War on Cancer Needs to Refocus to Stay Ahead of Disease Says Cancer Expert sjwilliamspa 2015/03/27
Published
Antibiotics that target mitochondria effectively eradicate cancer stem cells, across multiple tumor types: Treating cancer like an infectious disease 2012pharmaceutical 2015/02/15
Published
Pancreatic Islets larryhbern 2015/02/08
Publ
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Molecular Biology of Pancreatic Cancer: How Useful Is It in Clinical Practice? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
George H Sakorafas, Vasileios Smyrniotis
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Endoscopic Findings of Upper Gastrointestinal Lesions in Patients with Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Hiroyuki Watanabe, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Two Avirulent, Lentogenic Strains of Newcastle Disease Virus Are Cytotoxic for Some Human Pancreatic Tumor Lines In Vitro ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Megan Delimata, Sooraj Tejaswi
Vol 14, No 3 (2013): May – p. 221-303 Duration of Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer in a Case-Control Study in the Midwest and the Iowa Women’s Health Study (IWHS) Cohort ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sarah A Henry, Anna E Prizment, Kristin E Anderson
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Endoscopic Management of Pain in Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Parit Mekaroonkamol, Field F Willingham, Saurabh Chawla
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Advancements in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer: 2013 ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 15, No 5 (2014): September – p. 413-540 New-onset Diabetes: A Clue to the Early Diagnosis of Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Suresh T Chari
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 2: Carcinogenesis Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Murat Saruc, Jens Standop, Hiroshi Egami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 5 (2013): September – p. 475-527 Synchronous Triple Cancers of the Pancreas, Stomach, and Cecum Treated with S-1 Followed by Pancrelipase Treatment of Pancreatic Exocrine Insufficiency ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Daisuke Ishikawa, Shigeki Nanjo, Shinji Takeuchi, Tadaaki Yamada, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Toshifumi Gabata, Osamu Matsui, Hiroko Ikeda, Yasushi Takamatsu, Sakae Iwakami, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 1 (2012): January – p. 1-123 Newcastle Disease Virus LaSota Strain Kills Human Pancreatic Cancer Cells in Vitro with High Selectivity ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Sooraj Tejaswi, Megan Delimata
Vol 13, No 3 (2012): May – p. 252-329 Rare Solid Tumors of the Pancreas as Differential Diagnosis of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sabine Kersting, Monika S Janot, Johanna Munding, Dominique Suelberg, Andrea Tannapfel, Ansgar M Chromik, Waldemar Uhl, Uwe Bergmann
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 A Proteomic Comparison of Formalin-Fixed Paraffin-Embedded Pancreatic Tissue from Autoimmune Pancreatitis, Chronic Pancreatitis, and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL. TABLES 1-4 (PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Scott Brizard, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Highlights on the First Line Treatment of Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Krishna S Gunturu, Jamie Jarboe, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Pancreatic Cancer: Updates on Translational Research and Future Applications ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Evangelos G Sarris, Konstantinos N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Pancreatic Cancer: What About Screening and Detection? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Froso Konstantinou, Kostas N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Najla Hatem El-Jurdi, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 1: Basic Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Murat Saruc, Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Atsushi Itami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Analysis of Endoscopic Pancreatic Function Test (ePFT)-Collected Pancreatic Fluid Proteins Precipitated Via Ultracentrifugation ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL.(XLS)  SUPPL.(PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Aleksandr Gaun, John F K Sauld, Ali Ghoulidi, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Regulation Mechanisms of the Hedgehog Pathway in Pancreatic Cancer: A Review ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Kim Christin Honselmann, Moritz Pross, Carlo Maria Felix Jung, Ulrich Friedrich Wellner, Steffen Deichmann, Tobias Keck, Dirk Bausch
Vol 14, No 5S (2013): September (Suppl.) – p. 528-602 History of Previous Cancer in Patients Undergoing Resection for Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  PDF
Francesca Gavazzi, Maria Rachele Angiolini, Cristina Ridolfi, Maria Carla Tinti, Marco Madonini, Marco Montorsi, Alessandro Zerbi
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Molecular Biology of Pancreatic Cancer: How Useful Is It in Clinical Practice? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
George H Sakorafas, Vasileios Smyrniotis
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Endoscopic Findings of Upper Gastrointestinal Lesions in Patients with Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Hiroyuki Watanabe, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Two Avirulent, Lentogenic Strains of Newcastle Disease Virus Are Cytotoxic for Some Human Pancreatic Tumor Lines In Vitro ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Megan Delimata, Sooraj Tejaswi
Vol 14, No 3 (2013): May – p. 221-303 Duration of Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer in a Case-Control Study in the Midwest and the Iowa Women’s Health Study (IWHS) Cohort ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sarah A Henry, Anna E Prizment, Kristin E Anderson
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Endoscopic Management of Pain in Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Parit Mekaroonkamol, Field F Willingham, Saurabh Chawla
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Advancements in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer: 2013 ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 15, No 5 (2014): September – p. 413-540 New-onset Diabetes: A Clue to the Early Diagnosis of Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Suresh T Chari
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 2: Carcinogenesis Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Murat Saruc, Jens Standop, Hiroshi Egami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 5 (2013): September – p. 475-527 Synchronous Triple Cancers of the Pancreas, Stomach, and Cecum Treated with S-1 Followed by Pancrelipase Treatment of Pancreatic Exocrine Insufficiency ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Koushiro Ohtsubo, Daisuke Ishikawa, Shigeki Nanjo, Shinji Takeuchi, Tadaaki Yamada, Hisatsugu Mouri, Kaname Yamashita, Kazuo Yasumoto, Toshifumi Gabata, Osamu Matsui, Hiroko Ikeda, Yasushi Takamatsu, Sakae Iwakami, Seiji Yano
Vol 13, No 1 (2012): January – p. 1-123 Newcastle Disease Virus LaSota Strain Kills Human Pancreatic Cancer Cells in Vitro with High Selectivity ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Robert J Walter, Bashar M Attar, Asad Rafiq, Sooraj Tejaswi, Megan Delimata
Vol 13, No 3 (2012): May – p. 252-329 Rare Solid Tumors of the Pancreas as Differential Diagnosis of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Sabine Kersting, Monika S Janot, Johanna Munding, Dominique Suelberg, Andrea Tannapfel, Ansgar M Chromik, Waldemar Uhl, Uwe Bergmann
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 A Proteomic Comparison of Formalin-Fixed Paraffin-Embedded Pancreatic Tissue from Autoimmune Pancreatitis, Chronic Pancreatitis, and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL. TABLES 1-4 (PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Scott Brizard, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 13, No 4 (2012): July – p. 330-469 Highlights on the First Line Treatment of Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Krishna S Gunturu, Jamie Jarboe, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Pancreatic Cancer: Updates on Translational Research and Future Applications ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Evangelos G Sarris, Konstantinos N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Pancreatic Cancer: What About Screening and Detection? ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Froso Konstantinou, Kostas N Syrigos, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 14, No 4 (2013): July – p. 304-474 Diabetes and Pancreatic Cancer ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Najla Hatem El-Jurdi, Muhammad Wasif Saif
Vol 13, No 5 (2012): September – p. 470-547 Effects of Porcine Pancreatic Enzymes on the Pancreas of Hamsters. Part 1: Basic Studies ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Murat Saruc, Fumiaki Nozawa, Mehmet Yalniz, Atsushi Itami, Parviz M Pour
Vol 14, No 2 (2013): March – p. 109-220 Analysis of Endoscopic Pancreatic Function Test (ePFT)-Collected Pancreatic Fluid Proteins Precipitated Via Ultracentrifugation ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF  SUPPL.(XLS)  SUPPL.(PDF)
Joao A Paulo, Vivek Kadiyala, Aleksandr Gaun, John F K Sauld, Ali Ghoulidi, Peter A Banks, Hanno Steen, Darwin L Conwell
Vol 16, No 1 (2015): January – p. 1-99 Regulation Mechanisms of the Hedgehog Pathway in Pancreatic Cancer: A Review ABSTRACT  HTML  PDF
Kim Christin Honselmann, Moritz Pross, Carlo Maria Felix Jung, Ulrich Friedrich Wellner, Steffen Deichmann, Tobias Keck, Dirk Bausch
Vol 14, No 5S (2013): September (Suppl.) – p. 528-602 History of Previous Cancer in Patients Undergoing Resection for Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma ABSTRACT  PDF
Francesca Gavazzi, Maria Rachele Angiolini, Cristina Ridolfi, Maria Carla Tinti, Marco Madonini, Marco Montorsi, Alessandro Zerbi

Read Full Post »

Parathyroids and Bone Metabolism

Writer and Curator: Larry H. Bernstein, MD, FCAP 

 

 

Parathyroid hormone (PTH), parathormone or parathyrin, is secreted by the chief cells of the parathyroid glands as a polypeptide containing 84 amino acids. It acts to increase the concentration of calcium (Ca2+) in the blood, whereas calcitonin (a hormone produced by the parafollicular cells (C cells) of the thyroid gland) acts to decrease calcium concentration. PTH acts to increase the concentration of calcium in the blood by acting upon the parathyroid hormone 1 receptor (high levels in bone and kidney) and the parathyroid hormone 2 receptor (high levels in the central nervous system, pancreas, testis, and placenta). PTH half-life is approximately 4 minutes.[2] It has a molecular mass of 9.4 kDa.

hPTH-(1-34) crystallizes as a slightly bent, long helical dimer. Analysis reveals that the extended helical conformation of hPTH-(1-34) is the likely bioactive conformation.[4] The N-terminal fragment 1-34 of parathyroid hormone (PTH) has been crystallized and the structure has been refined to 0.9 Å resolution.

The_ribbon_cartoon_structure - hPTH helical dimer

The_ribbon_cartoon_structure – hPTH helical dimer

http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/1/1e/The_ribbon_cartoon_structure.png

Regulation of serum calcium

PTH was one of the first hormones to be shown to use the G-protein, adenylyl cyclase second messenger system.

Normal total plasma calcium level ranges from 8.5 to 10.2 mg/dL (2.12 mmol/L to 2.55 mmol/L).

Region Effect
bone It enhances the release of calcium from the large reservoir contained in the bones.[7] Bone resorption is the normal destruction of bone by osteoclasts, which are indirectly stimulated by PTH. Stimulation is indirect since osteoclasts do not have a receptor for PTH; rather, PTH binds to osteoblasts, the cells responsible for creating bone. Binding stimulates osteoblasts to increase their expression of RANKL and inhibits their expression of Osteoprotegerin (OPG). OPG binds to RANKL and blocks it from interacting with RANK, a receptor for RANKL. The binding of RANKL to RANK (facilitated by the decreased amount of OPG available for binding the excess RANKL) stimulates these osteoclast precursors to fuse, forming new osteoclasts, which ultimately enhances bone resorption
kidney It enhances active reabsorption of calcium and magnesium from distal tubules and the thick ascending limb. As bone is degraded, both calcium and phosphate are released. It also decreases the reabsorption of phosphate, with a net loss in plasma phosphate concentration. When the calcium:phosphate ratio increases, more calcium is free in the circulation
intestine via kidney It enhances the absorption of calcium in the intestine by increasing the production of activated vitamin D. Vitamin D activation occurs in the kidney. PTH up-regulates25-hydroxyvitamin D3 1-alpha-hydroxylase, the enzyme responsible for 1-alpha hydroxylation of 25-hydroxy vitamin D, converting vitamin D to its active form (1,25-dihydroxy vitamin D). This activated form of vitamin D increases the absorption of calcium (as Ca2+ ions) by the intestine via calbindin.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Parathyroid_hormone

Development of Present Concepts of the Parathyroid –
The Parathyroids – Progress, problems and practice,
in Current Problems in Surgery, 1971; 8(8): 3-64.
Leon Goldman, Gilbert Gordon, Betty S. Roof
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0011-3840(71)80008-4

The parathyroid gland first achieved clinical significance because of hypoparathyroid tetany. Tetany: a syndrome manifested by painful muscle spasms or rigors; is derived from the Greek:  tetanos, past participle of the verb teinein, meaning “to stretch,” Tetany : stretched, or spastic, in modern terms “up tight.,’ When the word was used by Hippocrates, no differentiation was made between the types of muscular spasms caused by neurotoxins (e.g., lockjaw) and those of metabolic causes. The word ~ went through the Latin, tetanus, and to French. Te’tanie, where the attribute of intermittent muscular spasm was added.

Owea's drawing of parathyroid gland of Indian rhinoceros

Owea’s drawing of parathyroid gland of Indian rhinoceros

Owea’s drawing of parathyroid gland of Indian rhinoceros

According to file Oxford English Dictionary, the relation of tetany to surgical operations was noted in tile year 1805 in The Medical Journal XIV, 304: “tetanie affections very often to|low the great operations. . .” It is not clear from this reference what type of operations were invo]ved.  The relationship of tetany to thyroidectomy was recognized as early as 1878 when WoIfler described convulsions in one of the patients on whom Billroth had performed a total thyroidectomy. The great surgeon WilIiam Stewart Halsted suggested that postoperative hypoparathyroidism had not been reported earlier because before that time total thyroidectomy had always been fatal, leaving insufficient time for tetany to develop. In 1883 Weiss collected 13 cases of tetany, all following total thyroidcctomy. The relation to total thyroidectomy became historically significant later when postoperative tetany was misinterpreted as the acute form of thyroid insufficiency, while myxedema was correctly recognized as the chronic form.
Anatomically, the parathyroid glands had been noted fleetingly by Remak (1855), by Virchow (1863) and probably by others in the course of human dissection. Perhaps better publicized was the description by Sir Richard Owen, published in 1852. As Hunterian Professor and Conservator of the Museum in the Royal College of Surgeons, Owen anatomized animals that died at the London Zoo. In 1849, while performing an autopsy on tile Great Indian rhinoceros, Owen clearly noted, drew and named the parathyroid gland (Fig. 1). However, microscopic examination was not reported, and it was not known at that time whether the parathyroid gland was separate.
The causal relationship of the parathyroid gland to post-thyroidectomy tetany was clarified by the French physiologist Eugdne Gley in 1891. He showed that, in the rabbit, removal of the thyroid gland was not responsible for these seizures but that removal of the parathyroid glands caused fatal convulsions.
Very soon after this, a parallel discovery was made in Berkeley, California, by Jacques Loeb.  Loeb noticed that the rhythmic contractions of a frog muscle in a saline medium were stopped by the addition of calcium. He concluded that calcium has the important function of inhibiting excessive neuromuscular
irritability.  Loeb’s studies led MacCallum, in 1909, to investigate the possibility that a low blood calcium level might be responsible for the increased excitability of the muscles, in hypoparathyroid tetany.  He and Voegtlin removed the parathyroids from dogs and showed that tetany ensued when the serum calcium level fell. They also showed that administration of calcium promptly relieved tetany. Less well known is their publication in the following
year, which entirely recanted the earlier view. Their observations that calcium, magnesium and strontium immediately abolish tetany, and the report of Joseph and Sleltzer that infusion of hypertonic sodium chloride slowly relieves this kind of tetany, led MacCallum to believe that the effect of calcium was nonspecific.
By this time thyroid surgery was being performed widely. The Reverdin brothers in Geneva noted what they considered complex nervous manifestations following total thyroidectomv, Moussu’ s observations in animals were confirmed in patients; post-thyroidectomy convulsions were not necessarily fatal.
Thyroid surgery was now sufficiently improved so that Kocher was able to find symptoms of tetany–and these were transient ….. in only 1 of his 18 cases of total thyroidectomy. How many more would have been identified as victims of hypoparathyroidism by appropriate chemical examination can only be conjectured. By 1907 Halsted had recognized the importance of the parathyroids and how essential the intimate knowledge of their anatomy is to the goiter surgeon. Halsted put a bright young medical student to work on this project as a penalty for delinquent attendance at lectures. The sketch of the beautiful dissection by the student, Herbert McLean Evans, was used by Halsted to illustrate his monograph on The Operative History of Goiter. On the basis of this knowledge, of anatomy, it was established that the parathyroids are usually related to the posterior capsule and that leaving this capsule intact greatly reduces the risk of tetany.
In 1923 the distinguished Norwegian physician-physiologist, Harald Salvesen published beautiful, imaginative and thorough studies in which he showed, that complete parathyroid ablation invariably lowered the blood calcium, that the blood sugar level was not altered and that guanidine accumulation occurred only terminally during agonal convulsions. He further found that parathyroid tetany could be prevented by calcium feeding and confirmed MacCallum’s earlier observation that it could be promptly corrected by calcium infusion. He also noted that one of his dogs with parathyroid tetany developed a cataract. In our opinion, the relation of the parathyroid gland to calcium metabolism was first firmly established by Salvesen in 1923.
Consider the knowledge and use of endocrines in 1923. Desiccated thyroid, which Osler had praised as the miracle of modern metabolic therapy, was the only orally effective endocrine preparation. ]nsulin had just been discovered. Another potent preparation was the hydrochloric acid extract of parathyroid glands made by Adolph Hanson. That it was an effective preparation is perhaps best attested by the fact that it is still used, under the name Parathyroid Extract USP, and that much of the work on the actions of parathyroid hormone has been carried out with this crude extract. In 1925 Collip, who had been of such immeasurable help to Banting, Best and McLeod in preparing a clean, potent insulin extract from normal pancreas, applied his genius to the parathyroid with an equally satisfactory result. His relatively clean parathyroid extract  made it possible for the first time to elucidate the actions of the parathyroid glands in man.
Using this preparation, Albright and Ellsworth in 1929 clarified the two fundamental actions of parathyroid hormone (PTH) identical with those obtained nowadays with the most highly purified preparations. These two actions are:
(1) elevation of serum calcium and
(2) excretion of phosphate by the kidneys, with a consequent lowering of the serum phosphate.
It will later be shown that the action that raises serum calcium levels is, for the most part, an increase in the rate of bone breakdown. It remained for Copp and associates to show in 1961 that another horrnone, calcitonin, with an opposite action, is necessary for maintenance of calcium homeostasis. And still later Chase and Aurbach showed in 1968 that the phosphaturic action of PTH is mediated by the enzyme adenyl cyclase, which stimulates production of cyclic 3’5′-adenosine monophosphate (AMP).
It is now clear that hypophosphatemia predisposes to hyperealcemia and that hyperphosphatemia can actually abolish hypercalcemia. However, numerous experiments, one of them by Albright’s collaborators, Ellsworth and Futeher in 1935 showed that parathyroid extract raised the serum calcium level in the absence of the kidneys.  Clearly, therefore, the calcium-mobilizing effect of PTH is not the result of the phosphate diuretic action only. Conclusive evidence was obtained by Barnicot of Cambridge in 1948. …
The brilliant group at the Massachusetts General Hospital, led by Aub and including two young men destined to make brilliant records in American medicine Fuller Albright and Waiter Bauer soon showed that the kind of hyperparathyroidism described by Recklinghausen, Mandl and Askanazy is, in fact, the end stage of a series of chemical events predictable from the known actions of PTH. Starting with the famous case of Captain Charles Martell, a mariner with severe bone disease, who shrank in stature in 10 years, Albright soon clarified the most significant feature of hyperparathyroidism: the hypercalcemia that is found in at least 99% of patients with proved primary hyperparathyroidism.
It was not until 1953 that Jonas Shota directly demonstrated the other action of excess PTH in hyperparathyroidism: a low rate of tubular reabsorption of phosphate (TRP), as fifteen years later, in 1968, Chase and Aurbach would show that this action is mediated by renal adenyl cyclase and cyclic AMP. Meanwhile, in 1935, Pappenheimer and Wilens had described another form of hyperparathyroidism arising not as a primary tumor, but as a secondary or compensatory response to the metabolic abnormalities of uremia. Goldman independently described this phenomenon. It .is noteworthy that hyperparathyroidism secondary to lack of dietary calcium had already been described by Erdheiqm and that  these 2 causes of secondary hyperparathyroidism, Uremia and intestinal malabsorption, have subsequently been shown, to have in comrnon inadequate intestinal absorption of calcium.
Since the classic studies of Sandstrom, Gley, Loeb, Salvesen, Cotlip, Aub, Bauer and Albright, enormous strides have advanced our knowledge of parathyroid physiology. Isolation, purification, and characterization of  the hormone and development of a highly sensitive  radioimmunoassay for PTH.  Almost slmultaneously in1959, Aurbach, Rasmussen and Craig obtained a purified bovine PTH. These two groups of investigators identified a similar peptide with a molecular weight of about 8,500 and with biological activity of about 3.000 units/mg. This peptide contains 84 amino acid residfies the first 30-45 are necessary for biologic and immunologic activity. A tentative molecular structure reported by Potts, Aurbach and Sherwood in 1965 has subsequently been modified by Brewer and Ronan, with confirmation by Niall et aI. in Potts’s laboratory. The heterogeneous  nature of circulating PTH was first: shown by Berson and Yalow using two antisera prepared from beef PTH but showing quantitative differences in reaction to circulating PTH. They were able  to detect two parathormones, one with a half-life of only 10-20 minutes, and another with a half-life of about 1.5 hours.
The parathyroid hormone-regulated transcriptome in osteocytes: Parallel actions with 1,25-dihydroxyvitamin D3 to oppose gene expression changes during differentiation and to promote mature cell function

Hillary C. St. John, MB Meyer, NA Benkusky, AH Carlson, M Prideaux, et al.
Bone 72 (2015) 81–91
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.bone.2014.11.010

Although localized to the mineralized matrix of bone, osteocytes are able to respond to systemic factors such as the calciotropic hormones 1, 25-(OH)2 D3 and PTH. In the present studies, we examined the transcriptomic response to PTH in an osteocyte cell model and found that this hormone regulated an extensive panel of genes. Surprisingly, PTH uniquely modulated two cohorts of genes, one that was expressed and associated with the osteoblast to osteocyte transition and the other a cohort that was expressed only in the mature osteocyte. Interestingly, PTH’s effects were largely to oppose the expression of differentiation-related genes in the former cohort, while potentiating the expression of osteocyte-specific genes in the latter cohort. A comparison of the transcriptional effects of PTH with those obtained previously with 1, 25-(OH)2 D3 revealed a subset of genes that was strongly overlapping. While 1, 25-(OH)2 D3 potentiated the expression of osteocyte-specific genes similar to that seen with PTH, the overlap between the two hormones was more limited. Additional experiments identified the PKA-activated phospho-CREB (pCREB) cistrome, revealing that while many of the differentiation-related PTH regulated genes were apparent targets of a PKA-mediated signaling pathway, a reduction in pCREB binding at sites associated with osteocyte-specific PTH targets appeared to involve alternative PTH activation pathways. That pCREB binding activities positioned near important hormone-regulated gene cohorts were localized to control regions of genes was reinforced by the presence of epigenetic enhancer signatures exemplified by unique modifications at histones H3 and H4. These studies suggest that both PTH and 1, 25-(OH)2 D3 may play important and perhaps cooperative roles in limiting osteocyte differentiation from its precursors while simultaneously exerting distinct roles in regulating mature osteocyte function. Our results provide new insight into transcription factor-associated mechanisms through which PTH and 1, 25-(OH)2 D3 regulate a plethora of genes important to the osteoblast/osteocyte lineage.

Bone, a dynamic and integrating tissue

The guest editors Bram C.J. van der Eerden, Anna Teti, Willian F. Zambuzzi
Archives of Biochemistry and Biophysics 561 (2014) 1–2
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.abb.2014.08.012

The special issue ‘Bone, a dynamic and integrating tissue’ provides the most recent information regarding the interacting nature of bone cells with their immediate neighboring cells within the skeleton as well as with distant target cells in other organs, using different types of both cellular and non-cellular communication. It should appeal to any scientist or clinician in the field, given the wide variety of topics, covering molecular, experimental cell and animal biology, biomechanics and -physics, genetics and medicine.

This special issue arose from a collaboration between the guest editors within ‘INTERBONE’, a European Union funded Marie Curie Actions – People – International Research Staff Scheme (PIRSESGA-2011-295181) on the interplay among bone cells, matrices and systems.

Over the recent years, many developments have paved new avenues to study signaling pathways and mechanisms in bone in much greater detail. Genetic progress has been made, which has provided us with novel genes behind already known as well as hitherto idiopathic bone diseases. The enormous expansion of specific animal models has enabled us to study new mechanisms and pathways in vivo in great spatial and temporal detail. As a consequence, novel treatment modalities have seen the light, which are predominantly focusing on bone anabolic therapies. These advances will not cease to exist and an exciting biological era lies ahead of us, with many discoveries to be made.

In this special issue of Archives in Biochemistry and Biophysics, experts in the field of bone metabolism have addressed the recent developments in which special attention is paid to the concept that bone is not just a static, isolated organ, but a dynamic and integrating tissue. Over the last decade, discoveries have led to the notion that bone cells are interacting with many other cell types within bone. Besides this intraskeletal communication, bone cells produce factors that are capable of controlling cell types and organs elsewhere in the organism, which are now being recognized as bona fide hormones.

All contributors have explored the recent advances made in their research area. The latest progress in osteoblast/osteocyte and osteoclast biology is revisited with special focus on bone morphogenetic proteins, microRNAs and extracellular vesicles as illustrative examples of different levels of communication between cell types. In separate chapters, the interaction of osteoblasts and osteoclasts, as well as their cross-talk with endothelial cells, fat cells, immune cells, hematopoietic stem cells and different types of cancer cells is discussed extensively, further emphasizing the interactive nature of bone cells in their microenvironment. Beside cell–cell interaction, attention has been paid to the osteointegration of bone cells in a non-cellular context, including extracellular matrix and metal devices, combining main components for bone bioengineering. Finally, the endocrine role of bone is discussed in great detail by several contributors, focusing on the control of bone cell function by the brain as well as the role of bone-produced factors in, amongst others, phosphate homeostasis, energy metabolism and fertility.

The Great Beauty of the osteoclast

Alfredo Cappariello, Antonio Maurizi, Vimal Veeriah, Anna Teti
Archives of Biochemistry and Biophysics 561 (2014) 13–21
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.abb.2014.08.009

Much has been written recently on osteoclast biology, but this cell type still astonishes scientists with its multifaceted functions and unique properties. The last three decades have seen a change in thinking about the osteoclast, from a cell with a single function, which just destroys the tissue it belongs to, to an ‘‘orchestrator’’ implicated in the concerted regulation of bone turnover. Osteoclasts have unique morphological features, organelle distribution and plasma membrane domain organization. They require polarization to cause extracellular bone breakdown and release of the digested bone matrix products into the circulation. Osteoclasts contribute to the control of skeletal growth and renewal. Alongside other organs, including kidney, gut, thyroid and parathyroid glands, they also affect calcemia and phosphatemia. Osteoclasts are very sensitive to pro-inflammatory stimuli, and studies in the ‘00s ascertained their tight link with the immune system, bringing about the question why bone needs a cell regulated by the immune system to remove the extracellular matrix components. Recently, osteoclasts have been demonstrated to contribute to the hematopoietic stem cell niche, controlling local calcium concentration and regulating the turnover of factors essential for hematopoietic stem cell mobilization. Finally, osteoclasts are important regulators of osteoblast activity and angiogenesis, both by releasing factors stored in the bone matrix, and secreting ‘‘clastokines’’ that regulate the activity of neighboring cells. All these facets will be discussed in this review article, with the aim of underscoring The Great Beauty of the osteoclast.

Osteoclasts: more than ‘bone eaters’

Julia F. Charles and Antonios O. Aliprantis
Trends in Molecular Medicine, Aug 2014; 20(8): 449-459
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.molmed.2014.06.001

As the only cells definitively shown to degrade bone, osteoclasts are key mediators of skeletal diseases including osteoporosis. Bone-forming osteoblasts, and hematopoietic and immune system cells, each influence osteoclast formation and function, but the reciprocal impact of osteoclasts on these cells is less well appreciated. We highlight here the functions that osteoclasts perform beyond bone resorption.
First, we consider how osteoclast signals may contribute to bone formation by osteoblasts and to the pathology of bone lesions such as fibrous dysplasia and giant cell tumors.
Second, we review the interaction of osteoclasts with the hematopoietic system, including the stem cell niche and adaptive immune cells. Connections between osteoclasts and other cells in the bone microenvironment are discussed within a clinically relevant framework.

Bone is a composite tissue of protein and mineral which undergoes continual remodeling to grow, heal damage, and regulate calcium and phosphate metabolism. This remodeling process is executed by the concerted and sequential effort of bone-resorbing osteoclasts and bone-forming osteoblasts, acting in what has been termed the basic multicellular unit (BMU) (Figure 1A). Osteocytes, long-lived osteoblast-derived cells that reside within the bone matrix, monitor bone quality and stress, and coordinate remodeling through membrane-bound and secreted factors. Skeletal integrity is maintained throughout the life-span by matching bone formation and resorption, a process referred to as osteoclast:osteoblast  ‘coupling.’ Coupling is thoroughly summarized in recent excellent reviews and in Figure 1.

Coupling: how osteoclasts ‘talk back’ to cells of the osteoblast lineage Coupling of bone formation to resorption is likely achieved through multiple mechanisms, including signals that stimulate the proliferation of pre-osteoblasts, their recruitment to resorption lacunae, and their differentiation into bone-forming cells. Cellular mediators of coupling include osteoclasts, osteoblasts, osteocytes, macrophages, and T cells, which produce a variety of factors including Wnt pathway regulators, such as sclerostin, and cytokines such as oncostatin M

Osteoclasts–osteoblast interactions in the basic multicellular unit (BMU).

Osteoclasts–osteoblast interactions in the basic multicellular unit (BMU).

Osteoclasts–osteoblast interactions in the basic multicellular unit (BMU).
Cell–cell contact mechanisms may also mediate OC-OB communication. Bidirectional signaling from OC ephrins and OB Eph receptors, and reverse signaling through RANKL on OBs, have both been invoked.

Box 1. Usurping local resources: osteoclasts feed bone invaders

Liberation of growth factors embedded in bone matrix by osteoclasts may promote metastatic tumor growth in bone. Reciprocal stimulation of osteoclasts by cancer cell derived parathyroid hormone related protein (PTHrP), and other factors, could potentiate growth factor release in what has been termed the ‘vicious cycle’ ]. Xenograft experiments utilizing breast cancer cells expressing a TGFβ responsive reporter demonstrated osteolytic metastases had high TGFβ activity. Inhibition of osteoclastic bone resorption with pamidronate reduced TGFβ activity and osteolytic lesions, suggesting that matrix resorption is a relevant source of TGFβ for skeletal metastasis in vivo. Although prophylactic pamidronate treatment decreased frequency of bone metastasis, the drug did not decrease disease progression if administered after tumor cell inoculation. Thus, whether inhibiting the release of matrix growth factors by osteoclasts has a substantive effect on tumor growth is unclear. Several bisphosphonates, as well as the anti-RANKL antibody denosumab, reduce skeletal events in metastatic cancer, but data on whether they prevent bone metastasis are inconsistent.

Immunoregulation by osteoclasts. Osteoclast precursors (OCPs) and osteoclasts (OCs) inhibit CD4 and CD8 T cell proliferation via nitric oxide (NO) production in response to T cell derived interferon g (IFNg). IFNg in turn inhibits differentiation of OCPs into mature OCs. OCs also present antigen through major histocompatibility complex class I (MHCI) to skew CD8+ T cells toward an induced Treg phenotype termed OC-iTcreg. OC-iTcreg cells in turn inhibit OCP differentiation to mature OC through IFNg, interleukin 10 (IL10), and IL6.

In mouse models, we suggest that systems for the temporal deletion of conditional alleles in osteoclasts and their precursors be established. Moreover, clinical research in humans with emerging therapeutics which specifically target key regulators of bone remodeling, such as RANKL, cathepsin K, and sclerostin, could include nested translational studies that specifically address their effects on the immune system, HSCs, and tumor growth, where appropriate. In these ways, a clear picture of osteoclast biology beyond their role as ‘bone eaters’ will emerge.

Leukemia inhibitory factor: A paracrine mediator of bone metabolism

Natalie A. Sims & Rachelle W. Johnson
Growth Factors, April 2012; 30(2): 76–87
http://dx.doi.org:/10.3109/08977194.2012.656760

Leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF) is a soluble interleukin-6 family cytokine that regulates a number of physiologic functions, including normal skeletal remodeling. LIF signals through the cytokine co-receptor glycoprotein-130 in complex with its cytokine-specific receptor [LIF receptor (LIFR)] to activate signaling cascades in cells of the skeletal system, including stromal cells, chondrocytes, osteoblasts, osteocytes, adipocytes, and synovial fibroblasts. LIF action on skeletal cells is cell-type specific, and frequently dependent on the state of cell differentiation. This review describes the expression patterns of LIF and LIFR in bone, their regulation by physiological and inflammatory agents, as well as cell-specific influences of LIF on osteoblast, osteoclast, chondrocyte, and adipocyte differentiation. The actions of LIF in normal skeletal growth and maintenance, in pathological states (e.g. autocrine tumor cell signaling and growth in bone) and inflammatory conditions (e.g. arthritis) will be discussed, as well as the signaling pathways activated by LIF and their importance in bone formation and resorption.

In vivo evidence of IGF-I–estrogen crosstalk in mediating the cortical bone response to mechanical strain

Subburaman Mohan, CG Bhat, JE Wergedal and C Kesavan
Bone Research (2014) 2, 14007 http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/boneres.2014.7

Although insulin-like growth factor-I (IGF-I) and estrogen signaling pathways have been shown to be involved in mediating the bone anabolic response to mechanical loading, it is not known whether these two signaling pathways crosstalk with each other in producing a skeletal response to mechanical loading. To test this, at 5 weeks of age, partial ovariectomy (pOVX) or a sham operation was performed on heterozygous IGF-I conditional knockout (HIGF-I KO) and control mice generated using a Cre-loxP approach. At 10 weeks of age, a 10 N axial load was applied on the right tibia of these mice for a period of 2 weeks and the left tibia was used as an internal non-non-loaded control. At the cortical site, partial estrogen loss reduced total volumetric bone mineral density (BMD) by 5% in control pOVX mice (P50.05, one-way ANOVA), but not in the H IGF-I KO pOVX mice. At the trabecular site, bone volume/total volume (BV/TV) was reduced by 5%–6% in both control pOVX (P,0.05) and H IGF-I KO pOVX (P50.05) mice. Two weeks of mechanical loading caused a 7%–8% and an 11%–13%(P,0.05 vs. non-loaded bones) increase in cortical BMD and cortical thickness (Ct.Th), respectively, in the control sham, control pOVX and H IGF-I KO sham groups. By contrast, the magnitude of cortical BMD (4%, P50.13) and Ct.Th (6%, P,0.05) responses were reduced by 50% in the H IGF-I KO pOVX mice compared to the other three groups. The interaction between genotype and estrogen deficiency on the mechanical loading-induced cortical bone response was significant (P,0.05) by two-way ANOVA. Two weeks of axial loading caused similar increases in trabecular BV/TV (13%–17%) and thickness (17%–23%) in all four groups of mice. In conclusion, partial loss of both estrogen and IGF-I significantly reduced cortical but not the trabecular bone response to mechanical loading, providing in vivo evidence of the above crosstalk in mediating the bone response to loading.

Role of FGF/FGFR signaling in skeletal development and homeostasis: learning from mouse models

Nan Su, Min Jin and Lin Chen
Bone Research (2014) 2, 14003; http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/boneres.2014.3

Fibroblast growth factor (FGF)/fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) signaling plays essential roles in bone development and diseases. Missense mutations in FGFs and FGFRs in humans can cause various congenital bone diseases, including chondrodysplasia syndromes, craniosynostosis syndromes and syndromes with dysregulated phosphate metabolism. FGF/FGFR signaling is also an important pathway involved in the maintenance of adult bone homeostasis. Multiple kinds of mouse models, mimicking human skeleton diseases caused by missense mutations in FGFs and FGFRs, have been established by knock-in/out and transgenic technologies. These genetically modified mice provide good models for studying the role of FGF/FGFR signaling in skeleton development and homeostasis. In this review, we summarize the mouse models of FGF signaling-related skeleton diseases and recent progresses regarding the molecular mechanisms, underlying the role of FGFs/FGFRs in the regulation of bone development and homeostasis. This review also provides a perspective view on future works to explore the roles of FGF signaling in skeletal development and homeostasis.

Osteoporosis in men: a review

Robert A Adler
Bone Research (2014) 2, 14001; http://dx.doi.org:/10.1038/boneres.2014.1

Osteoporosis and consequent fracture are not limited to postmenopausal women. There is increasing attention being paid to osteoporosis in older men. Men suffer osteoporotic fractures about 10 years later in life than women, but life expectancy is increasing faster in men than women. Thus, men are living long enough to fracture, and when they do the consequences are greater than in women, with men having about twice the 1-year fatality rate after hip fracture, compared to women. Men at high risk for fracture include those men who have already had a fragility fracture, men on oral glucocorticoids or those men being treated for prostate cancer with androgen deprivation therapy. Beyond these high risk men, there are many other risk factors and secondary causes of osteoporosis in men. Evaluation includes careful history and physical examination to reveal potential secondary causes, including many medications, a short list of laboratory tests, and bone mineral density testing by dual energy X-ray absorptiometry (DXA) of spine and hip. Recently, international organizations have advocated a single normative database for interpreting DXA testing in men and women. The consequences of this change need to be determined. There are several choices of therapy for osteoporosis in men, with most fracture reduction estimation based on studies in women.

From skeletal to non skeletal: The intriguing roles of BMP-9: A literature review

  1. Leblanc, G. Drouin, G. Grenier, N. Faucheux, R. Hamdy
    Advances in Bioscience and Biotechnology, 2013; 4: 31-46
    http://dx.doi.org/10.4236/abb.2013.410A4004

In the well-known superfamily of transforming growth factors beta (TGF-), bone morphogenetic proteins (BMPs) are one of the most compelling cytokines for their major role in regulation of cell growth and differentiation in both embryonic and adult tissues. This subfamily was first described for its ability of potentiating bone formation, but nowadays, the power of BMPs is well beyond the bone healing scope. Some of the BMPs have been well studied and described in the literature, but the BMP9 is still worthy of attention. It has been shown by many authors that it is the most potent osteogenic BMP. Moreover, it has been de- scribed as one of the rare circulating BMPs. In this paper, we will review the recent literature on BMP9 and the different avenues for future research in that field. Our primary scope is to review its relation to bone formation and to elaborate on the available literature on other systems.

Fong et al. recently demonstrated in vitro that rhBMP9 can also augment bone resorption. This increase was shown to be functional and not related to osteoclast formation. Furthermore, rhBMP9 could alter the intrinsic apoptosis pathway and increase survival of osteoclasts. The effect of rhBMP9 on osteoclast was explained by the presence of ALK1 and BMPRII co-receptors and their activation of the Smad 1/5/8 and non-smad MAPK/ERK pathways. These results show for the first time that BMP9 can directly affect human osteoclasts, acting on their function and their survival.

Insulin resistance is a systemic multifactorial impairment of glucose uptake. Muscle, a glucose consuming organ, needs Akt2 to be able to activate insulin-induced glucose uptake and this pathway seems to be severely impaired in insulin resistance. Interestingly, a combination of bioinformatic and high- throughput functional analyses have shown BMP9 to be the first hepatic factor to regulate blood glucose concencentration. Moreover, this effect was thought to be mediated by activation of Akt kinase in differentiated myotubes. Then, it has been demonstrated that recombinant BMP9 (1 and 5 mg/kg) improves glucose homeostasis in vivo in diabetic and non-diabetic rodents. The mechanism relied on the upregulation of Smad5 and Akt2 in differentiated rats myotubes. On the opposite side, Smad5 was downregulated in myotubes by de xamethasone, a well known hyperglycemia inducer and Smad5 knockdown in rats decreased Akt2 expression and phosphorylation leading to a decrease in insulin-induced glucose uptake by myotubes. It was then hypothesized that Smad5 regulated glucose uptake in skeletal muscle through Akt2 expression and phosphorylation. These findings also revealed Smad5 as a potential target for the treatment of type 2 diabetes. Hence, BMP9 could be seen as a potential activator of Smad5 for that purpose.

BMP9 is a major member of the TGF- superfamily that is implied in many fundamental developmental and pa- thologic processes. Future research will certainly bring answers to the many questions left open, and those an- swers will unquestionably lead to clinical applications.

Understanding Bone Loss

Max Stanley Chartrand, PhD.
DigiCare® Behavioral Research

During their lifetimes, at least half of those over age 50 will be at risk of developing osteoporosis. When we speak of bone loss we are primarily speaking of three diagnostic stages: Osteoarthritis (1-2% loss per annum), Osteopenia (3% per annum), and Osteoporosis (4-5%+ per annum) that are caused almost entirely by diet, hydration, lifestyle, medications, and environ-mental stressors.

Human bones are highly vascularized and mineralized tissues that are constantly being shaped and developed by cells called osteoblasts and torn down and resorbed by cells called osteoclasts. Recent research confirms that throughout one’s lifespan it is osteoblast activity that controls and dictates osteoclast activity as long as the body receives the nutrients it requires to maintain homeostasis. Growing children, for instance, have a far greater abundance of osteoblasts than of osteoclasts. By the time they reach young adulthood (at about age 26 for men, 22 for women) osteoclasts increase while osteoblasts slow down. Even so, humans of any age can increase osteoblast activity and slow the formation of osteoclasts through weight bearing exercise and other methods.

Long bone

Long bone

Long bone
The problem of bone shrinkage and decline in strength presents most often in health states involving:

  1. Sedentary Lifestyle, making weight bearing exercise a frontline defense against bone loss for everyone.
  2. Acidosis (low pH), from a diet that is nutritionally lacking, genetically modified, degerminated, irradiated, laden with toxins & over-processed.
  3. Chronic dehydration from too much caffeine and high fructose corn syrup (a GMO) and not enough water that is both ionized and alkalized.
  4. Lacking in calcium that is live, ionically charged, as well as phosphorus, magnesium, boron, and other minerals comprised in human bones. On the other hand, commercially available calcium causes atherosclerosis, kidney stones, bone spurs, cataracts, and yet MORE bone loss!
  5. Taking prescription medications, especially acid reflux meds, NSAIs and steroids. These and more interfere with osteoblast activity and weaken immunology. Osteoporosis meds prevent living bone mass!
  6. Unhealed injuries and deterioration of the spine, such as compression fractures (>50% of the US adult population), spinal stenosis, kyphosis, and scoliosis. These cause even more rapid loss of bone mass.
  7. Subclinical infections: tooth and gum sepsis, around artificial joints, keratosis obturans, kidney and bladder infections, neuropathies, and osteomyelitis as a result of injuries and/or shock to the bones.
  8. Heavy metal accumulations: lead, mercury, cadmium, arsenic, formaldehyde, cyanide, etc. found in the drinking water, fresh foods, cosmetics, paints, fuels, and a host of commonly used products.
  9.  Lifestyle Substances– Smoking, alcohol, excess coffee, marijuana, opium (including opiate pain killers), diet sodas, caffeine drinks.

The Kinetics of Skeletal Remodeling

Jan 1, 1966  by Lent C. Johnson
Semin Musculoskelet Radiol. 2000;4(1):1-15.

Bone tumor dynamics: an orthopedic pathology perspective.
Johnson LC1, Vinh TN, Sweet DE.

The diagnosis and classification of primary bone tumors remains as much a challenge today as it has for the last 80 plus years. Although pathology is invariably equated with the image of a diagnostic microscope, the vast majority of diagnoses are made grossly with the unaided eye, as are the tissue specimens selected for microscopic “confirmation.” Radiologic studies, particularly plain radiographs, remain the gold standard in gross pathologic diagnosis of the skeleton. Today, confirmation and final classification continue as the pathologist’s domain, but perhaps not for long, considering the evolving ancillary imaging techniques and progressive sophistication of magnetic resonance (MR) imaging. The bone tumor cases collected and compiled by Ernest Codman, M.D. during the second through fourth decades of this century formed the basis of the first tumor registry. The Codman Bone Sarcoma Registry demonstrated among other things the importance of radiographic/pathologic correlation, underscoring the reliability of a bone tumor’s location, margin (host bone/tumor interface), periosteal reaction, and matrix patterns as an accurate guide to classification and likely future biologic behavior. “A General Theory of Bone Tumors,” written by Lent C. Johnson nearly 50 years ago and published in the Bulletin of The New York Academy of Medicine (February 1953, second series, vol. 29, no. 2, pp. 164-171), provided a conceptual cellular approach to the understanding bone tumor dynamics reinforcing radiologic/pathologic correlation as a reliable diagnostic tool. At the time of Dr. Lent C. Johnson’s death (1910-1998), he was literally working on an updated version of his original article, the latter of which is being reprinted as the core of this illustrated revision. Our continued experience with bone tumors over the past five decades has only served to validate, on a daily basis, the fundamental principles outlined in Johnson’s original article. In like fashion, it is important to keep in mind that terminology and nomenclature has also evolved since 1953, despite a continued inability to achieve complete consensus.
PMID:  11061688    http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/11061688

Interactions between adrenal-regulatory and calcium-regulatory hormones in human health

Brown, J.M., Vaidya, A.

Curr Opinion in Endocr, Diabetes and Obesity 2014; 21 (3), pp. 193-201

Purpose of review: To summarize the evidence characterizing the interactions between adrenal-regulating and calcium-regulating hormones, and the relevance of these interactions to human cardiovascular and skeletal health. Recent findings: Human studies support the regulation of parathyroid hormone (PTH) by the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system (RAAS): angiotensin II may stimulate PTH secretion via an acute and direct mechanism, whereas aldosterone may exert a chronic stimulation of PTH secretion.
Studies in primary aldosteronism, congestive heart failure, and chronic
kidney disease have identified associations between hyperaldosteronism, hyperparathyroidism, and bone loss, which appear to improve when
inhibiting the RAAS. Conversely, elevated PTH and insufficient vitamin D
status have been associated with adverse cardiovascular outcomes, which
may be mediated by the RAAS. Studies of primary hyperparathyroidism implicate PTH-mediated stimulation of the RAAS, and recent evidence shows that the vitamin D-vitamin D receptor complex may negatively regulate renin expression and RAAS activity. Ongoing human interventional studies are evaluating the influence of RAAS inhibition on PTH and the influence of vitamin D receptor agonists on RAAS activity. Summary: Although previously considered independent endocrine systems, emerging evidence supports a complex web of interactions between adrenal-regulating and calcium-regulating hormones, with implications for human cardiovascular and
skeletal health.

Backbone modification of a polypeptide drug alters duration of action in vivo

Cheloha, R.W., Maeda, A., Dean, T., Gardella, T.J., Gellman, S.H.

Nature Biotechnology 2014; 32 (7), pp. 653-655 http://dx.doi.org/doi:10.1038/nbt.2920

Systematic modification of the backbone of bioactive polypeptides through amino acid residue incorporation could provide a strategy for generating molecules with improved drug properties, but such alterations can result in lower receptor affinity and potency. Using an agonist of parathyroid hormone receptor-1 (PTHR1), a G protein-coupled receptor in the B-family, we present an approach for residue replacement that enables both high activity and improved pharmacokinetic properties in vivo.

Mouse and human BAC transgenes recapitulate tissue-specific expression
of the vitamin D receptor in mice and rescue the VDR-null phenotype

Lee, S.M., Bishop, K.A., Goellner, J.J., O’Brien, C.A., Pike, J.W.
Endocrinology 2014; 155 (6), pp. 2064-2076
http://dx.doi.org/10.1210/en.2014-1107

The biological actions of 1,25-dihydroxyvitamin D3 (1,25(OH)2D3) are mediated by the vitamin D receptor (VDR), which is expressed in numerous target tissues in a cell type-selective manner. Recent studies using genomic analyses and recombined bacterial artificial chromosomes (BACs) have defined the specific features of mouse and human VDR gene loci in vitro. In the current study, we introduced recombined mouse and human VDR BACs as transgenes into mice and explored their expression capabilities in vivo. Individual transgenic mouse strains selectively expressed BAC derived mouse or human VDR proteins in appropriate vitamin D target tissues, thereby recapitulating the tissue-specific expression of endogenous mouse VDR. The mouse VDR transgene was also regulated by 1,25(OH)2D3 and dibutyryl-cAMP. When crossed into a VDR-null mouse background, both transgenes restored wild-type basal as well as 1,25(OH)2D3-inducible gene expression patterns in the appropriate tissues. This maneuver resulted in the complete rescue of the aberrant phenotype noted in the VDR-null mouse, including systemic features associated with altered calcium and phosphorus homeostasis and disrupted production of parathyroid hormone and fibroblast growth factor 23, and abnormalities associated with the skeleton, kidney, parathyroid gland, and the skin. This study suggests that both mouse and human VDR transgenes are capable of recapitulating basal and regulated expression of the VDR in the appropriate mouse tissues and restore 1,25(OH)2D 3 function. These results provide a baseline for further dissection of mechanisms integral to mouse and human VDR gene expression and offer the potential to explore the consequence of selective mutations in VDR proteins in vivo.

The sclerostin-independent bone anabolic activity of intermittent PTH treatment is mediated by T-cell-produced Wnt10β

Li, J.-Y., Walker, L.D., Tyagi, A.M., (…), Neale Weitzmann, M., Pacifici, R
Journal of Bone and Mineral Research 2014; 29 (1), pp. 43-54
http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1002/jbmr.2044/pdf

Both blunted osteocytic production of the Wnt inhibitor sclerostin (Scl) and increased T-cell production of the Wnt ligand Wnt10b contribute to the bone anabolic activity of intermittent parathyroid hormone (iPTH) treatment. However, the relative contribution of these mechanisms is unknown. In this study, we modeled the repressive effects of iPTH on Scl production in mice by treatment with a neutralizing anti-Scl antibody (Scl-Ab) to determine the contribution of T-cell-produced Wnt10b to the Scl-independent modalities of action of iPTH. We report that combined treatment with Scl-Ab and iPTH was more potent than either iPTH or Scl-Ab alone in increasing stromal cell production of OPG, osteoblastogenesis, osteoblast life span, bone turnover, bone mineral density, and trabecular bone volume and structure in mice with T cells capable of producing Wnt10b. In T-cell-null mice and mice lacking T-cell production of Wnt10b, combined treatment increased bone turnover significantly more than iPTH or Scl-Ab alone. However, in these mice, combined treatment with Scl-Ab and iPTH was equally effective as Scl-Ab alone in increasing the osteoblastic pool, bone volume, density, and structure. These findings demonstrate that the Scl-independent activity of iPTH on osteoblasts and bone mass is mediated by T-cell-produced Wnt10b. The data provide a proof of concept of a more potent therapeutic effect of combined treatment with iPTH and Scl-Ab than either alone.

N-cadherin restrains PTH activation of Lrp6/β-catenin signaling and osteoanabolic action

Revollo, L., Kading, J., Jeong, S.Y., (…), Mbalaviele, G., Civitelli, R.
Journal of Bone and Mineral Research 2015; 30 (2), pp. 274-28

Interaction between parathyroid hormone/parathyroid hormone-related peptide receptor 1 (PTHR1) and low-density lipoprotein receptor-related protein 6 (Lrp6) is important for parathyroid hormone (PTH) signaling and anabolic action. Because N-cadherin has been shown to negatively regulate canonical Wnt/β-catenin signaling, we asked whether N-cadherin alters PTH signaling and stimulation of bone formation. Ablation of the N-cadherin gene (Cdh2) in primary osteogenic lineage cells resulted in increased Lrp6/PTHR1 interaction in response to PTH1-34, associated with enhanced PTH-induced PKA signaling and PKA-dependent β-catenin C-terminus phosphorylation, which promotes β-catenin transcriptional activity. β-catenin C-terminus phosphorylation was abolished by Lrp6 knockdown. Accordingly, PTH1-34 stimulation of Tcf/Lef target genes, Lef1 and Axin2, was also significantly enhanced in Cdh2-deficient cells. This enhanced responsiveness to PTH extends to the osteo-anabolic effect of PTH, as mice with a conditional Cdh2 deletion in Osx+ cells treated with intermittent doses of PTH1-34 exhibited significantly larger gains in trabecular bone mass relative to control mice, the result of accentuated osteoblast activity. Therefore, N-cadherin modulates Lrp6/PTHR1 interaction, restraining the intensity of PTH-induced β-catenin signaling, and ultimately influencing bone formation in response to intermittent PTH administration.

EphrinB2 signaling in osteoblasts promotes bone mineralization by preventing apoptosis

Tonna, S., Takyar, F.M., Vrahnas, C., (…), Martin, T.J., Sims, N.A.
FASEB Journal 2014; 28 (10), pp. 4482-4496 10.1096/fj.14-254300

Cells that form bone (osteoblasts) express both ephrinB2 and EphB4, and previous work has shown that pharmacological inhibition of the ephrinB2/ EphB4 interaction impairs osteoblast differentiation in vitro and in vivo. The purpose of this study was to determine the role of ephrinB2 signaling in the osteoblast lineage in the process of bone formation. Cultured osteoblasts from mice with osteoblast-specific ablation of ephrinB2 showed delayed expression of osteoblast differentiation markers, a finding that was reproduced by ephrinB2, but not EphB4, RNA interference. Microcomputed tomography, histomorphometry, and mechanical testing of the mice lacking ephrinB2 in osteoblasts revealed a 2-fold delay in bone mineralization, a significant reduction in bone stiffness, and a 50% reduction in osteoblast differentiation induced by anabolic parathyroid hormone (PTH) treatment, compared to littermate sex- and age-matched controls. These defects were associated with significantly lower mRNA levels of late osteoblast differentiation markers and greater levels of osteoblast and osteocyte apoptosis, indicated by TUNEL staining and transmission electron microscopy of bone samples, and a 2-fold increase in annexin V staining and 7-fold increase in caspase 8 activation in cultured ephrinB2 deficient osteoblasts. We conclude that osteoblast differentiation and bone strength are maintained by antiapoptotic actions of ephrinB2 signaling within the osteoblast lineage.-
Bone involvement in primary hyperparathyroidism and changes after parathyroidectomy

Rolighed, L., Rejnmark, L., Christiansen, P.
European Endocrinology 2014; 10 (1), pp. 84-87

Parathyroid hormone (PTH) is produced and secreted by the parathyroid glands and has primary effects on kidney and bone. During the pathological growth of one or more parathyroid glands, the plasma level of PTH increases and causes primary hyperparathyroidism (PHPT). This disease is normally characterized by hyperparathyroid hypercalcemia. In PHPT a continuously elevated PTH stimulates
the kidney and bone causing a condition with high bone turnover, elevated plasma calcium and increased fracture risk. If bone resorption is not followed by a balanced formation of new bone, irreversible bone loss may occur in these patients. Medical treatment can help to minimize the loss of bone but the cure of PHPT is by parathyroidectomy. After operation, bone mineral density increases during the return to normal bone metabolism. Supplementation with calcium and vitamin D after operation may improve the normalization to normal bone metabolism with a secondary reduction in fracture risk.

Primary hyperparathyroidism and the skeleton

Mosekilde, L.
Clinical Endocrinology 2008; 69 (1), pp. 1-19
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1111/j.1365-2265.2007.03162.x

Today, primary hyperparathyroidism (PHPT) in the developed countries is typically a disease with few or no obvious clinical symptoms. However, even in the asymptomatic cases the endogenous excess of PTH increases bone turnover leading to an insidious reversible loss of cortical and trabecular bone because of an expansion of the remodelling space and an irreversible loss of cortical bone due to increased endocortical resorption. In contrast trabecular bone structure and integrity to a large extent is maintained and there may be a slight periosteal expansion. Most studies have reported decreased bone mineral density (BMD) in PHPT mainly located at cortical sites, whereas sites rich in trabecular bone only show a modest reduction or even a slight increase in BMD. The frequent occurrence of vitamin D insufficiency and deficiency in PHPT and increased plasma FGF23 levels may also contribute to the decrease in BMD. The effect of smoking is unsolved. Epidemiological studies have shown that the relative risk of spine and nonspine fractures is increased in untreated PHPT starting up to 10 years before the diagnosis is made. Successful surgery for PHPT normalizes bone turnover, increases BMD and decreases fracture risk based on larger epidemiological studies. However, 10 years after surgery fracture risk appears to increase again due to an increase in forearm fractures. There are no randomized controlled studies (RCTs) demonstrating a protective effect of medical treatment on fracture risk in PHPT. Less conclusive studies suggest that vitamin D supplementation may have a beneficial effect on plasma PTH and BMD in vitamin D deficient PHPT patients. Hormone replacement therapy (HRT) and maybe SERM appear to reduce bone turnover and increase BMD. However, their nonskeletal side-effects preclude their use for this purpose. Bisphosphonates reduce bone turnover and increase BMD in PHPT as in osteoporosis and may be a therapeutical option in selected patients with low BMD. Obviously, there is a need for larger RCTs with fractures as end-points that appraise this possibility. Calcimimetics reduce plasma calcium and PTH in PHPT but has no beneficial effect on bone turnover or BMD. In symptomatic hypercalcemic PHPT with low BMD where curative surgery is impossible or contraindicated a combination of a calcimimetic and a bisphosphonate may be an undocumented therapeutical option that needs further evaluation.

Current Issues in the Presentation of Asymptomatic Primary Hyperparathyroidism: Proceedings of the Fourth International Workshop

Shonni J. Silverberg, Bart L. Clarke, Munro Peacock, Francisco Bandeira, et al. The Journal of Clinical Endocrinology & Metabolism 2014; 99(10) http://dx.doi.org/10.1210/jc.2014-1415

Objective: This report summarizes data on traditional and nontraditional manifestations of primary hyperparathyroidism (PHPT) that have been published since the last International Workshop on PHPT.

Participants: This subgroup was constituted by the Steering Committee to address key questions related to the presentation of PHPT. Consensus was established at a closed meeting of the Expert Panel that followed.

Evidence: Data from the 5-year period between 2008 and 2013 were
presented and discussed to determine whether they support changes in recommendations for surgery or nonsurgical follow-up.

Consensus Process: Questions were developed by the International Task
Force on PHPT. A comprehensive literature search for relevant studies was undertaken. After extensive review and discussion, the subgroup came to agreement on what changes in the recommendations for surgery or nonsurgical follow-up of asymptomatic PHPT should be made to the Expert Panel.

Conclusions:

1) There are limited new data available on the natural history of
asymptomatic PHPT. Although recognition of normocalcemic PHPT
(normal serum calcium with elevated PTH concentrations; no secondary
cause for hyperparathyroidism) is increasing, data on the clinical
presentation and natural history of this phenotype are limited.
2) Although there are geographic differences in the predominant
phenotypes of PHPT (symptomatic, asymptomatic, normocalcemic),
they do not justify geography-specific management guidelines.
3) Recent data using newer, higher resolution imaging and analytic
methods have revealed that in asymptomatic PHPT, both trabecular
bone and cortical bone are affected.
4) Clinically silent nephrolithiasis and nephrocalcinosis can be detected
by renal imaging and should be listed as a new criterion for surgery.
5) Current data do not support a cardiovascular evaluation or surgery
for the purpose of improving cardiovascular markers, anatomical or
functional abnormalities.
6) Some patients with mild PHPT have neuropsychological complaints
and cognitive abnormalities, and some of these patients may benefit
from surgical intervention. However, it is not possible at this time to
predict which patients with neuropsychological complaints or cognitive
issues will improve after successful parathyroid surgery.

Sclerosing Bone Dysplasias: Leads Toward Novel Osteoporosis Treatments

Igor Fijalkowski, Eveline Boudin, Geert Mortier, Wim Van Hul
Current Osteoporosis Reports Sept 2014; 12(3), pp 243-251
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1007/s11914-014-0220-5

Sclerosing bone dysplasias are a group of rare, monogenic disorders characterized by increased bone density resulting from the disturbance in the fragile equilibrium between bone formation and resorption. Over the last decade, major contributions have been made toward better understanding of the pathogenesis of these conditions. These studies provided us with important insights into the bone biology and yielded the identification of numerous drug targets for the prevention and treatment of osteoporosis. Here, we review this heterogeneous group of disorders focusing on their utility in the development of novel osteoporosis therapies.

Clinical development of neridronate: potential for new applications

Gatti D, Rossini M, Viapiana O, Idolazzi L, Adami S
Ther & Clin Risk Manag Apr 2013; 2013(9): Pages 139—147

Neridronate is an aminobisphosphonate, licensed in Italy for the treatment
of osteogenesis imperfecta (OI) and Paget’s disease of bone (PDB).  A characteristic property of neridronate is that it can be administered both intravenously and intramuscularly, providing a useful system for administration in homecare. In this review, we discuss the latest clinical results of neridronate administration in OI and PDB, as well as in osteoporosis and other conditions. We will focus in particular on the latest evidence of the effect of neridronate on treatment of complex regional pain syndrome type I.

Disorders of bone remodeling

Feng, X., McDonald, J.M.
Ann Rev of Pathol: Mechanisms of Disease 2011; 6, pp. 121-145
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1146/annurev-pathol-011110-130203

The skeleton provides mechanical support for stature and locomotion, protects vital organs, and controls mineral homeostasis. A healthy skeleton must be maintained by constant bone modeling to carry out these crucial functions throughout life. Bone remodeling involves the removal of old or damaged bone by osteoclasts (bone resorption) and the subsequent replacement of new bone formed by osteoblasts (bone formation). Normal bone remodeling requires a tight coupling of bone resorption to bone formation to guarantee no alteration in bone mass or quality after each remodeling cycle. However, this important physiological process can be derailed by a variety of factors, including menopause-associated hormonal changes, age-related factors, changes in physical activity, drugs, and secondary diseases, which lead to the development of various bone disorders in both women and men. We review the major diseases of bone remodeling, emphasizing our current understanding of the underlying pathophysiological mechanisms.

Paget’s disease and hypercalcemia: Coincidence or causal relationship?

Green, I., Altman, A.
Harefuah 2009; 148 (10), pp. 708-710

Paget’s disease is a chronic disease in which osteoclast mediated bone resorption precedes imperfect osteoblast mediated bone repair. Symptoms include bone pain, pathological fractures, osteoarthritis and neurological symptoms. There is evidence that genetic and viral component are involved in the etiology. Hypercalcemia is rare and when it is diagnosed, primary hyperparathyroidism should be ruled out. The authors present a patient with Paget’s disease and concomitant hypercalcemia. Evaluation for hypercalcemia revealed an adenoma of the parathyroid. However, despite the removal of the adenoma, the symptoms persisted. Previous studies
showed that hyperparathyroidism causes hypercalcemia in Paget’s disease patients. Removal of the adenoma led to improvement in calcium and alkaline phosphatase (ALP) levels but clinical improvement is seen only in patients with high calcium level prior to the operation. This leads to the assumption that symptoms of Paget’s disease are due to osteoclast hypersensitivity to parathyroid hormone (PTH) and by removing the adenoma the osteoclast activity is also reduced. In summary, the most common cause of hypercalcemia in Paget’s disease patients is hyperparathyroidism and adenectomy may improve the biochemical and sometimes also the clinical symptoms of Paget’s disease.

Signaling networks that control the lineage commitment and differentiation of bone cells

Soltanoff, C.S., Yang, S., Chen, W., Li, Y.-P.
Critical Reviews in Eukaryotic Gene Expression 2009; 19 (1), pp. 1-46

Osteoblasts and osteoclasts are the two major bone cells involved in the bone remodeling process. Osteoblasts are responsible for bone formation while osteoclasts are the bone-resorbing cells. The major event that triggers osteogenesis and bone remodeling is the transition of mesenchymal stem cells into differentiating osteoblast cells and monocyte/macrophage precursors into differentiating osteoclasts. Imbalance in differentiation and function of these two cell types will result in skeletal diseases such as osteoporosis, Paget’s disease, rheumatoid arthritis, osteopetrosis, periodontal disease, and bone cancer metastases.
Osteoblast and osteoclast commitment and differentiation are controlled by complex activities involving signal transduction and transcriptional regulation of gene expression. Recent advances in molecular and genetic studies using gene targeting in mice enable a better understanding of the multiple factors and signaling networks that control the differentiation process at a molecular level.
This review summarizes recent advances in studies of signaling transduction pathways and transcriptional regulation of osteoblast and osteoclast cell lineage commitment and differentiation. Understanding the signaling networks that control the commitment and differentiation of bone cells will not only expand our basic understanding of the molecular mechanisms of skeletal development but will also aid our ability to develop therapeutic means of intervention in skeletal diseases.

Salmon calcitonin: a review of current and future therapeutic indications

  1. H. Chesnut III, M. Azria, S. Silverman, M. Engelhardt, M. Olson, L. Mindeholm Osteoporosis International 2008; 19(4), pp 479-491
    http://dx.doi.org:/10.1007/s00198-007-0490-1

Salmon calcitonin, available as a therapeutic agent for more than 30 years, demonstrates clinical utility in the treatment of such metabolic bone diseases as osteoporosis and Paget’s disease, and potentially in the treatment of osteoarthritis. This review considers the physiology and pharmacology of salmon calcitonin, the evidence based research demonstrating efficacy and safety of this medication in postmenopausal osteoporosis with potentially an effect on bone quality to explain its abilities to reduce the risk of spine fracture, the development of an oral salmon calcitonin preparation, and the therapeutic rationale for this preparation’s chondroprotective effect in osteoarthritis.

Pharmacotherapies to Manage Bone Loss-Associated Diseases:  A Quest for the Perfect Benefit-to-Risk Ratio

Valverde

Current Medicinal Chemistry : 15 (3): Pages 284-304
http://dx.doi.org:/10.2174/092986708783497274

In this review, benefits and side-effects of current and emerging therapies to treat and prevent pathological bone loss are described. Bisphosphonates are the antiresorptive compounds most widely used in the treatment of bone-loss associated diseases. They are generally well-tolerated although have recently been associated with osteonecrosis of the jaw and other complications. Therapies modulating estrogen receptor activation are indicated in the prevention and treatment of either breast cancer or osteoporosis in postmenopausal women. Thus, hormone replacement therapy is effective in prevention of osteoporosis, but its long-term use can increase the risk of breast cancer, stroke and embolism. Tamoxifen benefits all stages of breast cancer, but its use may lead to uterine cancer and thromboembolism. Raloxifene is approved in prevention of breast cancer and treatment of postmenopausal osteoporosis, but its use can increase the risk of fatal stroke. Aromatase inhibitors are superior to tamoxifen at advanced stages of disease and as adjuvants, but their use increase fracture incidence. Fulvestrant is as effective as aromatase inhibitors in the treatment of advanced breast cancer and does not cause bone fractures. Another antiresorptive available for the treatment of postmenopausal osteoporosis, Pagets disease and hypercalcemia is calcitonin, which also exhibits analgesic effects. A promising antiresorptive agent currently in clinical trials is denosumab. Aditional therapies for osteoporosis that decrease fracture risk consist of PTH-like anabolic agents and the dual action bone agent strontium ranelate. Antiseptics and antibiotics are used extensively in periodontal disease intervention to target bacterial biofilm, although hostdirected therapies are also being developed. – See more at: http://www.eurekaselect.com/66301/article#sthash.EGNCH4Eu.dpuf

Parathyroid Hormone An Anabolic Treatment for Osteoporosis

Paul Morley, James F. Whitfield and Gordon E. Willick
Current Pharmaceutical Design Pages 671-687
http://dx.doi.org:/10.2174/1381612013397780

Osteoporosis is a disease characterised by low bone mass, structural deterioration of bone and increased risk of fracture. The prevalence, and cost, of osteoporosis is increasing dramatically with our ageing population and the World Health Organization now considers it to be the second-leading healthcare problem. All currently approved therapies for osteoporosis (eg., estrogen, bisphosphonates, calcitonin and selective estrogen receptor modulators) are anti-resorptive agents that act on osteoclasts to prevent further bone loss. A new class of bone anabolic agent capable of building mechanically strong new bone in patients with established osteoporosis is
in development. While the parathyroid hormone (PTH) is classically considered to be a bone catabolic agent, when delivered intermittently at low doses PTH potently stimulates cortical and trabecular bone growth in animals humans. The native hPTH-(1-84) and its osteogenic fragment, hPTH-(1-34), have already entered Phase III clinical trials. Understanding the mechanism of PTHs osteogenic actions has led to the development of smaller PTH analogues which can also build mechanically normal bone in osteopenic rats. These new PTH analogues are promising candidates for treating osteoporosis in humans as they are as efficacious as hPTH-(1-84) and hPTH-(1-34), but there is evidence that they may have considerably less ability to induce hypercalcemia, the major side effect of PTH therapy. In addition to treating osteoporosis, PTHs may be used to promote fracture healing, to restore bone loss in immobilized patients, or following excessive glucocorticoid or prolonged spaceflight, and to treat psoriasis. http://www.eurekaselect.com/65008/article#sthash.FWa67NrB.dpuf

Effects of Parathyroid Hormone on Cancellous Bone Mass and Structure in Osteoporosis

Naohisa Miyakoshi
Current Pharmaceutical Design  ;10(21): Pages 2615-2627
http://dx.doi.org:/10.2174/1381612043383737

Parathyroid hormone (PTH) is the major hormonal regulator of calcium homeostasis. PTH is a potent stimulator of bone formation and can restore bone to an osteopenic skeleton, when administered intermittently. Osteoblasts are the primary target cells for the anabolic effects of PTH in bone tissue. Anabolic effects of PTH on bone have been demonstrated in animals and humans, by numerous measurement techniques including bone mineral density and bone histomorphometry. Clinically, the most important aspect of treatment for osteoporosis is prevention of fractures. Microstructural alterations, such as loss of trabecular connectivity, have been implicated in increased propensity for fracture. Recent two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) assessments of cancellous bone structure have shown that PTH can re-establish lost trabecular connectivity in animals and humans.
These results provide new insight into the positive clinical effects of PTH in osteoporosis. In recent randomized controlled clinical trials of intermittent
PTH treatment, PTH decreased incidence of vertebral and non-vertebral fractures
in postmenopausal women. Thus, PTH shows strong potential as therapy for osteoporosis. However, 2D and 3D structural analysis of advanced osteopenia in animals has shown that there is a critical limit of trabecular connectivity and bone strength below which PTH cannot completely reverse the condition. Given that PTH treatment fails to completely restore trabecular connectivity and bone strength in animals with advanced osteopenia, early treatment of osteoporosis appears important and efficacious for preventing fractures caused by decreased bone strength resulting from decreased trabecular connectivity. – See more at: http://www.eurekaselect.com/62780/article#sthash.OnoaRPyh.dpuf

Clinical applications of RANK-ligand inhibition

Romas, E.
Internal Medicine Journal 2009; 39 (2), pp. 110-116
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1111/j.1445-5994.2008.01732.x

An enhanced rate of bone remodelling fuelled by osteoclastogenesis mediates diseases such as osteoporosis, arthritic bone destruction, Paget’s disease and malignancy-induced bone loss. Thus, the control of osteoclastogenesis is of major clinical importance. The receptor activator of nuclear factor κB (RANK); its ligand, RANKL and decoy receptor, osteoprotegerin, are critical determinants of osteoclastogenesis, and increased RANK signalling is involved in several bone diseases, providing the rationale for RANKL inhibition. The effects of RANKL inhibition are being witnessed in clinical trials of neutralizing fully human monoclonal antibodies that target RANKL (e.g. denosumab) and which induce profound and sustained inhibition of bone resorption. The relative efficacy, cost-effectiveness and side-effects of targeted RANKL inhibition compared with conventional antiresorptive drugs (i.e. bisphosphonates) should be resolved by clinical trials in coming years.

Clinical development of neridronate: potential for new applications

Davide Gatti, M Rossini, O Viapiana, L Idolazzi, SAdami
Therapeutics and Clinical Risk Management 2013:9 139–147
http://dx.doi.org/10.2147/TCRM.S35788

Neridronate is an aminobisphosphonate, licensed in Italy for the treatment of osteogenesis imperfecta (OI) and Paget’s disease of bone (PDB). A characteristic property of neridronate is that it can be administered both intravenously and intramuscularly, providing a useful system for administration in homecare. In this review, we discuss the latest clinical results of neridronate administration in OI and PDB, as well as in osteoporosis and other conditions. We will focus in particular on the latest evidence of the effect of neridronate on treatment of complex regional pain syndrome type I.

The Sclerostin‐Independent Bone Anabolic Activity of Intermittent PTH Treatment Is Mediated by T‐Cell–Produced Wnt10β

Jau‐Yi Li, Lindsey D Walker, Abdul Malik Tyagi, Jonathan Adams, et al.
Journal of Bone and Mineral Research, Jan 2014; 29(1): pp 43–54
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1002/jbmr.2044

Both blunted osteocytic production of the Wnt inhibitor sclerostin (Scl) and increased T‐cell production of the Wnt ligand Wnt10β contribute to the bone anabolic activity of intermittent parathyroid hormone (iPTH) treatment. However, the relative contribution of these mechanisms is unknown. In this study, we modeled the repressive effects of iPTH on Scl production in mice by treatment with a neutralizing anti‐Scl antibody (Scl‐Ab) to determine the contribution of T‐cell–produced Wnt10β to the Scl‐independent modalities of action of iPTH. We report that combined treatment with Scl‐Ab and iPTH was more potent than either iPTH or Scl‐Ab alone in increasing stromal cell production of OPG, osteoblastogenesis, osteoblast life span, bone turnover, bone mineral density, and trabecular bone volume and structure in mice with T cells capable of producing Wnt10β. In T‐cell–null mice and mice lacking T‐cell production of Wnt10β, combined treatment increased bone turnover significantly more than iPTH or Scl‐Ab alone. However, in these mice, combined treatment with Scl‐Ab and iPTH was equally effective as Scl‐Ab alone in increasing the osteoblastic pool, bone volume, density, and structure. These findings demonstrate that the Scl‐independent activity of iPTH on osteoblasts and bone mass is mediated by T‐cell–produced Wnt10β. The data provide a proof of concept of a more potent therapeutic effect of combined treatment with iPTH and Scl‐Ab than either alone.

Treatment of Paget’s disease with hypercalcemia

Donald H. Gutteridge – Letter to the Editor
Bone 12 Jan 2006; 39(668)
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/j.bone.2006.01.165

Selby et al. [7] “Guidelines on the management of Paget’s disease of bone” produced a very helpful review, with 139 references. I take issue however with their approach to the clinical problem of concurrent Paget’s and hypercalcemia.
Firstly, the combination is not rare. Of 1836 literature and personally reported unselected patients with Paget’s disease, 90 had concurrent hypercalcemia due to primary hyperparathyroidism [PHPT], i.e., 4.9% [4]. The number with unspecified hypercalcemia would have exceeded 5%.                                     Secondly, the authors give similar weight to immobilization and PHPT as causes. Immobilization as a cause of hypercalcemia in Paget’s disease is rare [4,3]. The former paper studied 184 consecutive new referrals with Paget’s disease over 15 years. Hypercalcemia was present in 21: two had malignancy (multiple myeloma, secondary cancer); the remaining 19 had biochemical PHPT with most confirmed by neck exploration; none had hypercalcemia of immobilization. Gillespie [3] reported two patients who died following pagetic fractures with immobilization. One was diagnosed and treated as immobilization hypercalcemia; both had large parathyroid adenomas at autopsy.
Thirdly, they have recommended that “patients with Paget’s disease and hypercalcemia should be treated with bisphosphonate”. Since most patients with this combination have PHPT, since bisphosphonate treatment of Paget’s disease is associated with parathyroid hormone (PTH) stimulation [5] and since activation of Paget’s disease occurs with increased PTH [2], it seems reasonable to exclude PHPT (and other causes— e.g., milk alkali syndrome and vitamin D toxicity) and consider neck exploration before bisphosphonate treatment. The response to parathyroidectomy can be profound—and is predictable. In those with PHPT there is a significant linear relationship between preoperative severity (plasma calcium corrected for plasma albumin) and postoperative improvement in bone turnover (%fall in plasma alkaline phosphatase) [4]. In those 7 patients with a preoperative calcium >3.0 mmol/l, the postoperative mean fall in plasma alkaline phosphatase was 68%. Bisphosphonate treatment may be an option in those with PHPT and mild asymptomatic hypercalcemia; likewise following a reasonable interval (say 6 months) after successful neck exploration, should increased bone turnover and pagetic symptoms persist.

In those rare cases with the combination of Paget’s disease, hypercalcemia and immobilized pagetic fracture, where other causes of hypercalcemia have been excluded [1,6], bisphosphonate treatment is eminently reasonable.

[1] Bannister P, Roberts M, Sheridan P. Recurrent hypercalcaemia in a young man with mono-ostotic Paget’s disease. Postgrad Med J 1986;62:481–3.
[2] Genuth SM, Klein L. Hypoparathyroidism and Paget’s disease: the effect of parathyroid hormone administration. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1972;35: 693–9.
[3] Gillespie WJ. Hypercalcaemia in Paget’s disease of bone. Aust N Z J Surg 1979;49:84–6.
[4] Gutteridge DH, Gruber HE, Kermode DG, Worth GK. Thirty cases of concurrent Paget’s disease and primary hyperparathyroidism: sex distribution, histomorphometry, and prediction of the skeletal response to parathyroidectomy. Calcif Tissue Int 1999;65:427–35.
[5] Harinck HIJ, Bijvoet OLM, Blanksma HJ, Dahlinghaus-Nienhuys PJ. Efficacious management with aminobisphosphonate (APD) in Paget’s disease of bone. Clin Orthop Relat Res 1987;217:79–98.
[6] Nathan AW, Ludlam HA, Wilson DW, Dandona P. Hypercalcaemia due to immobilization of a patient with Paget’s disease of bone. Postgrad Med J 1982;58:714–5.
[7] Selby PL, Davie MWJ, Ralston SH, Stone MD. Guidelines on the management of Paget’s disease of bone. Bone 2002;31:10–9.

The authors of the article entitled “Guidelines on the management of Paget’s disease of bone” published in BONE 2002:31:10–9, have elected not to respond to the above letter to the Editor.

Safety of Bisphosphonates in the Treatment of Osteoporosis

Robert R. Recker, E. Michael Lewiecki, Paul D. Miller, James Reiffel
The American Journal of Medicine (2009) 122, S22–S32
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/j.amjmed.2008.12.004

In this review 4 experts consider the major safety concerns relating to bisphosphonate therapy for osteoporosis. Specific topics covered are skeletal safety (particularly with respect to atypical fractures and delayed healing), gastrointestinal intolerance, hypocalcemia, acute-phase (i.e., postdose) reactions, chronic musculoskeletal pain, renal safety, and cardiovascular safety (specifically, atrial fibrillation).

The bone-remodeling cycle

The bone-remodeling cycle

The bone-remodeling cycle.
Remodeling of bone in a multicellular bone unit starts with osteoblastic activation of osteoclast differentiation, fusion, and activation (A and B).
When resorption lacunae are formed, the osteoclasts leave the area and mononucleated cells of uncertain origin appear and “clean up” the organic matrix remnants left by the osteoclast, also possibly forming the cement line (dotted line) at the bottom of the lacunae
(C). During the resorption process, coupling factors, including insulin-like growth factor–I and transforming growth factor–β, are released from the bone-extracellular matrix, and these growth factors contribute to the recruitment of osteoblasts to the resorption lacunae and their activation.
(D). The osteoblasts will then fill the lacunae with new bone; when the same amount of bone is formed as is being resorbed, the remodeling process is finished, and the mineralized extracellular matrix will be covered by osteoid and a single-cell layer of osteoblasts
(E). (Reprinted with permission from J Dent Res.6)

SUMMARY

Persistent, long-term antifracture efficacy has been demonstrated for bisphosphonates, and there is no evidence that the antifracture efficacy declines during treatment periods lasting as long as 10 years. Bisphosphonate-induced oversuppression of remodeling and return of fracturing remains a theoretical possibility.
It is likely that a few patients who are potential candidates for bisphosphonate treatment have preexisting oversuppression of bone remodeling. Treatment with a bisphosphonate in these cases would not be helpful and might even be harmful. The problem when encountering a patient with fractures and deciding whether to recommend treatment with a bisphosphonate is that no reliable diagnostic method exists that allows detection of the rare instance of preexisting oversuppression of remodeling.  When pretreatment BMD is not particularly low, that is, not lower than normal or mildly osteopenic, the persistence of fracturing during treatment may mean that oversuppression of remodeling was already present and a change in medication would be appropriate. There is no evidence that bisphosphonate treatment impairs fracture healing. Indeed, there are a substantial number of reports involving animal models, as well as a few human case reports, to suggest that bisphosphonate treatment actually improves fracture healing. In general, it is important to bear in mind the positive benefit-to-risk ratio for this therapeutic class when making treatment recommendations for patients with osteoporosis.

Bisphosphonate Safety:

1.               Gastrointestinal Intolerance,2.               Hypocalcemia,

3.               Acute-Phase Reaction, and

4.               Chronic Bone and Muscle Pain

PTH: Potential role in management of heart failure

  1. Gruson, A. Buglioni, J.C. Burnett Jr.
    Clinica Chimica Acta 433 (2014) 290–296
    http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.cca.2014.03.029

Biomarkers play an important role for the diagnosis and prognosis of heart failure (HF), a disease with high morbidity and mortality as well as a huge impact on healthcare budgets. Parathyroid hormone (PTH) is a major systemic calcium-regulating hormone and an important regulator of bone and mineral homeostasis. PTH testing is important for differential diagnosis of calcemia related disorders and for the management of patients with chronic kidney disease. As secondary hyperparathyroidism has been evidenced in HF patients, PTH testing might be relevant in HF patients for risk stratification and more personalized selection of treatment.

Heart failure and neurohormonal activation

Heart failure is a syndrome characterized by increasing prevalence, high morbidity, elevated hospital readmission rate and high mortality. The continuing improvement of diagnosis, prognosis, treatment and management of HF requires a better understanding of the different sub-phenotypes and heterogeneity of this syndrome at the cellular, organ, and systemic level. Neurohormonal activation, one of the hallmarks of HF, plays a significant role in the myocardial and multi-organ adaptation. The comprehensive understanding of neurohormonal activation has allowed the identification of several biomarkers, such as natriuretic peptides, which are now playing an important role in HF management. Beside their contribution to the diagnosis of HF, natriuretic peptides are also relevant for follow-up and prognosis of HF patients.  Nevertheless, natriuretic peptides are more related to ventricular stretch, and biomarkers from other biological pathways like cardiac remodeling might provide additional value for the risk stratification of HF patients. The integration of biomarkers from several pathophysiological pathways along with imaging and genetic testing, might therefore be used to define HF subtypes, responding differently to specific therapeutic actions and contributing to more tailored based approaches.
Abnormalities of bone and mineral metabolism are also found in HF.  Secondary hyperparathyroidism has been evidenced in this context and several recent reports have documented the potential use of parathyroid hormone (PTH) testing for a more personalized management of HF patients. The aim of this article is therefore to review some of the cardiac effects of PTH and the potential role of PTH testing in HF.

Parathyroid hormone: biology and cardiac effects
PTH is one of the major regulators of the bone and mineral metabolism and its secretion is modulated by changes in concentration of calcium in the blood; decreased calcium concentrations stimulating PTH secretion via calcium-sensing receptors in the parathyroid gland. In response to hypocalcemia,
PTH has different targets to increase circulating calcium concentration. A fundamental target is the renal tubule where PTH will increase phosphorus excretion in the proximal tract and will enhance calcium reabsorption from the ascending limb of the loop of Henle to the collecting duct. The proximal renal tubule is also a target where PTH will stimulate the 1-α hydroxylation of 25-hydroxyvitamin D to 1,25-dihydroxyvitamin D: this biologically active form of vitamin D acts on the gut to increase absorption of both dietary calcium and phosphorus. Another target of PTH is the osteoclasts, leading to increased bone resorption with release of phosphorus and calcium in the blood.
PTH is a polypeptide containing 84 amino acids secreted by the parathyroid glands after cleavage from preproparathyroid hormone to proparathyroid hormone to the mature hormone. However, it displays several circulating forms and related fragments. PTH is secreted predominantly as an intact molecule, but it is rapidly cleaved in peripheral tissues to amino terminus and carboxy terminus fragments. The amino terminus fragment is biologically active and has a relatively short circulating half-life. The carboxy-terminal species include a 7-84 peptide and a variety of shorter fragments. These fragments can have a longer half-life and accumulate in renal failure. PTH assays measure not only the full-length form of PTH but also isoforms as well as fragments and differences can be observed between assays depending on the antibody specificities.

Cardiac effects of PTH
Primary hyperparathyroidism has been associated with heart diseases, underlying the potential cardiac consequences of increased circulating levels of PTH. Furthermore, as the heart is one of the target organs of PTH, the involvement of this hormone in the pathogenesis of cardiovascular diseases was previously suggested. PTH has different effects on the heart and can stimulate hypertrophy, arrhythmias and a pro-oxidative state. PTH has a direct hypertrophic action on cardiomyocytes. PTH is able, through a direct effect mediated through its receptors, to activate protein kinase C which further stimulates hypertrophic growth and reexpression of fetal type proteins in cardiomyocytes. PTH was also reported as a potent activator of protein kinase A (PKA) and several other downstream effectors related to cardiomyocyte hypertrophy. The hypertrophic effect of PTH on cardiac cells is also reinforced by its ability to stimulate an anti-hypertrophic response, including the natriuretic peptide gene transcription and by the increased of plasma concentrations of N-terminal pro-B-type natriuretic peptide (NT-proBNP) observed in patients with primary hyperparathyroidism. The hypertrophic effect of PTH on the heart was also evidence by a close relation between PTH levels and left ventricular mass.
In addition to its hypertrophic action, PTH can stimulate cardiac arrhythmias. PTH was documented as a chronotropic agent able to cause early death ofmyocytes in rat. Importantly, Bogin et al. showed in cultured heart cells of rat, that both amino-terminal PTH 1–34 and intact PTH 1–84 produced an immediate, sustained and significant rise in beats per minute and that the cells died earlier than control cardiomyocytes. Similar bservations were obtained by Shimoyama et al. In human, recent data showed that chronic renal failure and hyperparathyroidism are associated with a sympathetic over-activity. In that case, PTH 1–34 was able to facilitate norepinephrine release in human heart atria by activating the PTH-receptors. Therefore, highly increased PTH levels that can be observed in HF patients can participate to the elevated sympathetic nerve activity and the associated cardiovascular mortality.
The cardiac impact of PTH is also related to calcium overloading in myocardial cells. This cytoplasmic calcium overloading induced by PTH in myocardial cells appears as a paradox for hyperparathyroidism states. The mechanisms behind the increase of intracellular calcium involve a receptor-mediated rise in L-type calcium channel at the plasma membrane level leading to a secondary entry of calcium into cardiomyocyte and mobilization of calcium from sarcoplasmic reticulum. Both PTH 1–34 and PTH 1–84 produced such a dose dependent increase of intracellular calcium in cardiomyocytes. This increase of cytosolic calcium can be prevented by the calcium channel blocker verapamil.
Hyperparathyroidism has also been documented to trigger oxidative stress. When PTH levels are increased, a higher H2O2 production is observed in peripheral blood mononuclear cells. The increase in intracellular calcium induced by PTH might impair the mitochondrial function and ATP production, inducing the production of reactive oxygen species and leading to oxidative stress as well as inflammation and, at the end, to cardiomyocyte necrosis.
Lastly, increased circulating concentrations of PTH might stimulate adrenal aldosterone synthesis, initiating a vicious circle between hyperparathyroidism and hyperaldosteronism and leading to more proinflammatory, pro-oxidant and pro-fibrotic actions.

The rise of PTH in HF
Through its cardiac effects PTH can participate to the pathophysiology of cardiovascular diseases and a chronic excess to high circulating levels of PTH can have some deleterious consequences for the HF patients. Several factors might explain the increase of circulating PTH levels in HF patients.
First of all, impaired cation homeostasis and calcium loss should be considered.   Alteration in electrolyte equilibrium is frequent in HF patients as a consequence of hormonal changes in this pathological condition (hyperadrenergic state and secondary hyperaldosteronism). Calcium wasting is also triggered by diuretics, used to treat HF patients.
A second important factor can be a deficiency of vitamin D. Low vitamin D levels are frequently observed in HF patients and can lead to a rise in PTH levels.
Another documented factor is the interrelationship between hemodynamic state and serum intact PTH levels in patients with HF. Indeed, in a cross-sectional study including 105 patients with chronic HF, log-transformed intact PTH levels were positively and significantly correlated with pulmonary capillary wedge pressure and inversely correlated with stroke volume index after adjusting for variables associated with PTH.

The cross talk between PTH and aldosterone
The cross talk between PTH and FGF-23
Circulating levels of PTH and heart failure
PTH levels in HF patients
PTH testing and heart failure: conclusions and perspectives
PTH testing: assay matters

secondary hyperparathyroidism

secondary hyperparathyroidism

Potential involvement of secondary hyperparathyroidism in the worsening course of heart failure significant correlations were observed, through generation assays, between PTH and natriuretic peptides aswell as galectin-3. Importantly, the different immunoreactivities might impact on the value of PTH testing in treatment and prognosis of HF.

The measurement of PTH concentrations in HF can, like in patients with chronic kidney disease, help to monitor the efficiency of the treatment (drugs as well as medical devices). The use of PTH testing in HF patients might also allow the selection of more personalized and tailored therapies. HF patients with higher PTH levels could be relevant candidates for vitamin D supplementation or other pharmacological treatment. Based on the positive relationship between aldosterone and PTH, higher PTH levels can be an additional reason to use aldosterone blockers in HF patients.

Parathyroid hormone and cardiovascular disease events: A systematic review and meta-analysis of prospective studies

Adriana J. van Ballegooijen, I Reinders, M Visser, and IA Brouwer
Am Heart J 2013;165:655-664.e5
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ahj.2013.02.014

The parathyroid hormone (PTH) is a key hormone for the maintenance of calcium homeostasis. Low serum calcium triggers the secretion of PTH from the parathyroid glands.1 This results in a raise in serum calcium by promoting the release of calcium from bone, reduces calcium excretion by the kidneys, and increases the calcium absorption by the small intestine. In turn, the increase in calcium inhibits PTH secretion from the parathyroid glands.
In addition to traditionally known target organs, PTH is of interest for its potential impact on cardiovascular disease (CVD) risk. Observational studies have demonstrated that chronic PTH elevation is linked to hypertension, cardiac hypertrophy, and myocardial dysfunction. Furthermore, PTH receptors are present in the myocardium and exert hypertrophic effects on cardiomyocytes. Taken together, these associations suggest plausible mechanisms whereby elevated PTH concentrations may be involved in pathological processes that lead to CVD.

Background Parathyroid hormone (PTH) excess might play a role in cardiovascular health. We therefore conducted a systematic review and meta-analysis to evaluate the association between PTH and cardiovascular disease (CVD) events, and intermediate outcomes.
Methods We conducted a systematic and comprehensive database search using MEDLINE and Embase between 1947 and October 2012. We included English-language prospective studies that reported risk estimates for PTH and CVD events, and intermediate outcomes. The characteristics of study populations, exposure, and outcomes of total CVD events, fatal and non-fatal CVD events were reported, and a quality assessment was conducted. Results were extracted for the highest versus lowest PTH concentrations, and meta-analyses were carried out using random effects models.
Results The systematic literature search yielded 5770 articles, and 15 studies were included. Study duration ranged between 2 and 14 years. All studies were performed primarily in whites with a mean age between 55 and 75 years. The metaanalyses included 12 studies, of which 10 investigated total CVD events; 7, fatal CVD events; and 3, non-fatal CVD events. PTH excess indicated an increased risk for total CVD events: pooled HR (95% CI), 1.45 (1.24-1.71). The results for fatal CVD events and non-fatal CVD events were: HR 1.50 (1.18-1.91) and HR 1.48 (1.14-1.92). Heterogeneity was moderately present; however, sensitivity analyses for follow-up duration, prior CVD, or PTH as dichotomous values showed similar results.
Conclusions The meta-analysis indicates that higher PTH concentrations are associated with increased risk of CVD events.

Impact of estrogen on mechanically stimulated cells in vitro

Jörg Neunzehn, Ulrich Meyer and Hans-Peter Wiesman
Int.J.Curr.Microbiol.App.Sci (2014) 3(5) 898-906
Estrogen deficiency and decreased exercise known to be major causes for osteoporosis in elderly patients are assumed on important role in implant failure. Hormone replacement therapy and exercise are established methods to prevent the accompanying bone loss, thereby improving the conditions for implant osseointegration. Whereas the clinical effects of estrogen on bone are well documented, less is known about estrogen effects on loaded and unloaded osteoblasts on a cellular level. This study was aimed at investigating the effects of estrogen on mechanically stimulated osteoblast like cells in culture. Mechanically unstimulated cultures served as controls. Our investigations revealed that estrogen had a suppressive effect on the proliferative response of osteoblasts towards mechanical strain. Estrogen increased the synthesis of bone specific proteins in mechanically stimulated cultures whereas estrogen had no effect on unstimulated cells. The differentiation effects significant altered at estrogen doses of 10nmol and 10 μmol. Our data suggest a positive effect of hormone substitution on the composition of the extracellular matrix in loaded bones. In the context of implant dentistry, hormone repaints therapy should be regarded as a medical tool to improve the conditions for an undisturbed implant healing.

Normal bone physiology, remodelling and its hormonal regulation

Jennifer S Walsh
Surgery 2014; 33:1

The skeleton has structural and locomotor functions, and is a mineral reservoir. Bone turnover by osteoclasts and osteoblasts is a lifelong process, incorporating growth, modelling and remodeling to repair microdamage and access the mineral reservoir.
Bone formation and resorption are the basis of growth, modeling and remodeling. The bone remodeling cycle is an ongoing process that renews bone to repair microdamage and maintain strength. It also maintains serum calcium in the normal physiological range by release of mineral from the bone matrix as required. About 5-10% of the adult skeleton is replaced by remodeling each year.
On trabecular bone and at the endocortical surface, remodeling takes place on the surface of bone, but within cortical bone the osteoclasts form a cutting cone through the bone matrix. The signal to initiate remodeling may be endocrine (such as increased parathyroid hormone (PTH) in response to hypocalcaemia), which leads to generalized increases in osteoclast activation. Localized remodeling is initiated in response to microdamage, probably by signals from osteocytes. During a remodeling cycle, osteoclasts on the bone surface become activated and resorb bone matrix, creating a defect which is filled in by osteoblasts. The cycle usually takes about 200 days to complete. The bone remodeling cycle is highly regulated, and resorption and formation are closely coupled.
Signaling between bone cells is essential for the coordination of these processes. Osteoblasts regulate osteoclast activity through the receptor activator of nuclear factor-kB (RANK)/RANK ligand/osteoprotegerin system, and osteocytes regulate osteoblast activity through sclerostin secretion. If resorption and formation are balanced there is no net change in bone mass after each cycle, but with ageing and some disease states resorption exceeds formation leading to remodeling imbalance, decreased bone mass and loss of microstructural integrity. The rate of remodeling is determined by loading and endocrine influences. The most important endocrine regulator of bone turnover is probably estrogen, but other hormones regulating bone metabolism include insulin-like growth factor-1, parathyroid hormone and gut and adipocyte hormones.

Differential Diagnosis, Causes, and Management of Hypercalcemia

Fredriech K. W. Chan, et al.
Current Problems In Surgery June 1997; 34(6)

Hypercalcemia is a challenging clinical syndrome, both in diagnosis and therapy. The two most common causes of hypercalcemia, primary hyperparathyroidism and malignancy, account for approximately 90% of all patients with an elevated calcium level. In the general population, primary hyperparathyroidism is more common than malignancy. In a hospitalized population, malignancy is by far the more common. The differential diagnosis of hypercalcemia should be focused initially on the distinction between primary hyperparathyroidism and malignancy.

Primary hyperparathyroidism is caused by excessive, abnormally regulated secretion of parathyroid hormone from one or more adenomatous or hyperplastic parathyroid glands. In 80% of cases, primary hyperparathyroidism is due to a single adenoma. In 15% to 20% of patients, all four glands are enlarged as a result of hyperplasia. Parathyroid hyperplasia is also encountered in patients with Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia, Type I or II. Rarely, in fewer than 0.5% of patients, primary hyperparathyroidism is due to parathyroid carcinoma. The clinical features of primary hyperparathyroidism result from the hypercalcemia and the excessive output of parathyroid hormone (PTH).
The major target organs are the bones and the kidneys. The classic but rare bone disease of primary hyperparathyroidism is osteitis fibrosa cystica. Since the advent of the multichannel autoanalyzer in the early 1970s, an era marked by a great increase in incidence of primary hyperparathyroidism, the prevalence of radiologically apparent bone disease in patients with primary hyperparathyroidism has declined from 10% to 15% to a vanishingly small 1% to 2%. Sensitive technologies such as bone densitometry and bone histomorphometry, however, have revealed skeletal involvement with preferential reduction of cortical bone mass and relative preservation of cancellous bone mass. Although the incidence of nephrolithiasis in primary hyperparathyroidism has also decreased markedly, from approximately 60% in the 1940s and 1950s to 15% to 20% now, nephrolithiasis is still the most frequent complication of primary hyperparathyroidism.
Primary hyperparathyroidism also can be associated with neuropsychiatric, gastrointestinal, and cardiovascular manifestations. However, evidence that these features are pathophysiologically linked to the hyperparathyroid process or are reversible after successful parathyroidectomy is not compelling.

Management of Skeletal Health in Patients With Asymptomatic Primary Hyperparathyroidism

  1. Michael Lewiecki
    J Clin Densitometry: Assessment of Skeletal Health, 2010; 13(4), 324e334.
    http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/j.jocd.2010.06.004

Asymptomatic primary hyperparathyroidism (PHPT) may cause adverse skeletal effects that include high bone remodeling, reduced bone mineral density (BMD), and increased fracture risk. Parathyroid surgery, the definitive treatment for PHPT, has been shown to increase BMD and appears to reduce fracture risk. Current guidelines recommend parathyroid surgery for patients with symptomatic PHPT or asymptomatic PHPT with serum calcium > 1 mg/dL above the upper limit of normal, calculated creatinine clearance < 60 mL/min, osteoporosis, previous fracture, or age > 50 yr. The type of operation performed (parathyroid exploration or minimally invasive procedure) and localizing studies to identify the abnormal parathyroid glands preoperatively should be individualized according to the skills of the surgeon and the resources of the institution. In patients who choose not to be treated surgically or who have contraindications for surgery, medical therapy should include a daily calcium intake of at least 1200 mg and maintenance of serum 25-hydroxyvitamin D levels of at least 20 ng/mL (50 nmol/L). Bisphosphonates and estrogens have been shown to provide skeletal benefits that appear to be similar to parathyroid surgery. Cinacalcet reduces serum calcium in PHPT patients with intractable hypercalcemia but has not been shown to improve BMD. It is not known whether any medical intervention reduces fracture risk in patients with PHPT. There are insufficient data on the natural history and treatment of normocalcemic PHPT to make recommendations for management of this disorder.

Hyperparathyroidism

William D Fraser
thelancet July 11, 2009; 374: 145-158 – Seminar

Hyperparathyroidism is due to increased activity of the parathyroid glands, either from an intrinsic abnormal change altering excretion of parathyroid hormone (primary or tertiary hyperparathyroidism) or from an extrinsic abnormal change affecting calcium homoeostasis stimulating production of parathyroid hormone (secondary hyperparathyroidism). Primary hyperparathyroidism is the third most common endocrine disorder, with the highest incidence in postmenopausal women. Asymptomatic disease is common, and severe disease with renal stones and metabolic bone disease arises less frequently now than it did 20–30 years ago. Primary hyperparathyroidism can be cured by surgical removal of an adenoma, increasingly by minimally invasive parathyroidectomy. Medical management of mild disease is possible with bisphosphonates, hormone replacement therapy, and calcimimetics. Vitamin D deficiency is a common cause of secondary hyperparathyroidism, particularly in elderly people. However, the biochemical definition of vitamin D deficiency and its treatment are subject to much debate. Secondary hyperparathyroidism as the result of chronic kidney disease is important in the genesis of renal bone disease, and several new treatments could help achieve the guidelines set out by the kidney disease outcomes quality initiative.

Table 1: Changing clinical presentation of primary hyperparathyroidism
1930–1970 1970–2000
Nephrolithiasis 51–57% 17–37%
Hypercalciuria 36% 40%
Overt skeletal disease 10–23% 4–14%
Asymptomatic 6–18% 22–80%
Modified from reference 12
Panel 1: Recommendations for surgery from the National Institutes of Health
consensus conference on primary hyperparathyroidism in 1990 and 2002• Serum albumin-adjusted calcium greater than 0·25 mmol/L
above the upper limit of local laboratory reference range

• Urine calcium greater than 10 mmol per 24 h

• Creatinine clearance reduced by 30% or more

• Bone mineral density T score less than –2·5 (at any site)

• Age younger than 50 years

• Patient request; adequate follow-up unlikely

Aldosterone and parathyroid hormone interactions as mediators of metabolic and cardiovascular disease

Andreas Tomaschitz, Eberhard Ritz, Burkert Pieske, Jutta Rus-Machan
Metabolism Clinical and  Experimental 2014; 63: 20 31
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.metabol.2013.08.016

Several studies demonstrated a strong link between dysregulation of the aldosterone and parathyroid hormone (PTH) axes on the one hand and CV pathology on the other hand. Such evidence documents clinically relevant interactions between aldosterone and PTH and a resulting impact on CV health. This review provides an up to date overview discussing the mechanisms and the clinical relevance underlying the interactions between aldosterone and PTH.

Inappropriate aldosterone and parathyroid hormone (PTH) secretion is strongly linked with development and progression of cardiovascular (CV) disease. Accumulating evidence suggests a bidirectional interplay between parathyroid hormone and aldosterone. This interaction may lead to a disproportionally increased risk of CV damage, metabolic and bone diseases.

This review focuses on mechanisms underlying the mutual interplay between aldosterone and PTH as well as their potential impact on CV, metabolic and bone health. PTH stimulates aldosterone secretion by increasing the calcium concentration in the cells of the adrenal zona glomerulosa as a result of binding to the PTH/PTH-rP receptor and indirectly by potentiating angiotensin 2 induced effects. This may explain why after parathyroidectomy lower aldosterone levels are seen in parallel with improved cardiovascular outcomes.

Aldosterone mediated effects are inappropriately pronounced in conditions such as chronic heart failure, excess dietary salt intake (relative aldosterone excess) and primary aldosteronism.

PTH is increased as a result of
(1) the MR (mineralocorticoid receptor)mediated calciuretic and magnesiuretic effects with a trend of hypocalcemia and hypomagnesemia; the resulting secondary hyperparathyroidism causes myocardial fibrosis and disturbed bone metabolism; and

(2) direct effects of aldosterone on parathyroid cells via binding to the MR. This adverse sequence is interrupted by mineralocorticoid receptor blockade and adrenalectomy.

Hyperaldosteronism due to klotho deficiency results in vascular calcification, which can be mitigated by spironolactone treatment. In view of the documented reciprocal interaction between aldosterone and PTH as well as the potentially ensuing target organ damage, studies are needed to evaluate diagnostic and therapeutic strategies to address this increasingly recognized pathophysiological phenomenon.

The classical view that aldosterone acts exclusively on the electrolyte transport in epithelial cells has been broadened after the mineralocorticoid receptor (MR) has been identified in non-epithelial cells as well, e.g. vascular smooth muscle cells and cardiomyocytes. Apart from classical genomic effects, non-genomic aldosterone mediated effects have been identified in various tissues and organs outside of the kidneys and colon, e.g. inner ear, choroid plexus, endothelial cells and cardiomyocytes.

In the past it had been documented that primary aldosteronism (PA; absolute aldosterone excess) contributed to the development of CVD. Several studies suggested, however, that “absolute aldosterone excess” is only the tip of the iceberg leading to the concept of “relative aldosterone excess” . Several large cross-sectional and prospective studies demonstrated a consistent relationship between circulating aldosterone levels, CV risk factors and mortality risk.

Such recent studies also document that even circulating aldosterone concentrations in the “normal” range may result in inappropriate aldosterone–MR interaction which may be reversed by MR blockade.
The identification of PTH receptors within the CV system e.g. in cardiomyocytes, vascular smooth muscle, and endothelial cells, indicates that inappropriate PTH secretion may impact on the CV health beyond the dysregulation of calcium and phosphate homeostasis.

Application of PTH after myocardial infarction attenuates ischaemic cardiomyopathy by increasing migration of bone marrow-derived stem cells to the ischaemic myocardium. On the other hand the PTH excess in primary hyperparathyroidism (pHPT) is linked in the long-term to a spectrum of adverse effects e.g. bone loss and increased fracture risk, coronary microvascular dysfunction, derangement of lipid and glucose metabolism, subclinical aortic valve calcification, increased aortic stiffness, endothelial dysfunction and arterial hypertension.

Interactions between vitamin D, klotho and aldosterone
Increased activity of systemic or local renin–angiotensin systems (RAS) is linked to increased target organ damage. The organ and tissue protective effects of vitamin D have in part been explained by vitamin D induced modulation of RAS activity.

In landmark experiments Li et al. documented markedly elevated renin mRNA expression in the juxtaglomerular apparatus of vitamin D receptor (VDR) knock-out mice compared to wild type mice. Furthermore, 1,25-dihydroxy vitamin D (1,25(OH2)D3) modulated renin gene transcription and renin synthesis and this was independent of serum calcium, PTH and angiotensin 2. Angiotensin 2 in turn reduces renal klotho expression resulting in modulations of FGF-23-signaling and of 1-α hydroxylase activity. Klotho is a membrane (and circulating) protein which is highly expressed in the kidney and modulates the inhibitory effects of FGF-23 on calcitriol formation; klotho contributes to the regulation of renal tubular calcium and phosphate reabsorption. The modulatory effects of vitamin D on the RAS might result in a lower risk of development and progression of CV morbidity and mortality.

Evidence for stimulating effects of PTH on adrenal aldosterone secretion Aldosterone synthesis is mainly initiated by angiotensin 2 and potassium via activating the Ca2+-messenger system in zona glomerulosa (ZG) cells to stimulate the steroidogenic cascade within the mitochondria. The Ca2+-messenger system further participates in the initiation of steroidogenesis by facilitating the cholesterol transfer into the mitochondria. Findings from experimental, mechanistic, observational and interventional studies suggest that PTH contributes to the regulation of aldosterone secretion in the ZG of the adrenal glands.

The interaction between aldosterone and Klotho and its relationship to vascular osteoinduction

The interaction between aldosterone and Klotho and its relationship to vascular osteoinduction

The interaction between aldosterone and Klotho and its relationship to vascular osteoinduction

Estradiol determines the effects of PTH on ERa-dependent transcription in MC3T3-E1 cells

Monika H.E. Christensen, IS Fenne, MH Flågeng, B Almås, et al.
Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications 450 (2014) 360–365
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.bbrc.2014.05.109

Bone remodeling is a continuous process regulated by several hormones such as estrogens and parathyroid hormone (PTH). Here we investigated the influence of PTH on estrogen receptor alpha (ERa)-dependent transcriptional activity in MC3T3-E1 osteoblasts. Cells that were transfected with an ER-responsive reporter plasmid and treated with PTH showed increased luciferase activity. However, in the presence of 17b-estradiol, we observed that PTH inhibited ERa-mediated transcription. cAMP mimicked the effects by PTH, and the findings were confirmed in COS-1 cells transfected with expression vector encoding the catalytic subunit of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA). Furthermore, PTH exhibited specific effects on the mRNA expression of the decoy receptor osteoprotegerin (OPG) and the receptor activator of NF kappa-B ligand (RANKL) in MC3T3-E1 osteoblasts. In the absence of 17b-estradiol, PTH and cAMP enhanced the OPG/RANKL ratio, whereas, OPG/RANKL was suppressed when estradiol was present. In conclusion, our results indicate that the presence of estradiol determines whether PTH and cAMP stimulates or inhibits ERa-dependent activity and the OPG/RANKL mRNA expression in an osteoblastic cell line.

Ginsenoside-Rb2 displays anti-osteoporosis effects through reducing oxidative damage and bone-resorbing cytokines during osteogenesis

Qiang Huang, Bo Gao, Qiang Jie, Bo-Yuan Wei, et al.
Bone 66 (2014) 306–314
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.bone.2014.06.010

Reactive oxygen species (ROS) are a significant pathogenic factor of osteoporosis. Ginsenoside-Rb2 (Rb2), a 20(S)-protopanaxadiol glycoside extracted from ginseng, is a potent antioxidant that generates interest regarding the bone metabolism area. We tested the potential anti-osteoporosis effects of Rb2 and its underlying mechanism in this study. We produced an oxidative damage model induced by hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) in osteoblastic MC3T3-E1 cells to test the essential anti-osteoporosis effects of Rb2 in vitro. The results indicated that treatment of 0.1 to 10 μMRb2 promoted the proliferation of MC3T3-E1 cells, improved alkaline phosphatase (ALP) expression, elevated calcium mineralization and mRNA expressions of Alp, Col1a1, osteocalcin (Ocn) and osteopontin (Opn) against oxidative damage induced by H2O2. Importantly, Rb2 reduced the expression levels of receptor activator of nuclear factor kappa-B ligand (RANKL) and IL-6 and inhibited the H2O2-induced production of ROS. The in vivo study indicated that the Rb2 administered for 12 weeks partially decreased blood malondialdehyde (MDA) activity and elevated the activity of reduced glutathione (GSH) in ovariectomized (OVX)mice. Moreover, Rb2 improved the micro-architecture of trabecular bones and increased bone mineral density (BMD) of the 4th lumbar vertebrae (L4) and the distal femur. Altogether, these results demonstrated that the potential anti-osteoporosis effects of Rb2 were linked to a reduction of oxidative damage and bone-resorbing cytokines, which suggests that Rb2 might be effective in preventing and alleviating osteoporosis.

Inflammatory cytokines in Paget’s disease of bone

GRW de Castro, Z Buss, JS Da Rosa, TS Fröde
International Immunopharmacology 18 (2014) 277–281
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.intimp.2013.12.003

This study was undertaken to evaluate the expression of inflammatory cytokines in patients with Paget’s disease of bone (PDB). Serum levels of tumoral necrosis factor-α, interleukin 1β, interleukin-6 and interleukin-17
were measured in 51 patients with PDB and in 24 controls with primary osteoarthritis. Compared to controls, patients with Paget’s disease of bone presented higher levels of interleukin 6 and reduced interleukin 17, but levels of tumoral necrosis factor α and interleukin 1 β did not differ significantly. We found no significant differences when patients were compared according to disease activity or current treatment. There were no correlations between cytokine levels and bone-specific alkaline phosphatase or extension of Paget’s disease of bone on bone scintigraphs. In conclusion, patients with PDB present significant differences on levels of certain cytokines in comparison to primary osteoarthritis patients, but these alterations did not appear to have a clear correlation with parameters of disease activity or severity.

Development and validation of a novel cell-based assay for potency determination of human parathyroid hormone (PTH)
Axel Hohenstein, Meike Hebell, Heidi Zikry, Maria El Ghazaly, et al.
Journal of Pharmaceutical and Biomedical Analysis 98 (2014) 345–350
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jpba.2014.06.004

Disorders of bone metabolism
Orthopaedics I: General Principles

Nicola Peel
Surgery 33:1

Bone remodeling is critical to bone health. Alterations in the normal processes and regulation of remodeling may impact on bone mass and bone strength. Changes may be generalized or focal and underlie many of the common disorders of bone metabolism. This article focuses on the changes in bone remodeling which underlie both the development and treatment of osteoporosis. Osteomalacia, as an example of a mineralization disorder and Paget’s disease as an example of a focal disorder of bone remodeling, are also briefly reviewed.

There are many causes of increased bone turnover with the most common being the loss of estrogen at menopause. Increased bone turnover is initiated by increased activation frequency of osteoclasts. The consequent increase in remodeling space leads to bone loss which is, at least in part, reversible. Increased bone turnover is also associated with an increased risk of trabecular perforation with the increased number of remodeling sites acting as stress risers within the trabecular architecture. Bone loss within the trabecular compartment occurs preferentially from the horizontal, non-weight bearing plates resulting in disproportionate loss of bone strength for the reduction in bone mass.
Alterations in bone turnover also have potential to affect bone.

strength by changing the degree of mineralization. Primary mineral apposition occurs early after production of bone matrix by osteoblasts. After completion of the cycle, secondary mineral apposition occurs over many months. Increased bone turnover leads to reduced mineralization as the time between remodeling cycles reduces. Conversely, decreased bone turnover rates reduce the average time between remodeling at any site and hence lead to a greater degree of mineralization. Biomechanical principles indicate that the yield strength (stiffness) of highly mineralized bone increases but that it will withstand less deformation before fracture and therefore becomes brittle. A reduced degree of mineralization results in greater pliability but a reduction in bone strength.
Alterations in bone remodeling underpin changes in bone mass and bone strength. The impact of these changes is manifest in the development and clinical presentation of osteoporosis.

Paget’s disease

Paget’s disease

Paget’s disease: (a) increased uptake on nuclear medicine scanning in the right hemipelvis, sacrum and left femur and (b) left femur showing radiological changes of Paget’s including a fissure fracture in the proximal lateral cortex

Paget’s disease is an example of a localised disorder of bone turnover. Its aetiology remains unclear. Paget’s disease is not uncommon but is often asymptomatic and diagnosed coincidentally. It is estimated to affect approximately 2% of adults over the age of 55 in the UK but the prevalence varies markedly between populations. It is increasingly prevalent with increasing age and affects men more frequently than women. In 80% of cases more than one bone is involved, characteristically in an asymmetric distribution.
Pagetic bone is characterized by the presence of giant multinucleated osteoclasts resulting in dramatic increases in bone resorption in the affected bones. These regions undergo a lytic phase followed by a compensatory increase in bone formation. Rapid bone formation results in an accumulation of woven bone, which is mechanically abnormal resulting in loss of bone strength.
The typical clinical manifestation is of bone pain, which may be associated with bone expansion and deformity. Complications of Paget’s disease include the development of secondary osteoarthritis, fissure fractures and very rarely, osteosarcomatous change (<1% of cases).

.

Read Full Post »

German Genomics Firm Signature Diagnostics Acquired by ROCHE

Reporter: Aviva Lev-Ari, PhD, RN

 

 

Roche Buys German Genomics Firm Signature Diagnostics

Feb 09, 2015 | a GenomeWeb staff reporter

NEW YORK (GenomeWeb) – Continuing a buying spree, Roche today announced it acquired German translational oncology and genomics firm Signature Diagnostics for an undisclosed amount.

Based in Potsdam, Signature develops large blood plasma and tissue biobanks in cancers, including lung and colorectal cancer. The biobanks are constructed from multicenter prospective clinical studies, and Signature uses the samples, along with accompanying clinical progression and genetic data, to develop and validate circulating cell-free DNA-based tests. The tests, Roche said, could advance non-invasive treatment response monitoring for cancer patients.

Noting the importance of biobanks in research into the origins of diseases such as cancer, Roche Diagnostics COO Roland Diggelmann said, “Signature represents a unique bridge between high-value cancer biobanks and [next-generation sequencing] assay development.” He added that biobanks can be used for biomarker discovery and hypothesis testing with pharma.

Roche will leverage Signature’s capabilities to accelerate the development of NGS-based diagnostics, he said. In the fall of 2013, Signature told GenomeWeb that it had developed a plasma-based ultradeep sequencing test to monitor colorectal cancer patients and detect metastasis in the early stages.

Roche will integrate Signature into its sequencing unit and will continue to expand the company’s genomic signature portfolio, it said. Signature’s tests are for research use only.

The acquisition is the latest by Roche, which has been on a buying binge in the omics and molecular diagnostics space during the past year. In December, it bought informatics shop Bina Technologies and non-invasive prenatal testing firm Ariosa Diagnostics. Last spring, it acquired NGS firm Genia and point-of-care molecular diagnostics company Iquum.

Roche also acquired NGS sample preparation technology from AbVitro last October and made an investment into NGS firm Stratos Genomics in June 2014.

SOURCE

https://www.genomeweb.com/business-news/roche-buys-german-genomics-firm-signature-diagnostics?utm_source=SilverpopMailing&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign=Daily%20News:%20Roche%20Buys%20Signature%20Diagnostics%20-%2002/09/2015%2003:50:00%20PM

 

Roche Acquires Bina Technologies

Dec 19, 2014 | a GenomeWeb staff reporter

NEW YORK (GenomeWeb) – Roche said today that it has acquired Bina Technologies, a privately held informatics company based in Redwood City, Calif., for an undisclosed amount.

Bina markets its proprietary Genomic Management Solution, Bina-GMS, a software system for genomic data analysis.

Bina will be integrated into the Roche Sequencing Unit in the first quarter of 2015. The acquisition will enable Bina to continue to develop and commercialize Bina-GMS to support multiple sequencing technologies while also developing a solution for Roche sequencing systems.

“Informatics and data management are critical to providing a seamless, end-to-end sequencing solution,” Dan Zabrowski, head of Roche Sequencing, said in a statement. “Bina’s products are designed to improve the efficiency and value of genomic analysis, and the company continues to develop new methodologiesand algorithms that link NGS data to disease-relevant genetic markers.”

Bina’s CEO and Founder, Narges Bani Asadi, said in a statement that the acquisition validated the firm’s technology. “It is also an indication of how informatics and data science are going to play a major role in the future of medicine,” she added.

The Bina purchase is Roche’s latest in a string of acquisitions within the next-gen sequencing space. Earlier this month, it acquired noninvasive prenatal testing company Ariosa Diagnostics. In October, it acquired NGS sample-prep technology developed by AbVitro in order to develop targeted sequencing panels for the Genia and Pacific Biosciences platforms. Roche acquired the single-molecule nanopore startup Genia in June, and last year struck an agreement with Pacific Biosciences to develop a clinical sequencing system.

SOURCE

https://www.genomeweb.com/business-news/roche-acquires-bina-technologies

Read Full Post »

Shattered chromosome (chromothripsis) cures woman of immune disease

Reporter: Aviva Lev-Ari, PhD, RN

 

 

 

 

 

 

Call it a scientific oddity—or a medical miracle. A girl who grew up with a serious genetic immune disease was apparently cured in her 30s by one of her chromosomes shattering into pieces and reassembling. Scientists traced the woman’s improvement to the removal of a harmful gene through this scrambling of DNA in one of her blood stem cells—a recently identified phenomenon that until now had only been linked to cancer.

 

As a child, the woman was suffering from WHIM (warts, hypogammaglobulinemia, infections, and myelokathexis) syndrome, and extremely rare disease—only about 60 cases are known worldwide—patients live into adulthood, but they can develop lung scarring, hearing loss, and other health problems from the frequent infections.

 

In 2003, researchers linked WHIM to a gene called CXCR4, which codes for a cell surface protein that immune cells use to recognize chemical messengers called chemokines. In WHIM, patients have one normal copy of CXCR4 and a defective copy that causes the receptor to be overactive—it doesn’t shut off when it’s supposed to.

 

This somehow causes white blood cells to “get stuck” in the bone marrow instead of entering the bloodstream, says Philip Murphy, an immunologist at the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases in Bethesda, Maryland. Murphy and colleagues have studied WHIM patients at the National Institutes of Health’s (NIH’s) Clinical Center to better understand the disease and develop a possible treatment with a drug that inhibits CXCR4. Two years ago, they heard from a woman who said she wanted to bring in her two daughters for evaluation because they had inherited the disease.

 

The woman was that first WHIM patient, now 59 years old. Her two daughters in their early 20s did indeed have classic symptoms of WHIM, such as warts on their hands, and their blood cells carried the mutation in CXCR4 that usually causes it. But as for their mother, “When we asked a very simple question—‘How was she doing?’—she said she was fine,” Murphy recalls. She had not had warts or serious infections since her late 30s. “At this point we got very, very interested,” he says.

 

The NIH team began sleuthing. To its surprise, the woman’s white blood cells no longer had the faulty CXCR4 mutation, although other cell types still carried it. Examining the chromosomes in her apparently normal white blood cells, they found an anomaly: One copy of chromosome 2 was about 15% shorter than the other copy. Whole-genome sequencing revealed that it had become scrambled and lost a chunk that included the defective CXCR4and 163 other normal genes.

 

The explanation seems to be chromothripsis, a phenomenon discovered only 4 years ago in a leukemia patient and occasionally seen in other cancers. A chromosome somehow shatters during cell replication, then reassembles with the pieces in a different order. Presumably, the cells typically die as a result of this damage, Murphy says. If the cell survives, the scrambled genes may contribute to cancer.

 

In this case, however, the chromosome shattering seems to have occurred in a blood stem cell, which then replicated to give her a supply of normal white blood cells. The missing copy ofCXCR4 also appears to explain why the cells now constitute all of her white blood cells, the NIH researchers say. They showed that transplants of stem cells lacking one copy of CXCR4engraft better in mice than stem cells with two normal copies or a normal copy and the WHIM version, they report online today in Cell.

Source: news.sciencemag.org

See on Scoop.it – Cardiovascular Disease: PHARMACO-THERAPY

Read Full Post »

Classification of Microbiota –

An Overview of Clinical Microbiology, Classification, and Antimicrobial Resistance

Author and Curator: Larry H. Bernstein, MD, FCAP

Classification of Microbiota

Introduction to Overview of Microbiology

This is a contribution to a series of pieces on the history of biochemistry, molecular biology, physiology and medicine in the 20th century.  Here I describe the common microbial organisms encountered in the clinical laboratory, the method of their collection, plating, culture and identification, and antibiotic sensitivity testing and resistant strains.

I may begin with the recognition that there are common strains in the environment that are not pathogenic, and there are pathogenic bacteria.
In addition, there are bacteria that coexist in the body habitat under specific conditions so that we are able to map the types expected to location, such as, skin, mouth and nasal cavities, the colon, the vagina and urinary system.  Meningitides occur as a result of extension from the nasal cavity to the brain.  When bacteria invade the circulation, it is referred to as septicemia, and the bacteria can cause valvular heart damage.

Bacteriology can be traced to origins in the 19th century.  The clinical features of localized infection are classically referred to as redness, heat, a raised lesion (pustule), and exudate (serous or purulent – watery or cellular).  This not only holds for a focal lesion (as skin), but also for pneumonia, urinary infection, and genital. It may be accompanied by cough, or bloody cough and wheezing, or by an unclear urine. In the case of septicemia, there is fever, and there may be seizures or delirium.

Collection and handling of specimens

Specimens are collected by sterile technique by a nurse or physician and sent to a lab as a swab, or as a blood specimen.  In the case of a febrile illness, blood cultures may be obtained from opposite arms, and another an hour later.  This is related to the possible cyclical seeding of bacteria into the circulation.  If the specimen is collected from a site of infection, a swab may be put onto a glass slide for gram staining.  The specimen collected is sent to the laboratory.

We may consider syphilis and tuberculosis special cases that I’ll set aside.  I shall not go into virology either, although I may referred to smallpox, influenza, polio, HIV under epidemic.  The first step in identification is the Gram stain, developed in the 19th century.  Organisms of the skin are Gram positive and appear blue on staining.  They are cocci, or circular, organized in characteristic clusters (staphylococcus, streptococcus) or in pairs (diplococci, eg. Pneumococcus), and if from the intestine (enterococcus).  If they are elongated rods, they might be coliform.  If they stain red, they are Gram negative.  Gram negative rods are coliform, and are enterobacteriaceae. Meningococci are Gram negative cocci.  So we have certain information about these organisms before we plate them for growth.

Laboratory growth characteristics

The specimen is applied to an agar plate with a metal rod applicator, or perhaps onto more than one agar plate.  The agar plate contains a growth media or a growth inhibitor that is more favorable to certain species than to others.  The bacteria are grown at 37o C in an incubator and colonies develop that are white or nonwhite, and they are smooth or wrinkled.  The appearance of the colonies is characteristic for certain strains.  If there is no contamination, all of the colonies look the same.  The next step is to:

  • Gram stain from a colony
  • Transfer samples from the colony to a series of growth media that identify presence or absence of specific nutrient requirements for growth (which is presumed from the prior findings).

In addition, the colony samples are grown on an agar to which is applied antibiotic tabs.  The tabs either allow or repress growth.  It wa some 50 years ago that the infectious disease physician and microbiologist Abraham Braude would culture the bacteria on agar plates that had a gradient of antibiotic to check for concentration that would inhibit growth.

Principles of Diagnosis (Extracts)

By John A. Washington

The clinical presentation of an infectious disease reflects the interaction between the host and the microorganism. This interaction is affected by the host immune status and microbial virulence factors. Signs and symptoms vary according to the site and severity of infection. Diagnosis requires a composite of information, including history, physical examination, radiographic findings, and laboratory data.

Microbiologic Examination

Direct Examination and Techniques: Direct examination of specimens reveals gross pathology. Microscopy may identify microorganisms. Immunofluorescence, immuno-peroxidase staining, and other immunoassays may detect specific microbial antigens. Genetic probes identify genus- or species-specific DNA or RNA sequences.

Culture: Isolation of infectious agents frequently requires specialized media. Nonselective (noninhibitory) media permit the growth of many microorganisms. Selective media contain inhibitory substances that permit the isolation of specific types of microorganisms.

Microbial Identification: Colony and cellular morphology may permit preliminary identification. Growth characteristics under various conditions, utilization of carbohydrates and other substrates, enzymatic activity, immunoassays, and genetic probes are also used.

Serodiagnosis: A high or rising titer of specific IgG antibodies or the presence of specific IgM antibodies may suggest or confirm a diagnosis.

Antimicrobial Susceptibility: Microorganisms, particularly bacteria, are tested in vitro to determine whether they are susceptible to antimicrobial agents.

Diagnostic medical microbiology is the discipline that identifies etiologic agents of disease. The job of the clinical microbiology laboratory is to test specimens from patients for microorganisms that are, or may be, a cause of the illness and to provide information (when appropriate) about the in vitro activity of antimicrobial drugs against the microorganisms identified (Fig. 1).

Laboratory procedures used in confirming a clinical diagnosis of infectious disease with a bacterial etiology

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK8014/bin/ch10f1.jpg

A variety of microscopic, immunologic, and hybridization techniques have been developed for rapid diagnosis

techniques have been developed for rapid diagnosis

techniques have been developed for rapid diagnosis

From: Chapter 10, Principles of Diagnosis
Medical Microbiology. 4th edition.
Baron S, editor.
Galveston (TX): University of Texas Medical Branch at Galveston; 1996.

For immunologic detection of microbial antigens, latex particle agglutination, coagglutination, and enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) are the most frequently used techniques in the clinical laboratory. Antibody to a specific antigen is bound to latex particles or to a heat-killed and treated protein A-rich strain of Staphylococcus aureus to produce agglutination (Fig. 10-2). There are several approaches to ELISA; the one most frequently used for the detection of microbial antigens uses an antigen-specific antibody that is fixed to a solid phase, which may be a latex or metal bead or the inside surface of a well in a plastic tray. Antigen present in the specimen binds to the antibody as inFig. 10-2. The test is then completed by adding a second antigen-specific antibody bound to an enzyme that can react with a substrate to produce a colored product. The initial antigen antibody complex forms in a manner similar to that shown inFigure 10-2. When the enzyme-conjugated antibody is added, it binds to previously unbound antigenic sites, and the antigen is, in effect, sandwiched between the solid phase and the enzyme-conjugated antibody. The reaction is completed by adding the enzyme substrate.

agglutination test ch10f2

agglutination test ch10f2

Figure 2 Agglutination test in which inert particles (latex beads or heat-killed S aureus Cowan 1 strain with protein A) are coated with antibody to any of a variety of antigens and then used to detect the antigen in specimens or in isolated bacteria

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK8014/bin/ch10f2.jpg

Genetic probes are based on the detection of unique nucleotide sequences with the DNA or RNA of a microorganism. Once such a unique nucleotide sequence, which may represent a portion of a virulence gene or of chromosomal DNA, is found, it is isolated and inserted into a cloning vector (plasmid), which is then transformed into Escherichia coli to produce multiple copies of the probe. The sequence is then reisolated from plasmids and labeled with an isotope or substrate for diagnostic use. Hybridization of the sequence with a complementary sequence of DNA or RNA follows cleavage of the double-stranded DNA of the microorganism in the specimen.

The use of molecular technology in the diagnoses of infectious diseases has been further enhanced by the introduction of gene amplication techniques, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) in which DNA polymerase is able to copy a strand of DNA by elongating complementary strands of DNA that have been initiated from a pair of closely spaced oligonucleotide primers. This approach has had major applications in the detection of infections due to microorganisms that are difficult to culture (e.g. the human immunodeficiency virus) or that have not as yet been successfully cultured (e.g. the Whipple’s disease bacillus).

Solid media, although somewhat less sensitive than liquid media, provide isolated colonies that can be quantified if necessary and identified. Some genera and species can be recognized on the basis of their colony morphologies.

In some instances one can take advantage of differential carbohydrate fermentation capabilities of microorganisms by incorporating one or more carbohydrates in the medium along with a suitable pH indicator. Such media are called differential media (e.g., eosin methylene blue or MacConkey agar) and are commonly used to isolate enteric bacilli. Different genera of the Enterobacteriaceae can then be presumptively identified by the color as well as the morphology of colonies.

Culture media can also be made selective by incorporating compounds such as antimicrobial agents that inhibit the indigenous flora while permitting growth of specific microorganisms resistant to these inhibitors. One such example is Thayer-Martin medium, which is used to isolate Neisseria gonorrhoeae. This medium contains vancomycin to inhibit Gram-positive bacteria, colistin to inhibit most Gram-negative bacilli, trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole to inhibit Proteus species and other species that are not inhibited by colistin and anisomycin to inhibit fungi. The pathogenic Neisseria species, N gonorrhoeae and N meningitidis, are ordinarily resistant to the concentrations of these antimicrobial agents in the medium.

Infection of the bladder (cystitis) or kidney (pyelone-phritis) is usually accompanied by bacteriuria of about ≥ 104 CFU/ml. For this reason, quantitative cultures (Fig. 10-3) of urine must always be performed. For most other specimens a semiquantitative streak method (Fig. 10-3) over the agar surface is sufficient. For quantitative cultures, a specific volume of specimen is spread over the agar surface and the number of colonies per milliliter is estimated.

Identification of bacteria (including mycobacteria) is based on growth characteristics (such as the time required for growth to appear or the atmosphere in which growth occurs), colony and microscopic morphology, and biochemical, physiologic, and, in some instances, antigenic or nucleotide sequence characteristics. The selection and number of tests for bacterial identification depend upon the category of bacteria present (aerobic versus anaerobic, Gram-positive versus Gram-negative, cocci versus bacilli) and the expertise of the microbiologist examining the culture. Gram-positive cocci that grow in air with or without added CO2 may be identified by a relatively small number of tests. The identification of most Gram-negative bacilli is far more complex and often requires panels of 20 tests for determining biochemical and physiologic characteristics.

Antimicrobial susceptibility tests are performed by either disk diffusion or a dilution method. In the former, a standardized suspension of a particular microorganism is inoculated onto an agar surface to which paper disks containing various antimicrobial agents are applied. Following overnight incubation, any zone diameters of inhibition about the disks are measured. An alternative method is to dilute on a log2 scale each antimicrobial agent in broth to provide a range of concentrations and to inoculate each tube or, if a microplate is used, each well containing the antimicrobial agent in broth with a standardized suspension of the microorganism to be tested. The lowest concentration of antimicrobial agent that inhibits the growth of the microorganism is the minimal inhibitory concentration.

Classification Principles

This Week’s Citation Classic®_______ Sneath P H A & Sokal R R.
Numerical taxonomy: the principles and practice of
numerical classification. San Francisco: Freeman, 1973. 573 p.
[Medical Research Council Microbial Systematics Unit, Univ. Leicester, England
and Dept. Ecology and Evolution, State Univ. New York, Stony Brook, NY]
Numerical taxonomy establishes classification
of organisms based on their similarities. It utilizes
many equally weighted characters and employs
clustering and similar algorithms to yield
objective groupings. It can beextended to give
phylogenetic or diagnostic systems and can be
applied to many other fields of endeavour.

Mathematical Foundations of Computer Science 1998
Lecture Notes in Computer Science Volume 1450, 1998, pp 474-482
Date: 28 May 2006
Positive Turing and truth-table completeness for NEXP are incomparable 1998
Levke Bentzien

The truth-table method [matrix method] is one of the decision procedures for sentence logic (q.v., §3.2). The method is based on the fact that the truth value of a compound formula of sentence logic, construed as a truth-function, is determined by the truth values of its arguments (cf. “Sentence logic” §2.2). To decide whether a formula A is a tautology or not, we list all possible combinations of truth values to the variables in A: A is a tautology if it takes the value truth under each assignment.

Using ideas introduced by Buhrman et al. ([2], [3]) to separate various completeness notions for NEXP = NTIME (2poly), positive Turing complete sets for NEXP are studied. In contrast to many-one completeness and bounded truth-table completeness with norm 1 which are known to coincide on NEXP ([3]), whence any such set for NEXP is positive Turing complete, we give sets A and B such that

A is ≤ bT(2) P -complete but not ≤ posT P -complete for NEXP

B is ≤ posT P -complete but not ≤ tt P -complete for NEXP. These results come close to optimality since a further strengthening of (1), as was done by Buhrman in [1] for EXP = DTIME(2poly), seems to require the assumption NEXP = co-NEXP.

Computability and Models
The University Series in Mathematics 2003, pp 1-10
Truth-Table Complete Computably Enumerable Sets
Marat M. Arslanov

We prove a truth-table completeness criterion for computably enumerable sets.
The authors research was partially supported by Russian Foundation of Basic Research, Project 99-01-00830, and RFBR-INTAS, Project 97-91-71991.

TRUTH TABLE CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION*
EUGENE W. RYPKA
Department of Microbiology, Lovelace Foundation for Medical Education and Research,
Albuquerque, N.M. 87108, U.S.A.
Space life sciences 1971-12-1; 3(2): pp 135-156
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1007/BF00927988
(Received 15 July, 1971)
Abstract. A logical basis for classification is that elements grouped together and higher categories of elements should have a high degree of similarity with the provision that all groups and categories be disjoint to some degree. A methodology has been developed for constructing classifications automatically that gives
nearly instantaneous correlations of character patterns of organisms with time and clusters with apparent similarity. This means that automatic numerical identification will always construct schemes from which disjoint answers can be obtained if test sensitivities for characters are correct. Unidentified organisms are recycled through continuous classification with reconstruction of identification schemes. This process is
cyclic and self-correcting. The method also accumulates and analyzes data which updates and presents a more accurate biological picture.

Syndromic classification: A process for amplifying information using S-clustering

Eugene W. Rypka, PHD

http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/S0899-9007(96)00315-2

Optimal classification/Rypka < Optimal classification>

Contents

1 Rypka’s Method

1.1 Equations

1.2 Examples

2 Notes and References

Rypka’s Method

Rypka’s[1] method[2] utilizes the theoretical and empirical separatory equations shown below to perform the task of optimal classification. The method finds the optimal order of the fewest attributes, which in combination define a bounded class of elements.

Application of the method begins with construction of an attribute-valued system in truth table[3] or spreadsheet form with elements listed in the left most column beginning in the second row. Characteristics[4] are listed in the first row beginning in the second column with the code name of the data in the upper left most cell. The values which connect each characteristic with each element are placed in the intersecting cells. Selecting appropriate characteristics to universally define the class of elements may be the most difficult part for the classifier of utilizing this method.

The elements are first sorted in descending order according to their truth table value, which is calculated from the existing sequence and value of characteristics for each element. Duplicate truth table values or multisets for the entire bounded class reveal either the need to eliminate duplicate elements or the need to include additional characteristics.

An empirical separatory value is calculated for each characteristic in the set and the characteristic with the greatest empirical separatory value is exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the most significant attribute position.

Next the second most significant characteristic is found by calculating an empirical separatory value for each remaining characteristic in combination with the first characteristic. The characteristic which produces the greatest separatory value is then exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the second most significant attribute position.

Next the third most significant characteristic is found by calculating an empirical separatory value for each remaining characteristic in combination with the first and second characteristics. The characteristic which produces the greatest empirical separatory value is then exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the third most significant attribute position. This procedure may continue until all characteristics have been processed or until one hundred percent separation of the elements has been achieved.

A larger radix will allow faster identification by excluding a greater percentage of elements per characteristic. A binary radix for instance excludes only fifty percent of the elements per characteristic whereas a five-valued radix excludes eighty percent of the elements per characteristic.[5] What follows is an elucidation of the matrix and separatory equations.[6]

Computational Example
Bounded Class Data

bounded class data

Bounded Class Dimensions

G = 28 – 28 elements – i = 0…G-1[1]

C = 10 – 10 characteristics or attributes – j = 0…C-1

V = 5 – 5 valued logic – l = 0…V-1

Order of Elements

order of elements

Count multisets

count multisets

Squared multiset Counts

squared multiset counts

Separatory Values

separatory values

T=

max(T) = 309 = S8 = highest initial separatory value

Notes

Mathcad’s ORIGIN function applies to all arrays such that if more than one array is being used and one array requires a zero origin then the other arrays must use a zero origin with all variables being adapted as well.

Rypka’s Method Edit

Rypka’s[1] method[2] utilizes the theoretical and empirical separatory equations shown below to perform the task of optimal classification. The method finds the optimal order of the fewest attributes, which in combination define a bounded class of elements.

Application of the method begins with construction of an attribute-valued system in truth table[3] or spreadsheet form with elements listed in the left most column beginning in the second row. Characteristics[4] are listed in the first row beginning in the second column with the title of the attributes in the upper left most cell. Normally the file name of the data is given the title of the element class. The values which connect each characteristic with each element are placed in the intersecting cells. Selecting characteristics which all elements share may be the most difficult part of creating a database which can utilizing this method.

The elements are first sorted in descending order according to their truth table value, which is calculated from the existing sequence and value of characteristics for each element. Duplicate truth table values or multisets for the entire bounded class reveal either the need to eliminate duplicate elements or the need to include additional characteristics.

An empirical separatory value is calculated for each characteristic in the set and the characteristic with the greatest empirical separatory value is exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the most significant attribute position.

Next the second most significant characteristic is found by calculating an empirical separatory value for each remaining characteristic in combination with the first characteristic. The characteristic which produces the greatest separatory value is then exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the second most significant attribute position.

Next the third most significant characteristic is found by calculating an empirical separatory value for each remaining characteristic in combination with the first and second characteristics. The characteristic which produces the greatest empirical separatory value is then exchanged with the characteristic which occupies the third most significant attribute position. This procedure may continue until all characteristics have been processed or until one hundred percent separation of the elements has been achieved.

A larger radix will allow faster identification by excluding a greater percentage of elements per characteristic. A binary radix for instance excludes only fifty percent of the elements per characteristic whereas a five-valued radix excludes eighty percent of the elements per characteristic.[5] What follows is an elucidation of the matrix and separatory equations.[6]

Syndromic Classification: A Process for Amplifying Information Using S-Clustering

Eugene W. Rypka, PhD
University of New Mexico, Albuquerque, New Mexico, USA
Statistics Editor: Marcello Pagano, PhD
Harvard School of Public Health, Boston, Massachusetts, USA
Nutrition 1996; 12(11/12): 827-829

In a previous issue of Nutrition, Drs. Bernstein and Pleban’ use the method of S-clustering to aid in nutritional classification of patients directly on-line. Classification of this type is called primary or syndromic classification.* It is created by a process called separatory (S-) clustering (E. Rypka, unpublished observations). The authors use S-clustering in Table I.  S-clustering extracts features (analytes, variables) from endogenous data that amplify or maximize structural information to create classes of patients (pathophysiologic events) which are the most disjointed or separable. S-clustering differs from other classificatory methods because it finds in a database a theoretic- or more- number of variables with the required variety that map closest to an ideal, theoretic, or structural information standard. In Table I of their article, Bernstein and Pleban’ indicate there would have to be 3 ’ = 243 rows to show all possible patterns. In Table II of this article, I have used a 33 = 27 row truth table to convey the notion of mapping amplified information to an ideal, theoretic standard using just the first three columns. Variables are scaled for use in S-clustering.

A Survey of Binary Similarity and Distance Measures
Seung-Seok Choi, Sung-Hyuk Cha, Charles C. Tappert
SYSTEMICS, CYBERNETICS AND INFORMATICS 2010; 8(1): 43-48
The binary feature vector is one of the most common
representations of patterns and measuring similarity and
distance measures play a critical role in many problems
such as clustering, classification, etc. Ever since Jaccard
proposed a similarity measure to classify ecological
species in 1901, numerous binary similarity and distance
measures have been proposed in various fields. Applying
appropriate measures results in more accurate data
analysis. Notwithstanding, few comprehensive surveys
on binary measures have been conducted. Hence we
collected 76 binary similarity and distance measures used
over the last century and reveal their correlations through
the hierarchical clustering technique.

This paper is organized as follows. Section 2 describes
the definitions of 76 binary similarity and dissimilarity
measures. Section 3 discusses the grouping of those
measures using hierarchical clustering. Section 4
concludes this work.

Historically, all the binary measures observed above have
had a meaningful performance in their respective fields.
The binary similarity coefficients proposed by Peirce,
Yule, and Pearson in 1900s contributes to the evolution
of the various correlation based binary similarity
measures. The Jaccard coefficient proposed at 1901 is
still widely used in the various fields such as ecology and
biology. The discussion of inclusion or exclusion of
negative matches was actively arisen by Sokal & Sneath
in during 1960s and by Goodman & Kruskal in 1970s.

Polyphasic Taxonomy of the Genus Vibrio: Numerical Taxonomy of Vibrio cholerae, Vibrio
parahaemolyticus, and Related Vibrio Species
R. R. COLWELL
JOURNAL OF BACTERIOLOGY, Oct. 1970;  104(1): 410-433
A set of 86 bacterial cultures, including 30 strains of Vibrio cholerae, 35 strains of
V. parahaemolyticus, and 21 representative strains of Pseudomonas, Spirillum,
Achromobacter, Arthrobacter, and marine Vibrio species were tested for a total of 200
characteristics. Morphological, physiological, and biochemical characteristics were
included in the analysis. Overall deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) base compositions
and ultrastructure, under the electron microscope, were also examined. The taxonomic
data were analyzed by computer by using numerical taxonomy programs
designed to sort and cluster strains related phenetically. The V. cholerae strains
formed an homogeneous cluster, sharing overall S values of >75%. Two strains,
V. cholerae NCTC 30 and NCTC 8042, did not fall into the V. cholerae species
group when tested by the hypothetical median organism calculation. No separation
of “classic” V. cholerae, El Tor vibrios, and nonagglutinable vibrios was observed.
These all fell into a single, relatively homogeneous, V. cholerae species cluster.
PJ. parahaemolyticus strains, excepting 5144, 5146, and 5162, designated members
of the species V. alginolyticus, clustered at S >80%. Characteristics uniformly
present in all the Vibrio species examined are given, as are also characteristics and
frequency of occurrence for V. cholerae and V. parahaemolyticus. The clusters formed
in the numerical taxonomy analyses revealed similar overall DNA base compositions,
with the range for the Vibrio species of 40 to 48% guanine plus cytosine. Generic
level of relationship of V. cholerae and V. parahaemolyticus is considered
dubious. Intra- and intergroup relationships obtained from the numerical taxonomy
studies showed highly significant correlation with DNA/DNA reassociation data.

A Numerical Classification of the Genus Bacillus
By FERGUS G . PRIEST, MICHAEL GOODFELLOW AND CAROLE TODD
Journal of General Microbiology (1988), 134, 1847-1882.

Three hundred and sixty-eight strains of aerobic, endospore-forming bacteria which included type and reference cultures of Bacillus and environmental isolates were studied. Overall similarities of these strains for 118 unit characters were determined by the SSMS,, and Dp coefficients and clustering achieved using the UPGMA algorithm. Test error was within acceptable limits. Six cluster-groups were defined at 70% SSM which corresponded to 69% Sp and 48-57% SJ.G roupings obtained with the three coefficients were generally similar but there were some changes in the definition and membership of cluster-groups and clusters, particularly with the SJ coefficient. The Bacillus strains were distributed among 31 major (4 or more strains), 18 minor (2 or 3 strains) and 30 single-member clusters at the 83% SsMle vel. Most of these clusters can be regarded as taxospecies. The heterogeneity of several species, including Bacillus breuis, B. circulans, B. coagulans, B. megateriun, B . sphaericus and B . stearothermophilus, has been indicated  and the species status of several taxa of hitherto uncertain validity confirmed. Thus on the basis of the numerical phenetic and appropriate (published) molecular genetic data, it is proposed
that the following names be recognized; BacillusJlexus (Batchelor) nom. rev., Bacillus fusiformis (Smith et al.) comb. nov., Bacillus kaustophilus (Prickett) nom. rev., Bacilluspsychrosaccharolyticus (Larkin & Stokes) nom. rev. and Bacillus simplex (Gottheil) nom. rev. Other phenetically well-defined taxospecies included ‘ B. aneurinolyticus’, ‘B. apiarius’, ‘B. cascainensis’, ‘B. thiaminolyticus’ and three clusters of environmental isolates related to B . firmus and previously described as ‘B. firmus-B. lentus intermediates’. Future developments in the light of the numerical phenetic data are discussed.

Numerical Classification of Bacteria
Part II. * Computer Analysis of Coryneform Bacteria (2)
Comparison of Group-Formations Obtained on Two
Different Methods of Scoring Data
By Eitaro MASUOan d Toshio NAKAGAWA
[Agr. Biol. Chem., 1969; 33(8): 1124-1133.
Sixty three organisms selected from 12 genera of bacteria were subjected to numerical analysis. The purpose of this work is to examine the relationships among 38 coryneform bacteria included in the test organisms by two coding methods-Sneath’s and Lockhart’s systems-, and to compare the results with conventional classification. In both cases of codification, five groups and one or two single item(s) were found in the resultant classifications. Different codings brought, however, a few distinct differences in some groups , especially in a group of sporogenic bacilli or lactic-acid bacteria. So far as the present work concerns, the result obtained on Lockhart’s coding rather than that obtained on Sneath’s coding resembled the conventional classification. The taxonomic positions of corynebacteria were quite different from those of the conventional classification, regardless
of which coding method was applied.
Though animal corynebacteria have conventionally been considered to occupy the
taxonomic position neighboring to genera Arthrobacter and Cellulornonas and regarded to be the nucleus of so-called “coryneform bacteria,’ the present work showed that many of the corynebacteria are akin to certain mycobacteria rather than to the organisms belonging to the above two genera.

Numerical Classification of Bacteria
Part III. Computer Analysis of “Coryneform Bacteria” (3)
Classification Based on DNA Base Compositions
By EitaroM ASUaOnd ToshioN AKAGAWA
Agr. Biol. Chem., 1969; 33(11): 1570-1576
It has been known that the base compositions of deoxyribonucleic acids (DNA) are
quite different from organism to organism. A pertinent example of this diversity is
found in bacterial species. The base compositions of DNA isolated from a wide variety
of bacteria are distributed in a range from 25 to 75 GC mole-percent (100x(G+C)/
(A+T+G+C)).1) The usefulness of the information of DNA base composition for
the taxonomy of bacteria has been emphasized by several authors. Lee et al.,” Sueoka,” and Freese) have speculated on the evolutionary significance of microbial DNA base composition. They pointed out that closely related microorganisms generally showed similar base compositions of DNA, and suggested that phylogenetic relationship should be reflected in the GC content.
In the present paper are compared the results of numerical classifications of 45
bacteria based on the two different similarity matrices: One representing the overall
similarities of phenotypic properties, the other representing the similarities of GC contents.

Advanced computational algorithms for microbial community analysis using massive 16S rRNA
sequence data
Y Sun, Y Cai, V Mai, W Farmerie, F Yu, J Li and S Goodison
Nucleic Acids Research, 2010; 38(22): e205
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1093/nar/gkq872

With the aid of next-generation sequencing technology, researchers can now obtain millions of microbial signature sequences for diverse applications ranging from human epidemiological studies to global ocean surveys. The development of advanced computational strategies to maximally extract pertinent information from massive nucleotide data has become a major focus of the bioinformatics community. Here, we describe a novel analytical strategy including discriminant and topology analyses that enables researchers to deeply investigate the hidden world of microbial communities, far beyond basic microbial diversity estimation. We demonstrate the utility of our
approach through a computational study performed on a previously published massive human gut 16S rRNA data set. The application of discriminant and
topology analyses enabled us to derive quantitative disease-associated microbial signatures and describe microbial community structure in far more detail than previously achievable. Our approach provides rigorous statistical tools for sequence based studies aimed at elucidating associations between known or unknown organisms and a variety of physiological or environmental conditions.

What is Drug Resistance?

Antimicrobial resistance is the ability of microbes, such as bacteria, viruses, parasites, or fungi, to grow in the presence of a chemical (drug) that would normally kill it or limit its growth.

Diagram showing the difference between non-resistant bacteria and drug resistant bacteria.

Credit: NIAID

DrugResistance difference between non-resistant bacteria and drug resistant bacteria

DrugResistance difference between non-resistant bacteria and drug resistant bacteria

http://www.niaid.nih.gov/SiteCollectionImages/topics/antimicrobialresistance/1whatIsDrugResistance.gif

Diagram showing the difference between non-resistant bacteria and drug resistant bacteria. Non-resistant bacteria multiply, and upon drug treatment, the bacteria die. Drug resistant bacteria multiply as well, but upon drug treatment, the bacteria continue to spread.

Between 5 and 10 percent of all hospital patients develop an infection. About 90,000 of these patients die each year as a result of their infection, up from 13,300 patient deaths in 1992.

According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (April 2011), antibiotic resistance in the United States costs an estimated $20 billion a year in excess health care costs, $35 million in other societal costs and more than 8 million additional days that people spend in the hospital.

Resistance to Antibiotics: Are We in the Post-Antibiotic Era?

Alfonso J. Alanis
Archives of Medical Research 36 (2005) 697–705
http://dx.doi.org:/10.1016/j.arcmed.2005.06.009

Serious infections caused by bacteria that have become resistant to commonly used antibiotics have become a major global healthcare problem in the 21st century. They not only are more severe and require longer and more complex treatments, but they are also significantly more expensive to diagnose and to treat. Antibiotic resistance, initially a problem of the hospital setting associated with an increased number of hospital acquired infections usually in critically ill and immunosuppressed patients, has now extended into the community causing severe infections difficult to diagnose and treat. The molecular mechanisms by which bacteria have become resistant to antibiotics are diverse and complex. Bacteria have developed resistance to all different classes of antibiotics discovered to date. The most frequent type of resistance is acquired and transmitted horizontally via the conjugation of a plasmid. In recent times new mechanisms of resistance have resulted in the simultaneous development of resistance to several antibiotic classes creating very dangerous multidrug-resistant (MDR) bacterial strains, some also known as ‘‘superbugs’’. The indiscriminate and inappropriate use of antibiotics in outpatient clinics, hospitalized patients and in the food industry is the single largest factor leading to antibiotic resistance. The pharmaceutical industry, large academic institutions or the government are not investing the necessary resources to produce the next generation of newer safe and effective antimicrobial drugs. In many cases, large pharmaceutical companies have terminated their anti-infective research programs altogether due to economic reasons. The potential negative consequences of all these events are relevant because they put society at risk for the spread of potentially serious MDR bacterial infections.

Targeting the Human Macrophage with Combinations of Drugs and Inhibitors of Ca2+ and K+ Transport to Enhance the Killing of Intracellular Multi-Drug Resistant M. tuberculosis (MDR-TB) – a Novel, Patentable Approach to Limit the Emergence of XDR-TB

Marta Martins
Recent Patents on Anti-Infective Drug Discovery, 2011, 6, 000-000

The emergence of resistance in Tuberculosis has become a serious problem for the control of this disease. For that reason, new therapeutic strategies that can be implemented in the clinical setting are urgently needed. The design of new compounds active against mycobacteria must take into account that Tuberculosis is mainly an intracellular infection of the alveolar macrophage and therefore must maintain activity within the host cells. An alternative therapeutic approach will be described in this review, focusing on the activation of the phagocytic cell and the subsequent killing of the internalized bacteria. This approach explores the combined use of antibiotics and phenothiazines, or Ca2+ and K+ flux inhibitors, in the infected macrophage. Targeting the infected macrophage and not the internalized bacteria could overcome the problem of bacterial multi-drug resistance. This will potentially eliminate the appearance of new multi-drug resistant tuberculosis (MDR-TB) cases and subsequently prevent the emergence of extensively-drug resistant tuberculosis (XDR-TB). Patents resulting from this novel and innovative approach could be extremely valuable if they can be implemented in the clinical setting. Other patents will also be discussed such as the treatment of TB using immunomodulator compounds (for example: betaglycans).

Six Epigenetic Faces of Streptococcus

Kevin Mayer
http://www.genengnews.com/gen-news-highlights/six-epigenetic-faces-of-streptococcus/81250430/

Medical illustration of Streptococcus pneumonia. [CDC]

Streptococcus pneumonia

Streptococcus pneumonia

It appears that S. pneumoniae has even more personalities, each associated with a different proclivity toward invasive, life-threatening disease. In fact, any of six personalities may emerge depending on the action of a single genetic switch.

To uncover the switch, an international team of scientists conducted a study in genomics, but they looked beyond nucleotide polymorphisms or accessory regions as possible phenotype-shifting mechanisms. Instead, they focused on the potential of restriction-modification (RM) systems to mediate gene regulation via epigenetic changes.

Scientists representing the University of Leicester, Griffith University’s Institute for Glycomics, theUniversity of Adelaide, and Pacific Biosciences realized that the S. pneumoniae genome contains two Type I, three Type II, and one Type IV RM systems. Of these, only the DpnI Type II RM system had been described in detail. Switchable Type I systems had been described previously, but these reports did not provide evidence for differential methylation or for phenotypic impact.

As it turned out, the Type I system embodied a mechanism capable of randomly changing the bacterium’s characteristics into six alternative states. The mechanism’s details were presented September 30 in Nature Communications, in an article entitled, “A random six-phase switch regulates pneumococcal virulence via global epigenetic changes.”

“The underlying mechanism for such phase variation consists of genetic rearrangements in a Type I restriction-modification system (SpnD39III),” wrote the authors. “The rearrangements generate six alternative specificities with distinct methylation patterns, as defined by single-molecule, real-time (SMRT) methylomics.”

Eradication of multidrug-resistant A. baumanniii in burn wounds by antiseptic pulsed electric field.

A Golberg, GF Broelsch, D Vecchio,S Khan, MR Hamblin, WG Austen, Jr, RL Sheridan,  ML Yarmush.

Emerging bacterial resistance to multiple drugs is an increasing problem in burn wound management. New non-pharmacologic interventions are needed for wound disinfection. Here we report on a novel physical method for disinfection: antiseptic pulsed electric field (PEF) applied externally to the infected wounds.  In an animal model, we show that PEF can reduce the load of multidrug resistant Acinetobacter baumannii present in a full thickness burn wound by more than four orders of magnitude, as detected by bioluminescence imaging. Furthermore, using a finite element numerical model, we demonstrate that PEF provides non-thermal, homogeneous, full thickness treatment for the burn wound, thus, overcoming the limitation of treatment depth for many topical antimicrobials. These modeling tools and our in vivo results will be extremely useful for further translation of the PEF technology to the clinical setting. We believe that PEF, in combination with systemic antibiotics, will synergistically eradicate multidrug-resistant burn wound infections, prevent biofilm formation and restore natural skin microbiome. PEF provides a new platform for infection combat in patients, therefore it has a potential to significantly decreasing morbidity and mortality.

Golberg, A. & Yarmush, M. L. Nonthermal irreversible electroporation: fundamentals, applications, and challenges. IEEE Trans Biomed Eng 60, 707-14 (2013).

Mechanisms Of Antibiotic Resistance In Salmonella: Efflux Pumps, Genetics, Quorum Sensing And Biofilm Formation.

Martins M, McCusker M, Amaral L, Fanning S
Perspectives in Drug Discovery and Design 02/2011; 8:114-123.

In Salmonella the main mechanisms of antibiotic resistance are mutations in target genes (such as DNA gyrase and topoisomerase IV) and the over-expression of efflux pumps. However, other mechanisms such as changes in the cell envelope; down regulation of membrane porins; increased lipopolysaccharide (LPS) component of the outer cell membrane; quorum sensing and biofilm formation can also contribute to the resistance seen in this microorganism. To overcome this problem new therapeutic approaches are urgently needed. In the case of efflux-mediated multidrug resistant isolates, one of the treatment options could be the use of efflux pump inhibitors (EPIs) in combination with the antibiotics to which the bacteria is resistant. By blocking the efflux pumps resistance is partly or wholly reversed, allowing antibiotics showing no activity against the MDR strains to be used to treat these infections. Compounds that show potential as an EPI are therefore of interest, as well as new strategies to target the efflux systems. Quorum sensing (QS) and biofilm formation are systems also known to be involved in antibiotic resistance. Consequently, compounds that can disrupt or inhibit these bacterial “communication systems” will be of use in the treatment of these infections.

Role of Phenothiazines and Structurally Similar Compounds of Plant Origin in the Fight against Infections by Drug Resistant Bacteria

SG Dastidar, JE Kristiansen, J Molnar and L Amaral
Antibiotics 2013, 2, 58-71;
http://dx.doi.org:/10.3390/antibiotics2010058

Phenothiazines have their primary effects on the plasma membranes of prokaryotes and eukaryotes. Among the components of the prokaryotic plasma membrane affected are efflux pumps, their energy sources and energy providing enzymes, such as ATPase, and genes that regulate and code for the permeability aspect of a bacterium. The response of multidrug and extensively drug resistant tuberculosis to phenothiazines shows an alternative therapy for its treatment. Many phenothiazines have shown synergistic activity with several antibiotics thereby lowering the doses of antibiotics administered for specific bacterial infections. Trimeprazine is synergistic with trimethoprim. Flupenthixol (Fp) has been found to be synergistic with penicillin and chlorpromazine (CPZ); in addition, some antibiotics are also synergistic. Along with the antibacterial action described in this review, many phenothiazines possess plasmid curing activities, which render the bacterial carrier of the plasmid sensitive to antibiotics. Thus, simultaneous applications of a phenothiazine like TZ would not only act as an additional antibacterial agent but also would help to eliminate drug resistant plasmid from the infectious bacterial cells.

Multidrug Efflux Pumps Described for Staphylococcus aureus

Efflux Pump  Familya  Regulator(s)b  Substrate Specificity  References 
Chromosomally-encoded Efflux Systems 
NorA MFS MgrA, NorG(?) Hydrophilic fluoroquinolones (ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin)QACs (tetraphenylphosphonium, benzalkonium chloride)

Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide, rhodamine)

[16,18,19]
NorB MFS MgrA, NorG Fluoroquinolones (e.g. hydrophilic: ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin and hydrophobic: moxifloxacin,
sparfloxacin)TetracyclineQACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium, cetrimide)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide)
[31]
NorC MFS MgrA(?), NorG Fluoroquinolones (e.g. hydrophilic: ciprofloxacin and hydrophobic: moxifloxacin)Dyes (e.g. rhodamine) [35,36]
MepA MATE MepR Fluoroquinolones (e.g. hydrophilic: ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin and hydrophobic: moxifloxacin,
sparfloxacin)Glycylcyclines (e.g. tigecycline)QACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium, cetrimide, benzalkonium chloride)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide)
[37,38]
MdeA MFS n.i. Hydrophilic fluoroquinolones (e.g. ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin)Virginiamycin, novobiocin, mupirocin, fusidic acid

QACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium, benzalkonium chloride, dequalinium)

Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide)

[39,40]
SepA n.d. n.i. QACs (e.g. benzalkonium chloride)Biguanidines (e.g. chlorhexidine)

Dyes (e.g. acriflavine)

[41]
SdrM MFS n.i. Hydrophilic fluoroquinolones (e.g. norfloxacin)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide, acriflavine) [42]
LmrS MFS n.i. Oxazolidinone (linezolid)Phenicols (e.g. choramphenicol, florfenicol)

Trimethoprim, erythromycin, kanamycin, fusidic acid

QACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium)

Detergents (e.g. sodium docecyl sulphate)

Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide)

[43]

Plasmid-encoded Efflux Systems

QacA MFS QacR QACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium, benzalkonium chloride, dequalinium)Biguanidines (e.g. chlorhexidine)

Diamidines (e.g. pentamidine)

Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide, rhodamine, acriflavine)

[45,49]
QacB MFS QacR QACs (e.g. tetraphenylphosphonium, benzalkonium chloride)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide, rhodamine, acriflavine) [53]
Smr SMR n.i. QACs (e.g. benzalkonium chloride, cetrimide)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide) [58,61]
QacG SMR n.i. QACs (e.g. benzalkonium chloride, cetyltrymethylammonium)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide) [67]
QacH SMR n.i. QACs (e.g. benzalkonium chloride, cetyltrymethylammonium)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide) [68]
QacJ SMR n.i. QACs (e.g. benzalkonium chloride, cetyltrymethylammonium)Dyes (e.g. ethidium bromide) [69]

a n.d.: The family of transporters to which SepA belongs is not elucidated to date.
b n.i.: The transporter has no regulator identified to date.
QACs: quaternary ammonium compounds
The importance of efflux pumps in bacterial antibiotic resistance

  1. A. Webber and L. J. V. Piddock
    Journal of Antimicrobial Chemotherapy (2003) 51, 9–11
    http://dx.doi.org:/10.1093/jac/dkg050Efflux pumps are transport proteins involved in the extrusion of toxic substrates (including virtually all classes of clinically relevant antibiotics) from within cells into the external environment. These proteins are found in both Gram-positive and -negative bacteria as well as in eukaryotic organisms. Pumps may be specific for one substrate or may transport a range of structurally dissimilar compounds (including antibiotics of multiple classes); such pumps can be associated with multiple drug resistance (MDR). In the prokaryotic kingdom there are five major families of efflux transporter: MF (major facilitator), MATE (multidrug and toxic efflux), RND (resistance-nodulation-division), SMR (small multidrug resistance) and ABC (ATP binding cassette). All these systems utilize the proton motive force as an energy source. Advances in DNA technology have led to the identification of members of the above families. Transporters that efflux multiple substrates, including antibiotics, have not evolved in response to the stresses of the antibiotic era. All bacterial genomes studied contain efflux pumps that indicate their ancestral origins. It has been estimated that ∼5–10% of all bacterial genes are involved in transport and a large proportion of these encode efflux pumps.
The efflux pump

The efflux pump

Multidrug-resistance efflux pumps — not just for resistance

Laura J. V. Piddock
Nature Reviews | Microbiology | Aug 2006; 4: 629

It is well established that multidrug-resistance efflux pumps encoded by bacteria can confer clinically relevant resistance to antibiotics. It is now understood that these efflux pumps also have a physiological role(s). They can confer resistance to natural substances produced by the host, including bile, hormones and host defense molecules. In addition, some efflux pumps of the resistance nodulation division (RND) family have been shown to have a role in the colonization and the persistence of bacteria in the host. Here, I present the accumulating evidence that multidrug-resistance efflux pumps have roles in bacterial pathogenicity and propose that these pumps therefore have greater clinical relevance than is usually attributed to them.

Read Full Post »

Illumina launches three new Sequencing Systems and New Diagnostic Plans: Noninvasive Prenatal Testing and Oncology Markets

Reporter: Aviva Lev-Ari, PhD, RN

 

Illumina Launches Four New Systems; Provides Financial, Dx Update at JP Morgan

Jan 12, 2015 | Ed Winnick

SAN FRANCISCO (GenomeWeb) – Illumina today announced the launch of three new sequencing systems and provided an update on its diagnostic plans in the noninvasive prenatal testing and oncology markets.

Speaking at the JP Morgan Healthcare Conference, CEO Jay Flatley preannounced fourth quarter revenues of $512 million, as well as $1.86 billion in FY 2015 revenues, representing 31 percent year-over-year growth. He said the firm expects revenue growth of 20 percent in FY 2015.

He also unveiled the HiSeq X Five System, the HiSeq 3000 and 4000 Systems, and the NextSeq 550 System, an NGS system enabled for array scanning.

The HiSeq X Five is a scaled down version of the X Ten, which was launched at last year’s JP Morgan conference. It consists of five individual HiSeq X instruments, enabling more “capital-constrained” customers to adopt high-throughput whole-genome sequencing with a lower capital investment, Flatley said. The X Five provides the throughput to sequence more than 9,000 genomes a year, he noted, and will cost $6 million per system. Customers will be able to produce a genome for around $1,400 with the system, which will launch in the second quarter of 2015.

Flatley said that the firm sold far more X Ten systems in 2014 than it had initially anticipated. In total, he said the firm signed up 18 customers and sold 201 X Ten units during the year, including 37 sold in the fourth quarter.

The HiSeq 3000 and 4000 systems build on the capabilities of the HiSeq 2500 System and leverage the patterned flow cell technology developed for the HiSeq X Ten System.

SOURCE

https://www.genomeweb.com/business-news/illumina-launches-four-new-systems-provides-financial-dx-update-jp-morgan

Read Full Post »

The Evolution of Clinical Chemistry in the 20th Century

Curator: Larry H. Bernstein, MD, FCAP

Article ID #164: The Evolution of Clinical Chemistry in the 20th Century. Published on 12/13/2014

WordCloud Image Produced by Adam Tubman

This is a subchapter in the series on developments in diagnostics in the period from 1880 to 1980.

Otto Folin: America’s First Clinical Biochemist

(Extracted from Samuel Meites, AACC History Division; Apr 1996)

Forward by Wendell T. Caraway, PhD.

The first introduction to Folin comes with the Folin-Wu protein-free filktrate, a technique for removing proteins from whole blood or plasma that resulted in water-clear solutions suitable for the determination of glucose, creatinine, uric acid, non-protein nitrogen, and chloride. The major active ingredient used in the precipitation of protein was sodium tungstate prepared “according to Folin”.Folin-Wu sugar tubes were used for the determination of glucose. From these and subsequent encounters, we learned that Folin was a pioneer in methods for the chemical analysis of blood.  The determination of uric acid in serum was the Benedict method in which protein-free filtrate was mixed with solutions of sodium cyanide and arsenophosphotungstic acid and then heated in a water bath to develop a blue color.  A thorough review of the literature revealed that Folin and Denis had published, in 1912, a method for uric acid in which they used sodium carbonate, rather than sodium cyanide, which was modified and largely superceded the “cyanide”method.

Notes from the author.

Modern clinical chemistry began with the application of 20th century quantitative analysis and instrumentation to measure constituents of blood and urine, and relating the values obtained to human health and disease. In the United States, the first impetus propelling this new area of biochemistry was provided by the 1912 papers of Otto Folin.  The only precedent for these stimulating findings was his own earlier and certainly classic papers on the quantitative compositiuon of urine, the laws governing its composition, and studies on the catabolic end products of protein, which led to his ingenious concept of endogenous and exogenous metabolism.  He had already determined blood ammonia in 1902.  This work preceded the entry of Stanley Benedict and Donald Van Slyke into biochemistry.  Once all three of them were active contributors, the future of clinical biochemistry was ensured. Those who would consult the early volumes of the Journal of Biological Chemistry will discover the direction that the work of Otto Follin gave to biochemistry.  This modest, unobstrusive man of Harvard was a powerful stimulus and inspiration to others.

Quantitatively, in the years of his scientific productivity, 1897-1934, Otto Folin published 151 (+ 1) journal articles including a chapter in Aberhalden’s handbook and one in Hammarsten’s Festschrift, but excluding his doctoral dissertation, his published abstracts, and several articles in the proceedings of the Association of Life Insurance Directors of America. He also wrote one monograph on food preservatives and produced five editions of his laboratory manual. He published four articles while studying in Europe (1896-98), 28 while at the McLean Hospital (1900-7), and 119 at Harvard (1908-34). In his banner year of 1912 he published 20 papers. His peak period from 1912-15 included 15 papers, the monograph, and most of the work on the first edition of his laboratory manual.

The quality of Otto Folin’s life’s work relates to its impact on biochemistry, particularly clinical biochemistry.  Otto’s two brilliant collaborators, Willey Denis and Hsien Wu, must be acknowledged.  Without denis, Otto could not have achieved so rapidly the introduction and popularization of modern blood analysis in the U.S. It would be pointless to conjecture how far Otto would have progressed without this pair.

His work provided the basis of the modern approach to the quantitative analysis of blood and urine through improved methods that reduced the body fluid volume required for analysis. He also applied these methods to metabolic studies on tissues as well as body fluids. Because his interests lay in protein metabolism, his major contributions were directede toward measuring nitrogenous waste or end products.His most dramatic achievement was is illustrated by the study of blood nitrogen retention in nephritis and gout.

Folin introduced colorimetry, turbidimetry, and the use of color filters into quantitative clinical biochemistry. He initiated and applied ingeniously conceived reagents and chemical reactions that paved the way for a host of studies by his contemporaries. He introduced the use of phosphomolybdate for detecting phenolic compounds, and phosphomolybdate for uric acid.  These, in turn, led to the quantitation of epinephrine and tyrosin tryptophane, and cystine in protein. The molybdate suggested to Fiske and SubbaRow the determination of phosphate as phosphomolybdate, and the tungsten led to the use of tungstic acid as a protein precipitant.  Phosphomolybdate became the key reagent in thge blood sugar method.  Folin resurrected the abandoned Jaffe reaction and established creatine and creatinine analysis. He also laid the groundwork for the discovery of the discovery of creatine phosphate. Clinical chemistry owes to him the introductionb of Nessler’s reagent, permutit, Lloyd’s reagent, gum ghatti, and preservatives for standards, such as benzoic acid and formaldehyde. Among his distinguished graduate investigators were Bloor, Doisy, fiske, Shaffer, SubbaRow, Sumner and, Wu.

A Golden Age of Clinical Chemistry: 1948–1960

Louis Rosenfeld
Clinical Chemistry 2000; 46(10): 1705–1714

The 12 years from 1948 to 1960 were notable for introduction of the Vacutainer
tube, electrophoresis, radioimmunoassay, and the Auto-Analyzer. Also
appearing during this interval were new organizations, publications, programs,
and services that established a firm foundation for the professional status
of clinical chemists. It was a golden age.
Except for photoelectric colorimeters, the clinical chemistry laboratories
in 1948—and in many places even later—were not very different from
those of 1925. The basic technology and equipment were essentially
unchanged.There was lots of glassware of different kinds—pipettes,
burettes, wooden racks of test tubes, funnels, filter paper,
cylinders, flasks, and beakers—as well as visual colorimeters,
centrifuges, water baths, an exhaust hood for evaporating organic
solvents after extractions, a microscope for examining urine
sediments, a double-pan analytical beam balance for weighing
reagents and standard chemicals, and perhaps a pH meter. The
most complicated apparatus was the Van Slyke volumetric gas
device—manually operated. The emphasis was on classical chemical
and biological techniques that did not require instrumentation.
The unparalleled growth and wide-ranging research that began after
World War II and have continued into the new century, often aided by
government funding for biomedical research and development as civilian
health has become a major national goal, have impacted the operations
of the clinical chemistry laboratory. The years from 1948 to 1960 were
especially notable for the innovative technology that produced better
methods for the investigation of many diseases, in many cases
leading to better treatment.

AUTOMATION IN CLINICAL CHEMISTRY: CURRENT SUCCESSES AND TRENDS
FOR THE FUTURE
Pierangelo Bonini
Pure & Appl.Chem.,1982;.54, (11):, 2Ol7—2O3O,

the history of automation in clinical chemistry is the history of how and
when the techno logical progress in the field of analytical methodology
as well as in the field of instrumentation, has helped clinical chemists
to mechanize their procedures and to control them.

GENERAL STEPS OF A CLINICAL CHEMISTRY PROCEDURE –
1 – PRELIMINARY TREATMENT (DEPR0TEINIZATION)
2 – SAMPLE + REAGENT(S)
3 – INCUBATION
L – READING
5 – CALCULATION
Fig. 1 General steps of a clinical chemistry procedure
Especially in the classic clinical chemistry methods, a preliminary treatment
of the sample ( in most cases a deproteinization) was an essential step. This
was a major constraint on the first tentative steps in automation and we will
see how this problem was faced and which new problems arose from avoiding
deproteinization. Mixing samples and reagents is the next step; then there is
a more or less long incubation at different temperatures and finally reading,
which means detection of modifications of some physical property of the
mixture; in most cases the development of a colour can reveal the reaction
but, as well known, many other possibilities exist; finally the result is calculated.

Some 25 years ago, Skeggs (1) presented his paper on continuous flow
automation that was the basis of very successful instruments still used all over
the world. The continuous flow automation reactions take place in an hydraulic
route common to all samples.them after mechanization.

Standards and samples enter the analytical stream segmented by air bubbles
and, as they circulate, specific chemical reactions and physical manipulations
continuously take place in the stream. Finally, after the air bubbles are vented,
the colour intensity, proportional to the solute molecules, is monitored in a
detector flow cell.

It is evident that the most important aim of automation is to correctly process
as many samples in as short a time as possible. This result can be obtained
thanks to many technological advances either from analytical point of view or
from the instrument technology.

ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY –
– VERY ACTIVE ENZYMATIC REAGENTS
–                          SHORTER REACTION TIME
– KINETIC AND FIXED TIME REACTIONS
–                        No NEED OF DEPROTEINIZATION
– SURFACTANTS
–                      AUTOMATIC SAtIPLE BLANK CALCULATION
– POLYCHROMATIC ANALYSIS

The introduction of very active enzymatic reagents for determination of
substrates resulted in shorter reaction times and possibly, in many cases,
of avoiding deproteinization.Reaction times are also reduced by using kinetic
and fixed time reactions instead of end points. In this case, the measurement
of sample blank does not need a separate tube with separate reaction
mixture. Deproteinization can be avoided also by using some surfac—
tants in the reagent mixture. An automatic calculation of sample blanks
is also possible by using polychromatic analysis. As we can see from this
figure, reduction of reaction times and elimination of tedious ope
rations like deproteinization, are the main results of this analytical progress.

Many relevant improvements in mechanics and optics over the last
twenty years and the tremendous advance in electronics have largely
contributed to the instrumental improvement of clinical chemistry automation.

A recent interesting innovation in the field of centrifugal analyzers consists
in the possibility of adding another reagent to an already mixed sample—
reagent solution. This innovation allows a preincubation to be made and
sample blanks to be read before adding the starter reagent.
The possibility to measure absorbances in cuvettes positioned longitudinally
to the light path, realized in a recent model of centrifugal analyzers, is claimed
to be advantageous to read absorbances in non homogeneous solutions, to
avoid any influence of reagent volume errors on the absorbance and to have
more suitable calculation factors. The interest of fluorimetric assays is
growing more and more, especially in connection with drugs immunofluorimetric
assays. This technology has been recently applied also to centrifugal analyzers
technology. A Xenon lamp generates a high energy light, reflected by a mirror
— holographic — grating operated by a stepping motor.
The selected wavelength of the exciting light passes through a split and
reaches the rotating cuvettes. Fluorescence is then filtered, read by
means of a photomultiplier and compared to the continuously monitored
fluorescence of an appropriate reference compound. In this way, eventual
instability due either to the electro—optical devices or to changes in
physicochemical properties of solution is corrected.

…more…

Dr. Yellapragada Subbarow – ATP – Energy for Life

One of the observations Dr SubbaRow made while testing the phosphorus method seemed to provide a clue to the mystery what happens to blood sugar when insulin is administered. Biochemists began investigating the problem when Frederick Banting showed that injections of insulin, the pancreatic hormone, keeps blood sugar under control and keeps diabetics alive.

SubbaRow worked for 18 months on the problem, often dieting and starving along with animals used in experiments. But the initial observations were finally shown to be neither significant nor unique and the project had to be scrapped in September 1926.

Out of the ashes of this project however arose another project that provided the key to the ancient mystery of muscular contraction. Living organisms resist degeneration and destruction with the help of muscles, and biochemists had long believed that a hypothetical inogen provided the energy required for the flexing of muscles at work.

Two researchers at Cambridge University in United Kingdom confirmed that lactic acid is formed when muscles contract and Otto Meyerhof of Germany showed that this lactic acid is a breakdown product of glycogen, the animal starch stored all over the body, particularly in liver, kidneys and muscles. When Professor Archibald Hill of the University College of London demonstrated that conversion of glycogen to lactic acid partly accounts for heat produced during muscle contraction everybody assumed that glycogen was the inogen. And, the 1922 Nobel Prize for medicine and physiology was divided between Hill and Meyerhof.

But how is glycogen converted to lactic acid? Embden, another German biochemist, advanced the hypothesis that blood sugar and phosphorus combine to form a hexose phosphoric ester which breaks down glycogen in the muscle to lactic acid.

In the midst of the insulin experiments, it occurred to Fiske and SubbaRow that Embden’s hypothesis would be supported if normal persons were found to have more hexose phosphate in their muscle and liver than diabetics. For diabetes is the failure of the body to use sugar. There would be little reaction between sugar and phosphorus in a diabetic body. If Embden was right, hexose (sugar) phosphate level in the muscle and liver of diabetic animals should rise when insulin is injected.

Fiske and SubbaRow rendered some animals diabetic by removing their pancreas in the spring of 1926, but they could not record any rise in the organic phosphorus content of muscles or livers after insulin was administered to the animals. Sugar phosphates were indeed produced in their animals but they were converted so quickly by enzymes to lactic acid that Fiske and SubbaRow could not detect them with methods then available. This was fortunate for science because, in their mistaken belief that Embden was wrong, they began that summer an extensive study of organic phosphorus compounds in the muscle “to repudiate Meyerhof completely”.

The departmental budget was so poor that SubbaRow often waited on the back streets of Harvard Medical School at night to capture cats he needed for the experiments. When he prepared the cat muscles for estimating their phosphorus content, SubbaRow found he could not get a constant reading in the colorimeter. The intensity of the blue colour went on rising for thirty minutes. Was there something in muscle which delayed the colour reaction? If yes, the time for full colour development should increase with the increase in the quantity of the sample. But the delay was not greater when the sample was 10 c.c. instead of 5 c.c. The only other possibility was that muscle had an organic compound which liberated phosphorus as the reaction in the colorimeter proceeded. This indeed was the case, it turned out. It took a whole year.

The mysterious colour delaying substance was a compound of phosphoric acid and creatine and was named Phosphocreatine. It accounted for two-thirds of the phosphorus in the resting muscle. When they put muscle to work by electric stimulation, the Phosphocreatine level fell and the inorganic phosphorus level rose correspondingly. It completely disappeared when they cut off the blood supply and drove the muscle to the point of “fatigue” by continued electric stimulation. And, presto! It reappeared when the fatigued muscle was allowed a period of rest.

Phosphocreatine created a stir among the scientists present when Fiske unveiled it before the American Society of Biological Chemists at Rochester in April 1927. The Journal of American Medical Association hailed the discovery in an editorial. The Rockefeller Foundation awarded a fellowship that helped SubbaRow to live comfortably for the first time since his arrival in the United States. All of Harvard Medical School was caught up with an enthusiasm that would be a life-time memory for con­temporary students. The students were in awe of the medium-sized, slightly stoop shouldered, “coloured” man regarded as one of the School’s top research workers.

SubbaRow’s carefully conducted series of experiments disproved Meyerhof’s assumptions about the glycogen-lactic acid cycle. His calculations fully accounted for the heat output during muscle contraction. Hill had not been able to fully account for this in terms of Meyerhof’s theory. Clearly the Nobel Committee was in haste in awarding the 1922 physiology prize, but the biochemistry orthodoxy led by Meyerhof and Hill themselves was not too eager to give up their belief in glycogen as the prime source of muscular energy.

Fiske and SubbaRow were fully upheld and the Meyerhof-Hill­ theory finally rejected in 1930 when a Danish physiologist showed that muscles can work to exhaustion without the aid of glycogen or the stimulation of lactic acid.

Fiske and SubbaRow had meanwhile followed a substance that was formed by the combination of phosphorus, liberated from Phosphocreatine, with an unidentified compound in muscle. SubbaRow isolated it and identified it as a chemical in which adenylic acid was linked to two extra molecules of phosphoric acid. By the time he completed the work to the satisfaction of Fiske, it was August 1929 when Harvard Medical School played host to the 13th International Physiological Congress.

ATP was presented to the gathered scientists before the Congress ended. To the dismay of Fiske and SubbaRow, a few days later arrived in Boston a German science journal, published 16 days before the Congress opened. It carried a letter from Karl Lohmann of Meyerhof’s laboratory, saying he had isolated from muscle a compound of adenylic acid linked to two molecules of phosphoric acid!

While Archibald Hill never adjusted himself to the idea that the basis of his Nobel Prize work had been demolished, Otto Meyerhof and his associates had seen the importance of Phosphocreatine discovery and plunged themselves into follow-up studies in competition with Fiske and SubbaRow. Two associates of Hill had in fact stumbled upon Phosphocreatine about the same time as Fiske and SubbaRow but their loyalty to Meyerhof-Hill theory acted as blinkers and their hasty and premature publications reveal their confusion about both the nature and significance of Phosphocreatine.

The discovery of ATP and its significance helped reveal the full story of muscular contraction: Glycogen arriving in muscle gets converted into lactic acid which is siphoned off to liver for re-synthesis of glycogen. This cycle yields three molecules of ATP and is important in delivering usable food energy to the muscle. Glycolysis or break up of glycogen is relatively slow in getting started and in any case muscle can retain ATP only in small quantities. In the interval between the begin­ning of muscle activity and the arrival of fresh ATP from glycolysis, ­Phosphocreatine maintains ATP supply by re-synthesizing it as fast as its energy terminals are used up by muscle for its activity.

Muscular contraction made possible by ATP helps us not only to move our limbs and lift weights but keeps us alive. The heart is after all a muscle pouch and millions of muscle cells embedded in the walls of arteries keep the life-sustaining blood pumped by the heart coursing through body organs. ATP even helps get new life started by powering the sperm’s motion toward the egg as well as the spectacular transformation of the fertilized egg in the womb.

Archibald Hill for long denied any role for ATP in muscle contraction, saying ATP has not been shown to break down in the intact muscle. This objection was also met in 1962 when University of Pennsylvania scientists showed that muscles can contract and relax normally even when glycogen and Phosphocreatine are kept under check with an inhibitor.

Michael Somogyi

Michael Somogyi was born in Reinsdorf, Austria-Hungary, in 1883. He received a degree in chemical engineering from the University of Budapest, and after spending some time there as a graduate assistant in biochemistry, he immigrated to the United States. From 1906 to 1908 he was an assistant in biochemistry at Cornell University.

Returning to his native land in 1908, he became head of the Municipal Laboratory in Budapest, and in 1914 he was granted his Ph.D. After World War I, the politically unstable situation in his homeland led him to return to the United States where he took a job as an instructor in biochemistry at Washington University in St. Louis, Missouri. While there he assisted Philip A. Shaffer and Edward Adelbert Doisy, Sr., a future Nobel Prize recipient, in developing a new method for the preparation of insulin in sufficiently large amounts and of sufficient purity to make it a viable treatment for diabetes. This early work with insulin helped foster Somogyi’s lifelong interest in the treatment and cure of diabetes. He was the first biochemist appointed to the staff of the newly opened Jewish Hospital, and he remained there as the director of their clinical laboratory until his retirement in 1957.

Arterial Blood Gases.  Van Slyke.

The test is used to determine the pH of the blood, the partial pressure of carbon dioxide and oxygen, and the bicarbonate level. Many blood gas analyzers will also report concentrations of lactate, hemoglobin, several electrolytes, oxyhemoglobin, carboxyhemoglobin and methemoglobin. ABG testing is mainly used in pulmonology and critical care medicine to determine gas exchange which reflect gas exchange across the alveolar-capillary membrane.

DONALD DEXTER VAN SLYKE died on May 4, 1971, after a long and productive career that spanned three generations of biochemists and physicians. He left behind not only a bibliography of 317 journal publications and 5 books, but also more than 100 persons who had worked with him and distinguished themselves in biochemistry and academic medicine. His doctoral thesis, with Gomberg at University of Michigan was published in the Journal of the American Chemical Society in 1907.  Van Slyke received an invitation from Dr. Simon Flexner, Director of the Rockefeller Institute, to come to New York for an interview. In 1911 he spent a year in Berlin with Emil Fischer, who was then the leading chemist of the scientific world. He was particularly impressed by Fischer’s performing all laboratory operations quantitatively —a procedure Van followed throughout his life. Prior to going to Berlin, he published the classic nitrous acid method for the quantitative determination of primary aliphatic amino groups, the first of the many gasometric procedures devised by Van Slyke, and made possible the determination of amino acids. It was the primary method used to study amino acid composition of proteins for years before chromatography. Thus, his first seven postdoctoral years were centered around the development of better methodology for protein composition and amino acid metabolism.

With his colleague G. M. Meyer, he first demonstrated that amino acids, liberated during digestion in the intestine, are absorbed into the bloodstream, that they are removed by the tissues, and that the liver alone possesses the ability to convert the amino acid nitrogen into urea.  From the study of the kinetics of urease action, Van Slyke and Cullen developed equations that depended upon two reactions: (1) the combination of enzyme and substrate in stoichiometric proportions and (2) the reaction of the combination into the end products. Published in 1914, this formulation, involving two velocity constants, was similar to that arrived at contemporaneously by Michaelis and Menten in Germany in 1913.

He transferred to the Rockefeller Institute’s Hospital in 2013, under Dr. Rufus Cole, where “Men who were studying disease clinically had the right to go as deeply into its fundamental nature as their training allowed, and in the Rockefeller Institute’s Hospital every man who was caring for patients should also be engaged in more fundamental study”.  The study of diabetes was already under way by Dr. F. M. Allen, but patients inevitably died of acidosis.  Van Slyke reasoned that if incomplete oxidation of fatty acids in the body led to the accumulation of acetoacetic and beta-hydroxybutyric acids in the blood, then a reaction would result between these acids and the bicarbonate ions that would lead to a lower than-normal bicarbonate concentration in blood plasma. The problem thus became one of devising an analytical method that would permit the quantitative determination of bicarbonate concentration in small amounts of blood plasma.  He ingeniously devised a volumetric glass apparatus that was easy to use and required less than ten minutes for the determination of the total carbon dioxide in one cubic centimeter of plasma.  It also was soon found to be an excellent apparatus by which to determine blood oxygen concentrations, thus leading to measurements of the percentage saturation of blood hemoglobin with oxygen. This found extensive application in the study of respiratory diseases, such as pneumonia and tuberculosis. It also led to the quantitative study of cyanosis and a monograph on the subject by C. Lundsgaard and Van Slyke.

In all, Van Slyke and his colleagues published twenty-one papers under the general title “Studies of Acidosis,” beginning in 1917 and ending in 1934. They included not only chemical manifestations of acidosis, but Van Slyke, in No. 17 of the series (1921), elaborated and expanded the subject to describe in chemical terms the normal and abnormal variations in the acid-base balance of the blood. This was a landmark in understanding acid-base balance pathology.  Within seven years after Van moved to the Hospital, he had published a total of fifty-three papers, thirty-three of them coauthored with clinical colleagues.

In 1920, Van Slyke and his colleagues undertook a comprehensive investigation of gas and electrolyte equilibria in blood. McLean and Henderson at Harvard had made preliminary studies of blood as a physico-chemical system, but realized that Van Slyke and his colleagues at the Rockefeller Hospital had superior techniques and the facilities necessary for such an undertaking. A collaboration thereupon began between the two laboratories, which resulted in rapid progress toward an exact physico-chemical description of the role of hemoglobin in the transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide, of the distribution of diffusible ions and water between erythrocytes and plasma, and of factors such as degree of oxygenation of hemoglobin and hydrogen ion concentration that modified these distributions. In this Van Slyke revised his volumetric gas analysis apparatus into a manometric method.  The manometric apparatus proved to give results that were from five to ten times more accurate.

A series of papers on the CO2 titration curves of oxy- and deoxyhemoglobin, of oxygenated and reduced whole blood, and of blood subjected to different degrees of oxygenation and on the distribution of diffusible ions in blood resulted.  These developed equations that predicted the change in distribution of water and diffusible ions between blood plasma and blood cells when there was a change in pH of the oxygenated blood. A significant contribution of Van Slyke and his colleagues was the application of the Gibbs-Donnan Law to the blood—regarded as a two-phase system, in which one phase (the erythrocytes) contained a high concentration of nondiffusible negative ions, i.e., those associated with hemoglobin, and cations, which were not freely exchaThe importance of Vanngeable between cells and plasma. By changing the pH through varying the CO2 tension, the concentration of negative hemoglobin charges changed in a predictable amount. This, in turn, changed the distribution of diffusible anions such as Cl” and HCO3″ in order to restore the Gibbs-Donnan equilibrium. Redistribution of water occurred to restore osmotic equilibrium. The experimental results confirmed the predictions of the equations.

As a spin-off from the physico-chemical study of the blood, Van undertook, in 1922, to put the concept of buffer value of weak electrolytes on a mathematically exact basis.

This proved to be useful in determining buffer values of mixed, polyvalent, and amphoteric electrolytes, and put the understanding of buffering on a quantitative basis. A monograph in Medicine entitled “Observation on the Courses of Different Types of Bright’s Disease, and on the Resultant Changes in Renal Anatomy,” was a landmark that related the changes occurring at different stages of renal deterioration to the quantitative changes taking place in kidney function. During this period, Van Slyke and R. M. Archibald identified glutamine as the source of urinary ammonia. During World War II, Van and his colleagues documented the effect of shock on renal function and, with R. A. Phillips, developed a simple method, based on specific gravity, suitable for use in the field.

Over 100 of Van’s 300 publications were devoted to methodology. The importance of Van Slyke’s contribution to clinical chemical methodology cannot be overestimated. These included the blood organic constituents (carbohydrates, fats, proteins, amino acids, urea, nonprotein nitrogen, and phospholipids) and the inorganic constituents (total cations, calcium, chlorides, phosphate, and the gases carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and nitrogen). It was said that a Van Slyke manometric apparatus was almost all the special equipment needed to perform most of the clinical chemical analyses customarily performed prior to the introduction of photocolorimeters and spectrophotometers for such determinations.

The progress made in the medical sciences in genetics, immunology, endocrinology, and antibiotics during the second half of the twentieth century obscures at times the progress that was made in basic and necessary biochemical knowledge during the first half. Methods capable of giving accurate quantitative chemical information on biological material had to be painstakingly devised; basic questions on chemical behavior and metabolism had to be answered; and, finally, those factors that adversely modified the normal chemical reactions in the body so that abnormal conditions arise that we characterize as disease states had to be identified.

Viewed in retrospect, he combined in one scientific lifetime (1) basic contributions to the chemistry of body constituents and their chemical behavior in the body, (2) a chemical understanding of physiological functions of certain organ systems (notably the respiratory and renal), and (3) how such information could be exploited in the understanding and treatment of disease. That outstanding additions to knowledge in all three categories were possible was in large measure due to his sound and broadly based chemical preparation, his ingenuity in devising means of accurate measurements of chemical constituents, and the opportunity given him at the Hospital of the Rockefeller Institute to study disease in company with physicians.

In addition, he found time to work collaboratively with Dr. John P. Peters of Yale on the classic, two-volume Quantitative Clinical Chemistry. In 1922, John P. Peters, who had just gone to Yale from Van Slyke’s laboratory as an Associate Professor of Medicine, was asked by a publisher to write a modest handbook for clinicians describing useful chemical methods and discussing their application to clinical problems. It was originally to be called “Quantitative Chemistry in Clinical Medicine.” He soon found that it was going to be a bigger job than he could handle alone and asked Van Slyke to join him in writing it. Van agreed, and the two men proceeded to draw up an outline and divide up the writing of the first drafts of the chapters between them. They also agreed to exchange each chapter until it met the satisfaction of both.At the time it was published in 1931, it contained practically all that could be stated with confidence about those aspects of disease that could be and had been studied by chemical means. It was widely accepted throughout the medical world as the “Bible” of quantitative clinical chemistry, and to this day some of the chapters have not become outdated.

Paul Flory

Paul J. Flory was born in Sterling, Illinois, in 1910. He attended Manchester College, an institution for which he retained an abiding affection. He did his graduate work at Ohio State University, earning his Ph.D. in 1934. He was awarded the Nobel Prize in Chemistry in 1974, largely for his work in the area of the physical chemistry of macromolecules.

Flory worked as a newly minted Ph.D. for the DuPont Company in the Central Research Department with Wallace H. Carothers. This early experience with practical research instilled in Flory a lifelong appreciation for the value of industrial application. His work with the Air Force Office of Strategic Research and his later support for the Industrial Affiliates program at Stanford University demonstrated his belief in the need for theory and practice to work hand-in-hand.

Following the death of Carothers in 1937, Flory joined the University of Cincinnati’s Basic Science Research Laboratory. After the war Flory taught at Cornell University from 1948 until 1957, when he became executive director of the Mellon Institute. In 1961 he joined the chemistry faculty at Stanford, where he would remain until his retirement.

Among the high points of Flory’s years at Stanford were his receipt of the National Medal of Science (1974), the Priestley Award (1974), the J. Willard Gibbs Medal (1973), the Peter Debye Award in Physical Chemistry (1969), and the Charles Goodyear Medal (1968). He also traveled extensively, including working tours to the U.S.S.R. and the People’s Republic of China.

Abraham Savitzky

Abraham Savitzky was born on May 29, 1919, in New York City. He received his bachelor’s degree from the New York State College for Teachers in 1941. After serving in the U.S. Air Force during World War II, he obtained a master’s degree in 1947 and a Ph.D. in 1949 in physical chemistry from Columbia University.

In 1950, after working at Columbia for a year, he began a long career with the Perkin-Elmer Corporation. Savitzky started with Perkin-Elmer as a staff scientist who was chiefly concerned with the design and development of infrared instruments. By 1956 he was named Perkin-Elmer’s new product coordinator for the Instrument Division, and as the years passed, he continued to gain more and more recognition for his work in the company. Most of his work with Perkin-Elmer focused on computer-aided analytical chemistry, data reduction, infrared spectroscopy, time-sharing systems, and computer plotting. He retired from Perkin-Elmer in 1985.

Abraham Savitzky holds seven U.S. patents pertaining to computerization and chemical apparatus. During his long career he presented numerous papers and wrote several manuscripts, including “Smoothing and Differentiation of Data by Simplified Least Squares Procedures.” This paper, which is the collaborative effort of Savitzky and Marcel J. E. Golay, was published in volume 36 of Analytical Chemistry, July 1964. It is one of the most famous, respected, and heavily cited articles in its field. In recognition of his many significant accomplishments in the field of analytical chemistry and computer science, Savitzky received the Society of Applied Spectroscopy Award in 1983 and the Williams-Wright Award from the Coblenz Society in 1986.

Samuel Natelson

Samuel Natelson attended City College of New York and received his B.S. in chemistry in 1928. As a graduate student, Natelson attended New York University, receiving a Sc.M. in 1930 and his Ph.D. in 1931. After receiving his Ph.D., he began his career teaching at Girls Commercial High School. While maintaining his teaching position, Natelson joined the Jewish Hospital of Brooklyn in 1933. Working as a clinical chemist for Jewish Hospital, Natelson first conceived of the idea of a society by and for clinical chemists. Natelson worked to organize the nine charter members of the American Association of Clinical Chemists, which formally began in 1948. A pioneer in the field of clinical chemistry, Samuel Natelson has become a role model for the clinical chemist. Natelson developed the usage of microtechniques in clinical chemistry. During this period, he served as a consultant to the National Aeronautics and Space Administration in the 1960s, helping analyze the effect of weightless atmospheres on astronauts’ blood. Natelson spent his later career as chair of the biochemistry department at Michael Reese Hospital and as a lecturer at the Illinois Institute of Technology.

Arnold Beckman

Arnold Orville Beckman (April 10, 1900 – May 18, 2004) was an American chemist, inventor, investor, and philanthropist. While a professor at Caltech, he founded Beckman Instruments based on his 1934 invention of the pH meter, a device for measuring acidity, later considered to have “revolutionized the study of chemistry and biology”.[1] He also developed the DU spectrophotometer, “probably the most important instrument ever developed towards the advancement of bioscience”.[2] Beckman funded the first transistor company, thus giving rise to Silicon Valley.[3]

He earned his bachelor’s degree in chemical engineering in 1922 and his master’s degree in physical chemistry in 1923. For his master’s degree he studied the thermodynamics of aqueous ammonia solutions, a subject introduced to him by T. A. White.. Beckman decided to go to Caltech for his doctorate. He stayed there for a year, before returning to New York to be near his fiancée, Mabel. He found a job with Western Electric’s engineering department, the precursor to the Bell Telephone Laboratories. Working with Walter A. Shewhart, Beckman developed quality control programs for the manufacture of vacuum tubes and learned about circuit design. It was here that Beckman discovered his interest in electronics.

In 1926 the couple moved back to California and Beckman resumed his studies at Caltech. He became interested in ultraviolet photolysis and worked with his doctoral advisor, Roscoe G. Dickinson, on an instrument to find the energy of ultraviolet light. It worked by shining the ultraviolet light onto a thermocouple, converting the incident heat into electricity, which drove a galvanometer. After receiving a Ph.D. in photochemistry in 1928 for this application of quantum theory to chemical reactions, Beckman was asked to stay on at Caltech as an instructor and then as a professor. Linus Pauling, another of Roscoe G. Dickinson’s graduate students, was also asked to stay on at Caltech.

During his time at Caltech, Beckman was active in teaching at both the introductory and advanced graduate levels. Beckman shared his expertise in glass-blowing by teaching classes in the machine shop. He also taught classes in the design and use of research instruments. Beckman dealt first-hand with the chemists’ need for good instrumentation as manager of the chemistry department’s instrument shop. Beckman’s interest in electronics made him very popular within the chemistry department at Caltech, as he was very skilled in building measuring instruments.

Over the time that he was at Caltech, the focus of the department increasingly moved towards pure science and away from chemical engineering and applied chemistry. Arthur Amos Noyes, head of the chemistry division, encouraged both Beckman and chemical engineer William Lacey to be in contact with real-world engineers and chemists, and Robert Andrews Millikan, Caltech’s president, referred technical questions to Beckman from government and businessess.

Sunkist Growers was having problems with its manufacturing process. Lemons that were not saleable as produce were made into pectin or citric acid, with sulfur dioxide used as a preservative. Sunkist needed to know the acidity of the product at any given time, Chemist Glen Joseph at Sunkist was attempting to measure the hydrogen-ion concentration in lemon juice electrochemically, but sulfur dioxide damaged hydrogen electrodes, and non-reactive glass electrodes produced weak signals and were fragile.

Joseph approached Beckman, who proposed that instead of trying to increase the sensitivity of his measurements, he amplify his results. Beckman, familiar with glassblowing, electricity, and chemistry, suggested a design for a vacuum-tube amplifier and ended up building a working apparatus for Joseph. The glass electrode used to measure pH was placed in a grid circuit in the vacuum tube, producing an amplified signal which could then be read by an electronic meter. The prototype was so useful that Joseph requested a second unit.

Beckman saw an opportunity, and rethinking the project, decided to create a complete chemical instrument which could be easily transported and used by nonspecialists. By October 1934, he had registered patent application U.S. Patent No. 2,058,761 for his “acidimeter”, later renamed the pH meter. Although it was priced expensively at $195, roughly the starting monthly wage for a chemistry professor at that time, it was significantly cheaper than the estimated cost of building a comparable instrument from individual components, about $500. The original pH meter weighed in at nearly 7 kg, but was a substantial improvement over a benchful of delicate equipment. The earliest meter had a design glitch, in that the pH readings changed with the depth of immersion of the electrodes, but Beckman fixed the problem by sealing the glass bulb of the electrode. The pH meter is an important device for measuring the pH of a solution, and by 11 May 1939, sales were successful enough that Beckman left Caltech to become the full-time president of National Technical Laboratories. By 1940, Beckman was able to take out a loan to build his own 12,000 square foot factory in South Pasadena.

In 1940, the equipment needed to analyze emission spectra in the visible spectrum could cost a laboratory as much as $3,000, a huge amount at that time. There was also growing interest in examining ultraviolet spectra beyond that range. In the same way that he had created a single easy-to-use instrument for measuring pH, Beckman made it a goal to create an easy-to-use instrument for spectrophotometry. Beckman’s research team, led by Howard Cary, developed several models.

The new spectrophotometers used a prism to spread light into its absorption spectra and a phototube to “read” the spectra and generate electrical signals, creating a standardized “fingerprint” for the material tested. With Beckman’s model D, later known as the DU spectrophotometer, National Technical Laboratories successfully created the first easy-to-use single instrument containing both the optical and electronic components needed for ultraviolet-absorption spectrophotometry. The user could insert a sample, dial up the desired frequency, and read the amount of absorption of that frequency from a simple meter. It produced accurate absorption spectra in both the ultraviolet and the visible regions of the spectrum with relative ease and repeatable accuracy. The National Bureau of Standards ran tests to certify that the DU’s results were accurate and repeatable and recommended its use.

Beckman’s DU spectrophotometer has been referred to as the “Model T” of scientific instruments: “This device forever simplified and streamlined chemical analysis, by allowing researchers to perform a 99.9% accurate biological assessment of a substance within minutes, as opposed to the weeks required previously for results of only 25% accuracy.” Nobel laureate Bruce Merrifield is quoted as calling the DU spectrophotometer “probably the most important instrument ever developed towards the advancement of bioscience.”

Development of the spectrophotometer also had direct relevance to the war effort. The role of vitamins in health was being studied, and scientists wanted to identify Vitamin A-rich foods to keep soldiers healthy. Previous methods involved feeding rats for several weeks, then performing a biopsy to estimate Vitamin A levels. The DU spectrophotometer yielded better results in a matter of minutes. The DU spectrophotometer was also an important tool for scientists studying and producing the new wonder drug penicillin. By the end of the war, American pharmaceutical companies were producing 650 billion units of penicillin each month. Much of the work done in this area during World War II was kept secret until after the war.

Beckman also developed the infrared spectrophotometer, first the the IR-1, then, in 1953, he redesigned the instrument. The result was the IR-4, which could be operated using either a single or double beam of infrared light. This allowed a user to take both the reference measurement and the sample measurement at the same time.

Beckman Coulter Inc., is an American company that makes biomedical laboratory instruments. Founded by Caltech professor Arnold O. Beckman in 1935 as National Technical Laboratories to commercialize a pH meter that he had invented, the company eventually grew to employ over 10,000 people, with $2.4 billion in annual sales by 2004. Its current headquarters are in Brea, California.

In the 1940s, Beckman changed the name to Arnold O. Beckman, Inc. to sell oxygen analyzers, the Helipot precision potentiometer, and spectrophotometers. In the 1950s, the company name changed to Beckman Instruments, Inc.

Beckman was contacted by Paul Rosenberg. Rosenberg worked at MIT’s Radiation Laboratory. The lab was part of a secret network of research institutions in both the United States and Britain that were working to develop radar, “radio detecting and ranging”. The project was interested in Beckman because of the high quality of the tuning knobs or “potentiometers” which were used on his pH meters. Beckman had trademarked the design of the pH meter knobs, under the name “helipot” for “helical potentiometer”. Rosenberg had found that the helipot was more precise, by a factor of ten, than other knobs. He redesigned the knob to have a continuous groove, in which the contact could not be jarred out of contact.

Beckman instruments were also used by the Manhattan Project to measure radiation in gas-filled, electrically charged ionization chambers in nuclear reactors.
The pH meter was adapted to do the job with a relatively minor adjustment – substituting an input-load resistor for the glass electrode. As a result, Beckman Instruments developed a new product, the micro-ammeter

After the war, Beckman developed oxygen analyzers that were used to monitor conditions in incubators for premature babies. Doctors at Johns Hopkins University used them to determine recommendations for healthy oxygen levels for incubators.

Beckman himself was approached by California governor Goodwin Knight to head a Special Committee on Air Pollution, to propose ways to combat smog. At the end of 1953, the committee made its findings public. The “Beckman Bible” advised key steps to be taken immediately:

In 1955, Beckman established the seminal Shockley Semiconductor Laboratory as a division of Beckman Instruments to begin commercializing the semiconductor transistor technology invented by Caltech alumnus William Shockley. The Shockley Laboratory was established in nearby Mountain View, California, and thus, “Silicon Valley” was born.

Beckman also saw that computers and automation offered a myriad of opportunities for integration into instruments, and the development of new instruments.

The Arnold and Mabel Beckman Foundation was incorporated in September 1977.  At the time of Beckman’s death, the Foundation had given more than 400 million dollars to a variety of charities and organizations. In 1990, it was considered one of the top ten foundations in California, based on annual gifts. Donations chiefly went to scientists and scientific causes as well as Beckman’s alma maters. He is quoted as saying, “I accumulated my wealth by selling instruments to scientists,… so I thought it would be appropriate to make contributions to science, and that’s been my number one guideline for charity.”

Wallace H. Coulter

Engineer, Inventor, Entrepreneur, Visionary

Wallace Henry Coulter was an engineer, inventor, entrepreneur and visionary. He was co-founder and Chairman of Coulter® Corporation, a worldwide medical diagnostics company headquartered in Miami, Florida. The two great passions of his life were applying engineering principles to scientific research, and embracing the diversity of world cultures. The first passion led him to invent the Coulter Principle™, the reference method for counting and sizing microscopic particles suspended in a fluid.

This invention served as the cornerstone for automating the labor intensive process of counting and testing blood. With his vision and tenacity, Wallace Coulter, was a founding father in the field of laboratory hematology, the science and study of blood. His global viewpoint and passion for world cultures inspired him to establish over twenty international subsidiaries. He recognized that it was imperative to employ locally based staff to service his customers before this became standard business strategy.

Wallace’s first attempts to patent his invention were turned away by more than one attorney who believed “you cannot patent a hole”. Persistent as always, Wallace finally applied for his first patent in 1949 and it was issued on October 20, 1953. That same year, two prototypes were sent to the National Institutes of Health for evaluation. Shortly after, the NIH published its findings in two key papers, citing improved accuracy and convenience of the Coulter method of counting blood cells. That same year, Wallace publicly disclosed his invention in his one and only technical paper at the National Electronics Conference, “High Speed Automatic Blood Cell Counter and Cell Size Analyzer”.

Leonard Skeggs was the inventor of the first continuous flow analyser way back in 1957. This groundbreaking event completely changed the way that chemistry was carried out. Many of the laborious tests that dominated lab work could be automated, increasing productivity and freeing personnel for other more challenging tasks

Continuous flow analysis and its offshoots and decedents are an integral part of modern chemistry. It might therefore be some conciliation to Leonard Skeggs to know that not only was he the beneficiary of an appellation with a long and fascinating history, he also created a revolution in wet chemistry that is still with us today.

Technicon

The AutoAnalyzer is an automated analyzer using a flow technique called continuous flow analysis (CFA), first made by the Technicon Corporation. The instrument was invented 1957 by Leonard Skeggs, PhD and commercialized by Jack Whitehead’s Technicon Corporation. The first applications were for clinical analysis, but methods for industrial analysis soon followed. The design is based on separating a continuously flowing stream with air bubbles.

In continuous flow analysis (CFA) a continuous stream of material is divided by air bubbles into discrete segments in which chemical reactions occur. The continuous stream of liquid samples and reagents are combined and transported in tubing and mixing coils. The tubing passes the samples from one apparatus to the other with each apparatus performing different functions, such as distillation, dialysis, extraction, ion exchange, heating, incubation, and subsequent recording of a signal. An essential principle of the system is the introduction of air bubbles. The air bubbles segment each sample into discrete packets and act as a barrier between packets to prevent cross contamination as they travel down the length of the tubing. The air bubbles also assist mixing by creating turbulent flow (bolus flow), and provide operators with a quick and easy check of the flow characteristics of the liquid. Samples and standards are treated in an exactly identical manner as they travel the length of the tubing, eliminating the necessity of a steady state signal, however, since the presence of bubbles create an almost square wave profile, bringing the system to steady state does not significantly decrease throughput ( third generation CFA analyzers average 90 or more samples per hour) and is desirable in that steady state signals (chemical equilibrium) are more accurate and reproducible.

A continuous flow analyzer (CFA) consists of different modules including a sampler, pump, mixing coils, optional sample treatments (dialysis, distillation, heating, etc.), a detector, and data generator. Most continuous flow analyzers depend on color reactions using a flow through photometer, however, also methods have been developed that use ISE, flame photometry, ICAP, fluorometry, and so forth.

Flow injection analysis (FIA), was introduced in 1975 by Ruzicka and Hansen.
Jaromir (Jarda) Ruzicka is a Professor  of Chemistry (Emeritus at the University of Washington and Affiliate at the University of Hawaii), and member of the Danish Academy of Technical Sciences. Born in Prague in 1934, he graduated from the Department of Analytical Chemistry, Facultyof Sciences, Charles University. In 1968, when Soviets occupied Czechoslovakia, he emigrated to Denmark. There, he joined The Technical University of Denmark, where, ten years  later, received a newly created Chair in Analytical Chemistry. When Jarda met Elo Hansen, they invented Flow Injection.

The first generation of FIA technology, termed flow injection (FI), was inspired by the AutoAnalyzer technique invented by Skeggs in early 1950s. While Skeggs’ AutoAnalyzer uses air segmentation to separate a flowing stream into numerous discrete segments to establish a long train of individual samples moving through a flow channel, FIA systems separate each sample from subsequent sample with a carrier reagent. While the AutoAnalyzer mixes sample homogeneously with reagents, in all FIA techniques sample and reagents are merged to form a concentration gradient that yields analysis results

Arthur Karmen.

Dr. Karmen was born in New York City in 1930. He graduated from the Bronx High School of Science in 1946 and earned an A.B. and M.D. in 1950 and 1954, respectively, from New York University. In 1952, while a medical student working on a summer project at Memorial-Sloan Kettering, he used paper chromatography of amino acids to demonstrate the presence of glutamic-oxaloacetic and glutaniic-pyruvic ransaminases (aspartate and alanine aminotransferases) in serum and blood. In 1954, he devised the spectrophotometric method for measuring aspartate aminotransferase in serum, which, with minor modifications, is still used for diagnostic testing today. When developing this assay, he studied the reaction of NADH with serum and demonstrated the presence of lactate and malate dehydrogenases, both of which were also later used in diagnosis. Using the spectrophotometric method, he found that aspartate aminotransferase increased in the period immediately after an acute myocardial infarction and did the pilot studies that showed its diagnostic utility in heart and liver diseases.  This became as important as the EKG. It was replaced in cardiology usage by the MB isoenzyme of creatine kinase, which was driven by Burton Sobel’s work on infarct size, and later by the troponins.

History of Laboratory Medicine at Yale University.

The roots of the Department of Laboratory Medicine at Yale can be traced back to John Peters, the head of what he called the “Chemical Division” of the Department of Internal Medicine, subsequently known as the Section of Metabolism, who co-authored with Donald Van Slyke the landmark 1931 textbook Quantitative Clinical Chemistry (2.3); and to Pauline Hald, research collaborator of Dr. Peters who subsequently served as Director of Clinical Chemistry at Yale-New Haven Hospital for many years. In 1947, Miss Hald reported the very first flame photometric measurements of sodium and potassium in serum (4). This study helped to lay the foundation for modern studies of metabolism and their application to clinical care.

The Laboratory Medicine program at Yale had its inception in 1958 as a section of Internal Medicine under the leadership of David Seligson. In 1965, Laboratory Medicine achieved autonomous section status and in 1971, became a full-fledged academic department. Dr. Seligson, who served as the first Chair, pioneered modern automation and computerized data processing in the clinical laboratory. In particular, he demonstrated the feasibility of discrete sample handling for automation that is now the basis of virtually all automated chemistry analyzers. In addition, Seligson and Zetner demonstrated the first clinical use of atomic absorption spectrophotometry. He was one of the founding members of the major Laboratory Medicine academic society, the Academy of Clinical Laboratory Physicians and Scientists.

Nathan Gochman.  Developer of Automated Chemistries.

Nathan Gochman, PhD, has over 40 years of experience in the clinical diagnostics industry. This includes academic teaching and research, and 30 years in the pharmaceutical and in vitro diagnostics industry. He has managed R & D, technical marketing and technical support departments. As a leader in the industry he was President of the American Association for Clinical Chemistry (AACC) and the National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS, now CLSI). He is currently a Consultant to investment firms and IVD companies.

William Sunderman

A doctor and scientist who lived a remarkable century and beyond — making medical advances, playing his Stradivarius violin at Carnegie Hall at 99 and being honored as the nation’s oldest worker at 100.

He developed a method for measuring glucose in the blood, the Sunderman Sugar Tube, and was one of the first doctors to use insulin to bring a patient out of a diabetic coma. He established quality-control techniques for medical laboratories that ended the wide variation in the results of laboratories doing the same tests.

He taught at several medical schools and founded and edited the journal Annals of Clinical and Laboratory Science. In World War II, he was a medical director for the Manhattan Project, which developed the atomic bomb.

Dr. Sunderman was president of the American Society of Clinical Pathologists and a founding governor of the College of American Pathologists. He also helped organize the Association of Clinical Scientists and was its first president.

Yale Department of Laboratory Medicine

The roots of the Department of Laboratory Medicine at Yale can be traced back to John Peters, the head of what he called the “Chemical Division” of the Department of Internal Medicine, subsequently known as the Section of Metabolism, who co-authored with Donald Van Slyke the landmark 1931 textbook Quantitative Clinical Chemistry; and to Pauline Hald, research collaborator of Dr. Peters who subsequently served as Director of Clinical Chemistry at Yale-New Haven Hospital for many years. In 1947, Miss Hald reported the very first flame photometric measurements of sodium and potassium in serum. This study helped to lay the foundation for modern studies of metabolism and their application to clinical care.

The Laboratory Medicine program at Yale had its inception in 1958 as a section of Internal Medicine under the leadership of David Seligson. In 1965, Laboratory Medicine achieved autonomous section status and in 1971, became a full-fledged academic department. Dr. Seligson, who served as the first Chair, pioneered modern automation and computerized data processing in the clinical laboratory. In particular, he demonstrated the feasibility of discrete sample handling for automation that is now the basis of virtually all automated chemistry analyzers. In addition, Seligson and Zetner demonstrated the first clinical use of atomic absorption spectrophotometry. He was one of the founding members of the major Laboratory Medicine academic society, the Academy of Clinical Laboratory Physicians and Scientists.

The discipline of clinical chemistry and the broader field of laboratory medicine, as they are practiced today, are attributed in no small part to Seligson’s vision and creativity.

Born in Philadelphia in 1916, Seligson graduated from University of Maryland and received a D.Sc. from Johns Hopkins University and an M.D. from the University of Utah. In 1953, he served as captain in the U.S. Army, chief of the Hepatic and Metabolic Disease Laboratory at Walter Reed Army Medical Center.

Recruited to Yale and Grace-New Haven Hospital in 1958 from the University of Pennsylvania as professor of internal medicine at the medical school and the first director of clinical laboratories at the hospital, Seligson subsequently established the infrastructure of the Department of Laboratory Medicine, creating divisions of clinical chemistry, microbiology, transfusion medicine (blood banking) and hematology – each with its own strong clinical, teaching and research programs.

Challenging the continuous flow approach, Seligson designed, built and validated “discrete sample handling” instruments wherein each sample was treated independently, which allowed better choice of methods and greater efficiency. Today continuous flow has essentially disappeared and virtually all modern automated clinical laboratory instruments are based upon discrete sample handling technology.

Seligson was one of the early visionaries who recognized the potential for computers in the clinical laboratory. One of the first applications of a digital computer in the clinical laboratory occurred in Seligson’s department at Yale, and shortly thereafter data were being transmitted directly from the laboratory computer to data stations on the patient wards. Now, such laboratory information systems represent the standard of care.

He was also among the first to highlight the clinical importance of test specificity and accuracy, as compared to simple reproducibility. One of his favorite slides was one that showed almost perfectly reproducible results for 10 successive measurements of blood sugar obtained with what was then the most widely used and popular analytical instrument. However, he would note, the answer was wrong; the assay was not accurate.

Seligson established one of the nation’s first residency programs focused on laboratory medicine or clinical pathology, and also developed a teaching curriculum in laboratory medicine for medical students. In so doing, he created a model for the modern practice of laboratory medicine in an academic environment, and his trainees spread throughout the country as leaders in the field.

Ernest Cotlove

Ernest Cotlove’s scientific and medical career started at NYU where, after finishing medicine in 1943, he pursued studies in renal physiology and chemistry. His outstanding ability to acquire knowledge and conduct innovative investigations earned him an invitation from James Shannon, then Director of the National Heart Institute at NIH. He continued studies of renal physiology and chemistry until 1953 when he became Head of Clinical Chemistry Laboratories in the new Department of Clinical Pathology being developed by George Z. Williams during the Clinical Center’s construction. Dr. Cotlove seized the opportunity to design and equip the most advanced and functional clinical chemistry facility in our country.

Dr. Cotlove’s career exemplified the progress seen in medical research and technology. He designed the electronic chloridometer that bears his name, in spite of published reports that such an approach was theoretically impossible. He used this innovative skill to develop new instruments and methods at the Clinical Center. Many recognized him as an expert in clinical chemistry, computer programming, systems design for laboratory operations, and automation of analytical instruments.

Effects of Automation on Laboratory Diagnosis

George Z. Williams

There are four primary effects of laboratory automation on the practice of medicine: The range of laboratory support is being greatly extended to both diagnosis and guidance of therapeutic management; the new feasibility of multiphasic periodic health evaluation promises effective health and manpower conservation in the future; and substantially lowered unit cost for laboratory analysis will permit more extensive use of comprehensive laboratory medicine in everyday practice. There is, however, a real and growing danger of naive acceptance of and overconfidence in the reliability and accuracy of automated analysis and computer processing without critical evaluation. Erroneous results can jeopardize the patient’s welfare. Every physician has the responsibility to obtain proof of accuracy and reliability from the laboratories which serve his patients.

. Mario Werner

Dr. Werner received his medical degree from the University of Zurich, Switzerland in 1956. After specializing in internal medicine at the University Clinic in Basel, he came to the United States–as a fellow of the Swiss Academy of Medical Sciences–to work at NIH and at the Rockefeller University. From 1964 to 1966, he served as chief of the Central Laboratory at the Klinikum Essen, Ruhr-University, Germany. In 1967, he returned to the US, joining the Division of Clinical Pathology and Laboratory Medicine at the University of California, San Francisco, as an assistant professor. Three years later, he became Associate Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine at Washington University in St. Louis, where he was instrumental in establishing the training program in laboratory medicine. In 1972, he was appointed Professor of Pathology at The George Washington University in Washington, DC.

Norbert Tietz

Professor Norbert W. Tietz received the degree of Doctor of Natural Sciences from the Technical University Stuttgart, Germany, in 1950. In 1954 he immigrated to the United States where he subsequently held positions or appointments at several Chicago area institutions including the Mount Sinai Hospital Medical Center, Chicago Medical School/University of Health Sciences and Rush Medical College.

Professor Tietz is best known as the editor of the Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry. This book, now in its sixth edition, remains a primary information source for both students and educators in laboratory medicine. It was the first modem textbook that integrated clinical chemistry with the basic sciences and pathophysiology.

Throughout his career, Dr. Tietz taught a range of students from the undergraduate through post-graduate level including (1) medical technology students, (2) medical students, (3) clinical chemistry graduate students, (4) pathology residents, and (5) practicing chemists. For example, in the late 1960’s he began the first master’s of science degree program in clinical chemistry in the United States at the Chicago Medical School. This program subsequently evolved into one of the first Ph.D. programs in clinical chemistry.

Automation and other recent developments in clinical chemistry.

Griffiths J.

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/1344702

The decade 1980 to 1990 was the most progressive period in the short, but
turbulent, history of clinical chemistry. New techniques and the instrumentation
needed to perform assays have opened a chemical Pandora’s box. Multichannel
analyzers, the base spectrophotometric key to automated laboratories, have
become almost perfect. The extended use of the antigen-monoclonal antibody
reaction with increasing sensitive labels has extended analyte detection
routinely into the picomole/liter range. Devices that aid the automation of
serum processing and distribution of specimens are emerging. Laboratory
computerization has significantly matured, permitting better integration of
laboratory instruments, improving communication between laboratory personnel
and the patient’s physician, and facilitating the use of expert systems and
robotics in the chemistry laboratory

Automation and Expert Systems in a Core Clinical Chemistry Laboratory
Streitberg, GT, et al.  JALA 2009;14:94–105

Clinical pathology or laboratory medicine has a great
influence on clinical decisions and 60e70% of the
most important decisions on admission, discharge,
and medication are based on laboratory results.1
As we learn more about clinical laboratory results
and incorporate them in outcome optimization
schemes, the laboratory will play a more pivotal role
in management of patients and the eventual outcomes.
2 It has been stated that the development of
information technology and automation in laboratory
medicine has allowed laboratory professionals
to keep in pace with the growth in workload.

Since the reasons to automate and the impact of automation have
similarities and these include reduction in errors, increase in productivity,
and improvement in safety. Advances in technology in clinical chemistry
that have included total laboratory automation call for changes in job
responsibilities to include skills in information technology, data management,
instrumentation, patient preparation for diagnostic analysis, interpretation
of pathology results, dissemination of knowledge and information to
patients and other health staff, as well as skills in research.

The clinical laboratory has become so productive, particularly in chemistry and immunology, and the labor, instrument and reagent costs are well determined, that today a physician’s medical decisions are 80% determined by the clinical laboratory.  Medical information systems have lagged far behind.  Why is that?  Because the decision for a MIS has historical been based on billing capture.  Moreover, the historical use of chemical profiles were quite good at validating healthy dtatus in an outpatient population, but the profiles became restricted under Diagnostic Related Groups.    Thus, it came to be that the diagnostics was considered a “commodity”.  In order to be competitive, a laboratory had to provide “high complexity” tests that were drawn in by a large volume of “moderate complexity” tests.

Read Full Post »

« Newer Posts - Older Posts »